RapidformXOV UserGuide

User Guide
Rapidform XOV3
September 2012
Copyright INUS Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Rapidform User Guide & Tutorial
The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and
should not be construed as a commitment by INUS Technology, Inc. Any names, places, and/or events in this
publication are not intended to correspond or relate in any way to individuals, groups or associations. Any
similarity or likeness of the names, places, and/or events in this publication to those of any individual, living
or dead, place, event, or that of any group or association is purely coincidental and unintentional.
No warranties of any kind are created or extended by this publication. Any products and related
material disclosed in this publication have only been furnished pursuant and subject to the terms and
conditions of a duly executed agreement to license the Software. Any warranties made by INUS Technology,
Inc. with respect to the Software described in this publication are set forth in the License Agreement
provided with the Software and printed in this publication. As more definitively stated and set forth in the
License Agreement, INUS Technology, Inc. does not and will not accept any financial or other responsibility
that may result from use of the Software or any accompanying material including, without limitation, any
direct, indirect, special or consequential damages.
Individuals or organizations using the Software should ensure that the user of this information and/or the
Software complies with the laws, rules, and regulations of the jurisdictions with respect to which it is used.
This includes all applicable laws concerning the export of technology and the protection of intangible or
intellectual property rights. INUS Technology, Inc. asserts its rights in and will endeavor to enforce all
proprietary rights embodied in the Software and this publication including, without limitation, all copyright,
patent, trademark, and trade secrets or proprietary information. The only rights given to an individual or
organization purchasing the Software are those explicitly set forth in the License Agreement. Other than as
explicitly allowed in the License Agreement, copying the Software or this material (including any format or
language translation) is prohibited absent the prior written consent of INUS Technology, Inc.
INUS, INUS Technology, Rapidform, Rapidform XOR, XOR, Rapidform XOV, XOV, Rapidform XOS, XOS,
Rapidform.dll, Rapidform DENTAL, and the company logo and all product logos are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of INUS Technology, Inc. All other trademarks within this user guide & tutorial are
the property of their respective owners and are used for identification purposes only. Other than to identify
this Software and publication, individuals or organizations purchasing the software are not entitled to use
INUS Technologys trademarks without INUS Technologys prior written consent.
Correspondence regarding this publication should be directed to:

INUS Technology, Inc.
Voice: +82-2-6262-9900
Fax: +82-2-6262-9999
Email: info@inustech.com
Web: www.rapidform.com
Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................1
1.1.
Welcome to Rapidform XOV ................................................................................................ 2
1.2.
Key Themes of Rapidform XOV ............................................................................................ 4
1.3.
Features of Rapidform XOV ................................................................................................. 6
2.
GETTING STARTED ......................................................................................... 13
2.1.
System Requirements ........................................................................................................ 13
2.2.
Installation .......................................................................................................................... 17
2.3.
What Can XOV Do? ............................................................................................................. 19
2.4.
Basic Entity Terminology ................................................................................................... 20
2.5.
Basic Concept of User Interface ......................................................................................... 27
2.5.1.
User Interface Overview ..............................................................................................................................................28
2.5.2.
Understanding User Interface Philosophy ...........................................................................................................35
2.5.2.1.
Dialog Tree Convention .....................................................................................................................................35
2.5.2.2.
Selection Convention .........................................................................................................................................38
2.5.2.3.
Mode Convention ................................................................................................................................................39
2.5.2.4.
Docking Bar Convention ...................................................................................................................................40
2.5.3.
Navigating Entities ........................................................................................................................................................41
2.6.
Basic Inspection Overview................................................................................................. 45
3.
UNDERSTANDING SCAN DATA ...................................................................... 55
2.6.1.
2.6.2.
2.6.3.
2.6.4.
Importing Data ...............................................................................................................................................................45

Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data......................................................................................................................46
Analyzing Scan Data .....................................................................................................................................................48
Generating and Exporting Reports .........................................................................................................................53
3.1.
Why 3D Scanning? .............................................................................................................. 55
3.2.
Types of 3D Scan Data ........................................................................................................ 58
4.
UNDERSTANDING INSPECTION..................................................................... 68
4.1.
Inspection Scenario............................................................................................................ 68
4.2.
Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection Process ................................................ 71
3.1.1.
3.1.2.
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
Power of 3D Scan Data.................................................................................................................................................56

Applications of 3D Scan Data ....................................................................................................................................57
Understanding Point Clouds .....................................................................................................................................58

Understanding Mesh ....................................................................................................................................................62
Mesh vs. Point Cloud ....................................................................................................................................................66
4.2.1.
Preparing ...........................................................................................................................................................................72
4.2.1.1.
Working with Large Scan Data........................................................................................................................72
4.2.1.2.
Verifying Geometric Features ..........................................................................................................................74
4.2.1.3.
Alignment ...............................................................................................................................................................77
4.2.2.
Analyzing ..........................................................................................................................................................................82
4.2.2.1.
Checking Deviations ...........................................................................................................................................82
4.2.2.2.
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) ................................................................................ 88
4.2.2.3.
Simple Measuring ................................................................................................................................................90
4.2.3.
Reporting ..........................................................................................................................................................................95
4.2.3.1.
Visualizing Results with a Color Map ............................................................................................................95
4.2.3.2.
Visualizing Results by Tagging ........................................................................................................................99
4.2.3.3.
Adjusting the Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Results............................................................... 101
4.2.3.4.
Generating Reports .......................................................................................................................................... 103
4.2.4.
Inspection using Probe Measurement Devices............................................................................................... 106
5.
GETTING HELP .............................................................................................. 109
6.
USER INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 110
6.1.
Title Bar .............................................................................................................................112
6.2.
Menu Bar ...........................................................................................................................112
6.3.
Tool Palette .......................................................................................................................113
6.4.
Toolbar ..............................................................................................................................113
6.5.
Docking Bars.....................................................................................................................117
6.5.1.
6.5.2.
6.5.3.
6.5.4.
6.5.5.
6.5.6.
6.5.7.
6.5.8.
6.5.9.
6.5.10.
6.5.11.
6.5.12.
Tree ................................................................................................................................................................................... 120

Display ............................................................................................................................................................................. 125
Help .................................................................................................................................................................................. 133
Viewpoint ....................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Properties ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
Color Bar ......................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Report .............................................................................................................................................................................. 158
Support ........................................................................................................................................................................... 181
Image Folder ................................................................................................................................................................. 182
Console ........................................................................................................................................................................... 184
Error List .......................................................................................................................................................................... 184
Tabular View .................................................................................................................................................................. 184
6.6.
Model View .......................................................................................................................186
6.7.
Dialog Tree ........................................................................................................................187
6.8.
Monitoring Bars................................................................................................................ 189
6.9.
Esc Key ...............................................................................................................................191
6.8.1.
6.8.2.
6.8.3.
6.8.4.
6.8.5.
Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................................................... 189

Progress Bar ................................................................................................................................................................... 190
Time Indicator .............................................................................................................................................................. 190
Memory Usage Indicator ......................................................................................................................................... 190
Cache Disk Indicator .................................................................................................................................................. 190
6.10. Mouse Control .................................................................................................................. 191

6.11. Shortcut Keys ....................................................................................................................192
6.12. Pop-up Menus...................................................................................................................194
ii
6.13. 3D Mouse ..........................................................................................................................197
7.
MENU ............................................................................................................ 198
7.1.
File .....................................................................................................................................198
7.1.1.
File > New ...................................................................................................................................................................... 200
7.1.2.
File > Open .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
7.1.3.
File > Convert XDL ...................................................................................................................................................... 203
7.1.4.
File > Save ...................................................................................................................................................................... 204
7.1.5.
File > Save As ................................................................................................................................................................ 205
7.1.6.
File > Import Nominal Data .................................................................................................................................... 206
7.1.7.
File > PMI Import Wizard .......................................................................................................................................... 208
7.1.7.1.
File > PMI Import Wizard > CATIA ............................................................................................................... 210
7.1.7.2.
File > PMI Import Wizard > Siemens NX ................................................................................................... 216
7.1.7.3.
File > PMI Import Wizard > Creo(PRO/E) .................................................................................................. 221
7.1.8.
File > Import Scan Data ............................................................................................................................................ 226
7.1.9.
File > Replace Scan Data .......................................................................................................................................... 229
7.1.10. File > Batch Process .................................................................................................................................................... 234
7.1.11. File > Export .................................................................................................................................................................. 235
7.1.12. File > Publish ................................................................................................................................................................. 238
7.1.12.1.
File > Publish > Point Stream ........................................................................................................................ 238
7.1.12.2.
File > Publish > ICF............................................................................................................................................ 242
7.1.13. File > Capture Screen................................................................................................................................................. 247
7.1.14. File > Print ...................................................................................................................................................................... 249
7.1.15. File > Print Preview ..................................................................................................................................................... 250
7.1.16. File > Print Setup ......................................................................................................................................................... 250
7.1.17. File > Preferences ........................................................................................................................................................ 252
7.1.18. File > Summary Info ................................................................................................................................................... 263
7.1.19. File > Recent Files........................................................................................................................................................ 264
7.1.20. File > Exit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 265
7.2.
Select .................................................................................................................................266
7.2.1.
7.2.2.
7.2.3.
7.2.4.
7.2.5.
7.2.6.
7.2.7.
7.2.8.
7.2.9.
7.2.10.
7.2.11.
7.2.12.
7.2.13.
7.3.
Select > Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 268

Select > All ..................................................................................................................................................................... 271
Select > None ............................................................................................................................................................... 272
Select > Inverse............................................................................................................................................................ 273
Select > Custom Region ........................................................................................................................................... 274
Select > Boundary Entities ...................................................................................................................................... 276
Select > Entities Around Edges/Faces ................................................................................................................. 277
Select > Enlarge ........................................................................................................................................................... 279
Select > Shrink ............................................................................................................................................................. 281
Select > Convert Current Selection...................................................................................................................... 282
Select > By Criteria...................................................................................................................................................... 284
Select > By Color ......................................................................................................................................................... 285
Select > Exterior Poly-Face ...................................................................................................................................... 287
Edit ....................................................................................................................................288
7.3.1.
7.3.2.
7.3.3.
7.3.4.
7.3.5.
7.3.6.
7.3.7.
7.3.8.
7.3.9.
7.3.10.
7.3.11.
7.3.12.
Edit > Undo ................................................................................................................................................................... 289

Edit > Redo .................................................................................................................................................................... 290
Edit > Repeat Last Command ................................................................................................................................. 291
Edit > Cut ........................................................................................................................................................................ 291
Edit > Copy .................................................................................................................................................................... 292
Edit > Paste .................................................................................................................................................................... 293
Edit > Delete ................................................................................................................................................................. 294
Edit > Rebuild ............................................................................................................................................................... 294
Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only ....................................................................................................................... 295
Edit > Rollback ............................................................................................................................................................. 296
Edit > Roll Forward ..................................................................................................................................................... 297
Edit > Roll To Start ....................................................................................................................................................... 297
iii
7.3.13.
7.3.14.
7.3.15.
7.3.16.
7.3.17.
Edit > Roll To Next Alignment ................................................................................................................................ 298

Edit > Roll To End......................................................................................................................................................... 299
Edit > Suppress ............................................................................................................................................................ 299
Edit > Unsuppress ....................................................................................................................................................... 300
Edit > Feature ............................................................................................................................................................... 301
7.4.
Insert .................................................................................................................................302
7.5.
Tools ..................................................................................................................................515
7.4.1.
Insert > Align ................................................................................................................................................................ 303
7.4.1.1.
Insert > Align > Auto ........................................................................................................................................ 304
7.4.1.2.
Insert > Align > Best Fit ................................................................................................................................... 307
7.4.1.3.
Insert > Align > RPS .......................................................................................................................................... 310
7.4.1.4.
Insert > Align > Datum.................................................................................................................................... 315
7.4.1.5.
Insert > Align > 3-2-1 ....................................................................................................................................... 318
7.4.1.6.
Insert > Align > Transform ............................................................................................................................. 321
7.4.1.7.
Insert > Align > Adaptive ............................................................................................................................... 325
7.4.2.
Insert > Section ............................................................................................................................................................ 327
7.4.3.
Insert > Multiple Sections ........................................................................................................................................ 336
7.4.4.
Insert > Curve ............................................................................................................................................................... 343
7.4.5.
Insert > Ref. Geometry .............................................................................................................................................. 343
7.4.5.1.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Point..................................................................................................................... 345
7.4.5.2.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Simulated CMM Point ................................................................................... 355
7.4.5.3.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Vector .................................................................................................................. 364
7.4.5.4.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Plane .................................................................................................................... 372
7.4.5.5.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Circle .................................................................................................................... 385
7.4.5.6.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Slot ....................................................................................................................... 391
7.4.5.7.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Rectangle ........................................................................................................... 397
7.4.5.8.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Regular Polygon .............................................................................................. 402
7.4.5.9.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cylinder .............................................................................................................. 408
7.4.5.10.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cone..................................................................................................................... 414
7.4.5.11.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Sphere ................................................................................................................. 420
7.4.5.12.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Torus .................................................................................................................... 425
7.4.5.13.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Coordinate......................................................................................................... 430
7.4.6.
Insert > 3D GD&T ........................................................................................................................................................ 434
7.4.7.
Insert > Deviation ....................................................................................................................................................... 435
7.4.7.1.
Insert > Deviation > Whole Deviation ....................................................................................................... 436
7.4.7.2.
Insert > Deviation > Comparison Point .................................................................................................... 446
7.4.7.3.
Insert > Deviation > Boundary Deviation ................................................................................................ 454
7.4.7.4.
Insert > Deviation > Curve Deviation ........................................................................................................ 461
7.4.7.5.
Insert > Deviation > Silhouette Deviation ............................................................................................... 466
7.4.7.6.
Insert > Deviation > Virtual Edge Deviation ........................................................................................... 473
7.4.7.7.
Insert > Deviation > Geometry Deviation ............................................................................................... 479
7.4.8.
Insert > Plot ................................................................................................................................................................... 485
7.4.9.
Insert > Active Scan Data ......................................................................................................................................... 492
7.4.10. Insert > Scanner Direct Control ............................................................................................................................ 493
7.4.10.1.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Creaform Handyscan 3D ............................................................. 494
7.4.10.2.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica Minolta VIVID .................................................................... 497
7.4.10.3.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Breuckmann .................................................................................... 502
7.4.10.4.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > KODEN OCM-A................................................................................ 506
7.4.10.5.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Roland LPX (32 bit only) .............................................................. 506
7.4.10.6.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica Minolta RANGE5/RANGE7 (64 bit only).................. 509
7.4.10.7.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Shining3D ......................................................................................... 509
7.4.10.8.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Z Corporation ZScanner ............................................................. 511
7.4.11. Insert > Note ................................................................................................................................................................. 514
7.5.1.
Tools > Nominal Tools ............................................................................................................................................... 516
7.5.1.1.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Sew ........................................................................................................................ 517
7.5.1.2.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face ............................................................................................................. 518
7.5.1.3.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Transform ............................................................................................................ 521
7.5.1.4.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset .................................................................................................................... 526
iv
7.5.1.5.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Thicken ................................................................................................................. 529
7.5.1.6.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Face ......................................................................................................... 531
7.5.1.7.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Fix Normal ........................................................................................................... 532
7.5.1.8.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Healing Wizard .................................................................................................. 535
7.5.1.9.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Find Defect ......................................................................................................... 536
7.5.1.10.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Separate Thickened Body ............................................................................. 538
7.5.1.11.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Convert to Mesh ............................................................................................... 540
7.5.1.12.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Assign Tolerance............................................................................................... 542
7.5.2.
Tools > Scan Tools ....................................................................................................................................................... 545
7.5.2.1.
Tools > Scan Tools > Mesh Buildup Wizard ............................................................................................. 547
7.5.2.2.
Tools > Scan Tools > Align.............................................................................................................................. 553
7.5.2.3.
Tools > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge................................................................................................... 559
7.5.2.4.
Tools > Scan Tools > Combine...................................................................................................................... 563
7.5.2.5.
Tools > Scan Tools > Transform .................................................................................................................... 565
7.5.2.6.
Tools > Scan Tools > Filter Noisy Poly Vertices ....................................................................................... 569
7.5.2.7.
Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling ..................................................................................................................... 571
7.5.2.8.
Tools > Scan Tools > Generate Vertex Normal ....................................................................................... 573
7.5.2.9.
Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect ................................................................................................................. 575
7.5.2.10.
Tools > Scan Tools > Healing Wizard.......................................................................................................... 578
7.5.2.11.
Tools > Scan Tools > Fix Normal .................................................................................................................. 581
7.5.2.12.
Tools > Scan Tools > Sew Boundaries........................................................................................................ 583
7.5.2.13.
Tools > Scan Tools > Edit Boundaries ........................................................................................................ 586
7.5.2.14.
Tools > Scan Tools > Fill Holes ...................................................................................................................... 594
7.5.2.15.
Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature .................................................................................................................... 599
7.5.2.16.
Tools > Scan Tools > Remove Marker ........................................................................................................ 601
7.5.2.17.
Tools > Scan Tools > Decimate..................................................................................................................... 603
7.5.2.18.
Tools > Scan Tools > Split ............................................................................................................................... 607
7.5.2.19.
Tools > Scan Tools > Offset ............................................................................................................................ 610
7.5.2.20.
Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken ........................................................................................................................ 613
7.5.3.
Tools > Region Tools .................................................................................................................................................. 616
7.5.3.1.
Tools > Region Tools > Auto Segment ...................................................................................................... 616
7.5.3.2.
Tools > Region Tools > Resegment ............................................................................................................ 619
7.5.3.3.
Tools > Region Tools > Merge ...................................................................................................................... 621
7.5.3.4.
Tools > Region Tools > Split .......................................................................................................................... 623
7.5.3.5.
Tools > Region Tools > Insert ........................................................................................................................ 625
7.5.3.6.
Tools > Region Tools > Separate.................................................................................................................. 626
7.5.3.7.
Tools > Region Tools > Enlarge .................................................................................................................... 628
7.5.3.8.
Tools > Region Tools > Shrink ....................................................................................................................... 629
7.5.4.
Tools > Section Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 631
7.5.4.1.
Tools > Section Tools > Edit Section Deviation...................................................................................... 633
7.5.4.2.
Tools > Section Tools > Datum .................................................................................................................... 635
7.5.4.3.
Tools > Section Tools > Smart Dimension .............................................................................................. 637
7.5.4.4.
Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension .............................................................................................. 643
7.5.4.5.
Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension .......................................................................................... 650
7.5.4.6.
Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension ............................................................................................... 653
7.5.4.7.
Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension .......................................................................................... 658
7.5.4.8.
Tools > Section Tools > Position .................................................................................................................. 663
7.5.4.9.
Tools > Section Tools > Straightness ......................................................................................................... 669
7.5.4.10.
Tools > Section Tools > Circularity .............................................................................................................. 671
7.5.4.11.
Tools > Section Tools > Concentricity ....................................................................................................... 674
7.5.4.12.
Tools > Section Tools > Parallelism ............................................................................................................. 680
7.5.4.13.
Tools > Section Tools > Perpendicularity ................................................................................................. 684
7.5.4.14.
Tools > Section Tools > Angularity ............................................................................................................. 687
7.5.4.15.
Tools > Section Tools > Symmetry ............................................................................................................. 691
7.5.4.16.
Tools > Section Tools > Point ........................................................................................................................ 695
7.5.4.17.
Tools > Section Tools > Simulated CMM Point....................................................................................... 706
7.5.4.18.
Tools > Section Tools > Vector...................................................................................................................... 715
7.5.4.19.
Tools > Section Tools > Circle ....................................................................................................................... 724
7.5.4.20.
Tools > Section Tools > Slot........................................................................................................................... 730
7.5.4.21.
Tools > Section Tools > Rectangle .............................................................................................................. 734
7.5.4.22.
Tools > Section Tools > Regular Polygon ................................................................................................. 738
7.5.5.
Tools > Curve Tools ..................................................................................................................................................... 743
7.5.5.1.
Tools > Curve Tools > Spline ......................................................................................................................... 745
7.5.5.2.
Tools > Curve Tools > Section....................................................................................................................... 749
7.5.5.3.
Tools > Curve Tools > Intersection.............................................................................................................. 754
7.5.5.4.
Tools > Curve Tools > Surface UV Curves ................................................................................................. 756
7.5.5.5.
Tools > Curve Tools > Boundary .................................................................................................................. 758
7.5.5.6.
Tools > Curve Tools > Fit From Points ........................................................................................................ 760
7.5.5.7.
Tools > Curve Tools > Offset .......................................................................................................................... 764
7.5.5.8.
Tools > Curve Tools > Project ........................................................................................................................ 766
7.5.5.9.
Tools > Curve Tools > Mirror ......................................................................................................................... 769
7.5.5.10.
Tools > Curve Tools > Convert Entities ...................................................................................................... 771
7.5.5.11.
Tools > Curve Tools > Smooth ...................................................................................................................... 773
7.5.5.12.
Tools > Curve Tools > Trim ............................................................................................................................. 774
7.5.5.13.
Tools > Curve Tools > Extend ........................................................................................................................ 776
7.5.5.14.
Tools > Curve Tools > Split ............................................................................................................................. 779
7.5.5.15.
Tools > Curve Tools > Match ......................................................................................................................... 781
7.5.5.16.
Tools > Curve Tools > Merge ......................................................................................................................... 783
7.5.5.17.
Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node .............................................................................................................. 786
7.5.5.18.
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node ......................................................................................................... 787
7.5.5.19.
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Constraint ............................................................................................... 788
7.5.6.
Tools > GD&T Tools ..................................................................................................................................................... 789
7.5.6.1.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Datum ........................................................................................................................ 791
7.5.6.2.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Smart Dimension ................................................................................................... 793
7.5.6.3.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension .................................................................................................. 800
7.5.6.4.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension ............................................................................................... 810
7.5.6.5.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension .................................................................................................. 815
7.5.6.6.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension .............................................................................................. 822
7.5.6.7.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Bore Depth ............................................................................................................... 828
7.5.6.8.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Counterbore ............................................................................................................ 833
7.5.6.9.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Countersink ............................................................................................................. 837
7.5.6.10.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Thickness .................................................................................................................. 842
7.5.6.11.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Position ...................................................................................................................... 846
7.5.6.12.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Flatness...................................................................................................................... 854
7.5.6.13.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Straightness ............................................................................................................. 857
7.5.6.14.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Circularity ................................................................................................................. 864
7.5.6.15.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Cylindricity ............................................................................................................... 869
7.5.6.16.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Concentricity ........................................................................................................... 872
7.5.6.17.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Parallelism ................................................................................................................ 879
7.5.6.18.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Perpendicularity..................................................................................................... 886
7.5.6.19.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angularity ................................................................................................................. 892
7.5.6.20.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout ....................................................................................................................... 900
7.5.6.21.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Total Runout ............................................................................................................ 906
7.5.6.22.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Line Profile ............................................................................................................... 911
7.5.6.23.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Surface Profile ......................................................................................................... 917
7.5.6.24.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Symmetry ................................................................................................................. 921
7.5.7.
Tools > Regroup 3D GD&Ts ..................................................................................................................................... 926
7.6.
LiveInspect........................................................................................................................928
7.6.1.
LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process............................................................................................................... 932
7.6.2.
LiveInspect > LiveAlign............................................................................................................................................. 933
7.6.3.
LiveInspect > LiveCapture ....................................................................................................................................... 937
7.6.4.
LiveInspect > LiveDimension ................................................................................................................................. 941
7.6.5.
LiveInspect > LiveGeometry ................................................................................................................................... 944
7.6.6.
LiveInspect > Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 946
7.6.6.1.
General Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 947
7.6.6.2.
Probe Tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 949
7.6.6.3.
Scan Data Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 951
7.6.6.4.
Inspect Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 953
7.6.6.5.
Device Tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 955
7.6.6.6.
Hotkey Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 955
vi
7.6.7.
7.7.
Report ...............................................................................................................................957
7.7.1.
7.7.2.
7.7.3.
7.8.
Report > Generate Report ....................................................................................................................................... 958

Report > Export 3D HTML Report......................................................................................................................... 965
Report > Trend Report .............................................................................................................................................. 967
Measure.............................................................................................................................968
7.8.1.
7.8.2.
7.8.3.
7.8.4.
7.8.5.
7.8.6.
7.8.7.
7.8.8.
7.9.
LiveInspect > Move Device ..................................................................................................................................... 956
Measure > Distance.................................................................................................................................................... 969

Measure > Angle ......................................................................................................................................................... 973
Measure > Radius........................................................................................................................................................ 976
Measure > Section ...................................................................................................................................................... 979
Measure > Area ............................................................................................................................................................ 982
Measure > Volume ...................................................................................................................................................... 984
Measure > Mesh Deviations ................................................................................................................................... 986
Measure > Virtual Caliper ......................................................................................................................................... 989
View ...................................................................................................................................991
7.9.1.
View > Visibility ............................................................................................................................................................ 992
7.9.1.1.
View > Visibility > Show Selected Only..................................................................................................... 994
7.9.1.2.
View > Visibility > Show All ........................................................................................................................... 995
7.9.1.3.
View > Visibility > Hide All ............................................................................................................................. 996
7.9.1.4.
View > Visibility > Show Pass Only ............................................................................................................. 997
7.9.1.5.
View > Visibility > Show Fail Only ............................................................................................................... 997
7.9.1.6.
View > Visibility > Show Warning Only ..................................................................................................... 998
7.9.1.7.
View > Visibility > Show No Result Only................................................................................................... 999
7.9.1.8.
View > Visibility > Show Pass & Warning Only ..................................................................................... 1000
7.9.1.9.
View > Visibility > Show Fail & Warning Only .......................................................................................1000
7.9.1.10.
View > Visibility > Point Clouds .................................................................................................................1001
7.9.1.11.
View > Visibility > Meshes............................................................................................................................1002
7.9.1.12.
View > Visibility > Surface Bodies .............................................................................................................1003
7.9.1.13.
View > Visibility > Solid Bodies ..................................................................................................................1004
7.9.1.14.
View > Visibility > Curves .............................................................................................................................1005
7.9.1.15.
View > Visibility > Sections ..........................................................................................................................1006
7.9.1.16.
View > Visibility > Ref. Points ......................................................................................................................1006
7.9.1.17.
View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors ....................................................................................................................1007
7.9.1.18.
View > Visibility > Ref. Planes .....................................................................................................................1009
7.9.1.19.
View > Visibility > Ref. Circles .....................................................................................................................1010
7.9.1.20.
View > Visibility > Ref. Cylinders ................................................................................................................1010
7.9.1.21.
View > Visibility > Ref. Coordinates ..........................................................................................................1011
7.9.1.22.
View > Visibility > GD&Ts ..............................................................................................................................1012
7.9.1.23.
View > Visibility > Deviations .....................................................................................................................1013
7.9.1.24.
View > Visibility > Measurements .............................................................................................................1013
7.9.2.
View > Zoom ...............................................................................................................................................................1014
7.9.2.1.
View > Zoom > Area.......................................................................................................................................1015
7.9.2.2.
View > Zoom > Previous Area ....................................................................................................................1016
7.9.2.3.
View > Zoom > Fit ...........................................................................................................................................1017
7.9.2.4.
View > Zoom > PIP..........................................................................................................................................1018
7.9.3.
View > Navigate Sections ......................................................................................................................................1020
7.9.4.
View > Mesh Display Mode ...................................................................................................................................1021
7.9.5.
View > Body Display Mode....................................................................................................................................1022
7.9.6.
View > Viewpoint ......................................................................................................................................................1024
7.9.7.
View > Viewport ........................................................................................................................................................1027
7.9.8.
View > Light Properties ..........................................................................................................................................1030
7.9.9.
View > View Clip ........................................................................................................................................................1032
7.9.10. View > Annotation Alignment .............................................................................................................................1035
7.9.11. View > Annotation Display Control ...................................................................................................................1036
7.9.12. View > Maximize View Area ..................................................................................................................................1039
7.10. Add-Ins ............................................................................................................................1040

vii
7.10.1.
7.10.2.
7.10.3.
7.10.4.
7.10.5.
7.10.6.
7.10.7.
7.10.8.
7.10.9.
7.10.10.
7.10.11.
7.10.12.
7.10.13.
7.10.14.
7.10.15.
7.10.16.
Add-Ins > Import Large Data................................................................................................................................1041

Add-Ins > Import & Split.........................................................................................................................................1042
Add-Ins > Global Register ......................................................................................................................................1043
Add-Ins > Register Target.......................................................................................................................................1045
Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate .......................................................................................................................................1047
Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate .......................................................................................................................................1050
Add-Ins > Triangulate/Merge Large Data ........................................................................................................1052
Add-Ins > Surface Merge .......................................................................................................................................1054
Add-Ins > Volume Merge .......................................................................................................................................1057
Add-Ins > Combine ..................................................................................................................................................1059
Add-Ins > Find Scan Direction .............................................................................................................................1061
Add-Ins > Generate Vertex Normal ....................................................................................................................1063
Add-Ins > Reverse Normal .....................................................................................................................................1065
Add-Ins > Delete Poly-Faces .................................................................................................................................1066
Add-Ins > Trim Mesh ................................................................................................................................................1068
Add-Ins > Contour Curve From Whole Deviation .........................................................................................1071
7.11. Help .................................................................................................................................1073
8.
GLOSSARY .................................................................................................. 1075
9.
INDEX .......................................................................................................... 1087
viii
1. Introduction
To see the main contents of the help guide, press the F1 key while using a command or while in
any mode. The F1 key by default will open the contents help guide. This will display the help
document for the particular command or mode that is being used.
Note: You must be in an active command or in an activate mode to use the F1 function.
Otherwise, either the intro document page will be displayed if the F1 function is used for the
first time, or the last help page viewed.
Rapidform XOV3 | Introduction
1.1.
Welcome to Rapidform XOV
The Most CAD Friendly Point-Cloud Inspection Software
Thank you for choosing Rapidform XOV/VerifierTM, worlds most CAD friendly inspection software
for Systematic Inspection Processing using dense point cloud data. INUS Technology, Inc., the
leader in providing technologies that make 3D scanning an extremely powerful tool for a variety of
applications including manufacturing, R&D, quality inspection, medical research, civil engineering
and more, is now presenting the future of 3D scanning software technology with its next
generation 3D scan data processing platform, Rapidform XO. Rapidform XOV makes the inspection
processing faster and easier by utilizing a process and user interface that are instantly familiar to
CAD users.
Compare Manufactured Parts to CAD Models in Minutes

Rapidform XOV/Verifier is the only software of its kind that is built around the customer
inspection process with detailed planning and fast and easy execution of inspection processing
with no custom code writing or macros. It offers CAD deviation analysis and geometric
dimensioning & tolerancing(GD&T) of 3D scanned parts. It has been verified to perform the most
accurate & repeatable calculation of any 3D scanning inspection software, and certified by the
German PTB and has been tested by American NIST and the British NPL. It is suited for professional
metrology-level inspection applications with a rich feature set to inspect any part from any CAD
software.
Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA, Creo(Pro/ENGINEER) and SolidWorks
Native GD&T Import from CAD Truly 3D PMI-ready
Easiest & Quickest Works through CAD-like Intuitive User Interface
Easily Automate Every Inspection Job without Macro
Feature-by-feature Parametric Inspection - All inspection features can be updatable and

editable
Industry-proven Accuracy in Use at Top Companies
Intelligent Auto-Align Based on Feature Recognition
CAD style GD&T definition, GD&T on 2D, Pattern and Projected Modifier
Fully Support 2D type GD&T on 2D Drawing
Available to use Mesh (Tessellated CAD & Scan Data) as Nominal like CAD
Smart Dimension & Tolerance Table - Predefined tolerance table

Fully supported for streamlined and efficient inspection processes using portable
measurement devices LiveInspect
Totally Renovated Quality Inspection Software Solution

Compared to Rapidform XOV1, Rapidform XOV is totally renovated to differentiate itself from other
competing products like Rapidform XOR. Rapidform XOV is not a better product, but a different
product from other products in the market. The way to use it as well as the user interface and job
process are exactly the same as those of CAD, and Rapidform XOV is the only point cloud
inspection software that works like a history-based CAD system. This means that any part of an
inspection job can be modified at any time, and the software will update the results instantly. You
can correct mistakes or redo measurements without needing to repeatedly inspect the whole part.
In addition, Rapidform XOV can open native files from Siemens NX, CATIA and Creo(Pro/ENGINEER),
and import dimensions and tolerances defined in CAD parts. With the application, GD&T does not
have to be manually redefined anymore. Rapidform XOV is the first point cloud inspection
software to truly read native GD&T annotations (Product Manufacturing Information, PMI) from
these CAD applications.
1.2.
Key Themes of Rapidform XOV
The Most CAD Friendly Point-Cloud Inspection Software

Rapidform XOV is the best tool for design validation. Rapidform XOV provides a rich set of features
for checking Scan-to-CAD comparisons and native GD&T annotation (Product Manufacturing
Information, PMI) analysis. With Rapidform XOV, a design engineer using a major CAD application
can check the quality of a part at his or her desk immediately to effectively analyze problems in the
early design stages. It also is useful for detecting flaws early to prevent further investment of time
and money in a flawed part. This allows for a product development cycle to continue unimpeded.
Rapidform XOV is a unique solution in the market. It is a fundamentally different product from all
other point cloud inspection software. The job processes and user interface in Rapidform XOV have
been developed to be instantly familiar to users of popular CAD applications such as SolidWorks,
Siemens NX, CATIA and Creo(Pro/ENGINEER), which can lead to incredible time savings over
traditional quality inspection software. Rapidform XOV also provides higher accuracy and
repeatability compared to traditional quality inspection software and is the world's first inspection
software to introduce a feature-based parametric inspection concept, which is already very
popular in the general CAD industry. All inspection targets and alignment strategies defined in
Rapidform XOV are managed by features that can be updated, deleted and inserted at any stage. It
supports every possible inspection workflow and is suited to both design validation and in-depth
GD&T quality inspection in design and production.
Designed for CAD users who are unfamiliar with point cloud inspection and 3D scanning
Can casually verify the quality of a part before it goes to the formal inspection
Reduce the learning curve of inspection software through the use of a familiar CAD
interface and job process
Used to freely update, delete or insert features at any stage of the inspection process,
similar to CAD applications
Inspection Process Simplification by Rapidform XOV/Verifier
1.3.
Features of Rapidform XOV
The Highlighted Whats New Features and Enhancements
Rapidform XOV is an innovative new software solution that allows design engineers to conduct
fully feature-based parametric inspection with a CAD-like intuitive user interface. Rapidform XOV is
a totally renovated solution that provides a new approach with a familiar process. It is used to
check part quality and native GD&T information. Rapidform XOV is not only a better product, but a
different product from other inspection products. Over the past year, we have received valuable
input and guidance from our users on how to refine and perfect this point-cloud inspection
software application. The newest release of Rapidform XOV by ongoing innovations is our answers
to their requests and suggestions. The highlighted Whats New features are as follows:
New User Interface CAD - like Intuitive User Interface
Drastically Simplified Process through Smart Automation
Fully Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA and Creo(Pro/ENGINEER) Truly 3D PMI-ready
Feature-by-feature Parametric Inspection
Industry-proven Scan-to-CAD Alignment Enhancement
Fully Compliant with ASME(ANSI) Y14.5M GD&T
Truly Supports GD&T on 2D Draft
Mesh Data as a Nominal Data
Smart Dimension & Tolerance Table
Complete Toolbox for CAD & Scan Data Optimization
Streamlined and efficient inspection processes using portable measurement devices

LiveInspect
Automatic Scan Pair Search and Pair Geometry Display
Convenient Reporting Tools
Rebuild Performance Enhancements
Unicod and Multi-Language Support
Enhanced Mesh Segmentation and Editing Tools
New User Interface - CAD-like Intuitive User Interface

The functionality, user interface and job processes of Rapidform XOV are similar to those of
popular history-based CAD systems. When it comes to scan data based inspection for CAD users,
Rapidform XOV is the one and only answer.
Drastically Simplified Process through Smart Automation

You can measure and tolerance parts with just a few clicks. Rapidform XOV requires 30% less
mouse traveling distance and clicks compared to other inspection software.
1. Alignment
2. Whole
Deviation
3. Sectional
Deviation
4. Dimension
on Section
5. Reporting
6. Replace
Scan Data
Fully Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA and Pro/ENGINEER Truly 3D PMI-ready
Rapidform XOV opens native files from Siemens NX, CATIA and Creo(Pro/E), and imports
dimensions and tolerances defined in a CAD part, preventing a user from having to redefine the
GD&T. Rapidform XOV is the first point cloud inspection software to truly read native GD&T
annotations (Product Manufacturing Information, PMI) from the most widely used CAD
applications.
Feature-by-feature Parametric Inspection

Rapidform XOV is the only point cloud inspection software that works like a history-based CAD
system, allowing the modification of any part of an inspection job at any time with an instant
update of the results. Mistakes can be corrected or measurements can be re-taken without
needing to inspect the whole part all over again.
Industry-proven Scan-to-CAD Alignment Enhancement

When it comes to inspection, every calculation counts. Top manufacturers around the world trust
XOV to measure thousands of parts every day. In addition to its industry-proven accurate
alignment, Rapidform XOV introduces a new fully automated alignment feature based on
geometry feature recognition.
Fully Compliant with ASME(ANSI) Y14.5M GD&T

Many professional GD&T targets are supported in Rapidform XOV such as Patterns, Projected
modifiers, Simultaneous Requirements (SIMREQT), Symmetries, Lines and Surface Profiles,
Counterbores, Countersinks, Bore Depths, etc.
Truly Supports GD&T on 2D Draft

Rapidform XOV is the 1st software of its kind that fully supports GD&T in 2D. Various methods can
be used to define a sectional plane such as Full, Partial, Offset, Multiple and Revolved Section.
Mesh Data as a Nominal Data

In Rapidform XOV, mesh data (tessellated CAD or scan data) can be used as nominal data. GD&T
and +/- tolerances can easily be defined directly on mesh data and is similar with working with
CAD data because all geometrical features on the nominal mesh data are automatically recognized
after importing the mesh file.
Smart Dimension & Tolerance Table

Defining GD&T is much easier than ever through smart automation of UI. A predefined tolerance
table is available to drastically improve job efficiency.
Complete Toolbox for CAD & Scan Data Optimization

Error-free CAD and scan data is required to guarantee the reliability of accurate inspection results.
Rapidform XOV provides a complete toolset for the preparation of perfect CAD and scan data by
using CAD & Mesh healing features, CAD & Mesh de-noising features and CAD & Mesh editing
features.
Streamlined and efficient inspection processes using portable measurement devices

LiveInspect is a new User Interface (UI) that is used to control various portable measurement
devices in an easy and integrated fashion. LiveInspect is flexible and powerful, enabling probing
devices to be used during the inspection process in addition to, or instead of a scanning device.
The LiveInspect toolbar contains all the tools necessary when physically touching a probing
device to a measurement part in a consolidated and accessible layout.
Automatic Scan Pair Search and Pair Geometry Display

Rapidform XOVs new advanced algorithm now searches 3D scan pair geometries automatically
before inspecting geometric features. It also searches for linear or circular boundary edges when
inspecting an opened CAD body model. Recognized scan pair geometries are displayed after scan
data is aligned or overlapped with nominal data. When a face, region, edge, or vertex is selected,
searched scan pair geometries will be highlighted. Hovering the mouse cursor on a nominal face
10
or a region will have the same result.
Convenient Reporting Tools

Rapidform XOV has its own report generation tool inside of the application and it is designed for
easy learning and usage. New functionalities can add more custom values for higher degrees of
freedom when making a customized layout and some performance enhancements have been
made while generating or modifying reports.
Rebuild Performance Enhancements

Since Rapidform XOVs inspection process is parametric and creates a history, users can change
parameters or options and recalculate revised results at any time by rebuilding the inspection
history.
This enhancement is focused on rebuilding performance by removing redundant calculations.
When the options in the properties are modified, only inspection features influenced by the
changed options will be marked and they can be updated using the rebuild function.
11
Unicode and Multi-Language Support

XOV now supports a Unicode environment and is compatible with any language. Users can import
or export files with country specific characters such as umlauts (, , , etc.) or two bytes characters
such as Korean and Japanese.
Now users can choose their desired language within the application in the Preferences after a local
language pack has been installed.
Chinese
German
Korean
Supported languages are as follows:
Chinese (Simplified)
German
Italian
Korean
Russian
Polish
12
2. Getting Started
This section discusses the following topics:
System Requirements
Installation
What Can XOV Do?
Basic Entity Terminology
Basic Concept of User Interface
Basic Inspection Overview
2.1.
System Requirements
32-bit Edition
- Windows XP (32-bit or 64-bit SP2 or above)
OS
- Windows Vista (32-bit or 64-bit SP1 or

above)
- Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
64-bit Edition
- Windows XP (64-bit SP2 or above)
- Windows Vista (64-bit SP1 or above)
- Windows 7 (64-bit)
- Intel and AMD processors

CPU
- Recommended: Multiple core processors. Hyper-threading and clock speeds above 3ghz
can be beneficial but should be paired with a good balance of cores.
- Minimum: 1 GB
- Recommended: 2 GB
- Virtual Memory:
RAM
XP: recommended to about 2.5 times the

amount of RAM
Vista, Win7: recommended to use the default
option; Automatically manage paging file
size for all drives
- Minimum: 2 GB
- Recommended: 8-16 GB (Based on version
of Windows used)
- Virtual Memory:
XP: recommended to about 2.5 times the
amount of RAM
Vista, Win7: recommended to use the
default option; "Automatically manage
paging file size for all drives"
- 30 GB or more recommended
- Temporary file cache requires about 3 GB free disk space for every 100 million points
Hard Disk
- Recommended: a SSD with more than 256GB of space, or a 10,000RPM HDD

- Recommended: using multiple hard drives and assigning one as a cache drive for
Rapidform temporary storage and paging files and assigning the other for the operating
system
Display
GPU
- OpenGL 1.2 or above, 32 bit true color required

- Recommended 24-inch wide screen monitor, 1920X1280 resolution
- Recommended: NVidia GTX series with 1GB of RAM or more
Rapidform XOV3 | Getting Started
13
Intel G45
Intel
Intel G645GM
Intel G45
Intel
Intel G965
Intel G965
Intel 945GM
Intel 945GM
Intel HD 2000/3000
Intel HD 2000/3000
Rage XL
Rage XL
AMD
Intel G645GM
Radeon 7500
AMD
Radeon X600SE
Radeon 9600
Radeon 7500
Radeon 9600 XT
Radeon 9600
Radeon X600
Radeon X600
Radeon X600SE
Radeon X1600
Radeon X700
Radeon X1800 GTO
Radeon X1650
Radeon HD 2600 XT
Radeon X1600
Radeon HD 3870
Radeon X1800 GTO
Radeon HD 4770
Radeon HD 2600 XT
Radeon HD 4800 1G
Radeon HD 3670M
Radeon HD 5700
Radeon HD 3870
Radeon HG 5770
Radeon HD 4770
Radeon HD 5800
Radeon HD 4800 1G
Radeon HD 6470M
Certified
Radeon HD 5700
Radeon HD 6850
Graphics
Radeon HG 5770
Radeon HD 6870
Card
Radeon HD 5800
Radeon HD 6950
Radeon HD 6470M
Radeon HD 6970
Radeon HD 6850
Radeon HD 7850
Radeon HD 6870
Radeon HD 7770
Radeon HD 6950
Radeon HD 6970
Radeon HD 7850
Radeon HD 7770
FireGL V3100
FireGL Z1
AMD
FireGL V3100
AMD
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V5600
FireGL V5600
FireGL V7300
FireGL V7300
FireMV V2250
FireMV V2250
FirePro 2260
FirePro 2260
FirePro V2450
FirePro V2450
FirePro V3750
FirePro V3750
FirePro V3800
FirePro V3800
FirePro V4800
FirePro V4800
14
GeForce2 MX 100/200
GeForce2 MX 100/200
NVIDIA
GeForce4 Ti 4400
NVIDIA
GeForce FX Go 5200
GeForce FX 5200
GeForce Go 5200
GeForce FX 5500
GeForce Go 7400
GeForce FX 5600
GeForce Go 7600
GeForce FX 5600XT
GeForce 6200
GeForce FX 5700
GeForce 6600
GeForce FX Go 5200
GeForce 6800
GeForce FX Go 5700
GeForce 7600GS
GeForce Go 5200
GeForce 7600GT
GeForce Go 7400
GeForce 7900GS
GeForce Go 7600
GeForce 8300GS
GeForce 6200
GeForce 8400M
GeForce 6600
GeForce 8400GS
GeForce 6800
GeForce 8500
GeForce 7600GS
GeForce 8500GT
GeForce 7600GT
GeForce 8600
GeForce 7800GTX
GeForce 8600GS
GeForce 7900GS
GeForce 8600GT
GeForce 640M
GeForce 8600GTS
GeForce 8300GS
GeForce 640M
GeForce 8400M
GeForce 8600M
GeForce 8400GS
GeForce 8800GT
GeForce 8500
GeForce 8800GTS
GeForce 8500GT
GeForce 9200M
GeForce 8500GTS
GeForce 9300M
GeForce 8600
GeForce 9300GE
GeForce 8600GT
GeForce 9500GT
GeForce 8600GS
GeForce 9600GT
GeForce 8600GTS
GeForce 9800GT
GeForce 8600M
GeForce 9800GTX
GeForce 8800GT
GeForce G105M
GeForce 8800GTS
GeForce GT 220
GeForce 9200M
GeForce GT 630
GeForce 9300M
GeForce GTS 250
GeForce 9300GE
GeForce GTX 260
GeForce 9500GT
GeForce GTX 285
GeForce 9600GT
GeForce GT 310M
GeForce 9800GT
GeForce GTS 335M
GeForce 9800GTX
GeForce GT 360M
GeForce G105M
GeForce GT 425M
GeForce GT 220
GeForce GTX 465
GeForce GT 630
GeForce GTX 485M
GeForce GTS 250
GeForce GT 520M
GeForce GTX 260
GeForce GT 525M
GeForce GTX 285
GeForce GT 540M
GeForce GTS 335M
GeForce GT 550M
GeForce GT 310M
GeForce GT 555M
15
GeForce GT 360M
GeForce GT 8600M
GeForce GT 425M
GeForce GS 8600M
GeForce GTX 485M
GeForce GTX 550TI
GeForce GT 520M
GeForce GTX 560TI
GeForce GT 525M
GeForce GTX 560
GeForce GT 540M
GeForce GTX 570
GeForce GT 550M
GeForce GTX 580
GeForce GT 555M
GeForce GTX 670
GeForce GT 8600M
GeForce GTX 680
GeForce GS 8600M
GeForce GTX 550TI
GeForce GTX 560TI
GeForce GTX 465
GeForce GTX 560
GeForce GTX 570
GeForce GTX 580
GeForce GTX 670
GeForce GTX 680
Quadro FX 350M
Quadro NVS 120M

NVIDIA
Quadro NVS 135M
NVIDIA
Quadro FX 360M
Quadro NVS 140M
Quadro FX 570M
Quadro FX 350M
Quadro FX 580
Quadro FX 360M
Quadro FX 880M
Quadro FX 500
Quadro FX Go 1400
Quadro FX 540
Quadro FX 1400
Quadro FX 570M
Quadro FX 1500
Quadro FX 580
Quadro FX 3500
Quadro FX 880M
Quadro FX 4000
Quadro FX Go 1400
Quadro FX 4500
Quadro FX 1400
Quadro FX 5200
Quadro FX 1500
Quadro FX 5700
Quadro FX 3500
Quadro 600
Quadro FX 4000
Quadro 1500
Quadro FX 4500
Quadro 1800
Quadro FX 5200
Quadro 2000
Quadro FX 5700
Quadro 3000
Quadro 600
Quadro 2000D
Quadro 1500
Quadro 3500
Quadro 1800
Quadro 3800
Quadro 2000
Quadro 4000
Quadro 2000D
Quadro 4500
Quadro 3000
Quadro 3000M
Quadro 3500
Quadro 3800
Quadro 4000
Quadro 4500
Quadro 3000M
16
- Not Recommended
- Not Recommended
ATI Mobility Radeon 7000 IGP DDR
ATI Mobility Radeon 7000 IGP
ATI Radeon X800 GTO
DDR
ATI Radeon X1600

- If you use the AMD Radeon series, the panning or rotation in the application might not
operate correctly. To solve this problem, uncheck the Use Custom Settings option under 3D >
Standard Settings in the Catalyst Control Center dialog box and move the slider to the left.
It is recommended to set the anti-aliasing value lower than 8. Otherwise, detection of 3D
edges may not work properly or there may be problems with panning or rotating within the
application. If anti-aliasing is disabled, the edges and boundaries of shaded objects can be
jagged if displayed at angles close to 0 or 90 degrees.
- DVD drive
- 3 button mouse with scroll
- Sound card
- Keyboard
Other
- Network card
- Internet Explorer version 7.x or higher
- Adobe Acrobat version 5.x or higher
- Microsoft Excel 2003, 2007, or 2010 for XOV report
2.2.
Installation
1. Insert the installation DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.

2. The installation program should appear automatically. If the autorun installation does not start
automatically, browse the DVD-ROM directory and then double-click on the autorun.exe file.
3. Follow the instructions provided by the installation program.
4. After installation is complete, run the application.
5. After activating a license, a dialog box will be displayed for setting the initial settings for
Rapidform XOV.
17
Enable Multi-thread When set to True, multi-threading will be utilized to speed up the
calculation time of some functions. Enabling multi-threading is highly recommended. On a
single processor, multithreading generally occurs when the processor switches between
different process threads one at a time.
On a multiprocessor or multi-core system, threads will process simultaneously, with each
processor or core running a particular thread. Depending on how many cores the processor
has, the same number of progress bars will be displayed when multi-threading is enabled and
utilized.
User Name The name of the PC.
Update Product Automatically If it is set to True, whenever you launch the program, it will
check if there are any updates.
View Manipulation Style You can select one of the view manipulation style (zooming,
panning, rotating); Rapidform, SolidWorks, Siemens NX, Creo(Pro/E), CATIA, PolyWorks, or
Geomagic.
Preferred Scanner File Format Select a scanner formats that you frequently use, so that
when you import a scanner file, you will see only the chosen formats.
Preferred Scanner Direct Control Set frequently used scanners as True to display them in
the Device pull down menu when using the Insert > Scanner Direct Control command. To
apply changes, close and rerun the application.
Unit Selects default units to be used in the application.
Use Configurations Of Previous Version Set options to True or False to enable or disable
configurations from previous versions of the application.
18
2.3.
What Can XOV Do?
Powerful Digital Inspection with XOV

Rapidform XOV is 3D inspection software, capable of handling both scan data and probe data.
Scan data is a representation of a real object that consists of millions of points and is called a point
cloud. Point clouds are created using a 3D scanner.
Probe data is discrete points taken with a contact measurement device, and is more of a traditional
inspection process. Probe data can be more accurate at the point level, but can give vague results
on problem areas of a model such as warped or stretched areas.
Scanning with a 3D scanner can capture these conditions quicker and more accurately than single
point measurements. XOV is compatible with any 3D scanner or digitizer and provides various
inspection tools to virtually inspect scanned objects based on nominal information.
The digital inspection process in XOV can quickly deliver pass or fail results. By preserving acquired
data, more in-depth measurements can be performed even though the physical object being
inspected might not be available in a metrology lab. XOV scan data processing automatically aligns
scan shots then generates inspection-ready scan data. A generated point cloud or mesh is then
aligned with nominal CAD data using alignment methods such as auto, best-fit, or geometrybased alignment. Various inspection tools can generate deviation maps on CAD data, pass or fail
GD&T information, and sectional measurements. A MS Word-style reporting tool gathers all
inspection results and creates a customizable report complete with tables, histograms, and images.
These reports can then be exported into popular document formats.
19
2.4.
Basic Entity Terminology
The application can handle many different types of entities ranging from scan data to CAD data.
The entities can be the target or result of a 3D scan-based inspection process, or the by-products
of an inspection process.
This chapter explains what kinds of entities are used in the application and the terminology
definitions for them.
Nominal Data
Nominal data is standard data for 3D scan-based inspections. 3D CAD data and mesh data can be
nominal data in the application. When checking deviation against target scan data, the results are
calculated based on the nominal data. Additionally, to use a point cloud as nominal data, it needs
to be constructed as a mesh through a process called triangulation.
Nominal CAD Data
Nominal Mesh Data
Scan Data
Scan data is inspection target data. Point clouds and a mesh data can be scan data in the
application. When checking deviation based on nominal data, results are calculated by measuring
projected distances on the nominal data from the target scan data. To use CAD data as scan data, it
needs to be converted into a mesh or a point cloud through a process called tessellation.
Target Point Cloud Data
Target Mesh Data
20
Point Cloud
A point cloud is a set of 3D points that represent a real object in 3D space. Each point is a digitized
point represented on an object in a X, Y, and Z coordinate system. A point cloud is usually scanned
from a physical part by using a 3D scanner or a coordinate measuring machine (CMM). A point
cloud is used for various purposes, such as scan data for creating 3D CAD models, a target for a 3D
scan-based inspection process, visualization, animation, rendering, and mass customization
applications.
Point cloud data
Mesh
A mesh is a polygonal model consisting of vertices, edges, and faces. It represents the shape of a
real object in 3D space. A mesh can be constructed from a point cloud or CAD data by a process
called triangulation.
The mesh model is more useful than point clouds in various applications because it explicitly
represents both the surface and volume of a model. Mesh models are used for various purposes
such as scan data for creating detail 3D CAD models, a target or a reference for an accurate
inspection process, visualization, animation, and rendering.
Mesh from a point cloud of a real bottle
In the application, the following terminologies are used for a mesh entity:
Poly-Face: triangles enveloped by three poly-edges.

21
Poly-Edge: a connecting edge between two poly-vertices.
Poly-Vertex: a point which represents a position in 3D space.
Boundary: open boundaries in a mesh without triangles.
Terminology of a mesh
Region Group
Region segmentation is a unique process in Rapidform XOV. Geometric feature regions are
intelligently recognized and classified by colored region groups on a mesh model.
When a mesh model is used as nominal data in a 3D scan-based inspection process, geometric
regions on the mesh will be automatically classified.
The classified regions are used like faces of a CAD model for quickly selecting areas on features and
extracting geometric information.
Classified regions from a mesh
Surface / Solid Body

A surface body is a body that represents a part with a set of opened surfaces that has no volume. A
surface body consists of vertices, edges, faces, and boundaries.
22
Surface Body
A solid body is a body that represents a part with a set of closed surfaces that encloses a volume. A
solid body consists of vertices, edges, and faces.
Solid Body
Solid Body with Hidden Line
Surface bodies and solid bodies both represent a model constructed by geometric features in 3D
space. They are usually used as nominal data in a 3D scan-based inspection process. They can be
used to not only check the deviation between target scan data in overall regions, but also check
the deviation on boundaries, sections, specific positions, and measuring 2D/3D GD&T.
Checking the deviation between Surface / Solid Body and Scan Data
In the application, the following terminologies are used for surface / solid body entities:
Face: a single surface that represents a geometric shape.
Edge: a boundary line in-between 2 adjacent faces.
Vertex: a point at a corner of 3 adjacent faces.
Boundary: an open outer boundary of a model.

23
Terminology of a Body
Entity Normals
A normal is typically called a normal vector or a normal direction. It is a perpendicular direction to
the tangent plane at a specific point on an entity. When a normal is used in a mesh, it represents a
positive direction on the surface of the mesh. A normal is used for not only representing a positive
direction on the surface of an entity, but also for aligning entities, optimizing the quality of faces,
calculating an angle using the projection direction of target measurement points, and defining a
position of mating geometries.
Mesh containing twisted normals
Mesh containing corrected

normals
Curves
Interpolating curves are spline curves created by interpolating points on the surface of an entity. A
curve can be used as a reference entity in various situations, such as a guide curve for defining
measurement positions, serving as a profile for measuring sections or boundaries between
nominal and scan data, and as a reference entity for extracting target geometries.
24
Curves used as Guide Curve
Curves used as Section Profiles
Ref. Geometry
Ref.Geometry is a reference geometric feature that consists of various geometric types including:
Points, Vectors, Planes, Slots, Rectangles, Polygons, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, and Tori. They are
used as references for selecting, measuring, transforming, aligning, sectioning, and dimensioning
in 3D scan-based inspection.
Reference Geometries
Additionally, another Ref.Geometry type, CMM Points, is provided in the application. CMM Points
are a special type of Ref.Point. They are used for virtually simulating a contact point acquired in a
Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM).
Simulating a CMM Point
Section
25
A section is a projected 2D view which shows a cross section of a measurement part along a
specified cutting plane. For a section, the section deviation can be checked, GD&T can be
measured, and reference geometries can be extracted. Additionally, the deviation trends of section
profiles along a specific direction can be analyzed by using multiple sections.
Technical Drawing (Section)
GD&T in Section B-B
Nominal Section / Scan Section

When a section is created at a specific position, sectional profiles will be extracted from both
nominal and target scan data. A sectional profile extracted from nominal data is called a nominal
section and a sectional profile extracted from scan data is called a scan section. A nominal section
consists of section edges, and a scan section consists of section polylines. The section edges and
section polylines are constructed by line and arc type segments based on the geometric features
of the nominal and scan data. The resolution of section polylines can be manually adjusted.
Nominal Section
Scan Section
Scan Pairs
When beginning an inspection process, the features and geometry information for each nominal
face is read directly from a CAD model or a mesh that has been classified into geometrical regions.
The geometry features in the nominal data are used in measurements and for finding correct scan
data pairs.
When finding corresponding geometry pairs from scan data, corresponding points are first
searched from scan data within a volumetric zone called the thickness zone that is constructed by
user-defined Min./Max.distances on nominal data. Searched points are qualified through filtering
operations. The qualified points are called scan pair points in the application. Using these scan pair
points, scan pair geometry is created.
26
Nominal and Scan Data
Scan Pair Points and Scan Pair Geometry
Probe Point Data

Contact probe data also called Probe Point Data, is acquired when controlling portable
measurement devices with a probe in an inspection process. All probe point data is stored uncompensated, based on the center position of the probe tip. The data also retains all possible
metadata, or additional information from the device. Some of the information included can be the
probe radius, temperature, probe vector, device type, calibration info, and time of capture. Probe
Points are grouped into Probe Sessions, based on each measurement session, or each time the
device is started and stopped. Probed point data is used as point data in the application for
inspection processes.
Acquired Probe Point Data
2.5.
Basic Concept of User Interface
This guide is designed to help beginners understand the basic and essential design concepts of
Rapidform XOVs user interface.
User Interface Overview
Understanding User Interface Philosophy
Navigating Entities
27
2.5.1. User Interface Overview

The user interface of Rapidform XOV is designed to be easy to learn and use because it functions
similarly to other CAD software. It uses familiar tools for inspection with the addition of other
unique tools for an efficient and streamlined inspection process.
The following images shows elements which are frequently used in the application.
1. Menu Bar
All functions in the application are contained in the menu bar. These menus allow the easy
creation of a streamlined inspection process.
28
For more details, see the User Interface > Menu Bar chapter.
2. Tool Palette
The application features different modes that allows for the generation and editing of inspection
entities with only relevant functions displayed. Multiple modes are featured because the
application can handle and manipulate many different types of inspection entities. To simplify and
streamline the inspection process there are different modes that can be used to handle the types
of entities that are being worked with.
For more details, see the User Interface > Tool Palette chapter.
3. Toolbar
A group of icons is called a Tool Bar. When icons are dimmed, they are not available to use.
Toolbars can be customized by clicking Customize... in the menu that is displayed when rightclicking the toolbar area.
29
Opening Customize
Customized toolbar
For more details, see the User Interface > Toolbar chapter.
4. Inspection Feature Tree

Rapidform XOV uses a unique inspection method called parametric history-based inspection.
Parametric history-based inspection allows the creation of inspection entities by remembering the
operations used in an inspection process, the order of the operations, and their relationships to
one another.
For more details, see the User Interface > Docking Bar > Tree chapter.
5. Model Tree
The Model Tree shows all created entities by category. The Model Tree can be used for selecting
and controlling the visibility of entities.
30
Clicking the Show / Hide icon next to an entity will toggle between showing and hiding the
entity. If a parent entity is hidden, its child entities will not be displayed even if they are toggled to
be shown.
Hiding the Solid Body entity
For more details, see the User Interface > Docking Bar > Tree chapter.
6. Display, Help, Viewpoint

The Display, Help, and Viewpoint tabs are located at the bottom of the same window as the
Feature and Model Trees.
Display The Display pane is used to manage how entities are displayed. For example, it can be
used to set a model to be transparent or brightly lit. Different entities such as textures, normals,
faces, and boundaries can be shown or hidden as well.
31
Help The Help pane shows the table of contents of the user guide. It can be navigated
through by selecting a title on the table of contents in the Help pane or by pressing the F1 key
when a command dialog tree is floating in the Model View.
Viewpoint The Viewpoint pane can save view states that are currently being used. It works
much like taking a picture. When a viewpoint is taken, the visible state entities and viewing
direction are saved. The captured viewpoints can be used when an inspection report is
generated.
For more details, see the User Interface > Docking Bar chapter.
7. Selection Toolbar
When poly-faces and poly-vertices are to be selected, the application offers various selection
methods to use. For example, poly-faces can be chosen by dragging a line, circle, or rectangle.
Painting the desired area on the mesh is also possible, and can be expanded to connect all polyfaces. The selection method can be changed in this toolbar.
For more details, see the Select > Mode chapter.
8. Dialog Tree
When a command name that includes an ellipsis is selected, a corresponding dialog tree will be
displayed in the Model View. According to prerequisite conditions, some controls might be
enabled or disabled.
32
For more details, see the User Interface > Dialog Tree chapter.
9. Model View
The Model View is the main workspace. Models and entities are displayed and manipulated in the
Model View. It can support 4 different types of views. Four different three-window based views and
two different two-window based views are available.
For more details, see the User Interface > Model View chapter.
10. Properties
After an entity is selected, its properties can be viewed and changed. For example, after Nominal
Data is selected, its bounding box size can be checked in the properties pane. Options related to
Deviation and GD&T calculation can also be changed as desired.
33
For more details, see the User Interface > Docking Bars > Properties chapter.
11. Color Bar

The Color Bar is used to view deviation in created entities.
The Color Bar looks like the following image. The style of color bar can be easily changed by using
templates and its range can also be adjusted as desired.
For more details, see the User Interface > Docking Bars > Color Bar chapter.
12. Confirmation Button

The confirmation button confirms results. When running a command or entering a mode, this
button will be displayed. To accept all changes, click the confirm button
button
. Clicking the cancel
will discard all changes and the command or mode will be exited.
13. Tabular View

In the Tabular View, information for entities such as Comparison Points, Section Deviations, Curve
Deviations, Boundary Deviations, Whole Deviations, Ref. Positions, GD&Ts, Measurements, and Ref.
Geometries can be seen in a table.
34
For more details, see the User Interface > Docking Bars > Tabular View chapter.
14. Monitoring Bars

The Monitoring Bars show the current operation status, progress information, time information,
memory consumption information, and free space available in the cache folder.
For more details, see the User Interface > Monitoring Bars chapter.
2.5.2. Understanding User Interface Philosophy

The following chapters introduce general rules when using the application.
Dialog Tree Convention
Selection Convention
Mode Convention
Docking Bar Convention
2.5.2.1.
Dialog Tree Convention
How to use a Dialog Tree

35
Selecting Entities to Actively Control

When a command is executed, a dialog tree will be displayed in the Model view. Some dialog trees
require the user to select entities in various fields in order to proceed. The active control is a box
highlighted in a yellow color by default. It indicates the currently selected control is ready for the
selection of entities. When an entity is selected the name will be registered under the active
control. To select entities for another control, click the desired control box to make it active.
Below are examples of what a user might typically see in a dialog tree. Each command or tool has
its own set of options in its dialog tree so the images are used as a general guideline on the layout
and different functions.
The name of the command will be at the top of the
dialog tree. In this example there are multiple
stages and the first two buttons are the Previous
Stage and Next Stage buttons that will go forward
and backward through stages. The next two
buttons are the OK and Cancel buttons to apply the
command or exit out of it.
This second example shows a command that has
two more useful buttons. The first is the Lock
button. It is used when there are multiple changes
that need to be made using the same tool. Clicking
this button will set the OK button to not quit the
command when clicked. The button with the
magnifying glass is the Preview button which
allows the user to preview changes made to a
model in real-time without actually applying the
changes.
This dialog tree shows what stage a command or
tool is in. A command must have more than one
stage for this type of dialogue box to be displayed.
The first button is the OK button which applies
changes made in the current stage without exiting
the entire command, and the second button is the
Undo button which will deselect the last selection
made.
36
Some options will have selection buttons that allow

for the selection of different parameters. This
example has two selectable parameters, but
commands will vary in how many they might have.
Option check boxes toggle different parameters on
or off.
Radio buttons are used in a dialog tree to select an
option. Only one radio button can be chosen at a
time.
This is a selection area. The input box is used to
make a selection in the viewing area. In this
example an entity labeled "teeth" has been
selected. There are two buttons next to the input
box. The first is the Select None button and it will
delete all selected entities. The second button is the
Undo button which will deselect the last chosen
entity.
Dialog Tree Controls

The dialog tree is designed intuitively to easily complete a task through the use of common tools.
All tools have icons and they are only shown if needed in a specific dialog tree. The following icons
can be found in the dialog tree.
Lock(Dont Quit Command With OK) When this icon is toggled, the dialog tree will
remain open even if the OK icon for the command is clicked. It is designed for
commands that are consecutively applied several times in a row.
Break When an operation is executing, it can be stopped by using this button. The
keyboard shortcut is the Esc key.
Delete Selected Entities This button will remove chosen entities.
Preview When this button is clicked, the results of the command will be displayed
without executing it.
Enable Realtime Preview When this button is toggled, the results of a command will
be displayed in real-time whenever an input condition is changed.
Measure Distance, Radius, and Angle After clicking these icons, points on a model
can be picked to extract distance, radius, and angle, respectively. The measured value is
directly inputted into the text or spin box.
37
Estimate When selected, the application will automatically recommend an

appropriate value.
Flip Direction This button reverses the direction of a control.
Add This button adds an additional entity set.
All This button selects all entities which are available.
Auto Some text boxes have the value of Auto. When the value is set as Auto, the
application will estimate and use an appropriate value by analyzing the size of meshes
and poly-faces. If the
estimate button is selected, the estimated value can be seen.
A numerical value can be used instead of Auto. To reset to the Auto value, enter 0 as a
numerical value.
2.5.2.2.
Selection Convention
How to Select Entities

Look at the Cursor Icon
In the Model View, the mouse cursor has two modes. One is for the selection mode
, and the
other is for the viewing mode

. These can be switched by clicking the middle mouse button.
Entities can only be selected when the mouse curse is in the selection mode.
How to select entities

Dragging Selection Clicking the left mouse button then dragging it while holding it down
can be used to select a single entity or multiple entities.
Picking Selection A single entity can be chosen by a single left-clicking on it.
From Feature, Model Tree An entity or entities can be selected directly from the Feature Tree
or Model Tree.
Selecting Multiple Entities Multiple entities can be chosen by using the Shift key during
selection. To de-select entities, use the Ctrl key and select them.
38
Using Select Modes

Selecting a specific area to edit or remove poly-faces or poly-vertices can be difficult because a
mesh can be complicated and can consist of thousands or millions of vertices and faces. The Select
Mode tool bar located at the bottom left of the application enables the selection of poly-faces and
poly-vertices in a variety of ways. This tool bar can accelerate working speeds while managing
mesh or point cloud data.
The last icon on the toolbar is the

Visible Only selection mode that allows for only the selection
of visible poly-faces and poly-vertices in the model view. It is useful for avoiding the selection of
back-side poly-faces and poly-vertices.
Using the Select Filter

The application can create and manipulate various types of entities. For example, the application
can utilize meshes, regions, bodies, faces, edges, dimensions, etc. The Select Filter command
enables the selection of only desired entities and intelligently works within a command or a
chosen mode. For example, if the Defeature command is executed, only the Regions and PolyFaces filters will be offered in the Select Filter toolbar based on the selectable entities for the
current input condition.
2.5.2.3.
Mode Convention
Understanding Mode Convention

Accept and Cancel a Mode
When a mode is entered, two buttons will be shown in the right bottom corner of the Model view.
Confirm This button applies all changes made in the current mode, and then exits the
mode.
Cancel This button cancels all changes made in the current mode, and then exits the
mode.
Undo and Redo

39
Undo can be applied step-by-step in a mode but if the mode is exited, the undo history will be
reset.
2.5.2.4.
Docking Bar Convention
Docking Bars
Docking bars are located at the left, right, and bottom sides of the application. Docking bars are
used to hide frequently used windows to make more room for the model view or if a user desires
to simply make the look of the program cleaner and more organized. These docking bars can be
repositioned by dragging and dropping a docking bar into that particular space or into another
docking area. There are icons that are located on the right top side of a docking bar that performs a
variety of functions.
Auto Hide This button hides the docking bar to the side frame. When the cursor is
hovered over the name of a docking bar, it will automatically re-appear.
Close This button closes the docking bar. To show the docking bar again, click the right
mouse button on any tool bar area, and then check the desired docking bar.
To hide all current docking bars, press the F12 key, which will maximize the Model View. It is a
toggle function, so if the F12 key is pressed again, all hidden docking bars will appear.
40
2.5.3. Navigating Entities

Rotate, Zoom, and Pan
In the Model View, the mouse cursor has two modes. One is the selection mode and the other is
the viewing mode. These modes can be switched by clicking the middle mouse button. Entities
can only be selected when the mouse curse is in selection mode. The Rotate, Zoom, and Pan
functions will be explained below for each mode.
In Selection Mode
Rotate Right mouse button
Zoom Shift + Right mouse button (or scroll wheel)
Pan Ctrl + Right mouse button (or Left and Right mouse buttons together)
In Viewing Mode
Rotate Left mouse button (or Right mouse button)
Zoom Shift + Left or Right mouse button (or scroll wheel)
Pan Ctrl + Left or Right mouse button (or Left and Right mouse buttons together)
Note: The cursor operates similarly in viewing mode as it does in selection mode, except it
does not have the ability to select or make changes to any entities. The purpose of the viewing
mode is to simply view the model; and avoid making any selections, or unwanted alterations.
In the images below a model is shown being rotated with the cursor in selection mode.
1
In this image, the mouse is in selection

mode. Entities can be selected and
modified.
In this image, the right mouse button is

pressed and held down while the mouse
is moved; changing the cursor to the
rotate mode cursor.
41
In this image, the right mouse button has

been released, stopping the rotation of
the model, and returning the mouse
cursor back to its default selection state.
Using Zoom Functions

The Zoom functions are used to enlarge a display area in order to examine it more closely or to fit a
model to the screen. There are four types of zoom functions which can be accessed from the tool
bar, or by using the View > Zoom menu.
In the first image below, the model is open in the viewing area. In the second image the PIP zoom
function has been selected, as highlighted in red, allowing a portion of the model to be enlarged
for examination.
Below are the different Zoom commands and their functions:

Zoom Area Zooms to a selected area. (Shift + Z)
Zoom Previous Returns to a previous zoom state. (Shift + X)
Zoom Fit Zooms to fit all shown entities. (Ctrl + F)
Zoom PIP Shows a zoomed picture-in-picture window. (Ctrl + W)
Changing Viewpoints
Viewpoint functions are used to view the model from defined directions, based on the global
coordinate system. Different viewpoints can be selected from the tool bar or by using the View >
Viewpoint menu.
42
In the first image below, a model is shown in a random view orientation. Using the selected
viewpoint, highlighted in red in the second image, the model view is rotated and perfectly aligned
to the Front view, based on the global coordinate system.
Below are the different viewpoints and their functions:

Front Viewpoint Changes the viewpoint to the front view. (Alt + 1)
Back Viewpoint Changes the viewpoint to the back view. (Alt + 2)
Left Viewpoint Changes the viewpoint to the left view. (Alt + 3)
Right Viewpoint Changes the viewpoint to the right view. (Alt + 4)
Top Viewpoint Changes the viewpoint to the top view. (Alt + 5)
Bottom Viewpoint Changes the viewpoint to the bottom view. (Alt + 6)
Isometric Viewpoint Changes the viewpoint to a standard isometric view. (Alt + 7)
Rotate Viewpoint CCW Rotates the viewpoint counterclockwise by a quarter-turn (90
degrees).
Rotate Viewpoint CW Rotates the viewpoint clockwise by a quarter-turn (90 degrees).
Flip Viewpoint Flips the viewpoint horizontally along the vertical axis.
Showing and Hiding Entities

The application can handle many types of entities; but sometimes the need to filter out certain
entities is required. The Visibility toolbar can show and hide the most frequently used entities to
reduce the number of on-screen elements. Entities can quickly be shown or hidden by clicking
icons in the tool bar or by using the View > Visibility menu.
43
In the first image below, only surface bodies are enabling in the Visibility toolbar. In the second
picture, meshes have also been shown.
Below are the different visibility options and their functions:

Point Clouds Show or hide point clouds. (Ctrl + 1)
Meshes Show or hide meshes. (Ctrl + 2)
Surface Bodies Show or hide surface bodies. (Ctrl + 3)
Solid Bodies Show or hide solid bodies. (Ctrl + 4)
Curves Show or hide curves. (Ctrl + 5)
Sections Show or hide sections. (Ctrl + 6)
Ref. Points Show or hide Ref. points. (Ctrl + 7)
Ref. Vectors Show or hide Ref. vectors. (Ctrl + 8)
Ref. Planes Show or hide Ref. planes.
Ref. Circles Show or hide Ref. circles.
Ref. Cylinders Show or hide Ref. cylinders.
Ref. Coordinates Show or hide Ref. coordinates.
GD&Ts Show or hide GD&Ts. (Ctrl + 9)
Deviations Show or hide deviations. (Ctrl + 0)
44
2.6.
Basic Inspection Overview
There are several methods available to inspect scan data, but the basic inspection process is
comparing scan data to nominal data.
When an inspection process is defined in XOV, it will be parametric and have an inspection history
which enables easy modification of inspection features, parameters and options. A defined
parametric inspection process replaces macros, which are a series of commands. No additional
programming or knowledge is required to create an in-depth inspection process.
The following diagram shows a basic inspection process supported by XOV.
Preparation
Importing Data
Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data
Assigning Tolerances
Analysis
Analyzing Scan Data
Reporting
Generating and Exporting Reports
2.6.1. Importing Data

The first step in the inspection process is importing necessary data.
45
Inspection data consists of two different data types: Nominal Data and Scan Data. Nominal data
can be CAD or mesh data with ideal geometry and values. Scan Data can be point clouds or mesh
data scanned from a physical part. When importing CAD data as nominal data, Product
Manufacturing Information (PMI) can also be imported. PMI can be used as measurement targets
in the inspection process.
Related command:
File > Import Nominal Data
File > PMI Import Wizard
File > Import Scan Data
2.6.2. Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data

The second step in the inspection process is aligning scan data to nominal data.
The coordinate system for scan data may differ from the nominal coordinate system because the
scan data is scanned in real space based on the coordinate system of a 3D scanner. Before
inspecting nominal and scan data, alignment is needed to match the coordinate system between
them. During alignment, scan data is transformed to the nominal data by moving and rotating on
the global coordinate system.
Note: After alignment is complete, XOV will automatically find geometry pairs between
nominal and scan data.
46
Initial Alignment and Best Fitting

Auto Alignment
Auto Alignment matches the coordinate system of scan data to nominal data automatically. If only
a portion of a nominal model has been scanned, the Auto Align command can use feature
recognition to find the best position.
Auto Alignment is normally done as an initial alignment, and other alignments are performed
afterwards.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Auto
Best Fit
Best Fit Alignment reduces error across a part to find the best overall alignment. There are fitting
options to control the results as well as constraint options to control how scan data can move in
space.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Best Fit
Note: This command requires that nominal and scan data are roughly aligned. If they are not
roughly aligned, first use the Auto Align command.
Geometry Based Alignments

Note: These commands require that nominal and scan data are roughly aligned. If they are
not roughly aligned, first use the Auto Align command.
RPS
RPS, or Reference Point System, is an alignment method using geometry pair points from nominal
and scan data. These points can be weighed or constrained to simulate physical fixtures. Normally
circle or slot center points are used with sheet metal bodies.
Related command:
Insert > Align > RPS
Datum
47
Datums are primitive geometric entities such as planes, cylinders, cones, spheres, etc. Datum
Alignment matches datum geometries between nominal and scan data.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Datum
3-2-1
3-2-1 Alignment matches coordinate systems by constraining degrees of freeform. In the most
common case, 3 points are used to define a plane, 2 points to define a vector, and a last point to
define the origin of a coordinate system.
The 3-2-1 Align command also allows for set XY, YZ, and ZX planes, and several geometry types can
be used, not just planes, vectors, and points.
Related command:
Insert > Align > 3-2-1
Adaptive
Adaptive alignment applies N-point alignment to scan data by matching corresponding points to
the pre-planned points on nominal data.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Adaptive
Manual Alignments
Transform
Scan data can be manually transformed to nominal data by picking pair points or using a
manipulator. This method is used to closely move scan data to nominal data when the Auto
alignment method does not produce desired results. The transform command also supports the
use of a transform matrix if the user already knows specific transformation values.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Transform
2.6.3. Analyzing Scan Data

The third step in the inspection process is analyzing target scan data.
This step is the main inspection process for conducting an organized examination or formal
48
evaluation exercise. An Inspectors main focus is for examining the geometry or shapes of physical
parts and for comparing the features with original design intent of an ideal part. XOV offers
advanced inspection methods for an efficient and streamlined inspection process.
Inspecting Overall Deviation

Deviation inspection is one of measurement methods in an inspection process used to compare
the overall shape between nominal and scan data.
Since real-world deviation inspection cannot be performed, this method is a unique and powerful
inspection tool in scan data inspection. Overall errors such as distortion, abrasion and machining
accuracy of a part can be analyzed because scan data represents the overall shape of a real-world
object. Deviation can be displayed as a color map, or with whiskers or color points. These display
methods enable a user to quickly find error distributions and examine details.
Related commands:
Insert > Deviation > Whole Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Comparison Point
Inspecting with Curves

Deviation inspection with Curves is a measurement method in an inspection process that is used
to compare feature curves extracted from nominal and scan data.
Characteristic feature curves can be extracted from scan data and compared with nominal data.
Characteristic curves can be boundary curves, silhouette curves, virtual edges or manually
generated spline curves. The deviation results between nominal curves and scan curves will be
displayed as whiskers or color points.
49
Related commands:
Insert > Deviation > Boundary Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Curve Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Silhouette Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Virtual Edge Deviation
Inspecting Geometry
Deviation inspection with relative geometries is a measurement method in an inspection process
used to compare geometry features extracted from nominal and scan data.
Reference Geometry such as planes, cylinders, and circles can be extracted from nominal and scan
data and compared between them. This method is useful when comparing geometric elements
such as normal, size, and axis of important features.
Related command:
Insert > Deviation > Geometry Deviation
Inspecting with GD&T

Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) Inspection is a measurement method in an
inspection process. It is a precise mathematical language that can be used to describe the size,
form, orientation, and location of part features on nominal and scan data. GD&T is also a design
philosophy on how to design and dimension parts.
Additionally, GD&T is used to inspect features that will mate with features on other parts within an
50
assembly.
The following are the GD&Ts provided in XOV:

Geometric Dimension
Geometric Tolerance
Form Type
Flatness
Straightness
Circularity
Basic Dimension
Linear Dimension
Angular Dimension
Radial Dimension
Cylindricity
Additional Dimension
Bore Depth
Counterbore
Countersink
Thickness
Elliptical
Orientation Type
Parallelism
Perpendicular
Angularity
Run-out Type
Run-out
Total Run-out
Profile Type
Line profile
Surface profile
Location Type
Concentricity
Symmetry
Position
Related commands:
3D GD&T: Tools > GD&T Tools (works in the 3D GD&T mode)
2D GD&T: Tools > Section Tools (works in the Section mode)
51
Inspecting 2D Sections
Deviation inspection on sections is a measurement method in an inspection process used to
compare sectional shapes between nominal and scan data.
Since scan data represents the overall shape of a completely built object and exists in a digital
inspection environment, a section of a part can easily be inspected. A section plane can be
specified and used to cut scan and nominal data, allowing the deviation between them to be
compared. GD&T inspection can also be conducted on a cut section profile.
Related commands:
Insert > Section
Insert > Multiple Sections
Measurement of Scan Data

If the purpose of an inspection is not to compare scan data with nominal data and just simple
dimension measurements, such as area, volume, or sections of scan data, then the Measure tools
can be used. These functions are only for measurements and are not systematic.
Related commands:
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
52
Measure > Area

Measure > Volume
Measure > Mesh Deviations
Measure > Virtual Caliper
Analyzing Scan Data

To analyze the quality of just a scan data, the Plot command can be used. The thickness, curvature
and angle plot of a part can be analyzed and displayed with a color map.
Related command:
Tools > Plot
2.6.4. Generating and Exporting Reports

The final step in the inspection process is generating an inspection report.
Inspection results are most commonly shared in 2D reporting formats for easy communication.
XOV supports the creation of a variety of customizable reports with an integrated reporting tool.
Reports can be generated automatically from pre-made templates that can be customized. In
addition, both 3D HTML reports and trend analysis reports can be generated.
Generating a report
XOV has report generation tools in the Report tab that are similar to a MS-Word style environment
so anybody can easily generate and edit a report without learning new tools. When generating a
report, inspection features created during the inspection process are automatically added into the
report.
Entities in a report are parametrically connected to inspection features in XOV. If inspection
options are changed and different results are calculated, then these results will also be updated in
the report. The entire inspection process from importing to generating a report can be automated
53
using the Batch Process function.

After generating a report, it can be exported into a commonly used document format such as Excel,
PowerPoint, PDF and txt. The exported report can then be modified in other software and shared.
Related command:
Report > Generate Report
Generating a 3D HTML report

A html web report can be generated from inspection results. The html file can be shared without
purchasing or installing other software. A HTML report includes a 3D viewer to view 3D results for
Related command:
Report > Export 3D Html Report
54
Generating a Trend Analysis Report

A trend analysis report compares inspection results across multiple inspections. For example;
multiple parts of the same design can be analyzed to identify trends over time. It can also provide
consistency metrics of a process.
Related command:
Report > Trend Report
3. Understanding Scan Data

This guide is designed to help beginners understand the basic information about the
characteristics of scan data within the application.
Why 3D Scanning?
Types of 3D Scan Data
3.1.
Why 3D Scanning?
3D scanning is popular in various fields, and its usage is different for each purpose. There are
different kinds of scan data, and many details to understand. This guide will give basic information
on 3D scan data.
Rapidform XOV3 | Understanding Scan Data
55
Power of 3D Scan Data
Applications of 3D Scan Data
3.1.1. Power of 3D Scan Data

A 3D scanner is a device that captures a real object or an environment as 3D shape data. The
collected 3D information is converted into digital data commonly called 3D scan data or scan data.
3D scan data is a set of points. A point represents a location on a real object and contains the X, Y,
and Z coordinates. Numerous points can be used to describe a real object. For example, a digital
photo with a high resolution pixel count can represent the detailed shape of a real object.
3D scan data by resolution
A point set, also known as a point cloud, can be converted into an informative digital model with
software operations and is used in various industrial fields. 3D scan data has the following
strengths:
Can quickly create digital versions of real objects
Accurate
Captures complex freeform surfaces
Captures small to large scale objects (depending

on the 3D scanner used)
Obtains color information (depending on the 3D

scanner used)
Simulate environments and situations
Changes to different scales and measurements

easily
Easily extracts length, height, width, volume and

position data
Extracts sectional information
Compatible in a general PC environment

56
3.1.2. Applications of 3D Scan Data

Since 3D scan data can represent a real object with high accuracy, it is used for various purposes.
The use of scan data is expanding to custom markets as scan technology becomes easier to use
and more intuitive. Currently, 3D scan data is used primarily for the following purposes:
3D Printing, Rapid Prototyping (RP)

The technology of 3D Printing or Rapid Prototyping (RP) can create a quick physical mockup of
digital 3D data (generally .stl data is used) by laying down successive layers of material using
sectional information of a model. Using RP, product designers can make a mockup faster than with
other conventional manufacturing technologies, such as NC machining. A mockup can be used to
analyze a part, check collisions with other parts, decide ergonomic designs, and reduce design
iterations; amongst other uses.
Reverse Design
The process of making CAD data from a real object is called reverse designing. A real-world model
is not ideal to use in designing a CAD environment because it can be deformed by heat, stress and
abrasion, which would cause the 3D scan data of that model to also include those deformities.
Depending on the purpose, the decision to make a CAD file with a deformed shape or redesigning
it by extracting design intent is important to consider.
Measurement and Inspection

3D scan data is increasingly used for metrology or inspection. The more accurate points are that
are used to measure a feature, the more accurate an inspection will be. The scan data of a
manufactured part can be aligned with its CAD model (nominal data). It can then be compared to
check for differences and whether or not they pass or fail within set tolerances.
Medical
3D scan data is used in the medical field to make customized teeth, organs, and other vital parts.
For example, a 3D scanner can scan a patient's dental features and generate a digital model in
order to create a treatment and to simulate tooth movement. 3D scanners are changing traditional
dental treatment methods used to generate dental impressions and handmade artificial teeth.
57
Cultural Heritage
The cultural heritage domain also uses cutting-edge 3D scanning technology. 3D scanners can
generate accurate 3D files which can be used to restore historic buildings and objects. 3D scan
data is also used to simulate or visualize historic places.
Entertainment
The entertainment and video game industry also uses 3D scanners to reduce modeling time and
make more realistic 3D graphics. Scanning a real object or a human is much faster than modeling
them in 3D graphics software by hand.
Survey
Traditionally, the construction and civil engineering fields relied heavily on surveying, but it took
too much time and the workers would be exposed to the environment being surveyed. Even using
these methods there was often a lack of information, which caused delays in schedules and
generated additional costs. 3D scan technology is now used in these types of projects by removing
uncertainty, finishing a project quickly, and reducing costs.
3.2.
Types of 3D Scan Data
3D scan data can be a point cloud or a mesh. A point cloud is a raw file type from a scanner but
most scanning software can convert it to mesh data. However, both data types can be used to
reach a final goal. This guide will give you detail information regarding a point cloud and mesh.
Understanding Point Clouds
Understanding Mesh
Mesh vs. Point Cloud
3.2.1. Understanding Point Clouds

A point cloud is a representative data type which is composed of a group of vertices in a threedimensional coordinate system. Each vertex is defined by the X, Y, and Z coordinates; and
58
corresponds to one position on the surface of an object. While point clouds can be directly
visualized on a PC, they are not generally directly usable in most 3D applications.
Point Cloud by Data Type

The file type that a scanner creates will differ based on the type of scanner used. The following are
the different classifications for the internal structures of point clouds.
Random-type point cloud
This type of point cloud contains only random position
information (no relationship between points), and basic
information such as color and normal can be added.
Generally, neutral data (ascii format) or CMM data belong
to this group type.
Grid-type point cloud

As measured points are extracted from a scanner's grid
pattern, points will also be extracted from the corners of
the grid. Points are marked with an X-Y index and each
index has a depth to the scanning direction. This type of
scan data can be a 2.5D image (image + distance on each
pixel) using the projection direction and the scanning
position. Generally, structured light and long range
scanner produce this type of point cloud. A grid type
point cloud can easily be converted into a mesh by
projecting onto a planar, cylindrical, or spherical
coordinate used with the scanner.
59
Line-type point cloud

Generally, an arm-type device with a laser scanner or a
hand held scanner produces a line type point cloud. The
device emits dozens of lines of lasers every second and
point clouds are gathered from the scanning trace on the
surface of an object. The point density will be different
depending on the line direction and the scanning speed,
therefore the post processing required to generate a
mesh from the point cloud can be more difficult.
Point Cloud with Normal

The normal is a perpendicular vector to a plane. In the case of a rounded surface, the normal will
be a perpendicular vector to a tangential plane on a position of the rounded surface.
If a point cloud has normal information, it can be very helpful for visualizing a model. Normal
information is used for shading a model by analyzing the incidence angles and reflection angles of
light on a point. Normal information is also used to determine the front or back of a surface. This is
very important to accurately find and calculate face pairs between scan data and CAD data,
especially in the inspection software. The following image shows a shaded point cloud in the
software.
Display of Point Cloud with Normal Information
If a point cloud does not include normal information, the scan data will only be a group of points
displayed in a single color. Recognizing features and working with such scan data can be difficult
60
and tedious. The following image shows a point cloud without normal information.
Display of Point Cloud without Normal

Information
A point cloud without normal information also can be visualized by the depth shading method,
but the effect is not as effective as a point cloud with normal information. The closer points are
displayed in black and the points farther away are display in gray in relation from the viewing
direction. This method cannot determine the front or back of a surface but is still more helpful for
feature recognition than displaying with no shading at all. The following image shows the depth
shading method on a point cloud which does not have normal information.
Display of Point Cloud without Normal

Information - Depth Shading
Point Cloud with Textures

A point cloud has not only three-dimensional coordinates, but also R, G, and B color information
for each point. Rapidform uses this color information as a texture. A point cloud with color
information can be used to generate realistic visuals and help users to recognize complex features.
A textured point cloud is very efficient and easy to use for a continuous work flow.
61
Point Cloud with Textures
Point Cloud without Textures
3.2.2. Understanding Mesh

A mesh is polyhedron-based 3D digital data which consists of points, edges, and faces (usually
triangles). The mesh is frequently used in CAD/CAM/CAE and 3D computer graphics programs. A
3D scanning application generally uses a mesh which is created from a scanned point cloud.
Modern graphic cards are not optimized for rendering point clouds but have advanced technology
to display meshes. Therefore meshes are often more advantageous in regards to a smooth
visualization of complex surfaces and structures of an object. Triangulation, or meshing, is a
process to connect 3 points and construct a surface. When connecting points, the edge length can
be an important parameter to make a correct object shape.
62
What is a Perfect Mesh?

Erroneous Data
A mesh represents a surface by successively connected triangles. However, erroneous triangles
such as non-manifold, redundant, crossing, and reversed triangles cannot make a complete
mesh. These errors should be removed because they will affect the downstream workflow, i.e. RP,
NC machining, FEM (finite element method), and fitting surfacing for reverse design. The
following examples show errors on a mesh.
Non-manifold Triangle A single edge shared by three or more triangles
Redundant Triangle Ignoring boundaries, a point must have an identical number of

triangles and connecting edges
Crossing Triangle Edges sharing a poly-vertex intersect with one another
Reversed Triangle Opposite normal direction to neighboring triangles
Non-manifold Triangle
Redundant Triangle
Crossing Triangle
Reversed Triangle
Proper Shape of Triangle

The shape of a triangle is important for quality results. The aspect ratio, or the width to height on
a single triangle, should not be large. A triangle with a high aspect ratio will appear as a very thin
and sharp triangle, and can produce errors when using a model for RP, NC machining, FEM and
fitting surfacing. The ideal shape for a triangle is an equilateral triangle.
63
Noise on Mesh
Scan data may have noise produced by a scanner. For example when a very shiny object is
scanned, the reflection generates noise. The noisy data generates a rough surface on the mesh.
Noise can be reduced by the smoothing algorithm in the software which removes spiky points
by averaging using surrounding points. However, strong smoothness may removes sharp edges
and change feature accuracy.
Removing noise by smoothing
64
Mesh and Resolution

A high resolution mesh generates a large file size and using it in software can be difficult.
Conversely, a low resolution mesh is easy to use in software but cannot adequately represent the
feature information of an object. An ideal mesh should sufficiently express features with the
minimum amount of triangles possible within a desired tolerance. A high curvature area will
usually have a dense triangles structure and a low curvature area will usually have a sparse
triangle structure. Noise and defects should also be removed from the mesh.
Resolution is too low, making the model lack information and causing uniformity issues.
Mesh and Texture

As a point cloud can include texture information, a mesh can also include texture information. In
the following image, the left example shows a mesh without texture and the right example shows
a mesh with texture. The image illustrates how a mesh with color information can generate realistic
visuals.
Mesh only and colored mesh
There are two methods to express colors on a mesh. The first is to use an image file (jpg, bmp, etc)
since each point has mapping information on a bit map, allowing color to be smoothly filled
between points. The second method is using the R, G and B color values of points or triangles. In
the case of a dense mesh, it can be sufficient for visualization, but for sparse areas color
information will be missing and the displayed output will not look natural. If a mesh has texture
65
information, it can be converted from an image to a point color, and vice versa.
What Can Generate a Mesh?

A mesh can be converted from scan data by the triangulation process that is commonly used in
CAD, CAM, CAE and computer graphics. The following software can generate and modify a mesh.
Scan bundle software
Special scan data software, such as Rapidform XOR
CAD, CAM, CAE software (.stl format file)
3D computer graphics software
3.2.3. Mesh vs. Point Cloud

Mesh
Scan data is basically a collection of 3D points (a point cloud). It can be converted into a mesh by
connecting adjacent points with triangles, which are the simplest unit of a face. Generally mesh
has the following advantages over using a point cloud:
Can recognize features intuitively
Can distinguish front and back faces
Can measure the curvature of a surface
Can apply environment mapping
Can measure volume
Can easily extract neighboring point and triangle information
Can accurately calculate alignment between scan data
Can be directly used in RP, FEM, and NC machining
Can be used for reverse design
Can be used for metrology or inspection
Can be used for visualization and documentation
Can be used for animation
66
Mesh for a complex model
Point Clouds
A point cloud can contain additional normal or color information for each point, or the information
can be omitted. Constructing a shape from a lower resolution point cloud may be difficult due to
the lack of data, however using a high resolution point cloud can actually aide in the visualization
of an object in comparison to using a mesh. Long range scan data is usually saved in a very large
file and triangulation can be very difficult. The processing time may be lengthy, and the results can
be difficult to predict. If the purpose of using long range scan data is for CAD modeling, it is more
efficient to do parametric CAD modeling with a point cloud instead of a mesh or partially
converted point cloud. The benefits of using point clouds are as follows:
Can handle larger data files
Can do simple measuring
Can be used for reverse design
Can be used for surveying
Can be used for metrology or inspection
Can be used for visualization and documentation
Visualization of Point Cloud
67
4. Understanding Inspection
This guide is designed to help beginners understand the basic information about the
characteristics of scan data when deal with in the application.
Inspection Scenario
Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection Process
4.1.
Inspection Scenario
XOV offers various inspection scenarios for efficient and streamlined inspection process. The
following scenarios are supported in XOV.
Scenario I: Nominal vs. Scan Data Inspection

This scenario compares nominal data to scan data and is a basic inspection workflow. All options
and settings in the inspection features such as alignment tools, inspection tools and report tools
have been saved parametrically, and they have a history in the inspection feature tree. A user can
move back to a desired point to modify inspection features at any time.
1. Import nominal and scan data.

2. Align scan data to nominal data.
3. Inspect the data files based on inspection needs.
4. Generate a report from inspection results.
Rapidform XOV3 | Understanding Inspection
68
Scenario II: Repeating Inspection with Multiple Parts

This scenario nominal compares nominal data to multiple scan data files. The scan data has been
replaced after the first scenario, Scenario I.

4. Generate a report from the inspection results.
5. Import another scan data file. Steps 2-4 will automatically be calculated with the new scan data
file.
Scenario III: Scan Data vs. Scan Data Inspection

This scenario defines scan data as nominal data and compares it with another scan data file. If CAD
data does not exist or if a master scan data need to be set as the nominal data, this scenario can be
used. This scenario is similar to Scenario I, but the difference is that the scan data will be imported
as nominal data. After importing scan data as nominal data, a region segmentation step is added
to the process. Regions enable the selection of geometries on scan data like geometries on CAD
data.
69
1. Import scan data as nominal data.

2. The application will ask to perform region segmentation.
3. Import target scan data.
Scenario IV: Scan Data Only Inspection

Scan data can be inspected without nominal data. Dimension and geometries can be measured on
scan data features without comparing nominal data.
1. Import scan data.

2. Measure features. If necessary, generate ref. geometries then inspect with GD&T. (The GD&T
value is shown on the property panel of the created ref. geometry)
Scenario V: Inspection planning with only nominal data

This scenario generates an inspection plan with only nominal data. Scan data will be imported at a
later time. The basic process is the same as Scenario I, but defines inspection features without scan
data.
70
1. Import nominal data.

2. Run necessary align commands and set parameters.
3. Run necessary inspection commands and set parameters.
4. Generate a report. This report will not include inspection result values, but is used to set empty
tables, images to be captured, and variable texts.
5. Save the inspection document.
When importing scan data, it can be automatically analyzed based on the pre-planned inspection
process and the inspection results will be automatically populated into the report.
4.2.
Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection
Process
3D scan-based inspection is technology that utilizes 3D scanning technologies to virtually analyze
and digitize the geometric features and shapes of a real object. Using this technology, the real
world objects functionalities can be verified with a CAD design model or another scanned object.
Preparing
Working with Large Scan Data
Verifying Geometric Features
Alignments
Analyzing
Checking Deviations
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing(GD&T)
Simple Measuring
Reporting
Visualizing Results by Color Map
Visualizing Results by Tagging
Adjusting Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Results
Generating Reports
Inspection using Probe Measurement Device
71
4.2.1. Preparing
This is a first step in the 3D scan-based inspection process.
Alignments
4.2.1.1.
The biggest advantage of using XOV is that it can handle large numbers of scan data that cannot
be handled by other software.
32-bit vs. 64-bit

The terms 32-bit and 64-bit refer to the way a computer's processor, or CPU, handles information.
64-bit computers handle large amounts of random access memory (RAM) more effectively than a
32-bit system. The maximum RAM limitation in Windows 7 Ultimate is 192GB and the maximum
amount of memory available in a 32-bit computer is 4GB. Even if more RAM is present, it will not be
used. This amount of RAM can contain around 20 million polygons of scan data and can be equal
to roughly one hi-resolution scan file. To work with more data, changing to a 64-bit computing
environment is recommended.
Suppress / Unsuppress
Suppressing scan data is when all of the data from a point cloud file is saved to a hard disk
temporarily. Unsuppressing a point cloud file loads all the data back to physical memory. The
suppress / unsuppress mechanism manages data and memory by swapping data dynamically inbetween the physical memory and the hard disk. This enables large numbers of data sets to be
dealt with efficiently. When large numbers of point clouds are imported into the application, they
are automatically stored in the cache folder in smaller pieces. They are then efficiently loaded into
the application within the capability of the available physical memory when an operation is
performed. The swapping time for the suppress / unsuppress functionality is very short, so
calculation overhead is negligible. Setting the virtual memory to a physically separated hard disk
rather than the hard disk containing the operating system is ideal.
72
Some scan editing commands in the default mode are available when scan data is in a suppress
state. When entering the Mesh mode (in XOR) or Scan mode (in XOV) with suppressed scan data, a
message will be displayed asking if the scan data needs to be unsuppressed before entering the
mode. The available commands in a suppressed state are in the default mode such as Scan Tools or
Add-ins.
Available commands in a suppressed state in XOR
The following commands under Tools > Scan Tools are available and a suppressed mesh must not
have child entities (features) to apply them.
Mesh Buildup Wizard
Align Between Scan Data
Merge
Combine
Decimate Meshes
Transform Scan Data
Boolean
Average Meshes
Available commands in a suppressed state in XOV

The following commands under Add-ins are available.
Global Register
Register Target
2D Triangulate
3D Triangulate
Triangulate/Merge Large Data
Surface Merge
Volume Merge
Combine
Find Scan Direction
Generate Vertex Normal
Reverse Normal
Large Data Mode

When the Large Data Mode option is used on a large data set when applying a specific operation
that requires a lot of memory such as Merge, Decimate, 3D Triangulate (XOV add-in) and Volume
Merge (XOV add-in), the operation will be performed even if the model size exceeds the
computers memory limit. Normally when more than 20 million polygons, or 10 million points, are
used in a PC with 2GB of memory, it is recommended to use the Large Data Mode option.
73
Sampling
When reading a single point model with 40 million points, 2 GB of memory is necessary. Therefore,
to import large data sets that is beyond the memory limit of a PC, the data needs to be sampled.
When reading data using the Import command, one of the following sampling ratios can be used:
1/1, 1/4, 1/9, 1/16, 1/25, 1/36, 1/49, 1/64. If an imported file has a format specific to one scanner
and it is a grid type, sampling will skip several points in the X and Y directions; and if it is a line type,
sampling will simply skip points based on the chosen sampling ratio. When an imported file is in a
general format, sampling will be performed randomly according to the selected sampling ratio.
Any command with an option for Sampling Ratio, can dynamically sample scan data. Calculating
all data points in scan data can take a long time and has little effect on the final results, so
sampling data can be much more effective. Which sampling ratio that is chosen can depend on the
data itself, and the shape of the part. Using the adaptive sampling ratio will automatically try to
find the correct sampling value, which can save time and effort.
Displaying
When working with large data sets, it is more efficient to use the smallest size of data possible to
display a rendered model in the viewing window.
In the Display tab, the "Dynamic Display Ratio" and "Static Display Ratio" settings can be controlled.
Setting these values lower will cause the display to refresh faster. When the Dynamic Draw option
in the Display tab is off, the Dynamic Display Ratio cannot be controlled and the application will
draw all entities when a model is being moving by a mouse. If the value is set to "Auto", the
application will automatically set an adaptable display ratio in relation to the size of the model and
the number of points. Sometimes, rotating, panning, and zooming with a very large model can
become very slow and unresponsive. If this occurs, reduce the amount of data being displayed.
4.2.1.2.
Verifying Geometric Features is a basic process for preparing 3D scan data based inspection.
Geometric features consist of various geometric types such as Points, Vectors, Planes, Slots,
Rectangles, Polygons, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, and Tori. They are used for selecting, measuring,
transforming, aligning, sectioning, and dimensioning in 3D scan data based inspection.
74
Pairing Geometries between Nominal Data and 3D Scan Data

3D scan data based inspection in Rapidform XOV starts by verifying the geometric features of
nominal data and 3D scan data and creating a geometry pair set between them. After importing
nominal data, the geometric features are automatically detected from faces or regions of the
nominal data that represent feature shapes then geometric types are determined. Geometric
features verified from nominal data in this phase can be used for not only analyzing nominal
feature shapes directly, but also for finding scan pair geometries after importing 3D scan data and
aligning them. Geometric features are used to find scan points within a user-defined searching
zone expanded from the geometric features of nominal data along its normal direction. The
detected scan points are qualified by multiple criteria such as projection angles between the
normal direction of nominal faces, distribution rates, and densities. Finally, scan pair geometries
are created by fitting from the qualified scan points and connected to related normal geometric
features as pair sets.
Geometric features extracted from faces or regions of nominal data are displayed by continuous
lines. Scan pair geometries are fitted from qualified scan pair points of 3D scan data that are
displayed by dotted lines on the 3D scan data.
75
Geometry pair relationships are used for aligning 3D scan data to nominal data based on datum
features or for analyzing scan feature shapes based on nominal feature shapes.
Using Geometry Pairs for Aligning

Geometry pairs are useful for aligning 3D scan data to nominal data by using advanced alignment
methods such as RPS (Reference Point System), Datums, and 3-2-1 alignments. Geometric features
selected on nominal data as target datums can be used to find scan pair geometries by utilizing a
variety of criteria on each geometry position. They can also be used to construct coordinates on
each data file. Constructed coordinates are related as a geometry pair set and an alignment is
performed to minimize them in 3D space.
Using Geometry Pairs for Dimensioning

Geometry pairs are useful for measuring dimensions of features on 3D scan data based on feature
information of nominal data as well as evaluating Pass/Fail dimension results. Geometric features
selected on nominal data can be used to find scan pair geometries by utilizing a variety of criteria
on each geometry position. Dimensions are matched and measured between the geometries on
each data set and the measured dimensions are used to Pass or Fail the data sets.
76
4.2.1.3.
Alignment
Alignment is a process for reorienting 3D scan data to coordinates of nominal data in 3D space.
This is a required process for comparing 3D scan data and nominal data. Various alignment
methods such as Auto & Best-Fit, RPS, Datum, and 3-2-1 can be used independently or mixed
with other methods. Note that the RPS, Datum, and 3-2-1 alignments require that 3D scan data is
positioned with the coordinates of the nominal data so that the geometric features defined on the
nominal data can be matched to scan pair geometries within a user-defined searching zone.
An alignment process can be pre-defined without 3D scan data. Once the alignment process is
pre-defined, it will be performed whenever 3D scan data is imported. While the inspection is being
maintained, the alignment results will be automatically updated. They can also be calculated using
another 3D scan data file.
Various Alignment Methods

77
Various alignment methods are available in the application in order to align scan data to nominal
data.
Auto Alignment
This alignment method brings 3D scan data to nominal data by using a rough best-fit alignment
algorithm that approximately matches the coordinates of the target data.
This method is useful for:
Quickly aligning 3D scan data to nominal data by using geometric shape information
Finding scan pair geometries from geometric features of nominal data
Aligning 3D scan data that has no particular feature information to nominal data
The results of this alignment can be used as preparation for using advanced alignments such as
RPS (Reference Point System), Datum, or 3-2-1.
Related command:
Best Fit Alignment

This alignment method aligns 3D scan data to nominal data by using a best-fit alignment
algorithm that matches the coordinates of the target data to the deviation between geometric
shapes that is minimized within an allowable tolerance. This method assumes that the 3D scan
data is roughly positioned in the coordinates of the nominal data.
78
Accurately aligning 3D scan data to nominal data by using geometric shape information
Finding scan pair geometries from geometric features of nominal data
Aligning 3D scan data that has no particular feature information to nominal data
The results of this alignment can be used for analyzing the deviation between 3D scan data and
nominal data and it also used as a basic preparation for using advanced alignments such as RPS
(Reference Point System), Datum, 3-2-1 alignments.
Related command:
RPS Alignment
This alignment method is called "Reference Point System" or "Reference Positioning System" and
matches 3D scan data to nominal data by aligning a set of reference position points with
constraints. Geometric features that have points with properties can be used for defining RPS
target pairs in this alignment method. This method assumes that 3D scan data is positioned within
the coordinates of the nominal data so that the pair geometries can be extracted from the 3D scan
data based on the geometric features of nominal data.
Accurately aligning 3D scan data to nominal data based on their parts
Aligning 3D scan data that has particular feature information (e.g. fixing positions,
coordinate criteria, constraints and etc.) to nominal data
nominal data and analyzing feature shapes and the relationships between geometric features by
measuring GD&T.
Related command:
79
Datum Alignment
This alignment method matches 3D scan data to nominal data using a prioritized list of datums. N
(N=1,2, or 3) pairs of planes, vectors and points, or a pair of coordinates can be used for defining
target datum pairs. This method assumes that 3D scan data is positioned in the coordinates of the
nominal data so that the pair geometries can be extracted from the 3D scan data based on the
geometric features of the nominal data.
This method is useful for;
Aligning 3D scan data that has particular feature information (e.g. information for fixture,
coordinate criteria, and etc.) to nominal data
nominal data, and to analyze feature shapes and the relationship between geometric features by
measuring GD&T.
Related command:
3-2-1 Alignment
This alignment method matches 3D scan data to nominal data by constraining the 6 degrees of
freedom with 3 datum sets (plane, vector, and origin point) in 3D space.
Note: A basic rule of 3-2-1 alignment is defined by the minimum number of contact points
necessary to set coordinates for reorientation of a part. For example, the primary datum
requires three points, the secondary datum two points, and the third datum one point.
A Ref.Plane or a planar geometric feature that has normal direction and location information can
be a primary datum and a Ref.Vector or a cylindrical geometric feature that has axis and direction
information can be a secondary datum. A Ref.Point or circular geometric feature that has position
information can be a third datum. This alignment method assumes that 3D scan data is positioned
80
within the coordinates of the nominal data so that pair geometries can be extracted from the 3D
scan data based on the geometric features of the nominal data.
Aligning 3D scan data that has particular feature information (e.g. information for fixture,
coordinate criteria, and etc.) to nominal data
The results of this alignment can be used to analyze the deviation between 3D scan data and
nominal data as well as analyzing feature shapes and the relationship between geometric features
by measuring GD&T.
Related command:
Adaptive Alignment
This alignment method is only for probe point data. It allows N-point alignment by matching
corresponding probe points to the pre-planned points on nominal data.
Quickly aligning a hardware coordinate system to a nominal coordinate system while

controlling portable measurement devices in LiveInspect
Aligning a hardware coordinate system to a nominal data coordinate system that has no
particular features to be used for alignment
81
nominal data and for analyzing feature shapes and the relationship between geometric features by
measuring GD&T.
Related command:
4.2.2. Analyzing
Checking Deviations
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing(GD&T)
Simple Measuring
4.2.2.1.
Checking Deviations
Deviation is a process for comparing 3D scan data to nominal data within a user-defined
maximum deviation value, and is based on a variety of criteria, such as size, thickness, the shape of
a boundary or curve, or the geometric features of a model. The comparison is performed by
finding scan points within the maximum deviation and measuring the distances projected from
scan points onto a nominal entity along a user-defined direction. The normal direction of a
nominal entity is used as a projection direction by default. To measure deviations, 3D scan data
should be aligned to nominal data.
Various Comparison Methods

Various comparison methods such as Whole Deviation, Comparison Point, Section Deviation,
Boundary Deviation, Curve Deviation, Silhouette Deviation, Virtual Edge Deviation, and
Geometry Deviation can be used to analyze entities independently or used in conjunction with
other methods.
Whole Deviation
Compares the deviation between 3D scan data and nominal data for all regions.
82
Related command:
Comparison Point
Compares deviations at specific positions.
Related command:
Section Deviation
Compares the section deviation between 3D scan data and nominal data in a 2D section view.
83
Related command:
Insert > Section
Boundary Deviation
Compares the deviation between boundaries extracted from 3D scan data and nominal data.
Related command:
Curve Deviation
Compares the deviation between curves extracted from 3D scan data and nominal data.
Related command:
84
Silhouette Deviation
Compares the deviation between outer boundaries extracted from 3D scan data and nominal data
that is projected to a specific position.
Related command:
Virtual Edge Deviation

Compares the deviation between virtual curves extracted from round corner areas of 3D scan data
and nominal data.
Related command:
Geometry Deviation
Compares the deviation between geometries extracted from 3D scan data and nominal data.
85
Related command:
Evaluating Comparison Results

After comparing 3D scan data to nominal data, the Pass and Fail deviation results that are
calculated are represented by a color map on the nominal entity. The comparison results can be
intuitively analyzed globally by the deviation color map or locally analyzed by tagging annotations
at specific positions. The "+" deviation results shows regions of the 3D scan data or entities
extracted from the 3D scan data that have a larger size than that of the nominal data. The "-"
deviation results shows regions of the 3D scan data or entities extracted from the 3D scan data that
have a smaller size than that of the nominal data.
Replacing Target 3D Scan Data

Once 3D scan data has been compared to nominal data, the deviations are registered into the
Feature Tree as an inspection feature. The registered deviation features are managed by a
Systematic Inspection Process. If a 3D scan data file is replaced, the deviation results will be
automatically updated. The Deviation process can be pre-defined without any 3D scan data and
inserted into a report. When a 3D scan data file is imported, all the pre-defined inspection features
as well as reports will be automatically updated.
86
87
4.2.2.2.
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing
(GD&T)
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) is a process for analyzing the size, form,
orientation, and location of features in 2D or 3D space and for evaluating the Pass or Fail results of
features within a user-defined tolerance. The size of features can be analyzed by using geometric
dimensions such as Linear Dimensions, Angular Dimensions, or Radial Dimensions. The form,
orientation, and location of features can be analyzed by using geometric tolerances such as
Flatness, Circularity, Cylindricity, and Parallelism.
Geometric Dimension
Basic Dimension
Linear Dimension
Angular Dimension
Radial Dimension
Bore Depth
Counterbore
Countersink
Thickness
Elliptical
Geometric Tolerance
Form Type
Flatness
Straightness
Circularity
Cylindricity
Orientation Type
Parallelism
Perpendicular
Angularity
Run-out Type
Run-out
Total Run-out
Profile Type
Line profile
Surface profile
Location Type
Concentricity
Symmetry
Position
GD&T Annotation
GD&T annotations consist of a combination of Dimensions and Geometric Tolerance Feature
Control Frames. The Dimension Feature Control Frame includes a dimension and tolerance limits.
88
The GD&T Feature Control Frame builds up a series of GD&T symbols, tolerances, material
conditions and multi-datums.
The following figure shows a GD&T Feature Control Frame used in Rapidform XOV containing
position tolerance with dimension. If a dimension is already defined on a feature, all the Geometric
Tolerance (GTol) objects except Flatness and Straightness can be attached to the dimension.
< Annotation with GD&T results >

The following figure represents the standard Geometric Tolerance Feature Control Frame.
Pass/Fail inspection
GD&T can be judged for pass and fail by using nominal and measured values within a user-defined
tolerance. When a measured value is in between the Nominal Value + High Tolerance and the
Nominal Value + Low Tolerance, it will pass. When scan pair geometry of a Geometric Tolerance
object is within the limits of a corresponding tolerance, it will pass.
The GD&T Feature Control Frame is displayed using the Green, Yellow, and Red default colors that
indicate if a current measurement is within a given tolerance, in a warning zone, or out of tolerance.
The color properties can be changed in the Pass/Warning/Fail section of the Display tab at File >
Preferences, and the Warning Ratio (%) can be changed in the Properties of the Nominal Data. For
more information, see File > Preferences. In the Table View, either Pass or Fail will be displayed as
a Result value for each GD&T.
89
Visualization of GD&T objects

In the project tree, a popup menu is used to display properties as well as showing or hiding
annotations of a GD&T entity. It can be controlled in the Annotation Display Control.
The following figure illustrates GD&T objects with respect to Position and Cylindricity.
Tabular View of GD&T

When GD&T objects are computed, a table in the Tabular View will be automatically generated and
displayed.
4.2.2.3.
Simple Measuring
Measuring is a process for analyzing distances, angles, and radii between features in 3D scan data.
Measuring can be performed with 3D scan data without nominal data. If geometries are needed
during measuring, those geometries can be extracted from the 3D scan data directly by fitting
scan points. Once geometries have been extracted from 3D scan data, the geometries can be
reused for other measurements during the inspection.
90
Various measurements such as Distance, Angle, Radius, Section, Area, Volume, Mesh
Deviations, and Virtual Caliper can be used to measure features independently, or used in
conjunction with other measurements.
Distance
Distance measures a distance between features in 3D scan data. Various methods can be used
when measuring distance, such as Point to Point, Vector to Point, Vector to Vector, Plane to
Point, Plane to Vector, and Plane to Plane. Once a distance between features is measured, the
result is registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan data in
the Model View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results, the resulting
annotation and features that have been used for measuring are highlighted. This measurement is
useful for analyzing the relationship between the features of 3D scan data by distances.
Related command:
Measure > Distance
Angle
Angle measures an angle between angled features in 3D scan data. Various methods can be used
when measuring an angle, such as Vector to 2 Points, Plane to Vector, Between 3 Points,
Between 2 Vectors, and Between 2 Planes. Once an angle between features is measured, the
result will be registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan data
in the Model View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results, the resulting
annotation and features that have been used for measuring are highlighted. This measurement is
useful for analyzing the relationship between features of 3D scan data by angles.
91
Related command:
Measure > Angle
Radius
Radius measures the radius of a circular feature in 3D scan data. Various methods can be used
when measuring a radius, such as From Features and 3 Points. Once the radius of a feature is
measured, the result will be registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on
the 3D scan data in the Model View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results,
the resulting annotation and features that have been used for measuring are highlighted. This
measurement is useful for analyzing the relationship between features of 3D scan data by radii.
Related command:
Measure > Radius
Section
Section creates sections from 3D scan data and measures the distances between them. Sections
can be created by using various sectioning methods such as Draw Line On Screen, Select Plane,
N-Division Between Planes, N-Division Along Curve, and Radial. This measurement is useful for
analyzing a sectional difference between 3D scan data and nominal data after alignment. Note
that both creating sections and measuring distance on the sections can be performed in the
92
command.
Related command:
Measure > Section
Area
Area measures an area selected by poly-faces on a mesh. This measurement is available when
target entities are either a mesh or poly-faces. Once the area of a mesh or poly-faces is measured,
the result will be registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan
data in the Model View. This measurement is useful for analyzing an area of 3D scan data or
particular regions on 3D scan data and for evaluating deformations on 3D scan data.
Related command:
Measure > Area
Volume
Volume measures the volume of a mesh or selected poly-faces on a mesh. Using advanced
calculation methods such as Projected Volume and Enclosed Volume, volume can be calculated
whether target entities are open or not. This measurement is available when target entities are
meshes or poly-faces. Once the volume of a mesh or poly-faces is measured, the result is registered
into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan data in the Model View. This
93
measurement is useful for analyzing the volume of 3D scan data or particular regions on 3D scan
data and evaluating deformations.
Related command:
Measure > Volume
Mesh Deviations
Mesh Deviations measures the overall deviation of 3D scan data within a user-defined maximum
deviation value. This measurement is useful for analyzing regional differences between 3D scan
data and nominal data after alignment. Note that deviations can be measured in the command.
Related command:
Virtual Caliper
Virtual Caliper measures the distance between features in 3D scan data by virtually using a caliper.
Various methods can be used while measuring distances with a virtual caliper such as Outside
Caliper, Inside Caliper, and Depth Caliper. After picking a point on a poly-face of 3D scan data,
candidates that can be measured along a user-defined measuring direction will be displayed and a
distance will be measured with a second picked position. Once the distance between features is
measured, the result will be registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on
94
the 3D scan data in the Model View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results,
the annotation and features that have been used for measuring will be highlighted. This
measurement is useful for analyzing the relationship between features of 3D scan data by distance.
Related command:
4.2.3. Reporting
Visualizing Results with a Color Map
Adjusting Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Results
Generating Reports
4.2.3.1.
Visualizing Results with a Color Map
A color map is a map that shows the deviations of an entire shape using colors. It is a good way to
check deviations when viewing an entire model.
95
Several colors are used to express deviations; Each color is related to a value in the color bar.
Display type
Deviation in a whole shape can be displayed using one of three different methods:
Color map
Color point
Whisker
Color Map
A painted target is nominal data, also known as tessellated mesh data, when a color map is made.
Scan points cannot match exactly with points on tessellated mesh, so the deviation value of a
point on a tessellated mesh uses an interpolated value from projected scan points around the
generated nominal data point.
A color map can be useful for checking approximate deviation. When inspection results are
analyzed, a color map will be used to visualize deviation across an entire model.
96
Color Point
Expresses deviation as colored points. Colored points appear to be similar to a color map, however,
the target is a point of scan data and not nominal data.
The following figure shows the difference between a color map and color points. Color is displayed
on nominal data in the left figure and scan data in the right figure.
Color points are real results without compensation compared to a color map. When accurate
analysis is required, color point can be more accurate than a color map.
Whisker
Expresses deviation as colored lines. The color and length of a whisker is the distance between
scan data and nominal data. The wider the gap is, the darker the color of a line is.
Whiskers can be useful for:
Closer examination of deviations

Multiplication of colored lines is possible. The function makes a closer examination of
deviations easy. By changing the amount of whiskers that are simultaneous displayed,
deviation can be easily checked by the color and length of the resulting whiskers.
97
Checking incorrectly projected points

Some points might be projected onto an incorrect face on CAD data. The Whisker function can
be used to check for this type of error.
There is a incorrectly projected point displayed in red in the left figure below. When the
whisker function is used, the incorrectly projected point can be found easily as shown in the
right figure.
2. Color maps and tolerances

A color map will change depending on the tolerance values used.
Note: Tolerance colors can be changed in the Properties panel. Select an item in the
Inspection Feature tree to check its properties then click the User Tolerance Color button.
3. Showing and hiding a color map

Showing or hiding color maps can be performed in the Properties panel. Select an item in the
Inspection Feature tree then click the Visibility button. False hides a color map including
corresponding tags, and true shows the color map.
98
4.2.3.2.
A tag is another kind of display inspection result. Tags include several measured values, a name,
coordinate information, and statistical information.
The following figure is an example of a tag. When the comparison point function is used, the gap
between nominal data and scan data is shown on the tag as a value.
Changing the style and field of tags

The tag style and display fields can be modified in the Annotation Display Control. It is displayed
when the right mouse button is clicked on any empty area in the model view.
Style
The style and color of the font as well as the default style can be changed.
Font
99
Preset
Fields
Aligning Tags
When many tags are created, it can be difficult to check the target position of each tag on nominal
data. The tag alignment command can be used to clearly arrange them by going to View >
Annotation Alignment.
There are three ways to align tags:
Snapped: Aligns annotations without overlapping them and can be repositioned
Automatic: Aligns annotations near the border of the Model View and cannot be repositioned
Close To Object: Aligns annotations that cannot be repositioned near a model and may cause
overlapping
The following figure shows the result of each alignment type:
100
Showing and hiding tags

The visibility of tags can be controlled for inspection features in the Properties panel. When
Visibility is set to true, tags will be shown.
4.2.3.3.
Adjusting the Color Bar and Checking Go / No
Go Results
Color bar
The color bar is color range used to show how different scan data is from nominal data. The values
set in the color bar are the criteria used for drawing a color map.
The table below explains what each color represents in a default color bar:
Color
Meaning
Shows scan data is above nominal data.
(Yellow to red)
The darker the color, the wider gap between

scan data and nominal data.
101
Green is the ideal range. Data in the green

range is considered as Pass.
Shows scan data is below nominal data.
(Light blue to deep

blue)
The darker color, the wider the gap between

scan data and nominal data.
Modifying the color bar

Adjusting the color bar will change the color map. The color range and format can be changed.
Color Range
The limitation of the color bar determines the inspection range. If the range is too wide, it will be
difficult to notice small deviation changes. Normally the maximum range is set according to the
max deviation value or below.
Format
XOV provides various color bar templates. Color bar templates will be shown when the arrow icon
on the color bar is clicked.
Default: The default color bar in the Model View
Symmetry: Displays the color range with symmetrical colors
Go/no go: Shows pass and fail statuses
Signed: Shows whether scan data is above nominal data or not
Inverse: Inverses the color range

102
Go/No Go
Displays whether a measured value is within set tolerance values or not.
There are three statuses based on tolerance.
Pass: Displays that the gap between nominal data and scan data is within tolerance
Warning: Displays that a value passes but that the results are close to failing
Fail: Displays that the gap between nominal data and scan data is not within tolerance
Note: The tolerance of nominal data can be set by going to Tools > Nominal Tools > Assign
Tolerance. The warning ratio value can be set in the properties panel of the nominal data.
4.2.3.4.
Generating Reports
XOV contains advanced reporting functions for creating reports using custom or default templates.
Three kinds of reports can be selected based on the purpose of the report:
Normal report: A report that is directly editable and interlocked with the Model View
3D HTML report: A report that creates inspection results in a .html file with a 3D display of the
model
103
Trend report: A report that is useful for analyzing deviation trends over multiple scan data
files
Standard Reports
XOV provides standard reporting functions. Various formats can be exported and all reports are
editable.
Available Formats for Exporting
Microsoft PowerPoint: A commonly used presentation-style format
Microsoft Excel: Useful for when there are many tables in a report
Adobe PDF: Strong security since PDF data cannot be directly edited
TXT: Useful when a small file is desired. CSV files are used when there is a large amount of data
Interlocked Modification
Report entities are connected to the main inspection project. When inspection results are updated
a new report does not need to be generated. Instead, the Rebuild icon
report tab to apply all changes from the inspection project to the report.
can be clicked in the
Layout
The report tab contains a layout editing function. If a layout is made once it can be used again
whenever a new report is needed. Many companies use their own templates for documentation
104
and the report tab can be formatted to a company's default template by using the Layout function.
Editing
The report tab is editable by changing the type of screen shots, adding or removing fields, or
creating charts from tables.
Changing Screen Shots

Screen shots can be changed based on a view direction.
Adding or Removing Fields on a Table

When a table is selected in the Report tab, the Format menu tab will be displayed. The Field
Chooser option can be used to add or remove fields.
Creating a Chart from a Table

105
When a table is selected in the Report tab, a chart can be inserted using the selected table.
3D HTML Reporting
In addition to standard reporting features, XOV provides dynamic reporting in the form of 3D
HTML reporting. Inspection results are saved in the HTML file format and the model is displayed in
3D in the internet explorer browser. This type of reporting is useful for sharing reports with coworkers, because XOV does not need to be installed to see the model and the report.
Trend Reporting
When repetitive inspection is required between a single nominal data file and multiple different
scan data files, the trends for errors can be analyzed by utilizing the trend reporting tool.
The following example shows ten different scans that were inspected for cylindricity against a
nominal.
Three results in the trend report show errors outside of the set tolerance in red. The trend report
helps in finding problems during the manufacturing process as time passes.
4.2.4. Inspection using Probe Measurement Devices

3D Scan-based inspection technology enables the virtual inspection of geometric features and
shapes of a physical part based on the 3D scan data scanned by a 3D scanner as well as probe
measurement devices. The 3D scan data created by using the probe measurement device is called
106
probe point data in the application. The probe point data can be used for inspecting geometric
features and shapes of a physical part without nominal data, with nominal data, and with a preexisting inspection project.
Inspect without Nominal Data

This process is useful for inspecting the geometric features and shapes of a physical part when
nominal data does not exist. While probing on the physical part, probe point data is acquired and
used for aligning a hardware coordinate system to a global coordinate system, extracting
geometries, and measuring dimensions.
The following diagram illustrates an inspection process without nominal data using a probe
measurement device.
1. Setup device.
2. Plan alignment.
3. Probe to align the hardware coordinate system to the global coordinate system.
4. Extract geometries and measure dimensions.
For more information, refer to the Inspect without Nominal Data Tutorial.
Related command:
LiveInspect > LiveAlign
LiveInspect > LiveCapture
107
LiveInspect > LiveDimension

LiveInspect > LiveGeometry
Inspect with Nominal Data

This process is useful for inspecting the geometric features and shapes of a physical part when
nominal data exists. While probing on the physical part, probe point data is acquired and used for
aligning the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system, finding pair
geometries, and measuring dimensions.
The following diagram illustrates an inspection process with nominal data using a probe
measurement device.
1. Setup device.
2. Plan alignment.
3. Probe to align the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system.
4. Find pair geometries and measure dimensions.
For more information, refer to the Inspect with Nominal Data Tutorial.
Related command:
LiveInspect > LiveCapture
LiveInspect > LiveDimension
LiveInspect > LiveGeometry
Inspect with Pre-Existing Project

This process is useful for inspecting the geometric features and shapes of a physical part when a
pre-planned inspection project exists. While probing on the physical part, probe point data is
acquired and used for aligning the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system
and finding pair geometries. A pre-planned inspection project guides where probing is needed on
the nominal data. After finishing the probing, inspection results will be updated based on the
inspection plans.
108
The following diagram illustrates an inspection process with nominal data using a probe
measurement device based on pre-planned inspection plans.
1. Import pre-planned nominal data.

2. Probe to align the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system.
4. Find pair geometries. (Results are automatically updated.)
For more information, refer to the Inspect with Pre-Existing Nominal Data Tutorial.
Related command:
LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process
5. Getting Help
To get technical support:
If you have any problems or suggestions, you can contact support@rapidform.com.
To check the version of the application and its Product ID:
Go to Help > About.
When sending any technical support requests are sure to include this information.
To view the Quick Start Guide
Go to Help > Quick Start Guide.
Rapidform XOV3 | Getting Help
109
To access all online help documentation:
Look at the documentation in the Help subdirectory of the root directory.
A PDF version of the documentation in the User Guide subdirectory of the root directory is
also available.
To activate a Product license:
Go to Help > Activate License.
To Deactivate a Product license:
Go to Help > Deactivate License.
To profile the performance of a system:
Go to Help > Launch Performance Profiler.
To access documentation for a specific operation:

While using an operation, press the F1 key to display the documentation for that command in the
Help tab of the viewing window.
To access the FAQ, Technical Tips, and other resources:

Use the Support tab.
To obtain the latest information on the application:

Go to http://www.rapidform.com.
The available online resources include the latest product information, frequently asked questions
(FAQs), software downloads, and technical support contact information.
6. User Interface
The user interface of Rapidform XOV is intuitive and easy to use. It is a flexible and dynamic
Rapidform XOV3 | User Interface
110
interface that is simple to learn. The user interface windows and toolbars can be modified via the
right mouse button menu in the toolbar area so that they are always shown, dynamically hidden,
or never shown.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Palette
Toolbar
Docking Bars
Model View
Dialog Tree
Monitoring Bars
Esc Key
Mouse Control
Shortcut Keys
Pop-up Menus
3D Mouse
111
6.1.
Title Bar
The title bar shows the full path of the model currently being used at the top of the application. For
example, if the file C:\Program Files\INUS Technology\Product Name\Sample\xxx.xov is imported,
its name will be displayed in the title bar, but only after it is saved.
6.2.
Menu Bar
The menu bar shows the top level of all of the menus. These menus include File, Select, Edit, Insert,
Tools, Measure, View, Add-Ins and Help.
Moving Menu Bars

This pull-down menu bar can be freely docked anywhere and some commands have icons for
quicker referencing.
Menu Types
There are three types of objects in a menu:
Arrow Buttons ( )
If there is an arrow button next to a menu option, there will also be a sub menu that can be
accessed by clicking the arrow button.
Shortcut keys (
Frequently used commands also have shortcut keys to the right of the command name.
112
Ellipsis ( )
If there is an ellipsis "..." next to a dialog box or dialog tree, the command name has been
shortened and will be shown after it is clicked.
6.3.
Tool Palette
A Tool Palette is a group of tools used to generate and edit elements. The five modes in Rapidform
XOV are: Nominal, Scan, Section, 3D GD&T and Curve.
Activating and exiting a mode
Activating a mode
Click a mode button. When a mode is activated, the corresponding toolbars will also be
activated.
Exiting a mode
To accept all changes in a mode click the confirm button
Clicking the cancel button
6.4.
or the mode button again.
will discard all changes in the mode and exit it.
Toolbar
A toolbar contains menus or commands that are frequently used.
Customizing a Toolbar
To customize a toolbar, right-click on the toolbar and choose Customize.
113
The Customize menu has four tabs:
Commands
Toolbars
Keyboard
3D Mouse
The Commands tab

All commands are listed in the commands tab. If a command is selected, there will be a short
description about it. Command in the Commands tab can be dragged and dropped into a toolbar.
The Toolbars tab

If the radio box next to a toolbar is clicked, that item will be shown immediately.
114
To add a new toolbar, click the New button and a prompt to name the new toolbar will be
displayed.
Click OK button to create a new empty toolbar.
Drag and drop icons from the Commands tab to customize the toolbar.
115
Click Reset All to reset a toolbar to its default settings. Reset All does not immediately move the
position of a toolbar, however when the application is closed and re-launched, all toolbars will be
in their original states. To change the name of a toolbar, click the Rename button. To delete a
toolbar, click the Delete button. When the Show text option is checked, the names of icons will be
displayed at the bottom.
The Keyboard tab
In the Keyboard tab, keys can be bound to a command to create a shortcut. Select a category and a
command in it to create a new shortcut key. Click the Assign button and the shortcut key will be
bonded to the selected command. To remove an existing shortcut command, select it in the
116
Current Keys box, and click Remove. To return everything to the original default state, click the
Reset All button.
Note: If a shortcut is already bonded to a command, it cannot be assigned to another
command.
The 3D Mouse tab
In the 3D Mouse tab, shortcut keys can be set for the buttons of a 3D mouse. Click the number of
the button to be changed and double-click a command from the list box. To remove allocated
shortcuts, select the number and click the Delete button.
6.5.
Docking Bars
The application includes property bars that can be docked for the following items:
Tree
Display
Help
Viewpoint
Properties
117
Color Bar
Report
Support
Image Folder
Console
Error List
Tabular View
Showing or Hiding Docking Bars

When a docking bar is not visible, right-click on the toolbar pane and a visibility panel will be
displayed.
Icon
(Checked)
Status
The docking bar is shown on screen.
Unchecked
The docking bar is not shown.
Select docking bars without check marks to display them. Click the check box next to docking bars
to hide them or use the
icon.
Folding or Unfolding Docking Bars

There are two ways to fold docking bars.
F12 key
The F12 key hides all docking bars and only shows the model view. Pressing the F12 key again
118
restores all docking bars.
Auto Hide icon

A window can be set to hide automatically by clicking the Auto Hide icon
on its respective
title bar as shown in the bottom left image. An auto-hidden window will be shown when a
mouse cursor hovers over the appropriate tab for the window.
Floating or Docking Bars

Double-clicking on the title of a docking bar enables it to be moved. Double clicking it again will
dock it.
Note: Right-clicking on any of the docking bars will display the following pop-up menu.
119
6.5.1. Tree
There are two trees in the application used for displaying features and entities: the Inspection
Feature Tree and the Model Tree.
Inspection Feature Tree

The Inspection Feature Tree enables the creation of inspection entities by storing the operations
used in an inspection process, as well as the order of the operations and their relationships to each
other.
Whenever a feature such as an alignment, curve, or 3D GD&T, is generated, it will be added to the
Inspection Feature Tree in the order in which it was created. The Inspection Feature Tree shows all
changes and created entities in the application in chronological order as well as the history for all
changes and creations. The order of features can be altered by dragging and dropping features. It
is also possible to go back to a certain point in the inspection history by using the Rollback, Roll
Forward, Roll To End commands. This management of the inspection process is called parametric
history-based inspection.
Changing the feature history by

dragging and dropping
Created features can be suppressed and unsuppressed from the Inspection Feature Tree by
120
selecting Suppress in the popup menu or unchecking the check box next to the feature. If a feature
is not being used in the current inspection process, it can be temporally removed from the
Inspection Feature. The suppressed features will be unloaded from the memory and loaded into
cache space. Whenever the features are necessary, it can be reloaded into the memory by using
the unsuppress command.
Suppressing by using the suppress menu
Suppressing by unchecking a feature
Note: Suppressed features will not be attached to an inspection report. To add an inspection
feature into a report it needs to first be unsuppressed.
Selecting Several Items in a Tree

A single feature or multiple features in a tree can be selected by clicking and using the Ctrl or Shift
buttons on the keyboard. The order of features can be changed if desired.
Note: Entities in the Inspection Feature Tree and Model Tree can be tracked and selected by
typing the name of the entity on the keyboard.
Pop-Up Menu
Right-clicking on any entity in the Inspection Feature Tree will display the following pop-up menu.
121
Edit Enters a selected mode to edit.

Delete Deletes a feature.
Suppress Suppresses a feature so a model can be manipulated with the selected
feature temporarily removed.
Rollback Temporarily reverts a model to an earlier state. New features can be added or
existing features can be edited while a model is in the rollback state. When a feature is in
the rollback state, any feature created will be added above the selected rollback feature.
The RollForward command is used to roll forward and the Roll To End command is used
to go to the last feature in the feature tree.
Roll To Start Temporarily reverts a model to the initial state.
Show/Hide Shows or hides entities of a selected feature.
Show All Included In This Shows all entities of a selected feature even if the visibility
of the entities in the Properties panel is set to false.
Show Pass Only Shows only passing results from inspection results.
Show Fail Only Shows only failed results from inspection results.
Show Warning Only Shows only warning results from inspection result.
Show No Result Only Shows inspection results as colors without tags.
Show Pass & Warning Only Shows passing and warning results from inspection
results.
122
Show Fail & Warning Only Shows failed and warning result from inspection results.
Zoom To This Zooms an entity to fit a screen.
Adjust Colorbar Range Automatically calculates a value for maximum and minimum
deviation to improve displayed results.
Export Opens a dialog box used to specify the path and the type of file for
exporting features.
Report Displays a dialog box for generating a report.
Note: The pop-up menu may change appearance based on what feature type is selected when
opening it.
Model Tree
The Model Tree displays entities such as Point Clouds, Solid Bodies, Ref. Planes, and Ref.
Coordinates in a fixed order. Each entity is displayed under its corresponding group in the Model
Tree and features can be shown or hidden by enabling or disabling the entities in the Model Tree.
Showing or Hiding Entities in the Model View

When there is a closed eye icon
next to an entity in the Model View it will not be visible.
If a parent node is made invisible, all of its child entities will be invisible irrespective of their status.
In the example tree below, the Front, Top and Right Ref. Planes are set to be visible. However, the
123
Ref. Planes parent node is invisible, rendering all Ref. Planes invisible in the Model View.
Pop-Up Menu
Right-clicking on any feature will display the following pop-up menu:
Show This Only Hides all features and shows the selected feature only.
Show/Hide Shows or hides the selected feature.
Show All Included In This Shows all entities of a selected feature even if the visibility
of the entities in the Properties panel is set to false.
Show Pass Only Shows only passing results from inspection results.
Show Fail Only Shows only failed results from inspection results.
Show Warning Only Shows only warning results from inspection result.
Show No Result Only Shows inspection results as colors without tags.
Show Pass & Warning Only Shows passing and warning results from inspection
results.
Show Fail & Warning Only Shows failed and warning result from inspection results.
124
Zoom To This Zooms an entity to fit a screen.

Delete Deletes a selected feature.
Export Opens a dialog box used to specify the path and the type of file for
exporting features.
Report Displays a dialog box for generating a report.
Properties Shows properties
Note: Refer to Pop-up Menu above the explanation of Model Tree for other menu.
6.5.2. Display
In the Display tab, view and display settings can be changed.
All View Set the viewport (View > Viewport) to display more than two viewing panes. If
the All View option is checked, all changes made to views and display settings will be
applied to all views.
125
Current View Set the viewport (View > Viewport) to display more than two viewing
panes. If the Current View option is checked, all changes made to views and display
settings will be applied only to current view.
World Axis & Scale Displays a world axis at the bottom left corner of the Model View.
Scene Grid Shows a scene grid in the Model View at the X-Z global coordinate planes.
This option will be automatically enabled when entering into the Section mode. This
option is useful for estimating the size of entities when measuring features on sections.
Enabled Scene Grid option
Disabled Scene Grid option
Colorbar Shows the colorbar in the Model View.

Gradient Background Sets the background color of a workspace window as a gradient.
Label Shows the labels of ref. geometries, such as planes and vectors, in the Model
View.
Dynamic Draw Simplifies a model when it is in motion.
126
Dynamic Draw option enabled
Dynamic Draw option disabled
Front Face Determines the surface material of meshes and bodies in the Model View. As
Is displays each entity as a separate color, and All The Same displays all of the entities in
gray.
As Is
All The Same
Back Face - Opens the Back Face Color drop-down box which contains 3 options.
Complement takes the color of the front face and sets the complimentary color for back
faces.
As Is sets the color of front and back faces to the same color.
User Defined sets a user defined color for back faces. User Defined colors can be set in the
Display tab in File > Preferences.
Complement
As is
User Defined
Transparency Sets transparency for an entity type in the Model View.
Transparency enabled
Transparency disabled
Projection Method Projects a model with perspective which makes the foreground of a
part appear bigger, while background will appear smaller. Parallel projects a model
parallel to a viewing plane.
127
Viewpoint Sets the viewpoint mode as Front, Back, Left, Right, Top, Bottom and
Isometric. They are assigned to the following shortcut keys: Alt + 1, Alt + 2, Alt + 3, Alt + 4,
Alt + 5, Alt + 6 and Alt + 7.
Lock Locks the rotation of data in the Model View. If model data cannot be rotated,
check to see if this option has been activated.
Synchronize All View Synchronizes all open view ports in the Model View to that of the
current view.
Light Controls Lights 1, 2, 3 or 4, on or off. The Set button changes the properties for
lighting conditions. It can be accessed by going to: View > Light Properties.
View Clip Shows clipped views of model data. To set clipping properties, click the Set
button. It can also be accessed by going to: View > View Clip.
Shading Method Three methods for shading can be utilized:
Vertex Shades only poly-vertices from a mesh.
Smooth Face Shades poly-faces and blends them to connected poly-faces
smoothly.
Flat Face Shades each triangular face using one color and does not blend
connected poly-faces.
Vertex
Smooth Face
Flat Face
Point Shader Defines shading methods for point clouds. These shading methods can be
used to effectively view scan data.
Shading Method: Vertex
Normal Display: On
128
Depth Point Shading
X-Ray Point Shading
Note: The Point Shader option can be used while the mesh is set to the Vertex mode in
the Mesh Shader options.
None The default shading method. When a point cloud has color or normal
information and the Texture or Normal options are checked, the point cloud will be
shaded from the direction of the light source. Turning off Texture or Normal will
display all points as the same color without shading.
None with Normal
None without Normal
Depth From the origin viewpoint, the closer a point is, the darker the color of the
point will be. When a point is located farther away, the color of the point will
become lighter. The Set button can be used to define the range of depth by using
an adjustable slider. If points are out of a specified range of depth, they will
disappear from the Model View. The Depth function can be used to focus on a
particular area by removing other unwanted areas from the range of depth.
None
Depth
When a point cloud has normal information, depth shading is available along with
vertex shading. Depth shading and vertex shading display a point cloud with
129
enhanced three-dimensional effects to more easily distinguish the front of the solid
body from the back.
Depth Shading without Vertex
Depth Shading with Vertex
Normal
Normal
Note: To create normal information for point clouds when importing, check the
Normal checkbox in the Import dialog box.
Vertex shading can be enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking the
Normal checkbox in the Display tab.
X Ray Helps focus on an area of interest by making closer and farther areas
transparent. To define transparent areas, click the Set button. The Near and Far
areas will be transparent and the Middle area will be clearly displayed.
For example, if a scanner scans a building, it can be difficult to see the inside
because of the outer walls. The X-Ray function can be used to make the outer walls
transparent enabling the viewing of the inside clearly.
X-Ray Default
After Adjusting X-Ray Depth
The X-Ray shading method makes points transparent in a certain range. When
trying to select points, points nearer to the viewing direction are selected first even
if they are invisible. Therefore, this method should be only be used for data viewing
purposes.
130
Vertex Draws poly-vertices.

Edge Draws poly-edges. This option will not be available when the Shading Method is
set to Vertex.
Face Draws poly-faces. This option will not be available when Shading Method is set to
Vertex.
Texture Shades a point cloud from the direction of a light source when a point cloud has
color. Texture is combined with Point Shader. See Point Shader for detailed information.
Normal Uses normal information enabling vertex shading.
Checked
Unchecked
Normal is combined with Point Shader. See Point Shader for detailed information.
Boundary Shows or hides the boundaries of meshes. User Defined displays boundary
colors as set in Preferences. This option is available only for open meshes.
Boundary Enabled
Boundary Disabled
As Is
User Defined
Suppressed Show or hides suppressed scan data.

Vertex Size Determines the display size of a vertex.
131
Vertex Size: 1
Vertex Size: 2
Static Display Ratio Changes the amount of the data displayed when a model is static
by selecting a value in the Static Display Ratio box.
Display Mode Determines how a body is displayed.
Wireframe Draws only edges of faces.
Hidden Line Draws all hidden lines.
Shaded Draws shaded faces.
Shaded With Edges Draws shaded faces with edges.
Hidden Line
Wireframe
Shaded
Shaded With Edge
Resolution Sets the display resolution of bodies. The resolution level can be set from 0
to 10.
Resolution: 0
Resolution: 5
Resolution: 10
Cutting Plane Shows cutting planes when a section is used.

132
Checked
Unchecked
6.5.3. Help
In this tab, the online help file can be found and it is separated into two tabs for Contents and
Index. In the Contents tab, information on all of the menus in the application can be found. To
quickly find a menu, go to the Index tab, and input key words related to it.
Shortcut Key
The F1 key by default brings up the contents help guide. This will show the help document for the
command being using. The F1 function is available on commands that have a dialog tree.
Back to the Working Area

To go back to the working area, click the Model View tab at the bottom of the workspace window.
133
6.5.4. Viewpoint
Viewpoint manages viewpoints saved while viewing models and entities. It is useful for reusing
certain viewpoints. If a viewpoint is selected, all entities that existed in the selected viewpoint can
be seen in Model In Viewpoint. When Viewpoint1 is chosen in the Viewpoint panel, its entity
state will be shown in the Model In Viewpoint panel.
Add Viewpoint Adds a new viewpoint to capture the current view state.
Apply Viewpoint Changes the visibility and viewpoint to the selected viewpoint.
Double-clicking a viewpoint works same as this function.
Show Only Selected Viewpoint Changes the visibility of entities to the selected
viewpoint.
Reassign Viewpoint Reassigns the selected viewpoint from the current view state.
Zoom Determines the size of the thumbnail image.
Show/Hide Shows or hides inspection result.
Export Viewpoint Exports the selected viewpoint to an image file.
Note: Captured Viewpoints can be used as Custom Viewpoints when an inspection report is
generated. For more information, see Docking Bars > Report.
134
6.5.5. Properties
The Properties panel can be found on the right side of the application by default. It shows the
properties of selected entities such as names, tolerances, calculation results, and sizes. Entity
properties can be manually changed and these changed settings will govern how the entities are
computed during an inspection.
Nominal Property
When nominal data in a tree is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Name Name of nominal data.
Warning Ratio When a point is within the tolerance
zone, it will Pass. If it is near the border of the tolerance
zone, it will be displayed as a Warning. The warning
ratio can be set from a tolerance zone in this setting. If
it is set to -50, 50 percent of inside the tolerance will be
marked as a warning zone.
Offset For Thickness Compensation When nominal data is a one sided surface of a sheet
metal part but scan data is a whole part, the thickness difference can be compensated by
offsetting scan data. When an offset value is inserted, the Use For Alignments and Use For
Deviations options are shown below the Offset For Thickness Compensation option.
Setting a value to True will use the offset value for alignment and deviation.
Outlier For Geometry Type Checking (%) Sets the ratio of how much outlier data will be
removed when finding adaptable analytic geometry on scan data.
Geometry Type Checking Tol. Sets the tolerance value that is used to judge an analytic
shape. For example, setting a larger value may analyze a non-circle feature incorrectly as a
circle.
135
Max. Radius Of Analytic Shape Sets the tolerance value to judge an arc or line. For
example, if it is set to 1300mm, an arc that has a radius bigger than 1300mm will be
analyzed as a line.
Min. Distance Sub-Method Calculates a min. deviation distance using one of two
methods: Shortest or Normalize. Shortest defines deviation as the shortest distance from a
nominal point to scan data. Normalize defines deviation as the normal distance from a
nominal point to scan data.
Ignore Extreme Angle When true is selected, an extreme angle is filtered for deviation
and a scan pair. An extreme angle is the angle difference between a nominal point and a
scan point that is over 60 degrees. This option is useful when inspecting thin close walls for
correct scan pair walls.
When this option is not used, section deviation is carried out by searching for the point from
the scan data to the design data that has the shortest distance. A front face and rear face are
not distinguished during deviation so deviation results may not be correct.
136
When this option is used, the front and rear faces of scan data can be distinguished by
checking the normal difference between the nominal and the scan. The front and back faces
of the nominal data can then be used to find correct scan pair faces.
Ignore Extreme Distance When this field is set to True, only reliable data that excludes
noisy data is used for searching a counter part of a scan by fitting. When it is set to False,
calculation for removing an outlier is not made. When the difference of a part between a
designed model data and scan data is significantly large, set this value to False to search the
counterpart.
Ignore Extreme Angle This is the same option as the Ignore Extreme Angle in the
Deviation Options.
Check Pairs Axis/Normal Specifies an angle value for checking a pairs axis or normal. If
the normal of a pair is over the inputted angle when comparing it to the nominals normal,
this pair will be ignored for calculation.
If the axis or normal of scan pair geometry that has been calculated from a target while
measuring GD&T does not satisfy the condition of this option, the scan pair points will be
displayed in red with a warning message that states: The max angle deviation condition is
not satisfied. Check entities whose scan points are red color.
Distance Tol. Determines whether two features intersect or not. This option sets the
distance between two features until the application will consider them to be intersecting.
Angle Tol. Ignores angles between two scan features that are bigger than the angle of the
nominal.
137
Deviation Limit Ignores a sharp edge created by two pair features that has a bigger
distance value compared to the distance of the nominal.
Compensation Direction Chooses a compensation direction. The Probe Direction and
Face Normal can be selected.
Scan Property
When scan data in a tree is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of the scan data
Result
Matrix Transforms the matrix of an alignment. The
Export button will save its value in Rapidforms .trm
file format.
Mesh Property
When mesh data in the Model tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of the mesh
Appearance
Visibility Shows or hides a mesh.
Material The color of a mesh
Geometry
Volume Calculates the volume of a mesh by clicking
the Calc. button.
138
Area Calculates the area of a mesh by clicking the

Calc. button.
Mass Center Calculates the mass center of a mesh

using the X, Y and Z coordinate values by clicking the
Calc. button.
Scanner Type Chooses a scanner type. Undefined, Planar and Spherical can be selected.
Body Property
When a body is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of the body
Appearance
Visibility Shows or hides a body.
Material Color of a body
Geometry
Volume Calculates the volume of a solid body by
clicking the Calc. button.
The volume of surface body cannot be calculated.
Area Calculates the area of a body by clicking the

Calc. button.
Mass Center Calculates the mass center of a body

using the X, Y and Z coordinate values by clicking the
Calc. button.
139
Face Property
When a face is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of a face
Geometry
Area Calculates the area of a face when the Calc.
button is clicked.
Option
Tolerance Sets the tolerance used when calculating
deviation such as whole deviations, section deviations,
comparison and deviations. Different tolerances can
be set for each face.
Scan Pair Option

Zone Thickness (+)/(-) Sets the thickness when
searching scan data from a face.
Zone Shrinkage Reduces a fitting zone by shrinking its boundary to acquire only desired
scan data.
Normal Difference Creates ref. geometry but excludes noisy data or scan data out of a
set value. When this option is used, a ref. geometry pair is created using point data that has
a normal direction within the range of the setting value. Values out of the range are
excluded from calculation. The available range is from 0 to 180. When Do Not Use is
140
selected, the option will not be applied.
The following example shows the results of created ref. geometries that are different based
on Normal Difference.
[Case 1] Normal Difference: Do Not Use
When this option is not used, all scan data corresponding to the design data will be used
for creating ref. geometry. The sharply-sloped scan data will be used for calculating ref.
geometry pairs which will not create the desired ref. geometry.
[Case 2] Normal Difference: 30
When this option is used, scan data points out of the setting value are excluded from
calculation for creating ref. geometry. The sharply-sloped scan data will be excluded from
calculating ref. geometry pairs which will create the desired ref. geometry.
Pair Geometry Fitting Option

Geometry Type Shows the geometry type of a selected face.
Fitting Method Chooses the fitting method for finding scan pair geometry.
Best Fit finds scan pair geometry using the least squares fitting method from the scan pair
points searched inside of a fitting zone.
Min. Bound finds the maximum inscribed scan pair geometry that contacts the most
distant scan pair point along the negative normal direction.
141
Max. Bound finds the minimum circumscribed scan pair geometry that contacts the most
distant scan pair point along the positive normal direction.
Use Nominal Axis Changes the value of scan ref. geometry that has the same axis of a
face when finding scan ref. geometry.
Change the value to True or False by selecting multiple entities and selecting the desired
value.
Use Nominal Position Changes the value of scan ref. geometry that has the same
position of a face when finding scan ref. geometry.
value.
Use Nominal Radius Changes the value of scan ref. geometry that has the same radius
of a face when finding scan ref. geometry.
value.
Outlier Removal Type/Value Selects outlier removal types and values.
N*Sigma sets a fitting to exclude fitting data that has errors that are bigger than N times
of the standard deviation by inputting a N value into the Outlier Removal Value box.
Ratio sets a ratio to sort fitting data according to errors. The data that falls into the ratio
will be used in the fitting.
Absolute Distance sets a fitting by excluding fitting data outside of a set distance.
Sampling Ratio Sets a fitting using sampled data points according to a specified value.
When Auto is set, the sampling ratio will be applied according to the size of a target face.
Region Property
Region properties are displayed when scan data is used as nominal data.
142
Appearance
Material The color used to express a region.
Geometry
Area Calculates the area of a region when the Calc.
button is clicked.
Option
Tolerance Sets the tolerance used when calculating
deviation such as whole deviations, section deviations,
comparison deviations, etc. Different tolerances can be set
for each face.
Scan Pair Option

Zone Thickness (+)/(-) Sets the thickness when searching
scan data from a face.
Zone Shrinkage Reduces a fitting zone by shrinking the boundary of it to acquire only
desired scan data.
Normal Difference Creates ref. geometry but excludes noisy data or scan data out of a set
value. When this option is used, a ref. geometry pair is created using point data that has a
normal direction within the range of the setting value. Values out of the range are excluded
from calculation. The available range is from 0 to 180. When Do Not Use is selected, the
option will not be applied.
143

Geometry Type Shows the geometry type of selected face.
Fitting Method Chooses the fitting method for finding scan pair geometry.
Best Fit finds scan pair geometry using the least squares fitting method from the scan pair
points searched inside of a fitting zone.
Min. Bound finds the maximum inscribed scan pair geometry contacts the most distant
scan pair point along the negative normal direction.
Max. Bound finds the minimum circumscribed scan pair geometry contacts the most
distant scan pair point along the positive normal direction.
Use Nominal Axis When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the
same axis of the face.
Use Nominal Position When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have
the same position of the face.
Use Nominal Radius When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have
the same radius of the face.
Outlier Removal Type/Value
Selects outlier removal types and values.
144
N*Sigma sets a fitting to exclude fitting data that has errors that are bigger than N times of
the standard deviation by inputting a N value into the Outlier Removal Value box.
Ratio sets a ratio to sort fitting data according to errors. The data that falls into the ratio will
be used in the fitting.
Edge Property
When an edge is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.

Geometry Type Shows the geometry type of a selected
edge.
Fitting Method Chooses the fitting method for finding
scan pair geometry.
Best Fit finds scan pair geometry using the least squares
fitting method from the scan pair points searched inside of
a fitting zone.
Min. Bound finds the maximum inscribed scan pair
geometry contacts the most distant scan pair point along
the negative normal direction.
Max. Bound finds the minimum circumscribed scan pair
geometry contacts the most distant scan pair point along
the positive normal direction.
Best Fit
Min. Bound
Max. Bound
Use Nominal Axis When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the
same axis as the face.
Use Nominal Position When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have
the same position of the face.
Use Nominal Radius When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have
the same radius of the face.
145
Project On Nominal Projects scan points on to the nominal and fits them to find a pair.
Outlier Removal Type/Value Selects outlier removal types and values.
N*Sigma sets a fitting to exclude fitting data that has errors that are bigger than N times of
the standard deviation by inputting a N value into the Outlier Removal Value box.
Ratio sets a ratio to sort fitting data according to errors. The data that falls into the ratio will
be used in the fitting.
Ref. Geometry Property

When Ref. Geometry is selected, its properties are shown in Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of a Ref. Geometry
Appearance
Visibility Shows or hides nominal Ref.Geometry.
Pair Visibility Shows or hides scan
Ref.Geometry.
Show Deviation With Scan Is displayed when
selected Ref. Geometry is created from scan data
using the Extract method.
When this property is set to true, deviation of a
selected Ref. Geometry that has been fit using
scan data is displayed on the screen with a color
map as shown in the image below. The deviation
display will use the current color map and when
the properties of the color map are changed, it
will be applied to the deviation update
immediately. Fitting statistics are presented by a
numeric value in the Deviation Statistics With
Scan field. Once deviation is shown, changes to
scan data will be applied to the deviation. This
property is not applied to Points and Coordinates
among Ref. Geometries.
146
Difference With Scan Geometry

Shows the deviation between nominal Ref.
Geometry and its pair (Scan Ref. Geometry). To
inspect the deviation of all elements of a Ref.
Geometry, use this option. Based on the types of
geometries, the items shown in this option may
vary.
Alignment Property
When an alignment in a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of an alignment
Result
6 Sigma Statistical analysis of an alignment
Int. Sigma Integral sigma value
147
Histogram Statistical analysis of an alignment in

a histogram
Matrix Shows the transform matrix of an alignment. Clicking the Export button will save
the values in the Rapidform .trm file format.
GD&T Property
When a GD&T on tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of a GD&T
Appearance
Visibility Shows or hides a GD&T.
Tolerance Zone Shows or hides tolerance zones.
Pair Points Show or hides points that are within

the fitting zone of a nominal.
Option
Tolerance The value of tolerances
148
Section Property
When a section on a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of a section
Appearance
Visibility Shows or hides a section entity.
Deviation Visibility Shows or hides a section
deviation.
Nominal Section Shows or hides nominal sections.
Scan Section Shows or hides scan sections.
Tag Visibility Shows or hides tags on a section
deviation.
Ref. Geometries Visibility Shows or hides Ref.
Geometries on section deviation.
GD&T Visibility Shows or hides GD&T results on a
section deviation.
Tolerance Zone Visibility Shows or hides Tolerance
Zone on a section deviation.
Geometry
Length (Nominal) Calculates the length of nominal
data.
Length (Scan) Calculates the length of scan data.
Area (Nominal) Calculates the area of nominal data.
Area (Scan) Calculates the area of scan data.
Centroid (Nominal) Calculates the centroid of
149
nominal data.
Centroid (Scan) Calculates the centroid of scan data.
Display Option
Whisker Multiplier Determines the whisker size of
deviations.
Whisker Display Ratio Determines the display ratio
of whiskers.
Use Tolerance Color Displays tolerance color on a
section deviation.
Colorbar Owner Shows the owner of a colorbar.
Setting the option to True and editing the colorbar will
set the colorbar ownership to the current deviation.
Result
6 Sigma Statistical analysis of a deviation
Histogram Statistical analysis of an alignment by using a histogram
150
Section Edge Property

When the edge of a section on a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of a section
Geometry
Length Of Loop Calculates the length of a loop.
Area Of Loop Calculates the area of a loop.
Centroid Of Loop Calculates the centroid of a loop.
Scan Pair Option

Zone Thickness (+)/(-) Shows thickness when searching
scan data from a face.
Zone Shrinkage Reduces a fitting zone by shrinking the

boundary of the fitting zone to avoid unwanted scan data
from a fitting calculation.
151
Normal Difference Creates ref. geometry but excludes

noisy data or scan data out of a set value. When this
option is used, a ref. geometry pair is created using point
data that has a normal direction within the range of the
setting value. Values out of the range are excluded from
calculation. The available range is from 0 to 180. When
Do Not Use is selected, the option will not be applied.

Geometry Type The geometry type of a pair
Use Nominal Axis Changes the value of scan ref.
geometry having the same axis of a face when finding
scan ref. geometry.
Change the value to True or False by selecting multiple
entities and selecting the desired value.
Outlier Removal Type/Value Selects outlier removal
types and values.
N*Sigma sets a fitting to exclude fitting data that has
errors that are bigger than N times of the standard
deviation by inputting a N value into the Outlier
Removal Value box.
Ratio sets a fitting to begin by sorting fitting data
according to errors. The data that falls into the ratio will be
used in the fitting.
Absolute Distance sets a fitting by excluding fitting data
152
outside of a set distance.

Sampling Ratio Sets a fitting using sampled data points
according to a specified value. When Auto is set, the
sampling ratio will be applied according to the size of a
target face.
Deviation Property
When deviation in a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of a deviation
Appearance
Visibility Shows or hides a deviation entity.
Tag Visibility Shows or hides tags for a deviation.
Display Option
Display Type Shows Display type. Color Map,
Whisker, or Color Point can be selected on a whole
deviation, however, only Whisker and Color Point
can be used on a silhouette deviation.
Use Tolerance Color Displays tolerance color on a
section deviation.
Colorbar Owner Shows the owner of a colorbar.
Setting the option to True and editing the colorbar
will set the colorbar ownership to the current
deviation.
Show Contour Line Shows or hides contour lines.
Result
6 Sigma Statistical analysis of a deviation
153
Histogram Statistical analysis of an alignment by

using a histogram
Tag Property
When a tag in a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name Name of a tag
Appearance
Visibility Shows or hides a tag entity. When
Visibility is set to True, click the button to hide the
tag.
154
6.5.6. Color Bar

The Color bar is used to view deviation in created entities. The color bar looks like the following
image.
Editing a Color Bar

Color bars can be edited as necessary.
Changing Limits
A color segment is the area of the color scale between two cursors. Within a color segment,
numerical values are mapped linearly to colors. They are the color scales limits to define the value
range of colors used for deviation. These limits can be modified by double-clicking the numerical
values and entering new values through their related text boxes. New values are made effective by
pressing the Enter key.
Splitting a Color Segment

A color segment can be subdivided by selecting the Split pop-up menu on the color segment. A
new segment is then created on top of the current segment.
Deleting a Color Segment

A color segment can be deleted by selecting the Delete pop-up menu on the color segment.
155
Copying a Color Segment

A color segment can be copied by selecting it, right-clicking, selecting Copy and then Pasting.
Alternatively, a color segment can be copied and pasted by using the Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V shortcut
keys.
Inspect Color Picker

Select the Edit Color command from the pop-up menu on a color segment or double-click it to
display a Color Picker dialog box. Note that a tolerance color cannot be edited by the color picker.
Construction
The Color Picker consists of a color mode, a grayscale mode, Option, RGB and HSB. The color mode
and the grayscale modes can be changed by left-clicking in the appropriate control sector.
Color mode
In the pinwheel-shaped color mode, the Hue, Saturation and Brightness properties can be
defined by moving two squares using the left mouse button and mapping them to the
currently-selected segment.
The Hue property is defined by choosing a color section. The Saturation property is defined by
moving the squares to the outside of the section from the center, and the Brightness property
is defined by moving the squares to the inside of the section from the center.
156
Grayscale mode
In the grayscale mode, the Brightness property is defined by positioning two squares by using
the left mouse button. After positioning, the white-black gradient will be mapped to the
currently-selected segment.
Option
In the Option section, the editable box next to the Colors option defines the number of colors
and gradients of the currently-selected segment. It can be edited by typing in a value and
confirming with the ENTER key or by dragging the slide bar. The maximum number is 100.
The Reverse checkbox makes the color gradient of the currently-selected segment inverse. The
first and last segments of the color bar can only use one color each, so they must be selected
by using the square selectors in both the color and grayscale modes.
RGB and HSB

The RGB and HSB sections show the current color properties. The properties can be changed
by editing the number boxes.
157
Making a Color Bar

For a single color gradient, position one of the squares to define the Hue and Saturation properties.
Moving the mouse cursor around the line of a selected color will automatically snap the other
square to the line. Position a snapped square on the line to define the Brightness property. Both
squares can then be moved along a created line to fine tune if necessary.
For a fixed brightness gradient, position a square to define the Hue and Saturation properties and
position the other square to define the Brightness property. Positioning the other square while
holding down the Shift key will change the color while keeping the brightness at a fixed value.
6.5.7. Report
158
The Report panel provides a page layout designer similar to Microsoft Word. The default layout
can be edited before reporting and used as a template for a new report. After generating a report,
it can be saved as PowerPoint, Excel, PDF or TXT file.
Default Tab
The Default Tab includes various tools for editing a created report.
The following table describes the functions that are included in the Default Tab.
Generate
Report
Generates a report. When the menu is clicked, the Generate Report dialog will be
displayed. Generated targets can be selected optionally.
Creates a new report or exports a report to another file format.

Opens an empty document for creating a new report.
File
Exports a report to a PDF file.
Exports a report to a PowerPoint file. MS Office 2000 to 2010 is
supported.
Exports a report to an Excel file. The report can be exported in the
Excel file format. MS Office 2000 to 2010 is supported.
Sets the page layout of the report.
Mode
Sets the page layout of a report.

Click this button to move to the Layout Tab. The Layout
Tab is used to edit a template. For more details on the
159
Layout Tab, see the description for the Layout Tab.

Edits the header of a page.
Clicking this button enables a header to be edited.
Edits the footer of a page.
Clicking this button enables a footer to be edited.
Includes the cover page as the first page.
Copies, cuts, pastes or deletes objects such as a text box or image.
Pastes a cut or copied object to a desired location.
Place a cursor on a desired location on a page and click the paste
button to paste the copied object to that location. This button is
enabled only when there are cut or copied objects on the clipboard.
The shortcut for the Paste function is Ctrl + V.
Clipboard
Copies a selected object.

Copy
Select an object and click the Copy button to copy it to the

clipboard. The shortcut for the Copy function is Ctrl + C.
Cuts a selected object.
Cut
Select an object and click the Cut button to remove the object and
copy it to the clipboard. The shortcut for the Cut function is Ctrl + X.
Deletes a selected object.
Delete
Select the object and click the Delete button to delete the object.
Undo steps back previously performed work to a previous state and Redo steps
Undo/Red
o
forward from the Undo command.

Steps back previously performed work to a previous state.
Steps forward from the Redo command.
Capture
Image
Use the Capture Image function in the Default Mode or the Layout Mode.
Select a desired page on the left Layout panel, and the image related to the
selected page title will be captured and inserted into the report. Placing the
cursor on the Whole Deviation page and clicking the Capture Image button, will
create an image of a view that can be inserted. Select a view to insert the
selected image.
160
The items included in the Capture Image, and Custom Viewpoint options allow
the creation of desired viewpoints and inserting captured images in the report.
For example, the whole deviation image captured in a desired view in the
Default Mode or Layout Mode can be inserted into a report.
This button is enabled under the Layout mode or a newly-created report. The
added image is automatically updated to the report by clicking the Rebuild
button.
How to Use:
1.
First, select a desired view by moving the model in the Model View screen.
2.
Select the Viewpoint tab on the left side of the screen and click the Add
Viewpoint button in Viewpoint panel. A viewpoint image will be
displayed including the whole deviation in the Viewpoint Panel.
3.
Go to the Model In Viewpoint panel and right-click on the Whole

Deviation entity. In the pop-up menu, click the Create Custom
Viewpoint. Before right-clicking the Whole Deviation entity, make sure
that Meshes are activated. If they are not, the Whole Deviation entity will
not appear in the Model In Viewpoint Panel. This viewpoint is linked to
the layout image of the Whole Deviation.
4.
Click the Report tab next to the Model View tab.
5.
Click the Layout tab on the left side of the report.
6.
Click the Whole Deviation on the selected Layout panel.
7.
Click the Capture Image button and select Custom Viewpoint. The
created viewpoint image will be inserted in the report.
161
8.
Adjust the inserted image as desired.
9.
Save the report by clicking OK at the right-bottom corner of the screen

and exit the Layout mode.
10. Generate a report including the Whole Deviation.

Inserts simple tables, fields, texts, images, rectangles, circles or charts into a
report. For more details on the Insert function, refer to the Insert tab.
Inserts a simple table.
Click the arrow on the right-side of the icon and select rows and
columns of the table.
Inserts a field.
Click the arrow on the right-side of the icon and select the date and
time, page number, total page number, author, comment, keyword,
file full path, filename, measure unit and custom field.
Inserts text.
Click the insert text button then hold down the right mouse button on
a desired area and drag it. A text box will be displayed in the desired
Insert
area. Type text in the Text field of the Format Tab; the typed text will
be entered into the text box. When the mouse pointer is on a report
page, directly type the text on the page and a text box will be
automatically created and typed text will be entered into the text box.
The default font, which has been set in the Default tab, is applied to
the text. Changing the font in the Default tab or the Format tab while
selecting a text object will apply the changed font to the selected
object only.
Inserts an image.
Click this button and an Open window will be displayed for selecting a
desired file.
Inserts a rectangle.
Click this button and hold down the right mouse button. Drag it to a
desired area and a rectangle will be drawn.
Inserts a circle.
Click this button and hold down the right mouse button. A circle will
be drawn.
Shows the data in various types of charts.
Click this button and a Chart window will be displayed. Select a chart
type from the window. This icon is only enabled when a table is
selected that contains values.
162
Font
Arrange
Sets and changes the font used for text.
Arranges the order or position of selected objects or text.

Click this button and a drop-down menu will be displayed that lists object
arrangement types. For a more detailed description on the Arrange button, see
the Format Tab.
Update
Maximize/
Restore
Click the Rebuild button to update changes to a report.
Maximizes the report tab to the entire screen. Clicking the button again will
restore the screen size back to the previous size. The shortcut for the
Maximize/Restore function is F12.
File Tab
The File Tab includes the New/Open, Save, Export, Print and Page Setup functions.
The following table shows descriptions of the functions in the File Tab.
Creates new report or opens a created report.
New/Open
Creates an empty document for a new report.
Opens a previously created report.
163
Saves a created report.

Save
Saves a report in the xml file format.
Saves a report in one of many available formats.
Exports a created report. If selected, the Save As dialog will be displayed.

Exports a created report to a PowerPoint file.
Export
Exports a created report to an Excel file.
164
Clicking the Excel button to generate a report in Excel will display

the Save As window. Check Save Export File in this window to
save the generated report while it is being created. If it is
unchecked, the report will be generated in the Excel file format but
not saved as a file.
When printing images in the saved file, the resolution of images will
be lowered.
Exports a created report to a PDF file.
165
Exports a created report to a TXT file.
Prints a created report.

Print
Prints a created report.
Previews a created report before printing it.
Sets a page format.

Switches pages between portrait and landscape layouts.
Chooses a page size from:
Page
Setup
Sets margin sizes for a document.

Displays page borders.
Insert Tab
The Insert Tab includes the Capture Image, Table, Chart, Text, Field and Illustration functions.
The Following table shows the description of the functions in the Insert Tab.
166
Capture
Selects a capture image type.
Image
This function is described in the Capture Image section in the Default Tab.
Table
Inserts a new simple table.

Click the arrow mark and select the number of rows and columns.
Chart
Inserts a new chart. Data is displayed as various types of charts.

Click the button and a chart window will be displayed that can be used to select
a chart type. This icon is enabled only when selecting a table that contains
values
Text
Inserts new text. Click the button, right-click the mouse, and hold down the
mouse .Drag on a report page and a text box will be displayed in the dragged
area. Type text in the Text of Format Tab; and the typed text will be entered into
the text box. When the mouse cursor is on a page, direct typing text on the
report page will automatically create a text box and the typed text will be
entered into the text box.
Inserts the fields required for a report.
Date and
Time
Page
Number
Field
Total Page
Number
Inserts the creation time and date of a report.
Inserts the page number.
Inserts the total number of report pages.
File Full Path
Inserts the full path of a saved XOV file.
Filename
Inserts the name of a saved XOV file.
Measure Unit
Inserts a measurement unit set in Default Measure Unit of

File > Preferences.
Enables the definition of information frequently used in a
Custom Field
report. Choosing the Edit Custom Field at the bottom of the

custom field menu enables the definition of a custom field
name and its value. An Inserted custom field on a report
167
page will display its value when generating a report.

Inserts shapes and images.
Rectangle
Inserts a rectangle. Click the rectangle button, right-click,

hold down the mouse button, and drag it. A rectangle will be
drawn in the dragged area.
Circle
Inserts a circle. Click the circle button, right-click, hold down

the mouse button, and drag it. A circle will be drawn in the
dragged area.
Image
Inserts an image. Click this button and an Open window will

be displayed for selecting a desired image file.
Illustration
View Tab
The View Tab includes the Slide Show, Show/Hide, Zoom and Background functions.
The following table shows descriptions of the functions in the View Tab.
Slide Show
Shows a report as a slide show.

Clicking this button will change the screen to full screen mode and the report
will be fit to the top and bottom of the screen. Click the Esc key to exit the slide
show.
Shows or hides gridlines, page lines and outlines of report pages.
Click this checkbox and gridlines will be shown on the page. To
hide the lines, uncheck the checkbox.
Show/Hide
Click this checkbox and page lines will be shown on the page. To
hide the lines, uncheck the checkbox.
Click this checkbox and the outline panel will be displayed on the
left side of the window. The panel shows configuration options
for a report in text format.
Click this checkbox and the header and footer will be displayed
on the page. To hide the header and footer, uncheck the
168
checkbox.
Zooms in or out of the report view.

Zoom in or out of a report view by clicking the arrow mark and
selecting one of the following view options: 50%, 66%, 100%, and
200%.
Zoom
Click this button and the screen will be changed to full screen
and a report will be fit to the top and bottom of the screen.
Zooms in or out of a report view. It is similar to the Zoom
function; however, it has a greater degree of control on the level
of zoom. The minus
or plus
can be positioned as desired

Background
Maximize
icons can be used of the flag

.
Sets the background color of a report.

Click the arrow mark and a palette will be displayed. Select a desired color.
Maximizes the report tab to full screen. Clicking this button makes the screen
size return back to the previous size. The shortcut for this command is F12.
Format Tab
The Format tab is hidden until an object such as a text box, table, or image is inserted into a report
or an object in the report is selected. Select or insert an object and the Format tab will be displayed
on the right side of the View tab.
The image below shows the Format tab that is displayed when a text box is selected.
The image below shows the Format tab that is displayed when an image is selected.
169
Available functions vary according to selected objects. The following table shows the description
of the functions in the View Tab.
Insert
Inserts objects such as Tables, Fields, Text, Images, Rectangles, Circles, and
Charts.
More information for this function can be found in the Insert Tab.
Changes the properties of selected objects.

Default
Default
Select a shape and check the Default checkbox to set it as a

default shape. The following created shapes will have the same
color and outline as the default shape.
Overlay
Overlays an object anywhere on a page.
Lock
Ratio
Enlarges or reduces a shape by a fixed ratio.
Used to place text in a report.

Text
Click a text box and type. Clicking the arrow mark on the edge of the lower-right
side displays a settings window for changing the font, size, color, effect,
alignment and numbering of text.
Font
Specifies the font, size and effects of text in the text box.
Specifies the color, line color and line weight of a selected object.
Specifies a selected object color. Clicking the arrow mark on the
Styles
right side will display a color pallet.

Specifies the line color for a selected object. Clicking the arrow
mark on the right side will display a color pallet.
Specifies the line weight for a selected object. Clicking the arrow
mark on the right side will display a drop-down list.
Arrange
Arranges objects or text.

Bring to Front: Brings a selected object in front of all other objects.
Bring to Forward: Brings a selected object in front of other
objects.
170
Send to Back: Sends a selected object behind all other objects.

Bring to Backward: Sends a selected object behind other objects.
Group: Groups selected objects.
Ungroup: Ungroups a selected group.
Align Left In Line: Aligns text to the left in a line.
Align H Center In Line: Centers text horizontally in a line.
Align Right In Line: Aligns text to the right in a line.
Align Top In Line: Aligns text to the top in a line.
Align V Center In Line: Centers text vertically in a line.
Align Bottom In Line: Aligns text to the bottom in a line.
Align Left: Aligns objects to the left based on the left-most object.
Align Center: Centers objects horizontally based on the vertical
center line.
Align Right: Aligns an object to the right based on the right-most
object.
Align Distribute Horizontally: Aligns objects horizontally with
equal intervals between the left-most object and the right-most
object.
Align Top: Aligns objects to the top based on the top-most object.
Align Middle: Aligns objects to the middle between the top-most
object to the bottom-most object.
Align Bottom: Aligns text to the bottom based on the bottommost object.
Align Distribute Vertically: Aligns objects vertically with equal
intervals between the top-most object and the bottom-most
object.
Size
Adjusts the size of an object.

Adjusts the width of an object.
Adjusts the height of an object.
Option
Activates when a captured image is selected.

Shows only entities that are shown in the current view for
Use Shown
selected images or tables. For example, hiding Whole
Entities
Deviation tags in the current view will not display them in a
Only
table.
171
White
Background
Transparent
Background
Makes the color of a selected image white.

Makes the color of a selected image transparent.
Use Custom Replaces a default image to a custom image. This option is

Viewpoint
activated when a custom image is already defined.
Caption
Inserts text information at the bottom or top of an image. This command is

activated when an image is selected.
Sets the brightness, contrast, and rotation of an image.
Image
Adjust
More
Brightness
Increases the brightness of an image.
Less
Contrast
Decreases the contrast of an image.
Less
Brightness
Decreases the brightness of an image
90 Left
Rotate
Rotates an image 90 counterclockwise.
More
Contrast
Increases the contrast of an image.
90 Right
Rotate
Rotates an image 90 clockwise.
Layout Tab
The Layout Tab is deactivated until the Layout button is clicked in the Default Tab.
Insert or select an object such as a text box or table and the Layout Tab will be activated and
shown on the right side of the View Tab.
Template
Selects the default template of a report.
172
Selects a template to be modified and creates the report with

the selected template. The available templates are
A4_LandscapeA4_Landscape_ForProbe, A4_Portrait,
Legal_Landscape, Legal_Landscape_ForProbe,
Letter_Landscape, Letter_Landscape_ForProbe, and
Letter_Portrait.
Click the Manage button and the Edit Templates window will
be displayed. Add, load, duplicate, or rename the template
through this window.
Insert
This function is described in the Insert section in the Default Tab.
Automatically inserts necessary fields in a report.
Auto Text
Date and Time
Inserts the creation time and date of a report.
Page Number
Inserts page numbers.
Total Page
Number
Inserts the total number of report pages.
File Full Path
Inserts the full path of a saved XOV file.
Filename
Inserts the name of a saved XOV file.
Measure Unit
Custom Field
Capture
Inserts the measurement unit set as the Default Measure

Unit at File > Preferences.
Inserts a custom field box. The Edit Custom Field is used
for editing the custom field.
This function is described in the Insert section in the Default Tab.
Image
Header &
Footer
Inserts a header and footer into a report.

Inserts a header into a report.
Click this button to activate the header of a report to insert
objects.
173
Inserts a footer into a report.

Click this button to activate the footer of a report to insert
objects.
Includes the cover page as a counted page number.
Page Setup
Sets a page.
This function is described in the Page Setup in the File tab.
Confirm
Saves the changes to the layout of each entity page. Clicking the button and
moving to another entity page without clicking the Confirm button will save
changes automatically.
Customizing a Layout
A layout is a template that determines the location and size of tables, images, histograms and texts
in a report. Default layouts can be edited and saved for other inspection projects. To enter the
layout editing mode:
1) Click the Report tab.
2) Click the Layout button in the Default menu.

3) The Layout panel at the left side in the Report tab shows all feature lists. They can be selected
to edit them. Once a feature is selected its page structure will be displayed in the main window of
the Report tab.
174
4) To add an image such as a company logo, click the Image icon

Align the image to the right by clicking the Set Align Object in Line icon
Right In Line
and import an image.

and click the Align
under the Format icon in the Report tab.
5) To add texts, click the Text button
and drag a box where the text box should be created.
Write text directly into the text box or in the Format menu in the Report tab. Un-check the
Overlay option to prevent the text box from being overlapped by a table.
Align the text to the left by using the left align button
175
6) To add a field, click the Field button

and choose a field. The Entity Properties field
enables the addition of values that will be drawn in a table automatically.
7) To add preset images of a model, click the Capture Image button.
8) After completing a customized layout, click OK at the right-bottom side of the Model View and
176
exit the Layout Mode.

9) When a Comparison Point report is generated, results can be obtained in the Layout.
Note: All changes are automatically saved in the autoreporttemplate.xml file located at
C:\Documents and Settings\user name\My Documents\Product Name\Configure.
Saving and Loading a Layout Template

After editing a layout it can be managed in the Edit Template dialog box that is displayed by
clicking the Manage icon
in the Layout menu. Type a name for a new template and click the
Add button to create it. Templates can also be imported into the application in the Manage
Templates dialog box. To edit a template and preserve the original one, use the Duplicate button
and make a copied template and edit it. To delete all template settings and restore the default
template, click the Restore Preset button.
177
To change the current template of the current report layout, select an existing template under
Select Template.
Editing a Table
To add or remove fields in a table, select a table and click the Field Chooser icon
under the Format menu. Check only the desired fields for the table and arrange the order of each
field.
To add a defined table, click the Tabular View icon

additional table.
in the Layout menu and add an
178
Adding a Chart
1) First, select a table in the report.
2) Click Insert New Chart in the Default menu.
3) Select a chart type and check the values in the Legend to be drawn in the chart.
4) Click the OK button.
179
Editing a Image
Images can be dragged and dropped from the Viewpoint and Image Folder panels.
When selecting an image in a report, the Format menu will be displayed. The Format menu
includes various image editing tools.
For example, to align an image to the left, right or center, use the alignment icon
. To place an
image freely in a report, check the Overlay option under the Format menu.
Editing Texts
Text can be added by using the Insert New Text icon
. To change the font, size, color and other
parameters, use the tools under the Format menu.
For example, to align a text box to the left, right or center of a report, click the Arrange button and
use the alignment icon
. To place an image freely in a report, check the Overlay option. To
change border thickness, use the Specify selected object line weight icon
border color, use the Specify selected object line color icon
. To change
180
For information about generating a report see the Generate Report section.
6.5.8. Support
The Online Support Page of the Support panel provides most of the useful information that the
application website provides. Useful technical tips, tutorials, FAQs and other information can be
obtained by using the search box and the category list.
As well, feedback on Rapidform products can be left. Feedback and comments on our product will
be valuable information for enhancing the performance and functionality of future and existing
Rapidform products.
Web Contact
The Online Support Page can be accessed via web browser at:
http://rapidform.zendesk.com/home
Reporting a Log File

The log file records all actions while using the application. If an error happens, this file can be
helpful for the developers in troubleshooting. Sometimes it is necessary to send this file with a bug
report.
To generate a log file:
1. Run the Log_rfXOVerifier.bat file located in the installation folder of the application.
181
2. Use the software and try to recreate the event.

3. Once finished, the log file will be generated in the Logs folder under C:\Documents and
Settings\system name\My Documents\product name.
Note: To see the the Support page when the application starts, go to the General tab in File >
Preferences, and set "Show Support At Startup" to True.
6.5.9. Image Folder

The Image Folder stores images that are captured in the application. Images can be captured by
going to File > Capture Screen.
Displaying Types
In the Image Folder, two display types are available: Thumbnail View and Filmstrip View.
182
Thumbnail View
Filmstrip View
Images can be cycled forward or backward using the forward and backward buttons
They can also be rearranged by dragging and dropping them between other images.
Right-clicking on a thumbnail will display the following pop-up menu.
Delete Deletes a captured image.

Export Exports a thumbnail to another format like jpg or bmp.
Copy to Clipboard Copies an image to the clipboard.
Copy to Report Copies an image to the Report tab.
183
6.5.10. Console
The Console panel shows the detailed results of an operation. The results with its histogram log
calculated by the Measure > Mesh Deviation and Add-Ins > Global Register commands will be
printed in the Console window.
Clicking the right mouse button on the Console window will enable the following commands:
Copy Selection Only Copies a selected list.
Copy All Copies all lists.
Clear Clears all selections.
6.5.11. Error List

The Error List panel shows errors while rebuilding a feature history (Edit > Rebuild), converting
an .xdl file (File > Convert XDL) and importing nominal data with its PMI (File > PMI Import
Wizard). Erroneous features are shown with the
icon.
6.5.12. Tabular View

In the Tabular View, information of entities such as Comparison Points, Section Deviations, Curve
Deviations, Boundary Deviations, Whole Deviations, Ref. Positions, GD&Ts, Measurements, and Ref.
184
Geometries can be seen in a table.

Clicking the drop down menu button at top-right of the Tabular View will display a pop-up
menu where the display of the Tabular View can be set and tables can be exported in the .txt
and .csv file formats.
Removing and Adding Items in the Tabular View

To remove a field item, drag the item and drop in outside of the Tabular View.
To add a field item, select Field Chooser in the pop-up menu by clicking the drop down menu
button
and drag the item and drop it into the Tabular View.
Summary items can also be controlled by the Summary Chooser dialog box. Check summary
items to be displayed in the Tabular View.
185
Change the style of the Tabular View

The font and background color of the Tabular View can be changed by the Set Font and Set
Background Color options that can be accessed by clicking the drop down menu button
6.6.
Model View
The Model View is the main workspace. Models and entities are displayed and manipulated in the
Model View. It supports 4 different types of views, four kinds of three-window based views and two
kinds of two-window based views by going to View > View Port.
How to Rotate
Use the right mouse button.
Single-click the wheel button and use the left mouse button.
Use the arrow button on the keyboard.
186
Note: To fix the view direction and rotate the model, move the cursor near border of the Model
View and the cursor will change from
to
. Drag the mouse by following the border.
How to Pan
Ctrl + Right mouse button.
Single-click the Wheel button and use Ctrl + Left mouse button combination.
Left + Right mouse button.
How to Zoom
Shift + Right mouse button.
Single-click the Wheel button and use Shift + Left mouse button combination.
6.7.
Dialog Tree
When a command name includes an ellipsis is selected, a corresponding dialog tree will be
displayed in the Model View. According to prerequisite conditions, some controls might be
enabled or disabled.
Common Format
The following is the common format of a dialog tree.
Left side
The drop down arrow icon
collapse a dialog tree.
or the Tilde ( ~ ) button on the keyboard can be used to expand or
If the pin button is enabled ( ), whenever the user moves the mouse cursor away from the
dialog tree, it will automatically collapsed. When the mouse cursor is near the dialog tree it will
automatically expand. This behavior is useful to maximize available space to view a model. If the
button is disabled, the dialog tree is always expanded irrespective of the mouse position.
Right side
The Preview button
enables a user to preview the result of an operation before apply a
command to a model. After an operation is finished, the OK
and Restore buttons
will be
enabled. Directly clicking the OK button on some commands like Global Register will
187
automatically change it to the Break button so it can be stopped before calculation has finished.
The ESC key can also be used to stop a process. While a command is being performed, the dialog
tree will be disabled and options or parameters will not be able to be modified.
Folded Format
The plus and minus icons,
and
, allow a dialog tree to be folded or unfolded or to control
various parameters. Click the plus icon
in front of More Options to access more options.
Click the Reset button

to deselect all entities. If entities were already selected, they will be
automatically listed in the selection list. To remove entities from the selection list, select them
again while holding down the Ctrl key. To deselect the last selected entity only, click the undo icon
.
Procedure Format
Click the Next Stage

button
button to go to the next phase of a procedure. Click the Previous Stage
to go to a previous phase.
Length
Click the Flip Direction icon
icon
to flip the direction of a parameter. Click the Measure Distance
to measure distance and input an alternate value if necessary. Click the radius Measure
Radius button
to measure a radius and input an alternate value if necessary. The Measure
Distance and Measure Radius commands are the same as the Measure > Distance and Measure >
Radius commands in the top menu. To select a position on a line or plane, hold down the Ctrl key
and pick a point. To average a measured value, use the Shift key and measure.
Radius
Click the Calculate With Mesh Data icon
to calculate values automatically from mesh data
rather than inputting a value manually.

188
Entity
Click the Add icon

to add an additional instance of controls. Click the Remove icon
remove an instance of controls.
Click the All icon
to
to select all entities.
Operation
The Edit Control box for a floating-point number allows the input of a numerical value or a
numerical formula. The available symbols and functions are as follows:
- A numerical formula that starts with an equal =.
- plus(+), minus(-), multiplication(*), division(/), power(^), factorial(!), square root(sqrt), absolute
value(fabs), trigonometrical function(sin, cos, tan, sec, cosec, cot, sinh, cosh, tanh, asin, acos, atan),
exponential(exp), or logarithmic(log, ln) function.
- No distinction between capital letters and lowercase letters.
- Spacing is ignored.
6.8.
Monitoring Bars
The Monitoring Bars show the current operation status, progress information, time information,
memory consumption information, and the free space available in the cache folder.
6.8.1. Status Bar

The Status Bar shows an explanation of a selected command and the progress of an executed
command.
189
6.8.2. Progress Bar

Progress of a current operation is shown in the Progress Bar. It will be displayed as a numerical
percentage.
6.8.3. Time Indicator

The Total Time, Operation Time, Current System Time, as well as the Reset Time for the
application can be viewed by right-clicking on the time indicator.
The total time is the time spent in a session. The Operation Time is the time spent on one specific
operation. The Current System Time is the computer clock time. When the Time Reset option is
chosen, the time will change to 0:0:0.
6.8.4. Memory Usage Indicator

The memory usage can be check in the Memory Usage Indicator. The graph on the Memory Usage
Indicator will be increased according to the memory usage. If the graph is getting higher, strongly
recommend that you suppress features so that it is unloaded into the cache folder. To suppress the
features, refer to the chapter User Interface > Docking Bars > Tree.
6.8.5. Cache Disk Indicator

The free space available in the cache disk can be check in the Cache Disk Indicator. The green mark
on the Cache Disk Indicator will be changed to the yellow and red according to reducing the free
space available. If the mark is changed to red, strongly recommend that you assign the cache
folder to another disk or increase the free space in the cache disk. To assign the cache folder, refer
190
to the chapter Menu > File > Preferences.
6.9.
Esc Key
To cancel a current operation, press the Esc key. It is same as clicking the Break button
The Esc key cancels a command execution and deselects all currently selected entities.
6.10. Mouse Control

A mouse is the main device for controlling the application. Clicking buttons or objects with or
without certain keyboard modifier keys alters the way models on the screen are created, selected,
moved, edit or viewed. For simplicity, we have used specific instruction conventions within this
manual:
Left-click Press and release the Left mouse button.
Middle-click Press and release the Middle mouse button.
Right-click Press and release the Right mouse button.
Double-click Rapidly click the left mouse button twice.
Drag Single-click and hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse.
Mouse Button
Action
Left-click
Left
Usage
- selects a single item, button or icon.
- run menus and select options.
Double-click
- open the properties of the node in the model.

- make a docking window float, or vice versa.
Shift + Left-click
- select multiple items.
Ctrl + Left-click
- deselect items.
191
Middle
Drag
- rotate (in viewing mode after middle-clicking)

- select multiple items.
- move toolbar, window, dialog tree or dialog box.
Shift + Drag
- zoom (in viewing mode after middle-clicking)
Ctrl + Drag
- pan (in viewing mode after middle-clicking)
Middle-click
- run the Pause command for switching selection

mode to viewing mode, or vice versa.
Scroll wheel
- dynamic zoom in/out

- access pop-up menus which contain a context-
Right-click
Right
sensitive set of frequently used functions.
Drag
- rotate
Left + Right-click +
Drag
Ctrl + Drag
- pan
- pan
If the mouse position is near a border in the Model View and the model can be rotated, the cursor
will change to the rotate icon
6.11. Shortcut Keys

The shortcut keys provide quick access to the most commonly used commands. Keyboard
shortcuts offer an alternative method of performing actions for users who prefer the keyboard to
the mouse. Some of the commands in the application have default shortcut keys. Custom shortcut
keys can be defined by using the Customize menu on the toolbar.
The following is a list of default shortcut keys in the application:
File menu
Shortcut Key
192
New
Ctrl + N
Open
Ctrl + O
Save
Ctrl + S
Print
Ctrl + P
Select menu
Shortcut Key
All
Shift + A, Ctrl + A
None
Shift + N, Ctrl + D
Inverse
Shift + I, Ctrl + Shit + I
Edit menu
Shortcut Key
Undo
Ctrl + Z
Redo
Ctrl + Y
Repeat Last Command
Ctrl + Space
Cut
Ctrl + X
Copy
Ctrl + C
Paste
Ctrl + V
Delete
Delete
View menu
Shortcut Key
Zoom Area
Shift + Z
Zoom Previous Area
Shift + X
Zoom Fit
Ctrl + F
Zoom PIP
Ctrl + W
View > Mesh Display Mode > Point Set
F5
View > Mesh Display Mode > Wireframe
F6
View > Mesh Display Mode > Shaded
F7
View > Mesh Display Mode > Shaded

With Edges
F8
View > Viewpoint > Front
Alt + 1
View > Viewpoint > Back
Alt + 2
View > Viewpoint > Left
Alt + 3
View > Viewpoint > Right
Alt + 4
View > Viewpoint > Top
Alt + 5
View > Viewpoint > Bottom
Alt + 6
View > Viewpoint > Isometric
Alt + 7
View > Viewpoint > Align View
Ctrl + Shift + A
View > Visibility > Point Clouds
Ctrl + 1
View > Visibility > Meshes
Ctrl + 2
View > Visibility > Surface Bodies
Ctrl + 3
View > Visibility > Solid Bodies
Ctrl + 4
View > Visibility > Curves
Ctrl + 5
View > Visibility > Sections
Ctrl + 6
193
View > Visibility > Ref. Points
Ctrl + 7
View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors
Ctrl + 8
View > Visibility > GD&Ts
Ctrl + 9
View > Visibility > Deviation
Ctrl + 0
Etc
Shortcut Key
Auto Hide Docking Bar
F12
Help Context
F1
Break Command
Esc
Apply Command
Return
Shrink Dialog Tree
`( Single Quote)
6.12. Pop-up Menus

In the application view, right-clicking will display pop-up menus. The pop-up menu that is
displayed is based on the current mode and view.
Viewing Mode (
When in the viewing mode (

displayed:
) and the mouse is right-clicked, the following menu will be
Zoom Fit Fits a model to the entire viewing window.

Zoom Area Zooms the viewing area in on a selected rectangular region.
Zoom PIP Enlarges a view at the position of the mouse cursor.
Zoom To Selection Fits selected entities in the graphic area.
Align View Aligns the view respective to a selected planar entity.
194
Selection Mode (
When in the selection mode ( ) and the mouse is right-clicked in an empty area, the following
pop-up menu will be displayed.
Annotation Display Control Displays the Annotation Display Control dialog for changing
annotation styles.
Preset Shows default tag format if Default is selected and shown simple tags if Simple is
selected.
Default
Simple
Selection Mode Shows possible modes using the sub menu.

All - Faces Selects all faces.
None Deselects all selections.
Inverse Inverses current selections.
After Entity Selection

When selecting certain types of entities and accessing the pop-up menu, the command list might
be displayed differently. The following image is the menu for Faces.
195
Note: Holding the Ctrl button and accessing a pop-up menu for the selection of an edge, will
display the Deselect Tangent Edges command instead of the Select Tangent Edges
command.
Selection on Overlapped Entities

When there are overlapping entities in the Model View, it could be difficult to select an entity. In
such cases, hold a left-click on an entity and release and a pop-up menu will be displayed.
196
6.13. 3D Mouse
The application supports 3D hardware devices that can help in the inspection process.
(3Dconnexion, http://www.3dconnexion.com)
A 3D Mouse is a device similar to a joystick in purpose, but it also provides movement control with
6 degrees of freedom. Pull up or push down to move your model. Push left or right to move your
model left or right. Pull towards you or push away to move your model nearer or farther away.
Orientate your model on the screen by simply twisting in any direction to rotate it around the X, Y
or Z axis (pitch, roll, and yaw). With this 3D motion controller, models can be intuitively zoomed,
panned and rotated, exploring and navigating designs as naturally as if they were objects in the
real world.
The Customize dialog box for a 3D mouse can be opened by using the RMB (Right Mouse Button)
on the toolbar. Commands can be assigned to each button on the device.
197
Configuration settings will be saved at the following location; C:\Documents and Settings\User
Name\My Documents\Product Name\Configure\configure\rfSpaceball.cfg
Note: Depending on the device and the pre-set settings of some buttons, they may not be
able to customized.
7. Menu
The topmost menus in Rapidform XOV are: File, Select, Edit, Insert, Tools, Measure, View, AddIns and Help.
Click on one of the menus. Some of the menu choices may be grayed-out and unable to be
selected rather than in black and selectable. There are two possible reasons for this:
-That particular command is not available for the current operation.
-The appropriate prerequisite operations to access the command have not been performed. It is
sometimes necessary to perform operations in a certain order.
7.1.
File
The File menu is the first menu on the menu bar and includes commands to open new or existing
files, import additional files into the application, save files, and take screen captures of models and
the application. In the File menu, the default model settings and global options that affect all the
objects in the viewing window can be altered. The Exit command, which closes the application, is
also located in the File menu.
New Files
New
Creates a new file.
Open Files
Open
Opens an existing xov file.
Convert XDL
Converts and imports the legacy XOV file format, .XDL.
Rapidform XOV3 | Menu
198
Save Files
Save
Saves an existing xov file.
Save As
Saves a copy of an existing xov file.
Import Files
Import Nominal Data

Imports a model file or scan data to use as reference data during inspection.
PMI Import Wizard

Imports Product and Manufacturing Information, also known as PMI.
Import Scan Data

Imports scan data to compare to nominal data.
Replace Files
Replace Scan Data

Repeats an inspection project using different scan data but with the same inspection
parameters used in a previous project.
Batch Process
Batch Process
Executes a series of programs or jobs on a computer without manual intervention.
Export and Publish
Export
Saves selected entities and deviation results in various formats and exports them to other
programs.
Publish
Publishes mesh through Internet Explorer by using the Point Stream and ICF publishing
commands.
Capture Screen
Capture Screen
Creates a screen shot using a variety of methods.
199
Print Files
Print
Prints an active document.
Print Preview
Previews an active document before printing.
Print Setup
Sets printer settings.
Settings
Preferences
Manages global options that affect all objects in the viewing window.
Summary Information
Summary Info
Allows for the input of summary information for a model.
Recent Files
Recent Files
Lists recently used files in the application.
Exit
Exit
Closes the application.
7.1.1. File > New

What
The New command creates a new file to use within the application.
Why
The New command is useful for:
200
Creating a new file for a new project
How to Use
How to create a new file
1.
Go to File > New, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + N keyboard shortcut.
2.
A save file confirmation dialog box will appear for any existing open models that have
been changed. A save confirmation box will not appear for models that had only simple
changes made to it such as a view rotation.
3.
Click Yes to save any open models. To proceed without saving any open models, click
No. To cancel the New File operation, click Cancel.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Exit
7.1.2. File > Open

What
The Open command opens an existing xov file.
Why
The Open command is useful for:
Opening files native to the application
Opening files compatible with the application
How to Use
How to open a file
201
1.
Go to File > Open or click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + O keyboard shortcut.
Note: The application cannot open an .xov file that was created in a newer version of
the software.
2.
A save file confirmation dialog box will appear for any existing open models that have
been changed. A save confirmation box will not appear for models that had only simple
changes made to it such as a view rotation.
3.
Click Yes to save any open models. To proceed without saving any open models, click
No. To cancel the New File operation, click Cancel.
4.
The Open dialog box will appear. Select the path of the file in the File Name box.
5.
Click Open to open the selected file or click Cancel to quit the command.
Options in Detail
Include Display Preference Includes the display preferences stored with an .xov file that can
also be accessed by going to File > Preferences.
Show Preview & Info. Shows a thumbnail preview of the last saved view of a selected .xov file.
Summary Information Displays all entity information for a model being opened.
Note: The summary information for a file can be set in the File Summary information box.
Reference
Related Commands
202
File > Save

File > Save As
File > Recent Files
File > Exit
7.1.3. File > Convert XDL

What
The Convert XDL converts and imports the legacy XOV file format, .XDL.
Why
The Convert XDL command is useful for:
Opening files created in older versions of XOV that used the .XDL file format
How to Use
How to open and convert a .xdl file
1.
Go to File > Convert XDL.
2.
Select a .xdl file. The Summary Information window will show information about the file.
3.
Click Open to open and convert the file or Cancel to exit the Convert XDL command.
Options in Detail
Show Preview & Info. Shows a thumbnail preview of the last saved view of a selected .xdl file.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Save
File > Save As
File > Recent Files
File > Exit
203
7.1.4. File > Save

What
The Save command saves an existing xov file.
Why
The Save command is useful for:
Saving files native to the application
Saving files compatible with the application
How to Use
How to save a file
1.
Go to File > Save or click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + S keyboard shortcut.
Note: To save a copy of the current model use the File > Save As command.
2.
A dialog box will appear for any existing open models that are a format other than
the .xov format. This dialog box will not appear if the model was originally created in
the .xov.
Note: The directory of the last saved file will be remembered and shown when the
Save File command is executed.
3.
Input a name for the file and click Save to save the model or click Cancel to quit the
command.
Note: If a command is not finished, a rollback is being executed, or the model is in any
mode, a prompt box will appear asking if the changes for that command want to be
discarded. Finish the current command, rollback or exit the current mode to save, or
click Cancel to cancel the save command.
204
Reference
Related Commands
File > Save As
7.1.5. File > Save As

What
The Save As command saves a copy of the existing xov file.
Why
The Save As command is useful for:
Saving a file without closing it
Saving a file as a different file type
How to Use
How to save a file using the Save As command
1. Go to File > Save As or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note: To save the current model without a copy use the File > Save command.
2. A save as dialog box will be displayed.

3. Input a name for the file and click Save to save the model or click Cancel to quit the
command.
Note: The directory of the last saved file will be remembered and shown when the
Save File command is executed.
Reference
205
Related Commands
File > Save
7.1.6. File > Import Nominal Data

What
The Import Nominal Data command imports a model file or scan data to use as reference data
during inspection. Nominal data is typically a CAD model but mesh data can also be used. An
imported model will be registered under Nominal Data in the Inspection Feature Tree.
Why
The Import Nominal Data command is useful for:
Importing a model file or scan data as a reference file for inspection
How to Use
A. How to import CAD data as nominal data
1.
Go to File > Import Nominal Data or click the icon in the toolbar. The application
supports the standard file formats IGES, STEP, VDA-FS, and Parasolid without the need for
additional licenses.
To use other formats, the Rapidform Exchange License may need to be installed.
CAD
File
Version Supported
Comments
Extension
CATIA V4
.model
CATIA 4.1.9 to CATIA
- Geometry Only
4.2.4
CATIA V5
.CATPart,
CATIA V5 R2 through
.CATProduct
R22(V5-6 R2012)
- Geometry Only
- Unsupported non-ASCII
character in the file name
206
- PMI Import is supported

Creo
.prt, .prt.*,
PRO/E 16 to Wildfire 5,
(PRO/E)
.asm, .asm.*
Creo 1.0 to 2.0
Siemens NX
.prt
Unigraphics 11 to 18

- Geometry Only
and NX1 to NX8

SolidWorks
.sldprt,
- Geometry Only
SolidWorks 98 to 2012
Geometry only
.sldasm
2.
Click the Open button to import the model.
B. How to import a mesh as nominal data

1.
Go to File > Import Nominal Data or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Choose a mesh and then click the Open button to import the model.
3.
The Auto Segmentation Option dialog will be displayed. This procedure will classify a
mesh into geometric regions.
Select how the mesh is created:
Mesh From CAD Model If a mesh is converted from a CAD model, use this option.
Mesh From Scanning If a mesh is generated from a 3D scanner, use this option.
4.
Click the Make button to see the nominal data with regions.
Note: To set a mesh scan that has already been imported as scan data as nominal
data, select Make As Nominal in the popup menu in the Inspection Feature tree.
207
Options in Detail
Precision Indicates how many decimal places a position in space will carry with it throughout
calculations. The float precision is the default setting and is appropriate for most cases, but
double precision can be used with large data files such as mesh from a long range scanner.
Unit Sets the unit for a model in either mm, cm, m, km, in, ft, and mi.
Fix Erroneous Data Tests for non-manifold faces, coincident vertices and degenerate faces
and fixes them.
Include Texture Includes texture information when importing scan data.
Include Texture
Exclude Texture
Include Hidden Body Includes bodies which state is hidden from other CAD software.
Include Body Includes bodies when importing scan data.
Include Curve Includes curve information when importing scan data.
Include Ref. Geometry includes ref. geometry such as ref. circles, ref. slots, and ref. cylinders
when importing scan data.
Reference
Related Commands
File > PMI Import Wizard
7.1.7. File > PMI Import Wizard

What
The PMI Import Wizard command imports Product and Manufacturing Information, also known
as PMI, that is used is 3D computer-aided design and collaborative product development systems
to convey information on the design of a products components for manufacturing. This includes
208
data such as geometric dimensioning and tolerancing, 3D annotation and dimensions, surface
finish, and material specifications. CAD applications may also refer to PMI as Geometric
Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) or Functional Tolerancing and Annotation (FT&A).
Note: To use the PMI Import Wizard, a 3D PMI license is required. The supported files are listed
below.
CAD
File Extension
Version Supported
Comments
CATIA V5
.CATPart
CATIA V5 R2 through
Unsupported assembly file and

non-ASCII character in the file
R22(V5-6 R2012)
name
Creo
.prt, .prt.*
Unsupported assembly file
Creo 1.0 to 2.0
(PRO/E)
SIEMENS
PRO/E 16 to Wildfire 5,
.prt
NX
Unigraphics 11 to 18 and
NX1 to NX8
Unsupported assembly file
Why
The PMI Import Wizard command is useful for:
Importing PMI information
How to Use
How to import nominal data
1.
Go to File > PMI Import Wizard.
2.
Select an appropriate PMI file to import.
209
Reference
Related Commands
7.1.7.1.
File > PMI Import Wizard > CATIA
What
The CATIA PMI Import Wizard command is used to import a CATIA part file with the .CATPart file
extension that has PMI data into the CATIA application.
CATIA Compatibility Table
Type
Body Edge
Boundary
3D Ref.
Edge
Geom.
Linear
OK
(Exception:
single plane)
OK
(Exception:
ellipse)
OK
(Exception:
ellipse)
OK
(Exception:
single plane,
circle)
Angular
OK
(Exception:
cones apex
angle)
OK
(Exception:
ellipse)
OK
OK
Radial
OK
(Exception:
toruss
inscribed
diameter)
OK
(Exception:
ellipse)
OK
(Exception:
ellipse)
OK
(Exception:
circle, vector)
OK
OK
(Exception:
circle)
Dimension
Counterbore
Form
Body Face
Countersink
OK
Bore Depth
OK
OK
Thickness
OK
OK
OK
OK
Flatness
OK
-
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
line)
plane)
Straightness
Circularity
OK
(Exception:
torus)
OK
(Exception:
line)
OK
(Exception:
circle)
OK
(Exception:
plane, vector)
OK
OK
OK
OK
210
(Exception:
sphere, torus)
Cylindricity
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
line)
circle)
plane)
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
OK
OK
(Exception:
torus)
line, circle)
Angularity
OK
(Exception:
torus)
OK
(Exception:
line, circle)
OK
OK
(Exception:
plane, circle)
Line Profile
OK
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
line, circle,
ellipse)
line, circle,
ellipse)
plane, circle,
vector)
OK
OK
OK
(Exception:
line, circle,
ellipse)
(Exception:
line, circle,
ellipse)
(Exception:
plane, circle,
vector)
Orientation
Location
Surface Profile
OK
OK
plane)
Runout
OK
(Exception:
torus)
OK
(Exception:
circle)
OK
(Exception:
circle)
OK
(Exception:
plane, circle)
Total Runout
OK
(Exception:
torus)
OK
(Exception:
circle)
OK
(Exception:
circle)
OK
(Exception:
plane, circle)
Position
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
plane pair)
line, circle)
line pair)
plane, circle)
OK
OK
OK
(Exception:
(Exception:
line, circle)
line)
OK
OK
OK
(Exception:
sphere, torus)
OK
(Exception:
vertex, line)
OK
(Exception:
vertex,
ellipse, pair
OK
(Exception:
point, circle,
plane, vector)
Concentricity
Symmetry
Datum
OK
(Exception:
circle)
Perpendicularity
Runout
OK
(Exception:
circle)
Parallelism
Profile
(Exception:
circle)
Datum
type)
Note:
The linear dimension of a cylinder height in CAD will be replaced by the length of the axial
211
ref. vector in XOV.
The angular dimension between circles in CAD will be replaced by the angle between planes
in XOV.
The linear dimension on a vector in CAD will be replaced by the distance of two ref. points at
the start and end of the vector in XOV.
The linear dimension on an ellipse in CAD will be replaced by elliptical dimension in XOV.
The linear dimension between un-parallel entities will generate ref. points on a
corresponding position.
XOV Limitations
Custom Planes (View Direction) are not available.
Composites / Compounds are not available.
Projected Modifiers are not available.
Sketch entities are not available.
Arc lengths are not available.
Supports only LMC/MMC/RFS from TZS and TZM.
The shortest linear dimension between surfaces is not available.
A circle from Constructed Geometry is not available.
Datums on constructed geometries are not available.
Flag Note names are used as the content of a Note.
Why
The CATIA PMI Import Wizard tool is useful for:
Importing PMI data into the CATIA application
How to Use
How use the CATIA PMI Import Wizard command
1.
Go to File > PMI Import Wizard > CATIA. Select a file and click the Open button.
Note: When a CAD file is imported using the PMI Import Wizard, the file name will be
displayed between parentheses next to the name of the top project in the Model Tree.
When multiple files have been loaded, file names will be listed by inserting a plus sign
between the parentheses.
212
2.
The first stage will display statistics on imported results.
3.
Click the Next Stage button. An alignment method can be chosen.
Click the Next Stage button. Groups of GD&T can be organized. To add a group, click the
Add New GD&T Feature button and select GD&Ts.
Click OK to complete the command. The model with the defined GD&T groups will be
displayed.
213
Options in Detail
Open Dialog Box
Set Default Tolerance for nominal values (dimensions) whose tolerances are not defined
Allocates GD&Ts that do not have defined tolerances as the definition of the Tolerance Table
that can be accessed in File > Preferences.
Import Hidden Bodies Imports bodies that are hidden in CAD applications.
Actual Mating Defines a mating method to find scan pair geometry.
In Space Finds minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan
pair point along the positive normal direction of target edges based on the Actual Mating
Envelop Rule.
In Material Finds maximum inscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair
point along the negative normal direction of target edges based on the Actual Mating
Envelop Rule.
As Nominal Finds scan pair geometry based on the fitting method that has been defined
in the properties of a target edge.
Best Fit, Min. Bound, and Max. Bound can be used as the fitting method. For more
information, see User Interface > Docking Bars > Properties.
The following image illustrates how Actual Mating can be applied to scan data:
214
<Actual Mating Envelop Rule>
Stage1: Import Results

Number Of Datum Features Shows the results of imported datums.
Number Of Dimension Features Shows the results of imported dimensions.
Number of GT Features Shows the results of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Stage 2: Add Align

Add Align Features Predefines alignments. To add an alignment, click the Add Alignment
button
Stage 3: Grouping GD&Ts

GD&Ts Groups GD&Ts by the Top, Front, and Right default viewpoints. To add a new group,
click the Add New Group button
and select GD&Ts on the screen. To merge a group to the
group above it, click the Merge This Feature And Upper Feature button
GD&Ts To Exclude Shows the result of imported dimensions.
Reference
Related Commands
File > PMI Import Wizard > Siemens NX
File > PMI Import Wizard > Creo(PRO/E)
215
7.1.7.2.
What
The Siemens NX PMI Import Wizard command is used to import a Siemens NX part file with
the .prt file extension that has PMI data into the Siemens NX application.
SIEMENS NX Compatibility Table
Type
Dimension
Body Edge
Boundary
3D Ref.
Edge
Geom.
Linear
OK
OK
OK
OK
Angular
OK
OK
OK
Radial
OK
OK
OK
Counterbore
OK
Countersink
No
No
No
No
Bore Depth
No
No
No
No
OK
(Exception:
cylinder)
OK
OK
Flatness
OK
No
No
Straightness
OK
No
No
OK
(Exception:
sphere, torus)
No
No
Cylindricity
OK
No
No
Parallelism
OK
(Exception:
torus)
No
No
OK
(Exception:
No
Thickness
Form
Body Face
Circularity
Perpendicularity
Orientation
No
-
torus)
OK
(Exception:
torus)
No
Line Profile
OK
No
No
Surface Profile
OK
No
No
Runout
OK
No
No
OK
(Exception:
No
No
Angularity
Profile
Runout
Total Runout
No
-
sphere)
Location
Position
OK
(Exception:
No
No
216
plane pair,
sphere)
OK
Concentricity
No
No
(Exception:
sphere)
OK
(Exception:
Symmetry
No
No
-
plane)
Datum
OK
(Exception:
Datum
No
pair type,
freeform,
sphere, torus)
No
OK
(Exception:
plane, vector)
Note:
ref. vector in XOV.
in XOV.
The linear dimension on an ellipse in CAD will be replaced by the elliptical dimension in XOV.
The linear dimension between entities that are not parallel will generate ref. points on a
XOV Limitations
Custom Plane (View Direction) is not available.
Composite / Compound are not available.
Projected Modifier is not available.
Arc length is not available.
Supported only LMC/MMC/RFS from TZS and TZM.
URL Note is not available.
Coordinate Note is not available.
The title of a note is not available.
3D Ref. geometry for a plan and a vector is not available.
Why
The Siemens NX PMI Import Wizard tool is useful for:
Importing PMI data into the Siemens NX application

217
How to Use
How use the Siemens NX PMI Import Wizard command
1.
Go to File > PMI Import Wizard > Siemens NX. Select a file and click OK.
2.
3.
Click the Next Stage button and choose an alignment method.
218
displayed.
Options in Detail
Open Dialog Box
Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
219
Stage 1: Import Results

Number Of Datum Features Shows the result of imported datums.
Number Of Dimension Features Shows the result of imported dimensions.
Number of GT Features Shows the result of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Stage 2: Add Align

button

GD&Ts To Exclude Shows the results of imported dimensions.
Reference
220
Related Commands
7.1.7.3.
What
The Creo(PRO/E) PMI Import Wizard command is used to import a Creo(PRO/E) part file with
the .prt file extension that has PMI data into the Creo(PRO/E) application.
Creo(PRO/E) Compatibility Table
Type
Dimension
Body Face
Body Edge
Boundary
3D Ref.
Edge
Geom.
OK
(Exception:
vector)
Linear
OK
OK
OK
Angular
OK
OK
OK
(Exception:
circle)
OK
OK
(Exception:
sphere)
OK
Counterbore
OK
OK
OK
OK
Countersink
OK
OK
OK
OK
Bore Depth
OK
OK
OK
OK
Thickness
OK
OK
OK
OK
Flatness
OK
OK
(Exception:
Radial
OK
-
plane)
Straightness
Form
Circularity
OK
OK
(Exception:
line)
OK
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
vector)
-
sphere, torus)
Cylindricity
Orientation Parallelism
OK
(Exception:
cone)
OK
OK
221
(Exception:
plane, vector)
Perpendicularity
OK
OK
(Exception:
plane, vector)
Angularity
OK
OK
(Exception:
plane, vector)
Line Profile
OK
(Exception:
OK
(Exception:
line, circle)
line, circle)
OK
OK
OK
(Exception:
sphere)
OK
(Exception:
Profile
Surface Profile
Runout
Runout
Total Runout
sphere)
OK
(Exception:
single plane,
freeform)
OK
OK
Concentricity
OK
OK
(Exception:
vector)
Symmetry
OK
OK
OK
OK
Datum
OK
OK
OK
OK
(Exception:
vector)
Position
Location
Datum
OK
(Exception:
plane, vector)
Note:
ref. vector in XOV.
in XOV.
The linear dimension on an ellipse in CAD will be replaced by the elliptical dimension in XOV.
The linear dimension between entities that are not parallel will generate ref. points on a
XOV Limitations
222
Custom Plane (View Direction) is not available.
Composite / Compound are not available.
Projected Modifier is not available.
Arc length is not available.
Supported only LMC/MMC/RFS from TZS and TZM.
URL Note is not available.
Coordinate Note is not available.
The title of a note is not available.
3D Ref. geometry for a plan and a vector is not available.
Why
The Creo(PRO/E) PMI Import Wizard tool is useful for:
Importing PMI data into the Creo(PRO/E) application
How to Use
How use the Creo(PRO/E) PMI Import Wizard command
1.
Go to File > PMI Import Wizard > Creo(PRO/E). Select a file and click OK.
2.
3.
Click the Next Stage button. An alignment method can be chosen.
223
displayed.
Options in Detail
Open Dialog Box
224
Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
Stage 1: Import Results

Number Of Datum Features Shows the result of imported datums.
Number Of Dimension Features Shows the result of imported dimensions.
Number of GT Features Shows the result of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Stage 2: Add Align

button
225

GD&Ts To Exclude Shows the result of imported dimensions.
Reference
Related Commands
7.1.8. File > Import Scan Data

What
The Import Scan Data imports scan data to compare to nominal data. An imported model will be
registered under Scan Data in the Inspection Feature tree.
Note: Only .xov files can be imported to use as nominal data.
Why
The Import Scan Data command is useful for:
Importing scan data as meshes or point clouds to compare to nominal data
How to Use
How to import scan data
1.
Go to File > Import Scan Data. Multiple scans can be selected in the Import Scan Data
226
dialog box or scans can be imported one by one. When multiple scans are imported the
following message will be displayed.
2.
If Yes is selected, Tools > Scan Tools > Align command will execute to register scans and
align them. If No is selected, scans will be imported without any other actions.
Options in Detail
and fixes them.
Use ASCII Convert Selects columns and rows to import. Clicking on a column will produce a
pull-down menu used to define the property for that column.
X, Y, and Z are coordinate information.

R, G, and B are color information.
I, J, and K are normal information.
Ignore will ignore contents in the selected column.
A file normally contains X, Y, Z or X, Y, Z, R, G, B information. When only one R, G, B, color
information field has value it signifies an intensity value. When two or more R, G, B, color
information fields have values it signifies color information.
White Character (space, tab) Treats space and tab inputs as separators.
Other Character Treats user defined characters as separators.
Color Value Manually specify a numerical color value. A color range is normally between 0 and
255. When Auto is selected the application will automatically analyze the minimum and
maximum color values and multiply a proper value to create a range within the normal range of
227
0 to 255.
Template Selects a predefined template. To add current user defined settings as a template
click Edit Template and type the template name and click the Add button. The Delete button
removes selected templates from the list. The Default button returns to a default template
status.
Use Custom Setting

Use Custom Setting Specifies sub-options that will be preserved until changed again.
Precision Indicates how many decimal places a position in space will carry with it
throughout calculations. Float precision is the default setting and is appropriate for most
cases but double precision can be used with data of large size such as meshes from long
range scanners.
Sampling Ratio Samples data points by a specified value. When the ratio is 100%, all
selected data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be used.
Points Only Imports point clouds without poly faces.
Mesh Data
Points Only
Include Texture Imports texture information.
Include Texture
Exclude Textures
Include Vertex Normal Imports vertex normal information.
228
Without Vertex Normal
With Vertex Normal
Combine Point Clouds Merges point clouds to make a single point cloud.
Triangulation Cutoff Angle Filters noise during triangulation that has a scan direction
larger than a specified value.
Import Only Imports scan data without further procedures.
Reference
Related Commands
7.1.9. File > Replace Scan Data

What
The Replace Scan Data command repeats an inspection project using different scan data but with
the same inspection parameters used in a previous project.
Note: The import dialog box and options are the same as the ones found at File > Import Scan
Data.
229
Note: When replacing existing scan data with a new scan data, the Select Scan For
Replacement command automatically runs if several scan data files existed. This command
allows choosing target scan data for replacement by using entity name, importing order, and
center of mass.
Why
The Replace Scan Data command is useful for:
Importing scan data using the parameters set in another project
How to Use
How to replace scan data
1.
Go to File > Replace Scan Data or click on the icon in the toolbar. To replace multiple
scans with other scans, pairs need to be made between the defined inspection project
and the replacement scans.
230
2.
The pair dialog tree will be displayed when multiple scans are placed. The Name option
will make pairs by naming the order of the scans. The Import Order option makes pairs
by the import order. The Mass Center option makes pairs by judging the position of the
mass center of each scan.
Pairs can also be made manually by moving the thumbnail of an imported scan in the
Matching Thumbnail panel.
Options in Detail
and fixes them.
Use ASCII Convert Selects columns and rows to import. Clicking on a column will produce a
pull-down menu used to define the property for that column.
231
X, Y, and Z are coordinate information.

R, G, and B are color information.
I, J, and K are normal information.
Ignore will ignore contents in the selected column.
A file normally contains X, Y, Z or X, Y, Z, R, G, B information. When only one R, G, B, color
information field has value it signifies an intensity value. When two or more R, G, B, color
information fields have values it signifies color information.
White Character (space, tab) Treats space and tab inputs as separators.
Other Character Treats user defined characters as separators.
Color Value Manually specify a numerical color value. A color range is normally between 0 and
255. When Auto is selected the application will automatically analyze the minimum and
maximum color values and multiply a proper value to create a range within the normal range of
0 to 255.
Template Selects a predefined template. To add current user defined settings as a template
click Edit Template and type the template name and click the Add button. The Delete button
removes selected templates from the list. The Default button returns to a default template
status.
Use Custom Setting

Use Custom Setting Specifies sub-options that will be preserved until changed again.
Precision Indicates how many decimal places a position in space will carry with it
throughout calculations. Float precision is the default setting and is appropriate for most
cases but double precision can be used with data of large size such as meshes from long
range scanners.
232
Points Only Imports point clouds without poly faces.
Mesh Data
Points Only
Include Texture Imports texture information.
Include Texture
Exclude Textures
Generate Vertex Normal Shows the result of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Without Vertex Normal
With Vertex Normal
Combine Point Clouds Merges point clouds to make a single point cloud.
Triangulation Cutoff Angle Filters noise during triangulation that has a scan direction
larger than a specified value.
Import Only Imports scan data without further procedures.
Reference
Related Commands
233
7.1.10. File > Batch Process

What
The Batch Process commands execute a series of programs or jobs on a computer without
manual intervention by taking a set of scan data files as input, processing the data, and outputting
a set of data files.
Note: When multiple scan data files are opened and scan data files are specified as Active Scan
Data, the Batch Process menu will be unavailable.
Why
The Batch Process commands are useful for:
Processing jobs when computer resources are less busy
Avoiding idling computing resources with minute-by-minute intervention and supervision
Sharing optimized processing with others
Fully utilizing computing resources, helping to amortize the cost of the machine
Options in Detail
Add Files Selects scan data files as input.
Add Folders Groups files in folders while importing scan data files. The Import Each Folder as
234
a Group option groups files in a folder together and if it is not used files in a selected folder will
not be grouped during the import process.
Delete Removes selected scan data from the list box. Using this option after selecting a group
will delete all files in the group.
List UP/DOWN Changes the calculation order of selected scan data. Using this option after
selecting a group will move all files in the group as a single unit.
Replace Scan Pair Option Determines pairing when replacing a scan file that contains
multiple scans.
Group Groups selected files internally to work as one mesh or point cloud. A group name will
be created based on the folder where the top file among the selected files is located.
Ungroup Ungroups a selected group.
Rename Renames a group. When Scan Data File Group is selected in the File Name option
the created result will be named based on the group name.
Auto Group Groups folders based on the files in the groups.
Save Model File Saves resulting files in the .xov file format.
Print Report Prints a report.
Export Report Exports results as a .xov report, .pdf, .ppt, or Excel file.
Folder Saves files at the same location as the original file or defines another folder to save files
to.
File Name Determines a file name for a file to be saved.
7.1.11. File > Export

What
The Export command saves selected entities and deviation results in various formats and exports
them to other programs.
235
Why
The Export command is useful for:
Exporting a file into a different file type
Exporting a file into another program
How to Use
How to export a file
1.
Go to File > Export or click the icon in the toolbar. The application will show the default
extension automatically in the Export dialog box which can be changed. Entities can be
first selected then exported.
Note: Supported extensions for selected entities are listed in the following table:
The possible extensions of the file for the selected entities are as shown below:
Entity
Format
Remarks
XO Model (xdl)
Rapidform Model File 4.0(mdl)
IGES File(igs)
STEP File(stp)
Body
Parasolid Text File(x_t)

Parasolid Binary File(x_b)
ACIS Text File(sat)
ACIS Binary File(sab)
CATIA V4(model)
CATIA V5(catpart)
CATIA V5
requires
Rapidform
Exchange
License.
Binary STL File (stl)

Ascii STL File (stl)
XO Model (xdl)
Rapidform Model File 4.0 (mdl)
Rapidform Points File (pts)
Mesh
Rapidform Polygons File (fcs)

Ascii Points File (asc)
Cyber Ware Binary File (ply)
Cyber Ware Ascii File (ply)
OBJ File (obj)
3D Studio File (3ds)
VRML 1.0 File (wrl)
VRML 97 File (wrl)
INUS Compression File 3.0 (icf)
Kubit File (ptc)
236
Leica File (pts)

AutoCAD DXF File (dxf)
Reference
Geometry
Point, Vector, Plane -> xdl, mdl, igs, stp, sat, sab,
CATIA V4(model), CATIA V5(catpart)
Circle, Cylinder, Sphere, Coordinate -> xdl, mdl
Slot , Rectangle, Polygon, Cone, Torus -> xdl
CATIA V5
requires
Rapidform
Exchange
License.
XO Model (xdl)
Rapidform Model File 4.0 (mdl)
Section
IGES File (igs)

STEP File (stp)
Parasolid Text File (x_t)
Parasolid Binary File (x_b)
ACIS Text File (sat)
ACIS Binary File (sab)
CATIA V4(model)
CATIA V5(catpart)
CATIA V5
requires
Rapidform
Exchange
License.
AutoCAD DXF File (dxf)

Deviations
2.
Text(txt)
CSV(csv)
Click the OK button to export the selected entities or click the Cancel button to quit the
command.
Options in Detail
Geometry Exports geometry entities such as bodies, meshes, and ref. geometries as common
file formats.
Deviation Exports deviation results such as whole deviations and section deviations in the .csv
or .txt file formats. Comparison points can be exported in the .cmpt file format by clicking the
button in the Comparison Point dialog tree.
Reference
Related Commands
237
7.1.12. File > Publish

The Publish menu publishes mesh through Internet Explorer by using the Point Stream and ICF
publishing commands.
7.1.12.1. File > Publish > Point Stream

What
The Publish Point Stream command publishes selected meshes and point clouds as a stream of
points that can be viewed using the Internet Explorer browser. The RPS internet explorer viewer
plug-in is automatically installed when a PC is connected to the internet.
Why
The Publish Point Stream command is useful for:
Publishing a file into a Point Stream to be viewed in an Internet Explorer web browser
How to Use
A. How to publish a file as a point stream
238
1.
Go to File > Publish > Point Stream or click the icon in the toolbar and select a mesh or
a point cloud to publish.
2.
Click the OK button to publish the mesh. An .html and .rps file will be created that is
viewable in an Internet Explorer browser window. The same mouse and keyboard
controls used to rotate, pan and zoom in the application are also used in the browser.
3.
To see the saved file, open the .html file.

If this file is being used for the first time a dialog box used to install the RPS viewer plugin will be displayed. Click Install to install and proceed.
Note: This plug-in is not supported on 64-bit Internet Explorer.
4.
To control viewing:
Rotate: Left mouse button
Pan: Ctrl + Left mouse button
Zoom: Shift + Left mouse button or mouse wheel
B. How to share a generated file

Uploading on a website
The simplest way is to upload both the RPS and HTML files to a webhost, usually with an FTP client,
in the same folder. Then link to the HTM file's location.
To store the RPS and HTML file in a different folder, open the HTML file with a text editor and
change the RPSFilePath parameters value to correct location (Relative path from the directory of
the HTML file is in).
Inserting into another html file
239
To insert the RPS view of your model into another web page, just copy tags everything in the HTML
file from "<OBJECT>" to "</OBJECT>", and paste them into another HTML source file.
Options in Detail
Plug-in Shows the download path for the plug-in.
Version Shows the current version of the RPS viewer.
Width and Height Shows the width and height of the viewing area of a file.
HTML File Path Specifies the name and directory of a HTML document to be generated.
Background Specifies the background color of the RPS viewer. The RGB value can be between
0 and 255. The Use Texture option assigns a specific image as the background.
Without Texture
With Texture
Antialiasing Enables or disables anti-aliasing when a model is in a static state in the RPS
viewer.
Zoom Limit Controls the range of zoom-in. No Limit allows infinite zoom, Bounding Sphere
allows zooming up to the boundary of a boundary sphere, Nearest Distances allows zooming
to a nearest distance and Limit Factor scales zooming distance for the Bounding Sphere and
Nearest Distance options.
Launch Internet Explorer Specifies if a .html file will be opened in Internet Explorer upon
publishing.
Using the Point Stream Viewer
240
Shader Mode Sets various shader mode settings. For more information, see Display tab page.
Point Size Defines the drawing size of points.
Reset View Resets the view to the default view.
Model Information Displays the Number Of Points and Size Of Model.
Help Displays the help panel.
About RPS Viewer Displays the RPS Viewer information.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Publish > ICF
241
7.1.12.2. File > Publish > ICF

What
The Publish ICF command publishes selected entities (point cloud, mesh, surface or solid body) in
the .icf file format, enabling them to be viewed by the Internet Explorer browser. The ICF internet
explorer viewer plug-in is automatically installed when a PC is connected to the internet.
Why
The Publish ICF command is useful for:
Publishing a file into a .icf file to be viewed in the Internet Explorer web browser
How to Use
A. How to publish a file as an .ICF file
1.
Go to File > Publish > ICF or click the icon in the toolbar and select point cloud, mesh,
surface or solid body to publish.
242
2.
Click the OK button to publish the mesh. A .html and .icf file will be created that is
viewable in an Internet Explorer browser window. The same mouse and keyboard
controls used to rotate, pan and zoom in the application are also used in the browser.
Display properties of the web browser can be altered by changing the .html file that is
created.
The following table shows the parameter list you can use in the html code.
PARAM NAME
VALUE
Default Value
IcfPath
Location of ICF file
BackgroundColor
Three real values between 0 Gray color, the default

and 1, for example "0.5 1.0 color of xo
0.5"
ShowGrid
"true" or "false"
"true"
ShowWorldAxis
"true" or "false"
"true"
EnableGradientBackgr
oud
"true" or "false"
"true"
EnableDynamicDraw
"true" or "false"
"true"
DynamicDisplayRatio
"100", "50", "25", "10", "5", "1", "25"

"0.5", "0.1", auto (identical
243
with the value of xo)

StaticDisplayRatio
"100", "50", "25", "10", "5", "1", "100"

"0.5", "0.1" (identical with the
value of xo)
ShadingMode
One among "point shading", "smooth shading"

"smooth shading", "smooth
shading with point", "smooth
shading with point", "flat
shading", "flat shading with
edge ", and "flat shading with
edge"
(with point means whether
or not to show the vertex and
with edge means whether
or not to show the edges.)
Light
Multiple
choice
among "light1"
"light1", "light2", "light3" and

"light4" , or "lightall"
ProjectionMode
"perspective" or "parallel"
"perspective"
ViewOrientation
One among "front", "back", "front"

"left", "rignt", "top", "bottom",
"isometric"
EnableViewportLock
"true" or "false"
"false"
EnableTransparency
"true" or "false"
"false"
DrawBackface
"true" or "false"
"true"
BackfaceMode
One among "complement "complement color"

color", "as is", and user
defined
AnnotAlignMode
One among "free" , "snap", "snap"

and "automatic"
DelayLoad
true" or "false"
false
If it is "true", automatic icf

loading and drawing is not
carried
out
until
LoadDelayedIcf() method is
called.
PointSize
Size of vertex point, it should 2

be integer value and bigger
than 0
ShowModelTree
"true" or "false"
false
(Specifies whether or not to
show Model Tree when
ICFViewer
is
initially
244
executed.)
AutoShowHideModelT
ree
"true" or "false"
(Specifies whether or not to
show Model Tree when
ICFViewer
executed.)
ShowFPS
true
is
initially
"true" or "false"
(Displays
the
false
number
of
frames per second)

SHowColorBar
3.
"true" or "false"
true
To see the saved file, open the .html file.

If this file is being used for the first time a dialog box used to install the ICF viewer plug-in
will appear. Click Install to install and proceed.
Note: This plug-in is not supported on 64-bit Internet Explorer.
4.
To control viewing:
Rotate: Right mouse button
Pan: Right + Left mouse button
Zoom: Right + Left mouse button or mouse wheel
B. How to share a generated file

Uploading on a website
The simplest way is to upload both the ICF and HTML files to a webhost, usually with an FTP client,
in the same folder. Then link to the HTM file's location.
To store the ICF and HTML file in a different folder, open the HTML file with a text editor and
change the "IcfPath" parameters value to correct location (Relative path from the directory of the
HTML file is in).
Inserting into another html file
To insert the ICF view of your model into another web page, just copy tags everything in the HTML
file from "<OBJECT>" to "</OBJECT>", and paste them into another HTML source file.
Options in Detail
245
Plug-in Shows the location of the plug-in codebase.

Version Shows the current version of the .icf viewer.
Width and Height Shows the width and height of the viewing area of the file.
Fit Screen Size to Window on Resize Fits the viewer size to the Explorer window size when
the Explorer window size is adjusted.
HTML File Path Specifies the name and directory of a HTML document to be generated.
Enable Dynamic Draw Enables the Dynamic Display Ratio.
Dynamic Display Ratio Changes the amount points drawn while a model is in motion.
Static Display Ratio Changes the amount points drawn while a model is static.
Geometry Compression Ratio Defines the resolution of a saved model. When Lossless is set,
geometry will be preserved as it is but will create a larger file size.
Launch Internet Explorer Specifies if an .icf file will be opened in Internet Explorer upon
publishing.
Using the ICF Viewer
Reset View Resets the view to the default view.

Fit Zoom Fits the view to the screen.
Show Model Tree Shows the model tree.
Auto Show / Hide Model Tree Shows the collapsible model tree at left side. When the mouse
cursor is hovered over the Show Model Tree, the tree will be displayed.
Viewpoint Changes the viewing direction of the model.
246
Point Size Defines the drawing size of points.

About ICFViewerXO2 Control Displays the ICF Viewer information.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Publish > Point Stream
7.1.13. File > Capture Screen

What
The Capture Screen command creates a screen shot using a variety of methods. Captured images
are registered in the Image folder.
Why
The Capture Screen command is useful for:
Capturing a model in its current state
Capturing an image of a model to use in another program
247
How to Use
How to capture a file
1.
Go to File > Capture Screen or click the icon in the toolbar. The Capture Screen dialog
box will be displayed.
Note: The captured images saved to the Image Folder can be set to be shown as
thumbnails or filmstrip view.
2.
Select Current View as the Target method.
3.
Click the OK button to save the image to the Image Folder.
Options in Detail
Current View Captures the current view.
Entire Model View Captures the entire model view.
Mouse Dragging Area Captures the area defined by dragging the mouse drag.
Selected Window Captures a selected window.
Application Window Captures an entire application window.
White Background Sets the background of the capture to white and is available if the Target
248
is Current View, Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area.

Transparent Background Sets the background of the capture to transparent and is available if
the Target is Current View, Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area. Transparent
background is preserved when the exported image format is .tiff or .png.
Custom Resolution Sets a custom resolution with values between 20 and 8192 and is
available if the Target is Current View, Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area.
Show Dialog Tree Captures the dialog tree and is available if the Target is Current View,
Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area.
Copy To Windows Clipboard Copies a captured image to the windows clipboard, allowing
pasting into other applications.
Reference
Related Commands
Docking Bars > Image Folder
7.1.14. File > Print

What
The Print command prints the active document.
Why
The Print command is useful for:
Printing a current project
How to Use
How to print a file
1.
Go to File > Print or click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + P keyboard shortcut.
2.
Select the Printer, Print range and Number of copies.
249
3.
Click OK to complete the command.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Print Preview
File > Print Setup
7.1.15. File > Print Preview

What
The Print Preview command previews an active document before printing.
Why
The Print Preview command is useful for:
Previewing what a print-out will look like before printing
How to Use
How to print preview a file
1.
Go to File > Print Preview or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
A preview of the active document will be shown.
3.
Click Print to print the document or Close to exit without printing.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Print
File > Print Setup
7.1.16. File > Print Setup

250
What
The Print Setup command sets printer settings.
Why
The Print Setup command is useful for:
Changing printers
Changing printer properties
Changing paper size
How to Use
How to use print setup
1.
Go to File > Print Setup or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
A preview of the active document will be shown.
3.
Change settings and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit Print Setup.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Print
File > Print Preview
251
7.1.17. File > Preferences

What
The Preferences commands manage global options that affect all objects in the viewing window.
Options are saved to each .xov file and can be used later.
Note: After updating the application, customized settings files from older versions of the
application such as the Template, MaterialInfo.xmt.rfPreference.xpf, rfSpaceball.cfg, and
rfToolBarInfo.cfg can be used again. These files are located at: ~\Users\User
Name\Documents\Product Name
Why
The Preferences commands are useful for:
Changing colors
Changing line, point, and edge sizes
Changing global tolerances
Changing hardware settings
Changing input/output settings
Changing general settings
How to Use
How to set up Preferences
1.
Note: When starting the application for the first time the Initial Setup Dialog box will
be displayed. True or False can be selected for the option to Use Previous Version of
customized settings. To enable the option make sure the setting file is located at:
C:\Documents and Settings\User Name\My Documents\Product Name.
The settings for toolbars and customized toolbars can be imported, however the
position of customized toolbars cannot be imported and will be in a hidden state by
default.
Go to File > Preferences.
252
2.
The Preference dialog box will be displayed. Change the Background color to light
green in the Dialog Tree section in the Display tab.
3.
Click Apply to apply changes without closing the dialog box. The color of the dialog tree
will become green.
4.
Change preferences as desire and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit Preferences.

Preferences can be exported as a .xpf file by using the Export button, and can also be
imported by using the Import button. The Reset button will return the Default Decimal
Place, Default Measure Unit, Thousand Separators preferences as well as all entities in
the display tab to their default states.
Options in Detail
General Tab
Enable Multi-thread Enables multiple core or multiple thread enabled processors to utilize
multiple threads, speeding up the inspection process.
253
Template XOV File Specifies the directory of the xov file that is used as the template.
Update Product Automatically Updates the application automatically when the option is set
to True and the program is launched.
Cache Folder For Unloading And Backup Specifies a directory for temporary file caching and
is located in the user's temporary directory assigned by the system environment variables by
default.
Note: When working with large files it is recommended that the cache folder is set to a
separate dedicated hard disk drive. Setting the virtual memory to a separate dedicated hard
disk drive can also improve performance, especially when using Microsoft Windows Vista OS.
Show Support At Startup Show the Support tab whenever the application is launched when
set to True.
Auto Save Reminder In Every X Minutes Sets the amount of time in-between save dialog box
reminders.
View Manipulation Style Selects a view manipulation style (zooming, panning, and rotating)
from either Rapidform, SolidWorks, Siemens NX, Creo(Pro/E), CATIA, PolyWorks, or Geomagic.
Zooming Center Of Mouse Wheel Scroll Sets the zooming center to the position of the
mouse cursor or the center of the screen.
Rotation Angle Of Down/Up Arrow Key (degree) Sets the rotation angle in the model view
when using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Undo Depth (times) Sets the maximum amount of actions saved for the Undo command.
Default Decimal Place Sets the number of digits displayed after a decimal point between 1
and 10.
Default Input (Scanner) Unit Selects a default unit to use if there is no apparent unit in the
file format although it can be changed when importing a foreign file and is set by default to the
unit in the first loaded file.
Note: The default scanner unit is used for files that do not have an internal definition for
units. This is different than the Default Measure Unit parameter.
Default Measure Unit Sets the default measurement units for models.
254
Thousand Separators Separates thousands from hundreds for Real Value and Integer Value
numbers that have four or more places to the left of the decimal separator when set to True.
Sound Specifies the sounds used when the command completes, breaks, or sends a message
and can be either the default application sound or a user-specified sound.
Display Tab
Draw Properties Sets the color, size, width, fonts, shadows, backgrounds, transparency, and
other draw properties for entities within the application.
255
256
Dialog Tree Sets the font face for dialog trees.
Geometry Type Material Sets the default colors for geometry type materials.
Body Sets the default body material colors.
257
Ref. Geometry Sets the default properties for ref. geometry.
3D Sketch Sets the default properties for sketches.
Manipulator Sets the default properties for manipulators.
258
Widget Sets the default properties for widgets.
Accuracy Analyzer Sets the default properties for the Accuracy Analyzer.
259
OpenGL Sets the default properties for OpenGL.

Triangle Offset Displays the offset value of triangles when overlapping with other entities.
Line Offset Displays offset values of lines when overlapping with other entities.
Point Offset Displays offset values of points when overlapping with other entities.
The value range can be set from -1.0 to 1.0. If the value is set as -1.0, the entities closer to the
viewer will be displayed. If the value is set as 1.0, entities farther from the viewer will be
displayed. Using this option can define the overlapping order of entities.
Tolerance Tab
Mesh Sets the Outlier For Allowable Deviation % value.
Outlier For Allowable Deviation (%) Ignores the poly-vertices that cause the largest
deviations within a given value while creating fitting surfaces from mesh data. After
creating fitting surfaces, the area that will be less than this value.
Geometry Type Checking Control Sets the criteria of geometry type classification.
Outlier For Geometry Type Checking (%) - Ignores poly-vertices that cause the largest
deviations within a given value when fitting mesh regions to analytic geometry. After
creating analytic geometry, the area will be less than this value.
Geometry Type Checking Tolerance (mm) Tries to fit selected regions to specific
analytic geometry after removing outliers by the value of the Outlier For Geometry Type
Checking. If the maximum deviation is within this value, the application will recognize that
analytic geometry.
260
Maximum Radius Of Analytic Shape (mm) Accepts estimated analytic regions if their
radius values are less than a given value when the application estimates selected regions
to be analytic geometry. This value prevents the application from estimating a selected
region as a meaningless analytic geometry.
Geometry Fitting Control Sets the geometry fitting control properties.
Set Maximum Point Number For Geometry Fitting And Type Finding Limits the
number of points used for fitting when this option is True. When it is False, all points inside
of the searching zone will be used for fitting.
Maximum Point Number Defines the maximum number of points to be used for fitting.
Hardware Tab
Processor Feature Support Sets processor feature support properties. SSE2 (Streaming SIMD
Extensions), SSE3 or SSSE3 can be enabled which are provided by a CPU for higher processes.
These optimized settings are automatically set by the application after installing or running the
Performance Profiler (Help > Launch Performance Profiler).
OpenGL Renderer Setup Sets OpenGL rendering properties.
Use Trackball Depth Average Calculates the rotation center in the Model View.
Trackball Depth Average Resolution Sets the panning depth for a trackball in the
Model View.
Frame Buffer Save/Restore Optimizes rendering and speed settings and are
automatically set by the application after installing or running the Performance Profiler
(Help > Launch Performance Profiler).
Off-Screen Rendering Mode Determines graphic acceleration by Software or
Hardware. If a graphic device supports hardware acceleration, it is recommended setting
this option as Hardware.
Hardware Multi-thread Rendering Support Sets multi-threaded rendering support
when Hardware is selected in the Off-Screen Rendering option by selecting true or false.
Set to false when hardware cannot support this option.
Video RAM As Extended Memory Improves mesh rendering performance higher to
easily handle large mesh data using VBO functionality of OpenGL. It is recommended to
turn on this option for most graphic cards when handling millions of meshes to prevent
261
any abnormal display problems

Note: VBO is a functionality that uploads data into the video memory so that the data
resides in the video memory rather than the system memory for direct rendering from
graphic cards.
User Shader Programs For Enhanced Rendering - Enhances the clarity of shading when
a point cloud is shaded on a body.
Scanner Direct Control Sets frequently used scanners so when the LiveInpect command is
used only those scanners will be displayed in the Devices pull down menu.
File I/O
Default Import File Formats Sets True/False values for importing commonly used file formats.
Only commonly used formats will be displayed in the Import dialog box.
Locale
Language Sets the desired language within the application. Installed languages will be listed.
Note: Language packs are used to enable functionalities with specific languages and locales
within the application.
When installing Rapidform product, the English language pack will be installed by default
and a language pack will be installed based on the language of the OS system. The installed
language pack based on the OS will be the default language for the application but it can be
easily changed.
To use other languages instead of the default installed languages, additional language packs
262
need to be installed.
How to install language packs

1.
Insert the installation DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
2.
Browse the DVD-ROM directory and then go to the Language folder, double-click on the
setup.exe file within the desire language pack folder.
3.
After installation is complete, run the application.
4.
Go to File > Preferences, click the Locale tab, and choose desire language in the
Language option.
5.
Close the application then restart it.
How to download language packs

If the Rapidform product is installed using the Auto Update function, language packs will
need to be downloaded to use another language within the application.
1.
Go to website: http://www.rapidform.com/softwareupdate
2.
Download the language pack zip file in the XOV3/Verifier list.
3.
Unzip the zip file.
4.
Double-click the setup.exe file and follow the instructions.
Locale Format Sets the display format of numbers and time.
Reference
Related Commands
Docking Bars > Display
7.1.18. File > Summary Info

What
263
The Summary Info command allows for the input of summary information for a model.
Note: While opening a saved file, the summary information shows if the Show Preview & Info
Box option is checked in the Open dialog box.
Why
The Summary Info command is useful for:
Changing basic file summary information
How to Use
How to change summary information
1.
Go to File > Summary Info.
2.
The Summary Information dialog box is displayed.
3.
Change summary information as desire and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit the
Summary Information command.
7.1.19. File > Recent Files

What
264
The Recent Files command lists the recently used files in the application.
Why
The Recent File command is useful for:
Conveniently viewing recently used files
How to Use
How to view and open recent files
1.
Go to File > Recent Files. Mouse-over the command and a black arrow pointing to the
right will be displayed showing recently opened files.
2.
Select a file to open it.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Open
7.1.20. File > Exit

What
The Exit command closes the application.
Why
The Exit command is useful for:
Closing the application after a project is finished
Closing the application when the system is not in use to free computing resources
How to Use
How to exit the application
1.
Go to File > Exit.

265
2.
If there are unsaved changes a dialog box will be displayed.
3.
Save files as desire and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit the Exit command.
Reference
Related Commands
File > Save
File > Save As
7.2.
Select
When most of commands are executed, the selection mode is automatically activated. The Select
menu features advanced selection tools, which allows the selection of various entities in the
Model View.
Overall
Mode
Configures the shape of a selection tool.
All
Selects all entities.
None
De-selects all entities.
Inverse
Selects the inverse of selected entities.
Specific Entities
Custom Region
Selects an area by user selected vertices.
Boundary Entities
Selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around selected boundaries.
Entities Around Edges/Faces

Selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around selected entities.
Area
266
Enlarge
Enlarges a selection by a specified depth or angle.
Shrink
Shrinks selected poly-faces by a specified depth.
Convert Selection
Convert Current Selection

Converts entities to another entity type.
Selection Standard
By Criteria
Selects components of a face, boundary, curve, or poly-face entities based on edge length,
area or angle, as well as other components.
By Color
Selects poly-faces or poly-vertices by color.
Exterior selection
Exterior Poly-Face
Selects exterior regions of poly-faces on mesh data.
Filters can help make selections of entities easier.
Select Filter
Select various kinds of entities within in the application.
(Filter Bodies) - Allows the selection of bodies only.
(Filter Meshes/Point Clouds) - Allows the selection of meshes and point clouds only.
(Filter Faces/Regions) - Allows the selection of faces and regions only.
(Filter Boundaries) - Allows the selection of boundaries only.
(Filter Edges) - Allows the selection of edges and curves only.
(Filter Vertices) - Allows the selection of vertices and points only.
(Filter Poly-Faces) - Allows the selection of poly-faces only.
(Filter Poly-Vertices) - Allows the selection of vertices and points only.
267
(Filter Sections) - Allows the selection of sections and section edges only.
(Filter Mesh Boundaries) - Allows the selection of mesh boundaries only.
(Filter Ref. Geometries) - Allows the selection of ref. geometries only.
(Filter GD&Ts) - Allows the selection of GD&Ts only.
(Filter Tags) - Allows the selection of tags only.
(Clear All Filters) - Clears all selection filters (Shift + F).
Note: When a selection filter is on but the cursor is over an empty area, an icon (
) beside
the cursor will appear.

When the Mode is changed, the Selection Filters will be reset.
7.2.1. Select > Mode

What
The Select Mode command configures the shape of the selection tool.
Why
The Select Mode command is useful for:
Changing the shape of the selection tool to provide flexibility in selecting entities
How to Use
How to use the selection tool
1.
Go to Select > Mode or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Choose the selection mode type.
3.
Drag the selection tool over entities to select. To add a current selection to selections
already made, use the Shift button. To remove a current selection from selections
already made, use the Ctrl button.
268
Options in Detail
Note: All selection modes are able to select poly-vertices and poly-faces. The Rectangle
selection is the default selection mode in the application and can select any entities.
Line Selects a straight line by clicking at one end of a supposed line and dragging to another.
Note: The width of a line can be edited by using Alt + left mouse buttons together.
Rectangle Selects a region by dragging from one corner of an imaginary box to the opposite
diagonal corner.
Circle Selects a circular region by clicking in the center of a supposed circle and dragging
outward.
Note: The radius of a circle can be edited by using Alt + left mouse buttons together.
Polyline Selects the inside of a polygon by picking points in the viewing window and clicking
the RMB or double-clicking the LMB to finalize.
269
Freehand Selects an irregularly shaped region by tracing a perimeter with the mouse while
dragging.
Paint Brush Selects regions that the mouse cursor covers during the dragging.
Note: The range of the paint brush can be edited by using Alt + left mouse buttons together.
Flood Fill Selects poly-faces within same boundary.
Extend To Similar Select areas that consist of similar features.
Extend To Sudden Change Selects areas that have similar curvatures.
Box Configures the shape of the selection tool as a box.

270
Cylinder Configures the shape of the selection tool as a cylinder.
Sphere Configures the shape of the selection tool as a sphere.
Visible Only Decides whether selecting can take place on a visible area only or in space.
Position Snap Snaps to meshes or bodies when an object is picked. The snap distance and
snap plane can be defined in the bottom toolbar.
7.2.2. Select > All

What
The Select All command selects all entities.
Why
The Select All command is useful for:
Selecting all entities in the model view

271
How to Use
How to select all entities
1.
Go to Select > All Poly-Faces in the Scan mode, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the
Shift + A keyboard shortcut. All poly-faces can also be selected by using the RMB (Right
Mouse Button) and selecting all in the pop-up menu.
2.
All poly-faces will be selected.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.2.3. Select > None

What
The Select None command de-selects all entities.
Why
The Select None command is useful for:
Selecting all entities in the model view
272
How to Use
How to de-select all entities
1.
Select poly-faces in the model.
2.
Go to Select > None Poly-Faces, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Shift + N
keyboard shortcut. All poly-faces can also be de-selected by using the RMB (Right
Mouse Button) and selecting none in the pop-up menu.
3.
No poly-faces will be selected.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
Select > Inverse
7.2.4. Select > Inverse

What
The Select Inverse command selects the inverse of selected entities.
Why
The Select Inverse command is useful for:
Selecting the inverse of already selected entities

273
How to Use
How to select the inverse of entities
1.
Select poly-faces in the model.
2.
Go to Select > Inverse Poly-Faces, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Shift + I
keyboard shortcut. The inverse can also be selected by using the RMB (Right Mouse
Button) and selecting the inverse in the pop-up menu.
3.
The inverse of the originally selected poly-faces will be selected.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
Select > None
7.2.5. Select > Custom Region

What
The Select Custom Region command selects an area made by user selected vertices.
Why
The Select Custom Region command is useful for:
274
Selecting or de-selecting complex regions
How to Use
How to select a custom region
1.
Go to Select > Custom Region or click the icon in the toolbar.

Note: The Custom Region command can only be used in the Scan mode.
2.
Select the Add option. Pick poly-vertices to form a region.
3.
Click on the starting node or use the Close Path button to close the path.
4.
Click OK to finish the command.
Options in Detail
Custom Path Creates a custom path.
Note: A custom path drawn in a counterclockwise direction selects an inner region, but
creating a custom path in a clockwise direction selects an outer region. The Undo Last Path
button is used to cancel the last selection made, the Close Path button to close and finalize
the custom path, and the Reset button to discard all selections made.
Add Adds a selected region to existing selections.
Remove Removes a selected region from the existing selections.
275
Inverse Selects the inverse regions of existing selections.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.2.6. Select > Boundary Entities

What
The Select Boundary Entities command selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around selected
boundaries.
Why
The Select Boundary Entities command is useful for:
Selecting complex regions around a boundary
How to Use
How to select boundary entities
1.
Go to Select > Boundary Entities or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Change the Type To Select to Poly-Faces and select the boundary.
276
3.
Click OK to finish the command. Poly-faces around the boundary will be selected.
Options in Detail
Type To Select Chooses whether to select poly-faces or poly-vertices around a boundary.
Seed Boundaries Selects boundaries on a mesh in the model view.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.2.7. Select > Entities Around Edges/Faces

What
The Select Entities Around Edges/Faces command selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around
selected entities.
Why
The Select Entities Around Edges/Faces command is useful for:
Selecting entities around created edges and faces
277
How to Use
How to select entities around poly-faces
1.
Go to Select > Entities Around Edges/Faces or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note: The Entities Around Edges/Faces command can only be used in Scan modes
when scan data is mesh.
2.
Select a face on a body for the Seed Entities. Change the option to Poly-Faces.
3.
Click OK to finish the command. Poly-faces around the face will be selected.
Options in Detail
Seed Entities Selects entities (curves, edges, faces) that will be used to find poly-vertices or
poly-faces in the model view.
Options Chooses Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are the final selected entity type.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
278
Select > None

Select > Inverse
7.2.8. Select > Enlarge

What
The Enlarge command enlarges a selection by a specified depth or angle. Depending on the type
of selected entity, the options in the dialog tree will be shown differently. The command will not be
available until entities have been selected.
Why
The Enlarge command is useful for:
Selecting areas that would be difficult to select manually
How to Use
How to select entities using the Enlarge command
1.
Select faces. Poly-faces, Poly-vertices, Faces, Edges and Regions can be selected for the
Enlarge command.
2.
Go to Select > Enlarge or click the icon in the toolbar. Change the Angle to 15 degrees.
3.
Click OK to finish the command. Poly-faces around the face will be selected.
279
Options in Detail
Type To Select Chooses entity type to select.
Poly-Faces/Poly-Vertices/Faces/Edges/Region Shows currently selected entities.
Depth Expands the selection of entities by a specified depth.
Depth 2
Angle Enlarges regions by a specified angle for poly-faces and poly-vertices.
Initial Selection
Angle: 25
Angle: 60
Angle Tolerance Limits the angle tolerance when comparing other neighboring entities when
an edge or face has been selected.
Forward Depth Selects more edges when an edge or face is selected.
Forward Depth from the Initial Selection
280
Backward Depth Selects more edges in the opposite direction from Forward Depth when an
edge or face is selected.
Forward Depth from the Initial Selection
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
Select > Shrink
7.2.9. Select > Shrink

What
The Shrink command shrinks selected poly-faces by a specified depth. The command will not be
available until entities have been selected.
Why
The Shrink command is useful for:
Shrinking a selected area that might otherwise be difficult to do manually
How to Use
How to select shrink entities
1.
Go to Select > Shrink or click the icon in the toolbar. The pop-up menu can also be used
after selecting poly-faces.
281
2.
Change Depth to 1.
3.
Options in Detail
Type To Select Chooses entity type to select.
Poly-Faces/Poly-Vertices Shows currently selected entities.
Depth Shrinks the selection of entities by a specified depth.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
Select > Enlarge
7.2.10. Select > Convert Current Selection
282
What
The Convert Current Selection command converts entities to another entity type. The command
will not be available until entities have been selected.
Why
The Convert Current Selection command is useful for:
Converting one type of entity to another quickly and effectively
How to Use
How to convert entities
1.
Select an edge to convert to a vertex.
2.
Go to Select > Convert Current Selection or click the icon in the toolbar. The pop-up
menu can also be used after selecting poly-faces or poly-vertices.
3.
Click OK to complete the command. The edge will be changed to a vertex.
Options in Detail
From Shows selected entity type.
To Shows entity type for conversion.
Conversion List
From
To
Poly-Vertex
Poly-Face
283
Poly-Faces
Poly-Vertex
Region
Poly-Face
Boundaries
Poly-Face
Body Face
Body Edge
Body Edge
Body Vertex
3D Curve
3D Node Point
7.2.11. Select > By Criteria

What
The Select By Criteria command selects components of faces, edges, boundary entities based on
tolerance, and zones, as well as other components.
Why
The Select By Criteria command is useful for:
Selecting large amounts of components based on type quickly
How to Use
A. How to select components by criteria in the Scan mode
1.
Go to Select > By Criteria or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Set Type To Select as Faces.
3.
Select Sphere as the Pair Geometry Type.
4.
Click OK to complete the command. Spherical entities will be selected.
284
Options in Detail
Type To Select Chooses selection criteria. Faces, Edges, and Boundaries of a body can be
chosen.
Tolerance Selects entities by tolerance. The value will be changed depending on the tolerance
set in the color bar.
Zone Selects entities by zones. When a face on a nominal data is selected, the Properties
shows Zone Thickness(+), Zone Thickness(-), Zone Shrinkage and Normal Difference. This option
selects entities based on the following sub options:
+Thickness Selects entities by values From and To along a Zone Thickness(+).
-Thickness Selects entities by values From and To along a Zone Thickness(-). This option
is only activated when Type To Select is set to Faces.
Shrinkage Selects entities by values From and To along a Zone Shrinkage.
Angle Exclusion Selects entities by values From and To along a Normal Difference. This
option is only activated when Type To Selected is set to Faces.
Pair Geometry Type Selects entities by pair geometry type.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > By Color
7.2.12. Select > By Color

What
The Select By Color command selects poly-faces or poly-vertices by color. The command is
enabled when poly-faces or poly-vertices include color or texture information and can be used in
the Scan mode.
285
Why
The Select By Color command is useful for:
Selecting poly-faces or poly-vertices by color
How to Use
How to select entities by color
1.
Enter Scan mode.
2.
Go to Select > By Color or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Change the Type To Select option to Poly-Faces. Click the Pick Color button
and
extract a color from the mesh. Change the Fuse option to 200.
4.
Click the Add Color
5.
button to extract similar colors on the mesh.
Options in Detail
Type To Select Selects a type of entity to be selected.
Color Selects colors allows the use of the Pick Color, Add Color, and Remove Color buttons
286
to select colors.
Fuse Selects the level of diffusion when selecting similar colors.
Add Adds a selection when Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are selected before using the Select By
Color command.
Remove Removes a selection when Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are selected before using the
Select By Color command.
Replace Replaces a current selection when Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are selected before
using the Select By Color command.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > By Criteria
7.2.13. Select > Exterior Poly-Face

What
The Select Exterior Poly-Face command selects exterior regions of poly-faces on mesh data. It
can be used on volume reconstructed mesh or mesh with multiple layers.
Why
The Select Exterior Poly-Face command is useful for:
Separating exterior poly-faces from interior poly-faces
How to Use
How to select exterior poly-faces
1.
Enter the Scan mode. Go to Select > Exterior Poly-Face or click the icon in the toolbar.
Mesh that has poly-faces inside and outside such as a model captured by a CT scanner
can be used.
287
2.
Set Initial Radius to 10, Expand Radius to 5, and Tolerance to 0.3.
3.
Options in Detail
Initial Radius Changes the initial radius value used to detect exterior poly-faces.
Expand Radius Changes the expanded radius value from a seed region, which is an initially
selected point or face.
Tolerance Changes the interruption areas caused by noise on mesh.
Reference
Related Commands
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.3.
Edit
The Edit menu features commands to handle entities and operation.

288
Repeating Operation
Undo & Redo

Cancels a previously applied operation. To restore an operation after using the Undo command,
use the Redo command.
Repeat Last Command

Applies the last operation used.
Editing Entities
Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete

Cuts, Copies, Pastes, and Deletes selected entities.
Navigating Inspection History
Rebuild, Rebuild Current Mode Only

Rebuilds a model with the current version of the application based on its inspection history.
Rollback, Roll Forward, Roll To Start, Roll To Next Alignment, and Roll To End
Navigates a inspection history to return to a certain point of an inspection feature.
Showing or Hiding Features in History
Suppress and Unsuppress

Temporarily removes and brings back features from a model.
Editing Feature
Feature
Edits a selected feature.
7.3.1. Edit > Undo

What
289
The Undo command undoes previous operations.
Why
The Undo command is useful for:
Reversing mistakes made
Going back to a previous point
How to Use
How to undo an action
1.
Go to Edit > Undo or use the Ctrl + Z keyboard shortcut.

Note: The depth of the Undo command can be changed by going to File >
Preferences. The default depth is 50.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Redo
7.3.2. Edit > Redo

What
The Redo command reverses the Undo command or advances operations to a more current state
step-by-step. This command is opposite of undo command.
Why
The Redo command is useful for:
Advancing operations to a more current state
Reversing the Undo command
290
How to Use
How to undo an action
1.
Go to Edit > Redo or use the Ctrl + Y keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Undo
7.3.3. Edit > Repeat Last Command

What
The Repeat Last Command command repeats the previously used command.
Why
The Repeat Last Command command is useful for:
Repeating the last command made if it is going to be used often in a row
How to Use
How to repeat the last command
1.
Go to Edit > Repeat Last Command or use the Ctrl + Space keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Undo
Edit > Redo
7.3.4. Edit > Cut

291
What
The Cut command deletes an entity and copies it, saving it to the clipboard to be pasted.
Why
The Cut command is useful for:
Removing an entity to use for another time or place
How to Use
How to cut an entity
1.
Select an entity to cut.
2.
Go to Edit > Cut or use the Ctrl + X keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Paste
Edit > Copy
7.3.5. Edit > Copy

What
The Copy command copies a selected entity, saving it to the clipboard to be pasted.
Why
The Copy command is useful for:
Creating a copy of an existing entity to be used at a later time or place
How to Use
How to copy an entity
292
1.
Select an entity to copy.

Note: 3D curves and Ref. Geometries can be copied in the default mode.
2.
Go to Edit > Copy or use the Ctrl + C keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Cut
Edit > Paste
7.3.6. Edit > Paste

What
The Paste command copies a selected entity, saving it to the clipboard to be pasted.
Why
The Paste command is useful for:
Pasting a cut or copied entity
How to Use
How to paste an entity
1.
Select an entity and use the Cut or Copy command.
2.
Go to Edit > Paste or use the Ctrl + V keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Cut
Edit > Copy
293
7.3.7. Edit > Delete

What
The Delete command deletes selected entities.
Why
The Delete command is useful for:
Removing unnecessary entities
How to Use
How to delete an entity
1.
Select an entity.
2.
Go to Edit > Delete or use the Delete key on the keyboard.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Undo
Edit > Redo
7.3.8. Edit > Rebuild

What
The Rebuild command rebuilds a model with the current version of the application based on the
model history.
Why
294
The Rebuild command is useful for:
Updating and rebuilding a model using any changed algorithms or commands in the
application
How to Use
How to rebuild a model
1.
Go to Edit > Rebuild or use the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only
7.3.9. Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only

What
The Rebuild Current Mode Only command rebuilds a model with the current version of the
application based on the model history only in the current mode.
Why
The Rebuild Current Mode Only command is useful for:
Updating and rebuilding a model using any changed algorithms or commands in the
application in the current mode
How to Use
How to rebuild a model in the current mode
1.
Go to Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only or use the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
295
Edit > Rebuild
7.3.10. Edit > Rollback

What
The Rollback command temporarily reverts a model to an earlier state. New features can be added
or existing features can be edited.
Why
The Rollback command is useful for:
Going back to previous step in the inspection process
How to Use
How to rollback a model
1.
Select an entity in the feature tree.
2.
Go to Edit > Rollback or use the icon in the toolbar. All entities after the rollback entity
will be dimmed in the model tree.
3.
Add a new feature such as a Datum Alignment.
4.
Select the bottom feature and go to Edit > Roll To End to roll to the end of the
inspection history with the added Datum Alignment in the model.
Reference
296
Related Commands
Edit > Roll Forward
Edit > Roll To End
7.3.11. Edit > Roll Forward

What
The Roll Forward command rolls a model forward step-by-step after executing the Rollback
command. New features can be added or existing features can be edited.
Why
The Roll Forward command is useful for:
Going forward step-by-step after using the Rollback command to see changes
How to Use
How to Roll Forward a model
1.
After executing the Rollback command, select an entity in the feature tree.
2.
Go to Edit > Roll Forward or use the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Rollback
Edit > Roll To End
7.3.12. Edit > Roll To Start

What
The Roll To Start command rolls a model to the starting state of nominal and scan data. New
features can be added or existing features can be edited in this state.
297
Why
The Roll To Start command is useful for:
Going to the starting feature of a model
How to Use
How to roll a model to the beginning
1.
Select a feature in the Inspection Tree.
2.
Go to Edit > Roll To Start or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Roll To End
7.3.13. Edit > Roll To Next Alignment

What
The Roll To Next Alignment command rolls a model to the next alignment state in an inspection
history after executing the Rollback command.
Why
The Roll To Next Alignment command is useful for:
Going to the next alignment state in a inspection history after using the Rollback command
How to Use
How to roll a model to the next alignment
1.
After executing the Rollback command, go to Edit > Roll To Next Alignment or click
the icon in the toolbar.
298
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Rollback
Edit > Roll Forward
7.3.14. Edit > Roll To End

What
The Roll To End command rolls a model to the end of the inspection history after executing the
Rollback command.
Why
The Roll To End command is useful for:
Going to the end of the inspection history after using the Rollback command
How to Use
How to roll a model to the end
1.
After executing the Rollback command, go to Edit > Roll To End or use the icon in the
toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Rollback
Edit > Roll Forward
7.3.15. Edit > Suppress
299
What
The Suppress command suppresses a feature, temporarily removing it from the model.
Why
The Suppress command is useful for:
Seeing and working with a model without a specific feature
How to Use
How to suppress a feature
1.
Select an entity in the Inspection Feature tree.
2.
Go to Edit > Suppress, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Suppressed entities will be dimmed in the Model Tree.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Unsuppress
7.3.16. Edit > Unsuppress

What
The Unsuppress command unsuppresses a feature after using the Suppress command.
Why
300
The Unsuppress command is useful for:
Unsuppressing a feature
How to Use
How to unsuppress a feature
1.
Select a suppressed entity in the feature tree.
2.
Go to Edit > Unsuppress, or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Suppress
7.3.17. Edit > Feature

What
The Feature command allows the editing of a selected feature.
Why
The Feature command is useful for:
Selecting and editing a feature
How to Use
How select a feature
1.
Select an entity in the Inspection Feature tree.
2.
Go to Edit > Feature, or click the icon in the toolbar. The Whole Deviation dialog tree
will be displayed, enabling the editing of parameters of the entity.
301
7.4.
Insert
The Insert menu features various commands used to generate or import entities and register them
as features with a generation history in the Inspection Feature.
Alignment
Align
Aligns nominal data and scan data.
Section
Section
Computes sections of design data and scan data.
Multiple Sections
Computes multiple sections of design data and scan data.
Curve
Curve
Enters the Curve mode to generate and edit curves.
Ref. Geometry
Ref. Geometry
Creates Ref. Geometry such as cylinder axes, circle centers, and lines that intersect two planes.
3D GD&T
3D GD&T
302
Enters the 3D GD&T mode to generate GD&Ts and datums.
Inspection result
Deviation
Inspects deviation on 3D digital data.
Plot
Analyzes the thickness, curvature and angle of scan data and displays the results as a color
map.
Active Scan Data
Active Scan Data

Activates specific scan data to calculate GD&Ts and deviation.
Scanner Control
Scanner Direct Control

Enables the use of various scanning devices directly within the application.
Note
Note
Adds tags with custom text.
7.4.1. Insert > Align

The Align command aligns nominal data and scan data.
Initial Alignment and Best Fitting
Auto
Aligns scan data to nominal data automatically using features on a part, and applies the best fit
algorithm for a finer alignment.
Best Fit
Aligns scan data to nominal data using the overlapping regions between them.
Geometry Based Alignments

303
RPS
Aligns scan data to nominal data by matching pairs of reference positions under specified
constraint conditions.
Datum
Aligns scan data to nominal data by matching geometric features.
3-2-1
Aligns scan data to nominal data using vertices, a planar entity, and a linear entity to lock six
degrees of movement.
Manual Alignments
Transform
Roughly aligns scan data to nominal data or transforms a matrix.
Adaptive
Aligns scan data to nominal data by picking N points on a physical part based on pre-planned
inspection requirements.
7.4.1.1.
What
The Auto Align command aligns scan data to nominal data automatically using features on a part,
and applies the best fit algorithm for a finer alignment. This command is frequently used for an
initial alignment before using other alignment methods.
Nominal data uses the world coordinate system, but the origin of scan data is very different from
those coordinates. The first step of alignment is to roughly align scan data to nominal data. When a
scan data file is only a partial scan of a part or is symmetrical in shape, the size between the scan
data and nominal data can be very different and rough alignment may fail.
Nominal and Scan
After Auto Alignment
Why
304
The Auto Align command is useful for:
Initial alignment of distant scan data
Aligning fully scanned data automatically
Aligning partially scanned data automatically
How to Use
A. How to align fully scanned data
2. Go to Insert > Align > Auto or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Click OK to complete the command.
Note: After alignment is completed, the statistical deviation values for parameters
such Min., Max., Avg., RMS, and Std. Dev. will be displayed in the tabular view.
B. How to align scan data by feature recognition

305
2. Go to Insert > Align > Auto or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Check the Enhance Alignment Accuracy With Feature Recognition option.
Options in Detail
Methods
Enhance Alignment Accuracy With Feature Recognition Intelligently analyzes features on
scan data and matches them to nominal data. This option may take more time than a rough
alignment for larger files. If this option fails, the application will still internally perform
alignment. For scan data that covers an entire nominal data or has enough features, it is not
necessary to use this option.
Apply To Active Scan Data Only Aligns only active scan data. For more detail about active
scan data, see Insert > Active Scan Data.
Reference
Related Commands
306
7.4.1.2.
What
The Best Fit Align command aligns scan data to nominal data using the overlapping regions
between them. This command is most effectively used after a rough alignment using the Insert >
Align > Transform command.
Nominal and Scan
After Best Fit Alignment
Why
The Best Fit Align command is useful for:
Aligning scan data to minimize deviation in overall shape
Precise alignments
Aligning scan data by constraining rotation and translation
Aligning scan data using only partial area calculation
How to Use
A. How to best fit align using whole data
1. Import nominal and scan data. Use a rough alignment method such as Insert > Align >
Transform.
2. Go to Insert > Align > Best Fit or click the icon in the toolbar.
307
B. How to best fit align using partial data

1. Import nominal and scan data. Use a rough alignment method such as Insert > Align >
Transform to overlap them.
2. Go to Insert > Align > Best Fit or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Check the Use Selected Data Only option and select faces to use for the best fit
calculation.
308
Options in Detail
Default Options
Sampling Ratio Samples data points by a specified value. When the ratio is 100%, all selected
data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be used.
Max Iteration Count Determines a value that will limit the number of times a registration
iterates.
Max Average Deviation Determines a value as deviation criteria used to judge if a
registration result is satisfactory. The application will attempt to make the average deviation of a
final model less than this value within the Max. Iteration Count. The Estimate button
right side automatically calculates a value.
on the
Constraint Option
Global Coordinate Selects a reference direction for the translation and rotation of scan data.
User Defined Coordinate Selects a ref. coordinate that will serve as the reference direction of
a translation and rotation of scan data.
Lock Translation Locks a direction of movement during best fit alignment.
Lock Rotation Locks a direction of rotation during best fit alignment.
309
More Options
Use Only Reliable Scan Data Ignores poly-vertices that have been classified as noise during
alignment. Noisy data is unfiltered data that is away from the average deviation between
Use Selected Data Only Aligns only using a selected faces or regions on nominal data.
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.1.3.
What
The RPS Align aligns scan data to nominal data by matching pairs of reference positions under
specified constraint conditions. RPS stands for Reference Point System. It is defined by points
such as centers of circles, slots, spheres, or other canonical geometric shapes.
Nominal and Scan
After RPS Alignment
310
Why
The Best Fit Align command is useful for:
Aligning sheet metal parts that have holes or slots
Aligning parts that do not have clearly defined geometric features
How to Use
How to align a sheet metal part using the center of circles
1. Import nominal and scan data. Use a rough alignment such as Insert > Align > Auto.
Three circles on the model will be used for RPS.
2. Use the RPS Align command by going to Insert > Align > RPS or by clicking the icon in
the toolbar. Select the first circle on the nominal data and set X, Y, and Z to the Strong
Minimize option.
3. Select the second circle and set the Tolerance to 0.5 and X, Y, and Z to Default
Minimize to minimize the deviation between nominal and scan points along the axis.
4. Select the third and set the Tolerance to 0.5 and X, Y, and Z to Default Minimize.

311
The result will be displayed with annotations on each position. Pass and Fail will be
displayed in green or red based on the specified tolerance value. The names of tags can
be changed in Properties and Tabular View panels.
The deviations in all coordinate directions are displayed in annotations. The deviations in
a constrained coordinate direction will be highlighted in bold type. The red circle in the
following image shows that the X and Y directions are not constrained but Z is.
Options in Detail
312
Select Entities
RPS Pairs Selects an entity to be used as RPS.
RPS Pair Options

Weight Specifies a value used to attract a registration solution towards a reference position.
The bigger the value, the more a registration will be attracted towards a corresponding
reference position.
Tolerance Specifies an allowable deviation amount.
Ref. Coordinate Specifies a ref. coordinate for reference points that can be used as a local
coordinate instead of world coordinates to constrain a direction. If no coordinate is specified the
world coordinate will be used.
Additional Constraints Sets a matching condition for a reference position point.
The None option will ignore a value. This value may be changed by constraint conditions from
other points connected on a rigid body.
The Default Minimize option will move to minimize the deviation of a direction.
The Strong Minimize option will maintain the position of a scan point to the nominal position.
The Preserve Scan Pos. option will fix the position of a scan point.
Note: Examples of RPS Constraints are shown in the cases below:
Case1: X Axis= None, Y Axis= None
A scan point will not be joined in a calculation and there will be no change.
Case 2: X Axis= None, Y Axis= Default Minimize

The X position will not be joined in a calculation; however the Y deviation will be minimized
to the nominal point.
313
Case 3: X Axis= Default Minimize, Y Axis= Default Minimize

Both the X and Y deviations will be minimized.
Case 4: X Axis= Strong Minimize, Y Axis= Default Minimize

The X position will be same as the nominal point and the Y deviation will be minimized.
Case 5: X Axis= Preserve Scan Pos., Y Axis= Default Minimize

The X position of a scan point will be fixed and the Y deviation will be minimized.
More Options
Max Iteration Count Specifies a maximum number of calculations used to find a proper
314
alignment solution.
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.1.4.
What
The Datum Align command aligns scan data to nominal data by matching geometric features.
Nominal and Scan
After Datum Alignment
Why
The Datum Align command is useful for:
Aligning scan data to nominal data by matching datums
Aligning scan data to nominal data by matching geometric features
315
How to Use
How to align scan data to nominal data using geometries
2. Use the Datum Align command by going to Insert > Align > Datum or by clicking the
icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a cylinder on the nominal data.
Note: The manipulators for constrained axis and rotation will become gray whenever
geometric features are selected.
4. If the scan data is reversed use the Flip button.
316
5. Select a side plane on the nominal data.
6. Select the top plane on the nominal data.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Datum Pair Selects an entity from the nominal data to be used make a datum pair.
Datum Options
Type Shows datum type when an entity in a datum pair is selected.
Flip Reverses the direction of scan data.
317
More Options
alignment solution.
Show Manipulator Shows model manipulators on-screen. A gray manipulator means it has
been constrained.
Check Orthogonal Inputs an angle value inside the Angle Tolerance box. The application will
check if a picked datum pair is orthoginonal to an existing datum pair within the specified angle
tolerance. Any non-orthogonal datum pairs will generate an error message.
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.1.5.
What
The 3-2-1 Align command aligns scan data to nominal data using vertices, a planar entity, and a
linear entity to lock six degrees of movement. 3-2-1 alignment is the minimum number of contact
points necessary to locate a rectangular part in three different planes. 3 points are used to define a
primary plane, 2 points define a secondary plane perpendicular to the primary plane, and the last
single point defines the last plane that is perpendicular to both the primary and secondary plane.
318
Nominal and Scan
After 3-2-1 Alignment
Why
The 3-2-1 Align command is useful for:
Aligning a rectangular part using a vertex, a planar entity and a linear entity
How to Use
How to 3-2-1 align scan data to nominal
2. Use the 3-2-1 Align command by going to Insert > Align > 3-2-1 or by clicking the icon
in the toolbar.
3. Select the Plane button and select a plane on the nominal data to define the Z direction.
319
4. Click the Vector button and select a cylinder on the nominal data to define the Y
direction. Use the Reverse Direction button if the scan direction is flipped.
5. Click the Position button and select a sphere on the nominal data to define the X
direction.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Plane Selects a planar entity.
Vector Selects a linear entity or an entity that has an axis.
Position Selects a point or an entity which has a center point.
More Options
alignment solution.
Show Manipulator Shows model manipulators on-screen. A gray manipulator means it has
been constrained.
320
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.1.6.
What
The Transform Align command aligns roughly aligns scan data to nominal data or transforms a
matrix using the N Point, Rotate and Transform, By Matrix or By Scan Coordinate methods. It
can help with alignment problems that the standard alignment methods cannot support.
N Point Method
After Alignment
Why
The Transform Align command is useful for:
Manually aligning using the N Points method when auto alignment fails
Manipulating scan data position using the Rotate and Transform method
Reapplying previously used alignment displacement to another scan data using the By Matrix
method
Scan only inspection by aligning scan data to the world coordinate system without a nominal
321
using the By Scan Coordinate method
How to Use
How to manually align by picking points on a model
2. Use the Transform Align command by going to Insert > Align > Transform or by
clicking the icon in the toolbar. Select the N Points method. The Model View will be
divided into three different views.
3. Pick a point on the nominal data and a corresponding point on the scan data.
4. Create two or more pairs using the same method in Step 3.
322
5. Click OK to complete the command. The scan data will be roughly aligned by the chosen
matching points. The Best Fit alignment method can be used to further align the scan
data.
Options in Detail
Methods
N Points Registers scan data using manually chosen pair points.
Refine Alignment Applies best fit alignment for more accurate results
Rotate And Translate Manually rotates and moves scan data using manipulators in the
Model View. The Use Local Coordinate option will rotate and transform using selected
coordinates.
323
By Matrix Registers scan data using a 4x4 transformation matrix. Values can be directly input
into the Transform Value boxes. A transformation matrix file can be imported using the Matrix
File Open button
Set applies an imported matrix
Multiply multiplies an imported matrix
Inverse Multiply inverses and multiplies an imported matrix
Transpose transposes an imported matrix

Calculate Principal Axis Transform Finds transform matrix to move scan data to a
principal axis. It is useful for quickly aligning the coordinate system of scan data to the
global coordinate system.
Note: To export a transformation matrix from within the application, select an alignment in
the Inspection Feature tree and click the Export button
next to the Matrix in
the Properties panel.
By Scan Coordinate Moves scan data to an origin coordinate position when using scan data
as nominal data or during inspection. Alignment of scan data to a user-defined coordinate or a
direction can be set.
When the By Scan Coordinate, Moving, and Target options are enabled the following options
are enabled:
Moving
324
3-2-1 Moves scan coordinates in a desired direction. Select corresponding entities on a

mesh as a Plane, Vector, and Position. The chosen Plane will define the Z axis. The
Vector will define the Y axis, and the Position will define the Z axis. When an axis is gray it
is bound to a chosen entity and cannot be moved.
X-Y-Z Moves scan coordinates in a desired direction. Select corresponding entities on a

mesh as a Position, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis.
Target
Coordinate Selects a target coordinate.
X-Y-Z Moves scan coordinates in a desired direction. Select corresponding entities on a
mesh as a Position, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis.
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.1.7.
What
325
The Adaptive Align command aligns scan data to nominal data by picking N points on a physical
part based on pre-planned inspection requirements.
Why
The Adaptive Align command is useful for:
Aligning scan data to nominal data while using LiveInspect, in real-time.
How to Use
How to align
1.
Import nominal data.
2.
Go to Insert > Align > Adaptive or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Pick points on the nominal data that will be used as reference points.
4.
5.
Click the LiveInspect button to enter the LiveInspect mode.
6.
Select a device.
7.
Click the Connect button.
8.
Go to LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process or click the icon in the toolbar.
9.
Probe points on a physical part by following the Automatic measurement feature

guidance functionality.
326
10. Probe points on the physical part again to validate alignment.

11. Press the B button on the scanner to confirm the validation.
12. Select the Exit LiveInspect option.
Options in Detail
Select Points
Pick the Nominal Points for Reference Selects nominal points to be considered as reference
points.
More Options
Max. Iteration Count Specifies a maximum number of calculations used to find a proper
alignment solution.
Reference
Related Commands
LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process
7.4.2. Insert > Section

What
327
The Section command computes sections of design data and scan data. The section mode
supports 2D environments like 2D drafting for easy section deviation analysis between nominal
and scan data as well as inspecting section profiles using GD&T.
Section Inspection
Why
The Section command is useful for:
Checking deviation between sectional profiles
Inspecting a section profile using GD&T
How to Use
How to define a section position and inspect a section profile
1. Align scan data. Go to Insert > Section or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the Offset method and select a planar face as a Base Plane.
328
3. Set an offset distance or move the arrow on the screen to define the location of a
sectional plane.
4. Click the Next Stage button
Choose Min. Distance for the projection direction.
Select the Picking method under Manual under Tag Options and pick points on the
section where deviation values are desired.
6. Click OK to complete the command and enter the Section mode. In this mode
additional 2D inspections can be performed on a section. To hide deviation results and
tags, set them as False in the Properties panel.
329
7.
Click the Smart Dimension button

on the toolbar to inspect dimensions.
Pick an arc on a section and pick a space where the annotation will be located.
8. Pick two lines to inspect a distance and pick a space where the annotation will be
located.
9.
To exit the Section mode, click the Section button
Confirm icon
on the tool palette or the
at bottom right corner.
330
Options in Detail
[Stage 1: Set Position]
Methods
Offset Creates a section by offsetting a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane and
set a value as an Offset Distance, or move the arrow on the screen.
Rotation Creates a section by rotating a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane and
a linear entity or an entity that has an axis as a Rotation Axis. Set a value as an Offset Angle or
rotate the arrow on the screen.
Along Curve Creates a section that follows a curve. Pick a point on a curve as a Seed Position
and select a curve as a Path Curve.
Local Coordinate
Origin Defines a local coordinate to serve as the origin in the second stage of the Section
command. The local coordinate settings affect the location of a model.
331
X Axis Direction Selects the X direction of the origin by selecting a linear entity or an entity
that has an axis.
Flip Viewing Direction Reverses the viewing direction in the 2D view.
Multiple Cutting Plane

This option changes a view and prepares for the addition of cutting lines.
It also positions a cutting line by moving it up or down and resizes it by dragging the end
points.
The values can be changed by clicking the existing values on the screen.
[Stage 2: Set Deviation Options]

Calculation Option
Projection Distance Sets a projection distance.
Min Distance Projects scan points to a minimum distance on nominal data that
will become deviation.
332
Custom Projects scan points in a custom direction by selecting a linear entity as

the direction or by inputting a direction value.
Min Distance Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance
will be ignored in calculation and treated as noise.
More Options
Apply Single Component Analyzes deviation in a specific direction. When a component
direction is X, only the distance of the X component will be displayed.
[Stage 3: Set Display Options]
333
Display Option
Use Tolerance Color Displays defined tolerance color (default in green) on the color map to
display pass or fail result.
Whisker Multiplier Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker Multiplier
slider.
Whisker Multiplier: 1
Whisker Display Ratio Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker Display
Ratio slider.
Whisker Display Ratio: 30
Local Average Tagging

Automatic Sets automatic local average tagging settings.
Over Tol. Count Sets a limit for the highest points on mountains of deviation and
any value over the tolerance will be marked.
Over Tol. Count: 3
Under Tol. Count Sets a limit for the lowest points on mountains of deviation and
any value under the tolerance will be marked.
Manual Sets manual local average tagging settings.
Picking Marks deviation tags on chosen positions of the section profile.
334
Along Curve Marks deviation tags along selected curves. A start position needs to
be defined by a Seed Position on a curve. Use the No. Of Instances (total tags) and
Distance (interval) options to make multiple tags. When the Equal Spacing is
checked, a curve will be equally divided by the number of instances.
[Section Tool Palette]
Segment Scan Section Adjusts the resolution of a scan section.
Low Resolution
High Resolution
Max Arc Radius Defines a maximum arc size. When an arc size is specified as a very large
value, it will be treated as a line.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Multiple Sections
335
7.4.3. Insert > Multiple Sections

What
The Multiple Sections command computes multiple sections of design data and scan data. The
section mode supports 2D environments like 2D drafting for easy section deviation analysis
between nominal and scan data as well as inspecting section profiles using GD&T. It is similar in
function to the Section command, but supports multiple section creation.
Multiple Sections
Why
The Multiple Sections command is useful for:
Generating several sections with the same interval spacing
How to Use
How to define a section position and inspect a section profile
1. Go to Insert > Multiple Sections or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the Offset method and select a plane or planar face as a Base Plane.
336
3. Set the No. Of Instance option to 5 and the Distance option to 40 mm. Click the Next
Stage button
Note: To change the starting position of a section plane, drag the arrow in the Model
View.
4. Edit instances by selecting unnecessary instances and pressing the Delete key on the
keyboard. Click the Next Stage button
5. Choose the Min. Distance method as the projection direction. Click the Next Stage
button
6. Click OK to complete the command. Multiple sections will be generated.
337
Note: Double-click a section in the Inspection Feature tree or select a section and
click Edit > Feature to edit it.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1: Set Initial Position]
Methods
Offset Creates a section by offsetting a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane and
set a value as an Offset Distance, or move the arrow on the screen. To make multiple sections
set the No. Of Instances option which controls the total number of sections as well as the
Distance option which controls the intervals between sections.
Rotation Creates a section by rotating a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane and
a linear entity or an entity that has an axis as a Rotation Axis. To make multiple sections set the
No. Of Instances option which controls the total number of sections as well as the Distance
option which controls the intervals between sections.
338
Along Curve Creates a section that follows a curve. Pick a point on a curve as a Seed Position
and select a curve as a Path Curve. To make multiple sections set the No. Of Instances option
which controls the total number of sections as well as the Distance option which controls the
intervals between sections.
Local Coordinate
Origin Defines a local coordinate to serve as the origin in the second stage of the Section
command. The local coordinate settings affect the location of a model.
that has an axis.
[Stage 2: Set Detail Options]

Position
Distance Sets a detailed position of a selected instance.
339
Local Coordinate
Local Coordinate Redefines the local coordinate of a selected instance. For more details see
the Local Coordinate option under Stage 1.
[Stage 3: Set Deviation Options]

Calculation Option
Projection Direction Sets a detailed position of a selected instance.
Min Distance Projects scan points to a minimum distance on nominal data that
will become deviation.
Custom Projects scan points in a custom direction by selecting a linear entity as

the direction or by inputting a direction value.
Min Distance Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance
will be ignored in calculation and treated as noise.
More Options
Apply Single Component Analyzes deviation in a specific direction. When a component
340
direction is X, only the distance of the X component will be displayed.
[Stage 4: Set Display Options]

Display Option
Use Tolerance Color Displays defined tolerance color (default in green) on the color map to
display pass or fail result.
Whisker Multiplier Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker Multiplier
slider.
Whisker Display Ratio Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker Display
Ratio slider.

Automatic Sets automatic local average tagging settings.
Over Tol. Count Sets a limit for the highest points on mountains of deviation and
any value over the tolerance will be marked.
341
Over Tol. Count: 3
Under Tol. Count Sets a limit for the lowest points on mountains of deviation and
any value under the tolerance will be marked.
Manual Sets manual local average tagging settings.
On Specific Section Separates a window into two sections and is used to display a
section in a 2D view. Tags can be added to selected sections in the 2D environment.
Picking Marks deviation tags on chosen positions of the section profile.
Along Curve Marks deviation tags along selected curves. A start position needs to
be defined by a Seed Position on a curve. Use the No. Of Instances (total tags) and
Distance (interval) options to make multiple tags. When the Equal Spacing is
checked, a curve will be equally divided by the number of instances.
342
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Section
7.4.4. Insert > Curve

What
The Curve command enters the Curve mode which features commands for the generation and
editing of curves. When a curve is generated it will be added as a new feature named Curve[#] in
the Inspection Feature tree. For more information about the Curve mode, refer to Tools > Curve
Tools.
Why
The Curve command is useful for:
Comparing nominal and scan curves to assess curve deviation
Generating guide curves for multiple tags
Generating sectional curves of a model
7.4.5. Insert > Ref. Geometry

The Ref. Geometry menu features various commands used to inspect feature elements such as
cylinder axes, circle centers, and lines that intersect two planes. Ref. Geometry can be used for
measuring, transforming, aligning, sectioning, dimensioning, etc.
Ref. Geometries
343
Point
Creates a point that defines a position in three-dimensional space
Simulate CMM Point

Simulates a point generated by a Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
Vector
Creates a linear line with a direction
Plane
Creates a planar two-dimensional surface with a normal direction
Circle
Creates a ref. circle on a plane that consists of a center and radius
Slot
Creates a ref. slot on a plane that consists of two lines and two arcs
Rectangle
Creates a ref. rectangle on a plane that consists of four lines with four right angles
Regular Polygon
Creates a ref. regular polygon on a plane that consists of several equal lines
Cylinder
Creates a ref. cylinder, which is a three-dimensional shape consisting of an axis, a radius, and a
height value
Cone
Creates a ref. cone, which is a three-dimensional shape consisting of an axis, two different radii,
and a height value
Sphere
Creates a ref. sphere, which is a three-dimensional shape that consists of a center and a radius
Torus
Creates a ref. torus, which is a three-dimensional shape created by revolving a circle and
consists of a center, a major axis, and a minor radius
Coordinate
Creates a ref. coordinate that determines the position of a point or other geometric elements
Note: After generating ref. geometries, they can be exported by using the File > Export
command or the pop-up menu on selected ref. geometry in the Model Tree.
344
7.4.5.1.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Point
What
The Ref. Point command creates a reference point. A reference point is a zero dimensional entity.
A reference point is used to mark a specific position on a model or in space.
Ref. Point on Mesh
Intersection between curve and plane
Why
The Ref. Point command is useful for:
Finding a the center of a circle, slot, rectangle, polygon, or sphere
Finding an average point from multiple points
Finding the intersection point of two lines
Finding the intersection point of a line and a face
Finding the intersection point of three planes
Importing positions
How to Use
How to find and add a point on a circle center
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Ref. Geometry > Point or click
2. Change the Method to Find Circle Center.
3. Select circular edges on a model.
345
4. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created with its pair
geometry.
The deviation between nominal geometry and pair geometry is displayed in its property
pane. Inputting a tolerance value will color each deviation element in pass, fail, or
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Entities Selects target entities. Required target entities can differ depending on the method.
Methods
The following methods are available in this command:
Definition
Extract
Find Circle Center
Find Slot Center
Find Rectangle Center
Find Polygon Center
Find Sphere Center
Projection
Pick Multiple Points
Convert
N Division
Between 2 Points
Intersect 2 Lines
Intersect Line(Curve, Axis) & Face
Intersect 3 Planes
346
Find Cone Vertex
Extreme Position
Import
Probe Points
Definition Creates a point by using the mathematical definition of a point. The value can be
input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Extract Creates a point from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
Remove Outlier Removes outlier data to achieve more accurate fitting results.
The N*Sigma method requires an N value and excludes data that is larger than N times
the standard deviation, also known as the sigma.
The Ratio method requires a ratio value and only data that falls into the selected value
will be used.
The Absolute Distance method requires a distance and the fitting will be done by
excluding any data outside of that distance.
N Sigma
Find Circle Center Creates a circle center point from selected entities.
Fitting Type Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from nominal data. It will be
347
used as a fitting method for finding scan pair geometry using the As Nominal option.
Note: This option is available when finding different types of geometry from target
nominal entities.
Best Fit Finds geometry using the least squares fitting method from the nominal
edges of faces. It is used for finding best-fitted scan pair geometry from scan pair
points.
Min. Bound Finds maximum inscribed geometry using the minimum separation
fitting method from nominal edges or faces. It is used for finding the maximum
inscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along the
negative normal direction.
Max. Bound Finds minimum circumscribed geometry using the minimum
separation fitting method from nominal edges or faces. It is used for finding the
minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point
along the positive normal direction.
Best Fit
Min. / Max. Bound from

Minimum Separation
Remove Outlier, Sampling Ratio Identical to the Extract method.

Project On Plane Projects a created vector onto a selected planar entity such as a plane,
face, region, or sketch.
Fix Radius Specifies the value of the radius of a cylinder if it is already known.
Find Slot Center Extracts the center point of a slot from selected entities using a fitting
algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method under Ref. Point.
Find Rectangle Center Extracts the center point of a rectangle from selected entities using a
348
fitting algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method under Ref.
Point.
Rounded Corner Finds the center point of a rounded corner rectangle.

Find Polygon Center Extracts the center point of a polygon center from selected entities
using a fitting algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method under
Ref. Point.
Rounded Corner Used for polygon corners that are round.

Num. Of Edges Specifies the number of edges of a polygon.
Find Sphere Center Extracts the center point of a sphere from selected entities using a fitting
algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method under Ref. Point.
Use Normal Excludes points that have a normal angle larger than the normal of fitted
ref. geometry. After removing points, the application will internally generate fitted ref.
geometry again from the refined points.
Projection Extracts a point by projecting onto another entity.
To make a point using the Projection method:
1. Select points such as ref. points, curve points or vertices.
2. Select a target entity that selected points will be projected onto.
3. Click OK.
349
Pick Multiple Points Creates an average point by choosing one or more points.
To make a point using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick points on scan data or select points such as ref. points, vertices or circles.
2. Click OK.
Convert Creates a center point from a selected entity.

To make a point using the Convert method:
1. Select a circle or an arc.
2. Click OK.
N Division Creates multiple points by dividing a selected curve, vector, or mesh data.
To make a point using the N Division method:
1. Select a curve.
2. Click OK.
Uniform Creates planes by evenly dividing a selected entity by a specified number.
Offset Creates planes by a specified offset distance and total number on a selected
entity.
Uniform
Offset
Between 2 Points Creates a point between two points using a Ratio value to decide the
350
position.
To make a point using the Between 2 Points method:
1. Select two points.
2. Set the ratio of position between two selected points.
3. Click OK.
Ratio: 0.2
Ratio: 0.5
Ratio: 0.8
Intersect 2 Lines Creates a point from the intersection of two linear entities.
To make a point using the Intersect 2 Lines method:
1. Select two linear entities such as a line, edge, or vector.
2. Click OK.
Intersect Line (Curve, Axis) & Face Creates a point from the intersection of a curve and a face.
To make a point using the Intersect Axis and Face method:
1. Select a curve such as a line, edge, vector, 2D or 3D curve.
2. Select a face.
3. Click OK.
Intersect 3 Planes Creates a point from the intersection of three selected planar entities.
To make a point using the Intersect 3 Planes method:
1. Select three planar entities such as a face, region, or plane.
2. Click OK.
351
Check Orthogonality Allows the creation of a point only if three planes are orthogonal.
Find Cone Vertex Creates a point at the apex position of a conical entity.
Extreme Position Creates a point at an extreme position from selected entities. A target entity
and a linear entity need to be selected for a Direction to define an extreme direction.
Import Creates points by importing an ASCII file. A text file containing X,Y, and Z coordinates
separated by tabs or commas can be imported with the ASCII converter.
When a text file is opened, the ASCII Converter will be displayed. Column definition, separators
such as white space or user defined characters, and commas for decimal point in the ASCII
Convert dialog box can be set.
352
Probe Points Creates a point using a probed point.

Custom Compensation Compensates the center position of measured probe points by
the direction of the X, Y, and Z global axes or the probe axis.
[Stage 2: Define Scan Pair]

Make Scan Pair Creates a scan pair.
As Nominal Automatically creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as created in
Stage 1.
Manual Manually creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as created in Stage 1
but with the addition of CMM simulation.
Simulate CMM Creates a pair point by simulating CMM in a real world
environment. Scan data can be treated as a real part and the CMM can be virtually
controlled as a real CMM.
Ray Intersection Finds a pair point by intersecting a virtual ray and poly
vertices.
The Search Radius and Search Depth options define the size of a
searching zone.
The Direction option defines the projection direction of a ray.
The Fitting Type option is the fitting method used for detected polyvertices. When scan data is mesh it can be easy to find pair points on the
353
mesh surface, however for point clouds poly-vertices in a search area must
be fitted and a surface must be generated internally.
The Auto option fits poly-vertices in a search area to an identical
geometry type of a picked nominal face. If no nominal face exists, polyvertices will be fit to a freeform surface.
The Plane / Sphere / Cylinder / Cone / Torus / Surface Fitting options
fits poly-vertices in a searching zone to a specified geometry type.
Rod Contact Finds a pair point by the contact position of a rod. The
Search Radius and Search Depth define the size of a searching zone. The
Direction option defines the contact direction of the rod to poly-vertices.
The U-Axis defines the direction of the rod.
Disk Contact Finds a pair point by the contact position of a disk. The
Direction option defines the contact direction of the disk to poly-vertices.
Find Closest Point Finds the closest pair point within a given search
radius. The Search Radius option defines a searching zone from a
nominal point.
354
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Simulate CMM Point
7.4.5.2.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Simulated CMM
Point
What
The Simulated CMM Point command simulates a Coordinate Measuring Machine, or, CMM, as it
would function in the real world. Within the application, scan data will be treated as a real part and
the CMM Point command can be used to acquire measure points with a virtual probe device that
acts like a real-world probing device.
This method is available when both nominal and scan data exist as well as when inspecting scan
data only without any nominal data.
When a CMM point is picked on a model the direction of probing will be automatically defined by
the normal of the nominal data. However if only scan data is used, the probing direction will be
defined by a planes normal which will be internally made by fitting scan points within a searching
zone.
Why
The Simulated CMM Point command is useful for:
Finding a contact point by simulating CMM
Ray Intersection
This method is similar to a ball-type probing device. The Ray-Intersection method can find a
355
contact point on scan data but does not consider any physical conflicts between the virtual probe
and scan data.
Ray-Intersection finds pair points by intersecting a virtual ray and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the ball probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. Poly-vertices in the searching zone will be
candidate poly-vertices used to find the intersection with the virtual ray.
The specified depth is a total of the frontward and backward depth of a picked point on the
direction of measurement. If the Search Depth is set to 10mm, 5mm will be the search depth in
both directions as shown in the image below:
How to Use Ray Intersection

How to find a contact point using the Ray Intersection method
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Ref. Geometry > Simulated
CMM Point or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Ray-Intersection method.
3. Pick a point on a nominal face and set the search radius and depth.
356
4. Click OK to complete the command. A CMM point will be created on the nominal data
and its pair point will be found on the scan data.
warning colors.
Options in Detail for Ray Intersection

Reference Position Defines the probing position on nominal or scan data. A specific value can
be entered or a point on a model can be manually chosen.
Search Radius / Search Depth Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the searching
zone will be candidate points for a CMM point.
357
Fitting Type Selects the fitting method used for detecting poly-vertices. When scan data is
mesh it can be easy to find pair points on the mesh surface, however on point clouds pair points
cannot be found and one of the following fitting type options need to be used.
Auto Fits poly-vertices in a search zone identically to the geometry on a nominal face. If
no nominal face exists the fitting will be performed on a freeform face.
Plane Fitting Sets a CMM point to a place. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a plane.
Sphere Fitting Sets a CMM point to a sphere. Pair points are found by fitting polyvertices in a search area to a sphere.
Cylinder Fitting Sets a CMM point to a cylinder. Pair points are found by fitting polyvertices in a search area to a cylinder.
Cone Fitting Sets a CMM point to a cone. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices in
a search area to a cone.
Torus Fitting Sets a CMM point to a torus. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a torus.
Surface Fitting Sets a CMM point to a surface. Pair points are found by fitting polyvertices in a search area to a surface.
Direction Defines the approaching direction to an object. The direction for measuring a CMM
point is displayed as a blue arrow. Four direction options are available: Auto, Nominal Normal,
Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected on a
boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a nominal face.
Nominal Tangent Sets the approaching direction to an object tangent to a nominal

face.
358
Manual Manually sets the approaching direction to an object.
Rod Contact
This method is similar to a rod-type probing device. The Rod Contact method can find a contact
point on scan data but does not consider any physical conflicts between the virtual probe and scan
data. The virtual rod defines the searching zone on scan data and is useful for measuring
boundaries or features on sheet metal parts.
Rod Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the rod probe to scan data. The Rod Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. The Rod Axis option defines the direction of
the rod.
How to Use Rod Contact

How to find a contact point using the Rod Contact method
2. Choose the Rod Contact method.
3. Pick a point on a boundary of the nominal data and set the rod radius, search depth and
rod length.
359
warning colors.
Options in Detail for Rod Contact

Rod Radius / Search Depth / Rod Length Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the
searching zone will be candidate points for a CMM point.
360
Direction Selects the Measuring Direction and Rod Axis for the Rod Contact method.
Measuring Direction Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point
is selected on a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface. Four
direction options are available: Auto, Nominal Normal, Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is
selected on a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a
surface.
Nominal Normal Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a
nominal face.
Nominal Tangent Sets the approaching direction to an object tangent to a

nominal face.
Rod Axis Defines the direction of the rod axis. Four direction options are available: Auto,
Nominal Normal, Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto Sets the rod axis direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected on
a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal Sets the rod axis direction to an object normal to a nominal
face.
361
Nominal Tangent Sets the rod axis direction to an object tangent to a nominal
face.
Manual Manually sets the rod axis direction to an object.
Disk Contact
This method is similar to a disk-type probing device. The Disk Contact method can find a contact
data. The virtual disk defines the searching zone on scan data.
Disk Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the disk probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. The Direction option defines the contacting
direction of the disk. Using the flat surface of the disk probe can find a maximum point within the
search zone.
How to Use Disk Contact

How to find a contact point using the Disk Contact method
2. Choose the Disk Contact method.
362
warning colors.
Options in Detail for Disk Contact

Direction Selects the Measuring Direction for the Disk Contact method.
363
surface.
nominal face.

nominal face.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Point
Tip & Tutorial
Simulating a CMM to create Reference Points for RPS Alignment
7.4.5.3.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Vector
What
The Ref. Vector command creates a reference vector. A reference vector is a virtual axis with a
direction and infinite size. A ref. vector is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Vector command is useful for:
Extracting a vector entity
Finding the axis of a cylinder

364
Finding the axis of a cone
Finding the intersection between two planes
Adding lines on a section
Inspecting straightness in a scan-only inspection process
How to Use
How to find a vector from two intersecting planes
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Reg. Geometry > Vector or click
the icon in the tool bar.
2. Change the Method to Intersect 2 Planes.
3. Select two faces on the nominal data.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Vector1 will be created by intersecting two planes.
Its pair geometry will also be calculated.
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
365
Methods
Definition
Extract
Find Slot Axis
Find Cylinder Axis
Find Cone Axis
Projection
Pick Point & Line
Convert
Intersect 2 Planes
Average
Tangent
Cross 2 Lines
Probe Points
Definition Creates a vector using the mathematical definition of a vector. A numeric value can
be input or a point can be picked manually in the Model View.
Position & Direction Creates a ref. vector with Position and Direction values.
Position Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manual input of specific
values for X, Y and Z.
Direction Selects a linear entity to acquire a directional value or allows the
manual input of a specific numerical value. The X, Y or Z buttons align the direction
to a selected direction.
366
Start & End Creates a vector by defining the Start Position and the End Position.
Start Position and End Position Creates a vector by connecting two positions.
The positions can be selected in the Model View or manually input into the X, Y, Z
boxes.
Extract Extracts a vector from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
When a ref. vector is created by fitting a section of scan data, its straightness can be measured.
To inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. vector, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the
vector. It can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only inspection process.
will be used.
367
N Sigma
Project On Plane Projects a created vector onto a selected planar entity.
Find Slot Axis Creates a vector of a slot on a selected entity using a fitting algorithm. The
fitting option is the same as the Extract method.
points.
Max. Bound Finds the minimum circumscribed geometry using the minimum
368
Find Cylinder Axis Creates a cylinder axis from a selected entity by using the fitting algorithm.
The fitting option is same as the Extract method.
Use Normal Excludes points that have a normal angle larger than the normal of
fitted ref. geometry. After removing points, the application will internally generate
fitted ref. geometry again from the refined points.
Axis Constraint Constrain the direction of an axis.
Use Nominal As It Is Defines an axis in the same manner as Stage1. This option is
displayed in Stage2 when defining a scan pair.
Use Specified Axis As Initial Guess Defines an initial axis that can be used for
finding the direction of a fitting shape.
Use Specified Axis As It Is Manually define the direction of an axis. The direction
of an axis can be defined by selecting an entity that has a vector property or
manually typing the values.
Find Cone Axis Creates a cone axis from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm. The
fitting option is same as the Find Cylinder Axis method.
Projection Creates a vector by projecting a planar entity onto a linear entity.

To make a vector using the Projection method:
1. Select a planar entity such as a plane, face, or region.
2. Select a linear entity such as a line, vector, or edge.
3. Click OK.
369
Pick Multiple Points - Creates a vector by picking two or more points.

To make a vector using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick two or more points.
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & Line Creates a vector by picking a point as the position and a linear entity as the
direction.
To make a vector using the Pick Point & Line method:
1. Select a linear entity for the direction of a vector.
2. Pick a point for the position of the vector.
3. Click OK.
Convert Creates a vector as an axis of a selected entity or on a selected entity.

To make a vector using the Convert method:
1. Select a cylindrical entity such as a face or a region, or a linear entity such as a line or an
edge.
2. Click OK.
370
Intersect 2 Planes Creates a vector from intersecting two planes.

To make a vector using the Intersect 2 Planes method:
1. Select two planar entities such as planes, faces, regions.
2. Click OK.
Average Creates a vector by averaging two linear entities.

To make a vector using the Average method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, vectors.
2. Click OK.
Tangent Creates a vector that is tangent to a selected entity.

To make a vector by using the Tangent method:
1. Pick a point on an entity such as a curve, edge, or poly-vertex.
2. Click OK.
Cross 2 Lines Creates a vector from crossing two linear entities.

To make a vector using the Tangent method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, or vectors.
2. Click OK.
371
Probe Points Creates a vector using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a vector created by compensated probe points on a selected
plane.
Flip Compensation Flips the direction of compensation. For example, when the
Compensation Direction of nominal data in the Properties is set to Probe Direction,
compensation will correspond as shown in the figures below:
Unchecked
Checked
[Stage 2]
As Nominal Automatically creates a pair of ref. geometry from scan data as described in
Stage1.
Manual Manually creates a pair of ref. geometry from scan data as described in Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Plane
7.4.5.4.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Plane
What
The Ref. Plane command creates a reference plane. A reference plane is a virtual plane that has a
normal direction but an infinite size. A ref. plane is used for adding assisting geometry for
372
inspection.
Why
The Ref. Plane command is useful for:
Inspecting flatness in a scan-only inspection process
Offsetting a planar entity
Adding a projection plane
Adding section planes
Extracting a plane entity
Extracting a tangent plane
Extracting an orthogonal plane
Extracting an extreme position
How to Use
How to extract a plane from a nominal face
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Plane or click the
2. Select the Extract Method.
3. Select a face on the model.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created and its pair point
will be found on the scan data.
warning colors.
373
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
Pick Point & Normal
Pick Point & Coplanar Axis
Convert
N Division
Offset
Rotation
Average
View Direction
Tangent
Orthogonal
Draw Line
Mirror
Extreme Position
Probe Points
Definition Creates a ref. plane by using the mathematical definition of the plane. The value
can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Position & Normal Creates a ref. plane using Position and Normal values.
Position Specifies the values of X, Y and Z, or manually selects a point where the
normal value will be automatically acquired.
374
Normal Selects a point on the model to acquire a normal value of a picked object
or used to specify a numerical value. By clicking the X, Y, or Z buttons, a normal can
be aligned to a selected direction.
3 Positions Creates a plane which intersects with three positions.

Position 1 and Position 2 and Position 3 Chooses a position on the model or
directly inputs a X,Y and Z value.
Coefficient - Creates a plane using specified A, B, C and D values which are coefficients of
the plane equation (Ax + By + Cz + D = 0).
A, B, C, D Inputs the numerical value of coefficient of a plane.
Extract Extracts a plane from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
375
When a ref. plane is created by fitting a section of scan data, its flatness can be measured. To
inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. vector, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the plane.
It can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only inspection process.
nominal entities.
points.
376
will be used.
N Sigma
377
Projection Creates a plane by projecting a planar entity onto a linear entity.

To make a plane using the Projection method:
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a plane by picking three or more points.

To make a plane using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick three or more points.
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & Normal Axis Creates a plane by picking a point (position) and selecting a normal
axis.
To make a plane using the Pick Point & Normal method:
1. Select a linear entity for normal of the plane.
2. Pick a point for the position of the plane.
3. Click OK.
Pick Point & Coplanar Axis Creates a plane on a coplanar axis.

To make a plane using the Pick Point & Normal method:
1. Select a linear entity for coplanar axis.
378
2. Pick a point for the position of the plane.

3. Click OK.
Convert Creates plane on a selected planar entity.

To make a plane using the Convert method:
1. Select a planar entity (plane, face, region, etc).
2. Click OK.
N Division Creates planes by dividing selected entities. Multiple planes will be created evenly
and perpendicularly to the selected entity.
To make a plane using the N Division method:
1. Select a line, curve, edge or etc.
2. Define sub option.
3. Click OK.
Uniform Creates planes by evenly dividing a selected entity by specified number.
entity.
379
Offset Creates a specified number of planes by offsetting them from a selected planar entity.
To make a plane using the Offset method:
2. Set distance.
3. Click OK.
Note: A ref. plane can be offset by using the Ctrl key and mouse dragging an existing ref.
plane.
Rotation Creates multiple planes by rotating a planar entity.
To make a plane using the Rotation method:
2. Select a linear entity such as a line, vector, or edge which will be the rotation axis.
3. Set the rotation angle.
4. Click OK.
Average Creates a plane by averaging two selected planar entities. The planar entities do not
need to be parallel.
To make a plane using the Average method:
1. Select two planar entities such as a plane, face, or region.
380
2. Click OK.
View Direction Creates a plane in the current view direction.

To make a plane using the View Direction method:
1. Pick a point also known as a position, on the Model View.
2. The plane normal will be the viewing direction.
3. Click OK.
Tangent Creates a plane that is tangent to a picked entity.

To make a plane using the Tangent method:
1. Pick a point also known as a position, on a curve point, poly-vertex, vertex, face or ref. point.
2. Click OK.
Orthogonal Creates an orthogonal plane from a selected point (point-element entity) on a

mesh. A point and two body faces can also be used.
To make a plane using the Orthogonal method on a mesh:
1. Pick a point on a mesh.
2. Click OK.
381
To make a plane using the Orthogonal method on a body:

1. Pick a vertex on a body.
2. Select two body faces.
3. Click OK.
Draw Line Creates a plane by drawing a line on the screen.

To make a plane using the Draw Line method on a body:
1. Draw a linear line on the screen.
2. Click OK.
Mirror Finds and creates a symmetrical plane of a mesh automatically. An initial plane which
roughly indicates the normal direction of the plane is necessary.
Lock Normal Direction Of Mirror Plane As Selected Planes uses the normal of the initial
plane as it is.
To make a plane using the Mirror method:
1. Select an initial plane.
2. Select a mesh.
3. Click OK.
382
Extreme Position Creates a plane at a maximum or minimum position of a selected entity in a

specified direction.
To make a plane using the Extreme Position method:
1. Click the Direction button and select a linear entity such as a line, or vector.
2. Select a target entity.
3. Click OK.
The following images show generated planes at the extreme position to the Z direction on an
entity.
Probe Points Creates a plane using probed points.

Flip Compensation Flips the direction of compensation.
Fitting Type Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from nominal data.
Best Fit Finds geometry using the least squares fitting method from the probe
points. It is used for finding best-fitted scan pair geometry from scan pair points.
Min. Bound Finds maximum inscribed geometry that contacts the most distant
probe point along the negative normal direction using the minimum separation
fitting method.
383
Max. Bound Finds minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most
distant probe point along the positive normal direction using the minimum
separation fitting method.

[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Vector
384
7.4.5.5.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Circle
What
The Ref. Circle command creates a reference circle. A reference circle is a two-dimensional entity
that has a center and a radius. A ref. circle is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Circle command is useful for:
Inspecting circularity in a scan-only inspection process
Finding a hole
Finding a center or an arc
Extracting a circle entity
How to Use
How to extract a circle from a nominal face
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Circle or click the
2. Choose the Find Circle Center Method and select a circular edge.
385
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
N Division
Pick Plane & Surface
Probe Points
Definition Creates a ref. circle by using the mathematical definition of a circle. The value can
be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Center, Normal & Radius Creates a circle using Position, Normal, and Radius values.
3 Positions Creates a circle by three specified positions.
386
Extract Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
When a ref. plane is created by fitting a section of scan data, its circularity can be measured. To
inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. circle, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the plane. It
can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only inspection process.
nominal entities.
points.
387
will be used.
N Sigma
Project On Plane Projects a circle onto a selected plane.
The following options are available in Stage2. When a hole on sheet metal is
scanned the hole boundary may be positioned below the sheet metal surface
because the thickness of the sheet metal is also scanned. The following options are
used to correctly project scan pair ref. geometry onto the surface of a sheet metal
part.
Specify Plane Projects scan pair ref. geometry onto a fitting plane by fitting scan
data around the specified nominal face.
Fit Plane From Scan Pair Projects scan pair ref. geometry onto a fitting plane by
fitting scan data around the initial scan pair ref. geometry.
388
Specify Plane
Fit Plane From Scan Pair
Fix Radius Specifies the value of the radius of a circle if it is already known.
Projection Creates a circle by projecting onto a planar entity. A circle and a planar entity must
be selected.
To make a circle using the Projection method:
2. Select a circular entity such as a ref. circle or edge.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a circle by picking three or more points.

To make a circle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
N Division Creates circles by dividing selected cylindrical or conical entities. Multiple circles
will be created evenly and perpendicularly to the selected entity.
To make a circle using the N Division method:
389
1. Select a cylindrical or conical entity.

2. Define a division method and a total number.
3. Select two points for a Start Point and End Point.
4. Click OK.
Offset Creates planes by a specified offset distance and a total number on a selected
entity.
Uniform
Offset
Pick Plane & Surface Creates a circle on an intersection between a planar entity and an entity
that has a circular section such as a cylinder, cone, sphere, or torus.
Check Orthogonality Allows the creation of a circle only if two planes are orthogonal.
To make a circle using the Pick Plane & Surface method:
1. Select a circular section entity.
2. Set a plane.
3. Click OK.
Probe Points Creates a circle using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a circle created by compensated probe points on a selected
plane.
390
Best Fit Finds geometry using the least squares fitting method from probed
fitting method.
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Slot
7.4.5.6.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Slot
What
391
The Ref. Slot command creates a reference slot. A reference slot is a two-dimensional entity that
has two lines and two arcs. A ref. slot is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Slot command is useful for:
Finding a center of a slot
How to Use
How to extract a slot from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Slot or click the icon
in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Extract Method and select a slot edges.
will be found on the scan data
warning colors.
392
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
Probe Points
Definition Creates a slot by using the mathematical definition of a slot. The value can be input
numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Coordinate & Size Creates a slot by specifying a Center, Normal, Width, and Radius.
2 Centers, Normal & Radius Creates a slot by specifying a Center1, Center2, Normal,
and Radius.
Extract Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

393
points.
Best Fit
Min. / Max. Bound from Minimum

Separation
will be used.
N Sigma
394
Project On Plane Projects a slot onto a selected plane.
part.
Specify Plane
Projection Creates a slot by projecting onto a planar entity. A slot and a planar entity must be
selected.
To make a slot using the Projection method:
2. Select a slot entity such as a ref. slot or edge.
3. Click OK.
395
Pick Multiple Points Creates a slot by picking six or more points.

To make a slot using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick six or more points.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points Creates a slot using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a slot created by compensated probe points on a selected
plane.
fitting method.
Best Fit

Separation
[Stage 2]
396
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Circle
7.4.5.7.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Rectangle
What
The Ref. Rectangle command creates a reference slot. A reference rectangle is a two-dimensional
entity that has four lines and four right angles. A ref. rectangle is used for adding assisting
geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Rectangle command is useful for:
Finding a center of a rectangle
Extracting a rectangular entity
How to Use
How to extract a rectangle from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Rectangle or click
2. Choose the Extract Method and select rectangle edges.
397
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
Probe Points
Definition Creates a rectangle by using the mathematical definition of a rectangle. The value
can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Coordinate & Size Creates a rectangle by specifying a Center, Normal, Width, Height,
and Corner Radius.
398
3 Positions Creates a rectangle by specifying three positions. Position1 and Position2

define an edge of a rectangle and Position3 defines the height of the rectangle.
Extract Extracts a rectangle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

points.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
399
will be used.
N Sigma
Project On Plane Projects a rectangle onto a selected plane.
part.
Specify Plane
400
Rounded Corner Creates a rectangle with rounded corners.
Projection Creates a rectangle by projecting onto a planar entity. A rectangle and a planar
entity must be selected.
To make a rectangle using the Projection method:
2. Select a rectangular entity such as a ref. rectangle or edge.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a rectangle by picking six or more points.

To make a rectangle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Probe Points Creates a rectangle using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a rectangle created by compensated probe points on a
selected plane.
401
fitting method.
distant probed point along the positive normal direction using the minimum
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
7.4.5.8.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Regular Polygon
What
The Ref. Regular Polygon command creates a reference polygon. A reference polygon is a twodimensional entity that has several equal lines. A ref. polygon is used for adding assisting
402
Why
The Ref. Regular Polygon command is useful for:
Finding a center of a polygon
Extracting a regular polygon entity
How to Use
How to extract a regular polygon from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Regular Polygon or
click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Extract Method and select polygon edges.
warning colors.
403
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
Probe Points
Definition Creates a polygon by using the mathematical definition of a polygon. The value can
Coordinate & Size Creates a polygon by specifying a Center, Normal, U Axis, No. of
Edges, and Rounded Corner.
2 Segment & Rounded Radius Creates a polygon by specifying Start Segment, End
Segment, Normal, Number of Edges and Corner Radius. The Start and End Segments
define an edge of a polygon and Normal defines the direction of a polygon.
404
Extract Extracts a polygon from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

points.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
405
N Sigma
Project On Plane Projects a rectangle onto a selected plane.
part.
Specify Plane

406
Rounded Corner Creates a polygon with rounded corners.
No. Of Edges Sets the number of edges for a polygonal feature shape.
Projection Creates a polygon by projecting onto a planar entity. A polygon and a planar entity
must be selected.
To make a polygon using the Projection method:
2. Select a polygonal entity such as a ref. polygon or edge.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a polygon by picking six or more points.

To make a polygon using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Probe Points Creates a polygon using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a polygon created by compensated probe points on a
selected plane.
407
fitting method.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
No. Of Edges Sets the number of edges for a polygonal feature shape.
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
7.4.5.9.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cylinder
What
The Ref. Cylinder command creates a reference polygon. A reference cylinder is a threeRapidform XOV3 | Menu
408
dimensional entity that has an axis, radius, and a height value. A ref. cylinder is used for adding
assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Cylinder command is useful for:
Inspecting cylindricity in a scan-only inspection process
Extracting a cylinder entity
How to Use
How to extract a cylinder from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Cylinder or click the
2. Choose the Extract Method and select cylinder faces.
warning colors.
Options in Detail
409
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Pick Axis & Radius
Convert
Probe Points
Definition Creates a cylinder by using the mathematical definition of a cylinder. The value can
Position, Normal & Radius Creates a cylinder by specifying a Position, and a Normal
which define the axis of the cylinder, and a Radius.
Axis Points & Radius Creates a cylinder by specifying a Start Position and an End
Position which define the axis of the cylinder, and a Radius.
Extract Extracts a cylinder from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

When a ref. cylinder is created by fitting a section of scan data, its cylindricity can be measured.
To inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. cylinder, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the
410
nominal entities.
points.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
N Sigma
411
Axis Constraint Constrains the direction of an axis.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a cylinder by picking seven or more points.
To make a cylinder using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick seven or more points.
2. Click OK.
Pick Axis & Radius Creates a cylinder by picking a linear or axial entity as an axis and the
radius of the cylinder.
To make a vector using the Pick Axis & Radius method:
1. Select a linear or axial entity to define the cylinder axis.
2. Input the cylinder radius or click the Circular Entity button and pick a circular entity.
3. Click OK.
412
Convert Creates a cylinder by selecting a circular entity.

To make a cylinder using the Convert method:
1. Pick a circular entity such as an edge or ref. circle.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points Creates a cylinder using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a cylinder created by compensated probe points on a
selected plane.
fitting method.
Best Fit

413
Minimum Separation
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Cone
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Sphere
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Torus
7.4.5.10. Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cone

What
The Ref. Cone command creates a reference cone. A reference cone is a three-dimensional entity
that has an axis, two different radii, and a height value. A ref. cone is used for adding assisting
414
Why
The Ref. Cone command is useful for:
Extracting a cone entity
How to Use
How to extract a cone from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Cone or click the
2. Choose the Extract Method and select cone faces.
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
415
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Probe Points
Definition Creates a cone by using the mathematical definition of a cone. The value can be
input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Apex Point & Apex Angle Creates a cone by specifying an Apex Position, an Axis and
an Apex Angle.
Axis Points & Radii Creates a cone by specifying a Top Position, a Bottom Position,
and a Bottom Radius.
Bottom, Radii, Axis & Height Creates a cone by specifying an Axis, a Top Radius, a
Bottom Position, a Bottom Radius and a Height.
416
Extract Extracts a cone from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

nominal entities.
points.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
417
N Sigma
Fix Radius Specifies the value of the radius of a cone if it is already known.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a cone by picking eight or more points.
To make a cone using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick eight or more points.
2. Click OK.
418
Probe Points Creates a cone using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a cone created by compensated probe points on a selected
plane.
fitting method.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation

[Stage 2]
419

Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Cylinder
7.4.5.11. Insert > Ref. Geometry > Sphere

What
The Ref. Sphere command creates a reference sphere. A reference sphere is a three-dimensional
entity that has a center and a radius. A ref. sphere is used for adding assisting geometry for
inspection.
Why
The Ref. Sphere command is useful for:
Extracting a sphere entity
How to Use
How to extract a sphere from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Sphere or click the
2. Choose the Extract Method and select sphere faces.
420
will be found on the scan data
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Convert
Probe Points
Definition Creates a sphere by specifying the Center and Radius of a sphere and using the
mathematical definition of a sphere. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked
421
by a point in the Model View.
Extract Extracts a sphere from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

nominal entities.
points.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
422
N Sigma
Fix Radius Specifies the value of the radius of a sphere if it is already known.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a sphere by picking four or more points.
To make a sphere using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick four or more points.
2. Click OK.
Convert Creates a sphere by selecting a circular entity.

To make a sphere using the Convert method:
1. Pick a circular entity such as an edge or ref. circle.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points Creates a sphere using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a sphere created by compensated probe points on a selected
plane.
423

fitting method.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
Fix Radius Specifies the value of the radius of a sphere if it is already known.
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
424
7.4.5.12. Insert > Ref. Geometry > Torus

What
The Ref. Torus command creates a reference torus. A reference torus is a three-dimensional entity
created by revolving a circle that has a center, axis, and major and minor radii. A ref. torus is used
for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Torus command is useful for:
Extracting a torus entity
How to Use
How to extract a sphere from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Torus or click the
2. Choose the Extract Method and select torus faces.
warning colors.
425
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
Probe Points
Definition Creates a torus by specifying a Center, Axis, Major Radius and Minor Radius of a
torus.
Extract Extracts a sphere from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

nominal entities.
426
points.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
N Sigma
427
Pick Multiple Points Creates a torus by picking seven or more points.
To make a torus using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick seven or more points.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points Creates a torus using probed points.

Project On Plane Projects a torus created by compensated probe points on a selected
plane.
fitting method.
428
Best Fit

Minimum Separation

[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
429
7.4.5.13. Insert > Ref. Geometry > Coordinate

What
The Ref. Coordinate command creates a reference coordinate. A reference coordinate is a local
coordinate system that a user can use to define additional coordinates.
Why
The Ref. Coordinate command is useful for:
Transforming scan data
Aligning scan data
Adding local coordinates
How to Use
How to generate a coordinate using three planes
1. Go to Insert > Ref. Geometry > Coordinate or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Change the method to Intersect 3 Planes.
3. Select three perpendicular faces.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
430
Target Entities
Entities Selects target entities.
Methods
Definition
Extract
Pick Point & 2 Lines
Pick Point & Coordinate
Insert 3 Planes
Tangent
Convert
Definition Creates a ref. coordinate by the mathematical definition of the coordinate.

Origin & Axis Creates a coordinate using the Origin and Axis1 value.
Origin Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manually input of the X, Y
and Z values.
Axis1 / Axis2 Selects a point on the model to acquire the direction of an object or
by specifying a numerical value. The X, Y or Z buttons align the normal to the
selected direction.
Order Defines the order of Axis1 and Axis2 as X, Y or Z. If the order is XY, Axis1
will be set to X direction and Axis2 will be set to Y direction.
Origin & Rotation Creates a coordinate with the Origin and Rotation value.
Origin Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manually input of the X, Y
and Z values.
Rotation Specifies the degree of an angle of an axis that a coordinate will rotate
around.
Extract Extracts a coordinate from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
431
will be used.
N Sigma
Pick Multiple Points Creates a coordinate by picking two or more points. For more
information about the Order option, see the Definition method.
To make a coordinate using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & 2 Lines Creates a coordinate from a point used for an origin and two lines used
432
for directions. The direction of the coordinate on the first and second line will follow the settings
in the Order option. For more about the Order option, see the Definition method.
Pick Point & Coordinate Creates a coordinate from a point used for an origin and another
coordinate.
Intersect 3 Planes Creates a coordinate from three planar entities.

Check Orthogonality Allows the creation of a coordinate only when three planes are
orthogonal.
Tangent Creates a coordinate tangent to a manually picked entity using a point on a mesh or
a body face.
Convert Creates a coordinate by selecting a ref. slot or a ref. rectangle.
433
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
7.4.6. Insert > 3D GD&T

What
The Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing, or GD&T menu features processes for analyzing the
size, form, orientation, and location of features in 2D or 3D spaces as well as evaluating Pass/Fail of
features within a user-defined tolerance. The size of features can be analyzed using geometric
dimensions such as Linear Dimension, Angular Dimension, and Radial Dimension. The form,
orientation, and location of features can be analyzed using geometric tolerances such as Flatness,
Circularity, Cylindricity, and Parallelism.
Geometric Dimensions
Geometric Tolerances
Basic Dimension
- Linear Dimension
- Angular Dimension
Form Type
- Radial Dimension
- Circularity
- Flatness
- Straightness
- Cylindricity
- Bore Depth
Orientation Type
- Counterbore
- Parallelism
- Countersink
- Thickness
- Perpendicular
- Elliptical
- Angularity
Run-out Type
- Run-out
- Total Run-out
Profile Type
- Line profile
434
- Surface profile
Location Type
- Concentricity
- Symmetry
- Position
The Insert > 3D GD&T command enters the 3D GD&T mode where GD&Ts and datums can be
generated. When GD&Ts are created, new inspection features named 3D GD&T1, 3D GD&T2 will
be created in the Inspection Feature tree.
For information about 3D GD&T, see Tools > GD&T Tools.

Note: 2D GD&T are supported in the section mode.
7.4.7. Insert > Deviation

The Deviation menu features processes for comparing 3D scan data to nominal data within a userdefined maximum deviation value based on a variety of criteria, such as size, thickness, a shape of
a boundary or curve, or the geometric features of a model. The comparison is performed by
finding scan points within the maximum deviation and measuring distances projected from scan
points onto a nominal entity along a user-defined direction. A normal direction of a nominal entity
is used as the projection direction by default. This process assumes that 3D scan data is aligned to
nominal data.
The Deviation menu provides various deviation methods to inspect 3D digital data. After
executing a deviation, it is registered as inspection features in the Inspection Feature Tree with its
history. Deviation parameters can be edited at another time to get the result again.
435
History Tree of Deviation Features
Overall Deviation
Whole Deviation
Calculates a gap distance by projecting all scan points onto nominal data.
Comparison Point
Expresses the deviation of a point on nominal data and a point on scan data.
Deviation with Curve
Boundary Deviation
Performs comparisons on the boundary regions between design data and scan data and
displays the results with colored lines or points.
Curve Deviation
Performs comparisons between a nominal curve and a scan curve and displays the deviation
results with colored lines or points.
Compares a silhouette of scan data to nominal data and displays the results with colored lines
or points.
Virtual Edge Deviation

Analyzes the deviation at sharp edges of scan data and nominal data.
Geometry Deviation
Geometry Deviation
Compares analytic geometries such as cylinders, circles, and planes between nominal and scan
data.
7.4.7.1.

436
What
The Whole Deviation command calculates gap distance by projecting all scan points onto
nominal data. Deviation is displayed using color mapping which helps to analyze negative and
positive deviation flow through a whole part.
Nominal and Scan
Whole Deviation
Why
The Whole Deviation command is useful for:
Analyzing the overall deviation flow of a part
Analyzing freeform surfaces
Analyzing deformations during manufacturing
How to Use
How to the deviation of a whole part
1.
Import and align nominal and scan data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Whole Deviation or
2.
The first stage will define the calculation method. Choose the Shape option for the
Method, and the Min. Distance option for the Projection Direction.
3.
Click the Next Stage button

. The deviation between the nominal and scan parts will
be calculated and displayed using a color map.
437
4.
To analyze gap distance values on specific positions, select the Picking method for Local
Average Tagging and select desired points on the model. The gap distance will be
displayed in tags that will be colored as pass or fail based on the tolerance range.
Note: A display of the deviation tag color follows the deviation color defined in
colorbar by default and its result value is displayed by Go/NG (No Go) color.
5.
Click OK to complete the command. The display properties of boundary deviation entities
can be changed in the Properties panel.
438
The Tabular View displays tags and statistical values.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Calculation Options
Scan Data Sampling Ratio Samples scan data points by a specified value. When the ratio is
100%, all selected data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be used.
When using large data sets sampling with a smaller ratio will not sacrifice registration results
but will decrease processing time.
Calculation Methods
Shape Compares the deviation between nominal and scan surfaces.
Max. Deviation Specifies the maximum distance used to ignore scan points when
deviation is over a specified value. Any scan points over the maximum distance will be
439
treated as outlier data.

Thickness Compares the thickness between nominal and scan thickness. This command is
useful for inspecting the wall thickness of a part such as a plastic part or blade part.
Two methods are available to detect the thickness on a point.

The By Ray Firing method shoots a ray and detects the thickness when the ray meets the
opposite side.
The By Intact Sphere method internally generates a sphere and detects the thickness when the
sphere meets another scan area.
When scan data is noisy it can cause incorrect calculations in thickness as displayed in the
following image. In this situation, moving the slider of the Ignore Neighboring Noise option to
More can help to provide a correction calculation.
Max. Thickness specifies a maximum thickness to be reported.
Projection Direction
Min. Distance Projects scan points to a minimum distance to express deviation.
440
When the Apply Single Component option is checked, deviation will be analyzed in a specific
direction. If the component direction is X, only the X direction value of the deviation will be
displayed.
Custom Projects scan points in a specific direction to express deviation.
[Stage 2]
441
Display Options
Color Map Displays results as a color map using a defined color range.
Show Contour Line Displays black curves between color boundaries to clearly
distinguish a range when neighboring colors are similar.
Show Contour Line
Hide Contour Line
Whisker Displays deviation results as displacement vectors with colors defined by a deviation
color range. Whiskers also serve to check the projection direction of each scan point.
To adjust the whisker size, set the value manually or use the slider next to Whisker Multiplier.
To adjust the amount of whiskers, set the value manually or use the slider next to Whisker
Display Ratio.
442
Color Point Displays deviation results on all scan points with colors as defined by a deviation
color range.
Use Tolerance Color Uses the tolerance color to color a model based on a user defined
range. The tolerance colors can be changed in the display tab in the preferences or can be
manually edited in the color bar.
With Tolerance Color
Without Tolerance Color

Over Tol. Count Marks the highest positions of deviation groups over a specified tolerance.
Over Tol. Count: 3
Under Tol. Count Marks the lowest positions of deviation groups under a specified tolerance.
Picking Marks deviation values on selected positions of a model.
443
Linear Pattern Marks deviation points by using the linear pattern method. A start position
needs to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set Direction1 and Direction 2 by
picking a linear entity or an entity that has an axis. Set the No. Of Instances and Distance to
make multiple points.
Direction 1:
Direction 2:
Interval: 10
Interval: 5
Instances: 5
Instances: 3
Circular Pattern Marks deviation points by using a circular method. A start position needs to
be specified using the Seed Position function. Set the Rotation Axis by picking a linear entity
or an entity that has an axis. Set the No. Of Instances and Interval Angle to make multiple
points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be equally divided by a specified number of
instances.
No. Of Instances: 10
Equal Spacing
Interval Angle: 15
Along Curve Marks deviation points on selected curves. A start position needs to be specified
using the Seed Position function. Select curves or edges as Path Curve. Set No. Of Instances
and Distance to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a curve will be equally
divided by a specified the number of instances.
444
Equal Spacing
Distance: 5
Cylindrical Pattern Marks deviation points on a cylindrical face by using a cylindrical pattern
method. A start position needs to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set the
Rotation Axis by picking a linear entity or an entity that has an axis. Set No. Of Instances and
Interval Angle to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be equally
divided by a specified number of instances. To offset the pattern to the axis direction, set No. Of
Offset and Distance.
Spherical Pattern Marks deviation points on a spherical face by using a spherical pattern
Sphere Center and Polar Axis by selecting an entity. Set the Sphere Theta Option and Sphere
Phi Option to make multiple points.
Theta Option:
Phi Option:
No. Of Instance: 6
No. Of Instance: 3
Interval Angle: 15
Interval Angle: 30
Reference
Related Commands
445

7.4.7.2.
What
The Comparison Point command expresses the deviation of a point on nominal data and a point
on scan data. The mean value of the distance between each nominal and scan point are used to
calculate a comparison point. Each comparison point consists of an x, y, and z location point and
the normal, radius, max. angle, and max. distance criteria values.
Comparison Points Result
Detail View of Comparison Point
Why
The Comparison Point command is useful for:
Analyzing the accurate mean value on a small area
Analyzing the deviation on specific positions
Managing critical positions for a part
How to Use
How to compare deviation on specific CAD positions
1.
Import and align nominal and scan data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Comparison Point
446
or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Change the distance of the Position Snap option to 10.
3.
Change the view to top of the model. When the mouse cursor is hovered is over the
model, its position coordinates will be displayed.
4.
Select multiple points on the model using the snap function. When a point is selected its
deviation and pass/fail color will be displayed.
5.
447
Note: The preview function is available only in the Pick Points method. When
comparison points are added on a model while the Preview function is enabled, the
deviation result will be calculated in real-time. When the option values of the
comparison points on the dialog tree are changed, they will be applied to calculation
result in real-time and the result will be changed. If a radius being searched has many
poly-vertices or if the options are frequently changed, the calculation speed may be
slower; so it may be helpful to disable this option.
Options in Detail
Methods
Pick Points Marks deviation points on selected positions on a model. To reuse exported
comparison points or other position data, use the Create Comparison Points From File button
. Points in the .cmpt, .igs, .iges, .step, or ascii text file format can be imported.
To export comparison points:

448
1. Go to File > Export.

2. Choose a Deviation type.
3. Select a comparison point feature from an Inspection Feature or the Model tree.
4. Click OK.
5. Choose a file type and click the Save button.
Note: When using the ASCII Converter in the Comparison Point From File function
to
import comparison points, the projection direction on the nominal data is decided by
normal information (I, j, k) in the file and each comparison point will use the face normal of
the projected position. If all points have the same normal information in the file, a message
box will be displayed that displays: The points in the file have the same normal information.
Do you want to change normal in criteria option? If yes is clicked, the Normal option under
the criteria of the comparison point will be changed to the Custom direction. This custom
direction can be modified.
If a file does not contain normal information or ignores normal information during the
import process, points will be projected to the minimum distance and each comparison
point will use the face normal of the projected position.
Pick Probe Point Marks deviation points by using probed points.
Direction 1:
Interval: 10
Direction 2:
Interval: 5
Instances: 5
Instances: 3
Note: The projection direction of linear patterned comparison points will be defined by an
449
orthogonal direction constructed by Direction1 and 2. The deviation between nominal data
and scan data will be measured at the projected positions on a nominal face.
instances.
Equal Spacing
Interval Angle: 15
Equal Spacing
Distance: 5
To offset comparison points from a curve, input an Offset value. This option is useful for directly
generating comparison points by offsetting distances from the boundary of nominal data.
Offset from a boundary

450
Spherical Pattern Marks deviation points on spherical face using the spherical pattern
method. You need to pick or type a start position using Seed Position. Set Sphere Center and
Polar Axis by selecting an entity. Set Sphere Theta Option and Sphere Phi Option to make
multiple points.
Theta Option:
Phi Option:
No. Of Instance: 6
No. Of Instance: 3
Interval Angle: 15
Interval Angle: 30
Criteria
The following image displays how to judge correct scan points.
Projected scan points within a comparison point radius can be candidates
Scan points over a maximum distance will be ignored
Scan points over a maximum angle will be ignored
451
Nominal Value Specifies a standard deviation value that judges the deviation result as a go or
no-go status. When deviation results are between the combination of Nominal Value and Low
Tolerance and Nominal Value and High Tolerance, they will show as Pass or Warning. Otherwise,
it will Fail. When scan data if offset by a constant distance, the offset distance can be specified as
a nominal value.
Normal Decides the normal vectors of a comparison point. A normal vector is used to classify
whether scan points are normal within a Max. Angle. The Auto method automatically gets the
normal vectors from the face of nominal data. The Custom method allows manually
specification of the X, Y, and Z vectors for a custom normal direction.
Radius Specifies a spherical radius of a comparison point. Scan points projected onto a sphere
will be averaged and the application will calculate the deviation between the comparison
points on the nominal data and scan data.
Max. Angle Specifies the maximum normal angle difference between a comparison point and
scan points. When a projected scan point has a normal direction is over a given angle compared
to the normal direction of a comparison point, it will be ignored during calculation. Scan points
with a similar normal direction to a specific position of normal data can be used for accurate
452
calculations.
Max. Distance Specifies the maximum deviation between scan and nominal data. Scan points
over a given distance will be ignored during calculation.
Apply Single Component Analyzes deviation in a specific direction. If the component
direction is X, all X direction values of the deviation will be displayed.
Calculation Options
Shape Compares the deviation between nominal surfaces and scan surfaces.
Thickness Compares the thickness between nominal and scan thickness. This command is
useful for inspecting the wall thickness of a part such as a plastic part or blade part.
Same As Comparison Point Projects scan points along the normal direction of comparison
points that are set in the Normal option under Criteria.
Custom Projects scan points in a specific direction to express deviation.
Use Specific Tolerance Sets the default tolerance that
Reference
453
Related Commands
7.4.7.3.
What
The Boundary Deviation command performs comparisons on the boundary regions between
design data and scan data and displays the results with color lines or color points. A boundary is
the border between a model and space and can be shown on an open model such a sheet metal
part.
Boundaries
Boundary Deviation
Why
The Boundary Deviation command is useful for:
Analyzing an outer shape
Analyzing holes in sheet metal
Trim line inspection
How to Use
How to analyze a boundary
1.
Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Boundary Deviation
454
2.
Pick a boundary on the nominal data.
3.
. Deviation will be calculated and shown in a color map.
455
4.
Select the Picking method under Local Average Tagging and select points on a
boundary to check specific deviation results.
5.
456
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Boundaries Selects a single or multiple boundaries on nominal data.
Note: Scan boundaries can be shown by checking Boundary in the Display tab.
Apply Single Component Analyzes deviation in a specific direction.

Normal Displays deviation along the normal direction from nominal data.
Tangent Displays deviation along the tangent direction of nominal data.
The following image shows Normal and Tangent components on a boundary point:
User Define Defines a custom component direction of a deviation. Specify direction

values by selecting a linear entity or an entity that has an axis.
Max. Deviation Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance will be
ignored in calculation and treated as noise.
Compensate Boundary For Side Wall Or Bending Shape Compensates boundaries
positioned below a sheet metal surface due to the sheet metal thickness also being scanned, by
projecting onto a scan surface.
457
The results of a boundary deviation will be different based on whether this option is used or
not.
Boundary Deviation
Boundary Deviation
Without Compensation
With Compensation
Search Distance Finds a scan surface by specifying the distance value from a nominal
boundary.
[Stage 2]
Display Options
458
Display Ratio.
Show Single Component Whisker Displays the defined direction of whiskers when the
Apply Single Component option is applied in Stage1.
Minimum Distance Whisker Displays the minimum distance of whisker and is

available when the Apply Single Component option is applied in Stage1.
Single & Minimum Whisker Displays the defined direction of whiskers and the
minimum distance of whisker and is available when the Apply Single Component
option is applied in Stage1.
color range.
Use Tolerance Color Uses the tolerance color to color a model based on a user defined
459

Over Tol. Count: 3
Reference
460
Related Commands
7.4.7.4.
What
The Curve Deviation command performs comparisons between a nominal curve and a scan curve,
and displays the deviation results as a colored line or point.
Curve Deviation
Display Result using Whiskers
Why
The Curve Deviation command is useful for:
Analyzing freeform shapes
Analyzing character lines
Analyzing section curves
How to Use
How to analyze curves between nominal and scan data
1.
Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Create two curves using the Tools > Curve Tools
command, one on the nominal data and one on the scan data. Go to Insert > Deviation
> Curve Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar.
461
2.
Select and designate each curve as a Nominal Curve and a Scan Curve.
3.
4.
Moves the slider for the Whisker Multiplier option to the right to increase the whisker
distance.
. Curve deviation results will be displayed.
462
5.
Select the Picking method under Local Average Tagging and select points on the model
to display specific deviation values used to analyze gap distances.
Gap distances will be displayed with a pass or fail color in the tags based on a defined
tolerance range.
6.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
463
Nominal Curve Selects a nominal curve that serves as a reference curve.

Scan Curve Selects a scan curve that serves as a comparison curve.
Apply Single Component Analyzes deviation in a specific direction.
Max. Deviation Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance will be
ignored in calculation and treated as noise.
[Stage 2]
Display Options
Display Ratio.
464
color range.
Use Tolerance Color - Uses the tolerance color to color a model based on a user defined

Over Tol. Count: 3
465
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.7.5.
What
The Silhouette Deviation command compares a silhouette of scan data to nominal data and
displays the results with color lines or color points.
466
Why
The Silhouette Deviation command is useful for:
Analyzing an outer profile of a plastic part
Analyzing trim lines for sheet metal parts
How to Use
How to analyze a silhouette between nominal and scan data
1.
Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Silhouette
Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Choose Straight Silhouette and select nominal faces as Reference faces.
3.
Select a linear entity or an entity that has an axis as a Direction. This example uses a ref.
plane.
467
4.
5.
boundary to display specific deviation values.
. Deviation results will be displayed as a color map.
6.

468
The display properties of boundary deviation entities can be changed in the

Properties panel.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Display Options
Straight Silhouette Creates a silhouette by projecting a nominal body or faces on a plane.
Reference Selects a nominal body or faces of a body as a reference.
Direction Defines the direction of a light. Using the direction a silhouette will be
created on a virtual plane.
469
Revolving Silhouette Creates a silhouette by revolving a nominal body or faces on a plane.

Entities can be selected for Reference, Rotation Axis, and Direction.
Reference Selects a nominal body or faces of a body as a reference.
Rotation Axis Defines a revolving axis. A linear entity or an entity that has an axis can
be selected.
Direction Defines a projection plane by selecting a planar entity.
Calculation Options
Scan Search Radius Defines a searching zone size to find a scan point around a selected
reference.
470
Use Specific Tolerance Sets a default tolerance for faces of nominal data and is used to in
inspection of comparison points.
Max Deviation Specifies a maximum deviation between scan and nominal data. Scan points
Local Coordinate
Origin Defines a local coordinate to serve as an origin. The local coordinate settings affect the
location of a model.
that has an axis.
[Stage 2]
Display Options
Use Specific Tolerance Sets a default tolerance for faces of nominal data and is used to in
inspection of comparison points. The Flip Sign of Deviation Result button
positive and negative results.
reverses
471
Display Ratio.
color range.

472
Over Tol. Count: 3
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.7.6.
What
The Virtual Edge Deviation command analyzes deviation at sharp edges of scan data and
nominal data. Many real world parts edges are rounded by filleting or abrasion caused by the
movement of a related mechanical part. The Virtual Edge Deviation command can calculate a
virtual edge from rounded edges and compare the deviation.
473
Virtual Edge
Virtual Edge Deviation Result
Why
The Virtual Edge Deviation command is useful for:
Trim line inspection
Analyzing abrasion on edges
How to Use
How to analyze a virtual edge between nominal and scan data
1.
Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Virtual Edge
Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Choose the By Common Edge method to use sharp edges without fillets on CAD data.
Select shared edges.
3.
. Deviation results will be displayed as a color map.
474
4.
boundary to display specific deviation values.
5.

The display properties of boundary deviation entities can be changed in the Properties
panel.
475
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Methods
By Common Edges Selects a common edge that has two adjacent faces. When edges do not
have a fillet or chamfer, use this method.
By Edge Groups Selects a group of two edges of faces that are apart from each other. Left
Edges and Right Edges must be chosen to find the intersection of the two groups adjacent
faces. The order of edges is not important. When edges have a fillet or chamfer, use this method.
Calculation Options
Extend Length Defines an extension distance of faces used to intersect two face groups and
to find sharp edges from intersections.
476
Good
Bad

Max. Deviation Specifies a maximum deviation between scan and nominal data. Scan points
[Stage 2]
Methods
Display Ratio.
477
color range.

Over Tol. Count: 3
478
Reference
Related Commands
7.4.7.7.
What
The Geometry Deviation command compares analytic geometries such as cylinders, circles, and
planes between nominal and scan data.
Geometry Deviation (i.e. Cylinders)
479
Why
The Geometry Deviation command is useful for:
Analyzing important geometries on a part
Comparing the size of geometries
How to Use
How to extract and compare geometries
1.
Go to Insert > Deviation > Geometry Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
To extract cylinders, choose Cylinder as the Geometry Type.
3.
Nominal data is automatically selected as the Target. The application will search cylinders
from a selected target. Set the Position, Diameter, and Angle tolerances and click the
Next Stage button
480
4.
Deviation results will be attached to all cylinders in the model.
Note: Display properties in an annotation may be difference from the image above.
Annotation display properties can be changed by using the Annotation Display
Control in the pop-up menu.
5.
Select unnecessary annotations and click the Delete Tag button
6.
panel.
481
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Geometry Type
Geometry Type Chooses a type of geometry to inspect.
Target Selects nominal body or faces. When the command runs, an entire nominal body will
be automatically set as the Target and prepared to automatically find geometries. To find
geometries only for some faces, unselect the whole body and then select faces.
Auto-Generation Options
Merge Separated Part Of Same Shape Extracts separated partial areas from a single
geometry as a single geometry. The following images show what happens when three
cylindrical faces are selected.
Selected targets
482
Result with the Geometry Deviation
Result without the Geometry Deviation
option
option
Create Only When Whole Shape Is Covered Extracts only a perfect shape of a geometry
type. If a half face of a cylinder is selected as a target, it will not be regarded as a cylinder. To
extract a shape with only partial parts of a geometry type, do not use this option.
With this option, it cannot be a
With this option, it can be a cylinder
cylinder
[Stage 2]
483
Manual Create Enforces features as a desired geometry type by fitting select faces manually if
desired features are not extracted as a selected geometry type in the previous stage. This option
is useful when using a mesh as nominal data.
To manually extract a geometry:
1. Click the
button.
2. Select faces.
3. Click the Accept
button.
To release the selection of Target, push the Esc button on the keyboard.
To remove unnecessary annotation
1. Select annotations.
2. Click The Delete Tag button
or push the Delete button on the keyboard.
Note: If a tag is selected in the second stage, all information of selected geometry deviation
is displayed in the Properties panel. Visibility, tolerance, scan pair search option, nominal
fitting options and nominal constraint options of selected tag can be individually
controlled.
Reference
Related Commands
484

7.4.8. Insert > Plot

What
The Plot command analyzes the thickness, curvature and angle of scan data and displays the
results as a color map. This function can be applied only to scan data that is a point cloud or a
mesh, making nominal data unnecessary.
Thickness Plot
Curvature Plot
Angle Plot
Why
The Plot command is useful for:
Analyzing the thickness plot of a part
Analyzing the surface curvature or fillet radius of a part
Analyzing the draft angle of a part
How to Use
How to analyze a blade thickness plot
1.
Import scan data.
2.
Go to Insert > Plot or click the icon in the toolbar.
485
3.
Select the scan data as the Target and choose the Thickness method with the By Ray
Firing option. Specify the Max. Thickness as 50mm.
4.
5.
Click the
icon in the color bar and choose Adjust Colorbar Range to automatically
get the proper min/max range for the model.
6.
Choose the Picking method under Local Average Tagging and pick points on a
boundary to check specific deviation values.
7.
panel.
486
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Geometry Type
Target Selects a point cloud or a mesh as target data.
Thickness Displays the thickness map of scan data. It is useful for inspecting wall thickness of a
part such as a plastic part or a blade part.
Two methods are available to detect the thickness on a point.

The By Ray Firing method shoots a ray and detects the thickness when the ray meets the
opposite side.
487
The By Intact Sphere method internally generates a sphere and detects the thickness when the
sphere meets another scan area.
When scan data is noisy it can cause incorrect calculations in thickness as displayed in the
following image. In this situation, moving the slider of the Ignore Neighboring Noise option to
More can help to provide a correction calculation.
Max. Thickness specifies a maximum thickness to be reported.

Curvature Displays a curvature map of scan data. Curvature is the amount by which a
geometric object deviates from being flat. It is useful for inspecting round or freeform shapes.
The position of a 2D curve has a single curvature value. However, the position of a 3D surface has
many curvature values as shown in the figure below.
Curvature on 2D
Curvature on 3D
488
In the Next Stage, if the Min. option is selected, the minimum curvature value at each poly-vertex
will be displayed.
If the Max. option is selected, the maximum curvature value at each poly-vertex will be displayed.
If the Mean option is selected, the mean value of the Min. and Max. curvature value at each polyvertex will be displayed.
If the Gaussian option is selected, the multiplication of the Min. and Max. will be displayed.
Angle Displays an angle map by analyzing angle differences between each normal of a polyvertex and a reference direction.
This command is useful when inspecting a parting line, which is the place where two or more
parts or undercut areas of a model meet.
[Stage 2]
489
Direction 1:
Direction 2:
Interval: 10
Interval: 5
Instances: 5
Instances: 3
instances.
Equal Spacing
Interval Angle: 15
490
Equal Spacing
Distance: 5
Spherical Pattern Marks deviation points on a spherical face by using a spherical pattern
Sphere Center and Polar Axis by selecting an entity. Set the Sphere Theta Option and Sphere
Phi Option to make multiple points.
Theta Option:
Phi Option:
No. Of Instance: 6
No. Of Instance: 3
Interval Angle: 15
Interval Angle: 30
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Deviation
491
7.4.9. Insert > Active Scan Data

What
Used to select target active scan data for inspection when multiple scans are imported.
Why
The Active Scan Data command is useful for:
Inspection using scan data of varying accuracy
Using multiple scan data files
Using alignment or GD&T for a particular scan data file
How to Use
How to activate scan data for alignment
1.
Import a nominal data file and multiple scan data files.
2.
Choose the Specific Scan Data option and select scans to be used for alignment.
3.
Click OK.
492
4.
Go to Insert > Align > Auto to align scan data. Do not check the Apply To Active Scan
Data Only option. Click OK. Alignment will be completed using activated scan data.
Note: Checking Apply To Active Scan Data Only will only move the two activated
scans and other leave other scans without translating them.
5.
To activate all scans, go to Insert > Active Scan Data and select All Scan Data. Click OK.
Options in Detail
All Scan Data Selects a point cloud or a mesh as target data.
Specific Scan Data Activates only selected scans.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > 3D GD&T
Insert > Deviation
7.4.10. Insert > Scanner Direct Control

The Scanner Direct Control menu enables the use of various scanning devices directly within the
application.
493
A preferred scanner device can be set in the Initial Setup Dialog that will be displayed when the
application is initially started or in the Device list in the Hardware table at File > Preferences.
Scanner Direct Control

The following scanners can be used directly within the application:
Creaform Handyscan 3D
Konica Minolta VIVID
Breuckmann
KODEN OCM-A
Roland LPX (32 bit only)
Konica Minolta RANGE5/RANGE7 (64 bit only)
Shining3D
Z Corporation ZScanner
7.4.10.1. Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Creaform

Handyscan 3D
VXscan or VXelements should be installed in advance to directly control a Handyscan 3D scanner.
Supported devices
Device
HandyScan
32-bit
64-bit
Yes
Yes
Options in Detail
1. Configure
494
Session
New Starts a new session.
Open Opens an existing session file (.CSF).
Save Saves the current session (.CSF).
Positioning Features
Open Opens a positioning target file (.TXT).
Copy - Copies positioning targets to a new scan.
Save - Saves positioning targets in a file (.TXT).
Scan List - Shows existing scans of the current session and
highlights the current scan.
Add Adds a scan to the current session.
Rename Scan - Changes the name of the current scan
in the Current Scan box.
Remove Scan - Removes the current scan.
Sensor
Configuration - Shows the Sensor Configuration
dialog box for Handyscan 3D.
Calibration Shows the Sensor Calibration dialog
box for Handyscan 3D.
Scan Backup Path Sets the backup folder for scan data.
2. Scan
495
Scan
Start Starts scanning.
Stop Stops scanning.
Reset Clears the scan data for the current scan.
Surface Gathers surface data and positioning
features during scanning.
Positioning Features Gathers only positioning
Show Current Scan Only Shows only the scan data
of a selected scan.
Hide Positioning Features When Surface Scanning
Hides positioning features during scanning.
Show VxScan Entity Only Shows only meshes and
ref. point entities related to scan data.
Open VxScan Window Opens the VxScan window
and enables users to access all functions that VxScan
provides.
Surface Parameter - Sets scanning volume size or resolution.
Volume Size Adjust surface reconstruction settings and sets the scanning volume.
Changing the volume size directly affects the voxel size of each resolution level.
Resolution Select High, Medium or Low resolution.
Apply - Confirms settings.
Cancel Restores a previous setting.
Center Volume - Centers the volume on an object being scanned.
Refine - Performs an operation on a surface that decreases the impact of possible
positioning errors that may occur during scanning.
496
Facet Parameter
Spike Filter Determines the level of spike filtering.
Fill Positioning Features Fills holes created by the positioning features on an object.
Apply Confirms settings.
7.4.10.2. Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica

Minolta VIVID
Supported devices
Device
VIVD 910
VIVD 9i
32-bit
64-bit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Options in Detail
1. General
Scan
Name Used to input the name of a scan
shot and its suffix.
Auto
Align
Automatically
aligns
captured scan shots.

Rotary Axis is used for a rotary table
device, and Geometry performs auto
alignment with an application algorithm.
The With Only Last Scan option performs
alignment between the last scan shot and
a previous one.
Save Raw Data Saves raw scan data to a
desired directory.
497
Preview Shows a preview image with a

color map. Red represents near distances
from a scanner and blue represents far
distance. Anything displayed in black will
not be seen by a scanner, because it is out
of range. When a preview is satisfactory,
click Accept.
Scan Starts scanning.
Auto Scan Starts auto scanning using a rotary table. Parameters can be set in the Rotary
Table tab in the Auto Scan option.
Digitizer Parameter Applies parameters from the Standard and Advanced tab to a
scanner device when the Set button is clicked. The Get button retrieves the parameters
from a scanner device to the Standard and Advanced tab.
Mode Select the Standard, Extend or User mode provided by a scanner device.
2. Standard Tab
Focus Sets a focusing distance. Clicking Auto
Focus, will set a scanner to find the best
focusing distance automatically. Checking the
Auto Focus Before Scan option will allow a
scanner to Auto Focus whenever it scans.
Exposure Sets the exposure of scanner
device.
LD - LD (Laser Diode) Power.
Gain - CCD Gain.
Auto Exposure Before Scan Sets
exposure values automatically before
starting a scan.
Auto
Exposure Finds the best
exposure for scanning. Checking the

Auto Exposure Before Scan option
allows a scanner to use Auto Exposure
whenever it scans.
498
Scan
No Polygon Gathers only point clouds.
Multi-Pass Determines the number scans.
Import Raw Data Imports .cdk and .cdm file formats.
Texture
Use Texture Gathers textures. To correct a texture color, use the Dark Correct or Log
Correction options.
Dark Correction - Applies dark correction to color data. Use for striation-type noise
in images.
Log Correction - Applies logarithmic correction to color data. Used to brighten
neutral colors.
Brightness Corrects texture brightness.
Overlap Texture - Uses the texture of a current model and overlaps it onto previously
scanned data. A non-textured model can overlap another texture in different illumination
conditions.
3. Advanced Tab
Raw Data Process
Reduction Rate Decides the sampling
ratio used to import scan data.
Filter - Decides the filtering method for
poly-vertices.
The None method will not filter any polyvertices.
The Noise Filter method will filter noisy
poly-vertices.
The High Quality method will filter
unreliable data but is only effective for
importing scan data obtained using a
Vivid910.
The Noise Filter & High Quality method
499
uses both the Noise Filter and High

Quality methods and is also only
effective
for
importing
scan
data
obtained using a Vivid910.

Remove Chooses a method to remove unnecessary parts while importing scan data.
The Don't Remove method will not remove any parts
The Bound method removes boundary points.
The Bound & xx Degree method removes boundary points and polygons within a
corresponding angle range between 5, 10, 15, and 20 Degrees to a view vector.
Fill Holes Fills small holes in a mesh.
Multi-Depth Scan
Multi-Depth Scan Executes multiple scans while changing distances.
For example, setting Spacing to 20 and Scan Num to 3 when the distance is 600, will scan
at the 580, 600, and 620 positions and create three meshes in the working window with the
names Default - 000deg: 01, Default - 000deg: 02 and Default - 000deg: 03.
Direction Selects the direction for multi scanning.
Forward Starts scanning in the forward direction from a current focus length.
Backward Starts scanning in the backward direction from a current focus length.
Both Starts scanning in the forward and backward direction from a current focus
length.
No. of Scan Defines how many scan shots will be captured.
Spacing Defines distance increments for focus length.
VIVID 9i Calibration Calibrates a VIVID 9i scanner which requires a calibration jig.
4. Rotary Table Tab
500
Connection
Auto
Connect
On
Startup
Automatically communicates with a

rotary table upon startup.
Model Selects a rotary table which you
want to connect.
PORT Selects the port used to
communicate with a rotary table.
Connect Starts communication with a
rotary table.
Disconnect Stops communication with
a rotary table.
Single Scan
Use Angle As Name Suffix Uses a specified angle for the file name suffix.
Auto Rotate Automatically turns a rotary table by a specified angle after scanning.
Rotary Manually turns a rotary table.
The Move button starts to turn a rotary table.
The Origin button moves a rotary table to its origin position.
Auto Scan Sets the parameters used for an automated scan.
No. of Scan Sets the number of rotations.
Total Angle Sets the entire angle of scanning.
Equal Spacing Applies scanning with an equal angle decided by the No. of Scan and
Total Angle options.
Interval Waiting Sets the value for scanning after a rotary table has been turned. A time
can be set to prevent a model from shaking by the sudden stop of a rotary table.
5. Calibration Tab
501
The Calibration tab contains parameters for

calibration of a rotary table.
Calibration State shows the calibration status
or if a stored calibration has been successfully
loaded. If it is not lit a calibration is necessary.
Calibration Types chooses the method of
calibration. The default is Plate for plates
provided by Konica Minolta. When a calibration
ball provided by INUS Technology is used the
Sphere type needs to be used.
Scan For Calib uses a jig used for calibration
that can be scanned. The axis vector of the
rotary table can automatically be found by
processing the scan data of a part in the
application.
If the results of an axis vector are not satisfactory, it can be manually re-assign by selecting scan
areas using the Upper Sphere, Lower Sphere, Left Plate, and Right Plate buttons. The new axis
vector will be recalculated from the manual selection of areas.
When scan data contains noise, the application may fail to calibrate and the scan data may need
to be edited by making a reference vector in the application. After editing scan data, the Pick Rot
Vector option can be used to set a rotation vector. Click the Pick Scan & Calib. Option and select
a scan data to perform calibration.
Calibration Info. shows the current calibration information.
Load Calib Data will load calibration information previously stored in a file.
Save Calib. Data will save the current calibration information to a file.
Manual Clustering Criterion can be used to classify clusters for calibration purposes and if it is
not checked, the value will be automatically calculated.
7.4.10.3. Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Breuckmann

To execute the Breuckmann command, previously, Optocat should be installed on your machine.
502
Options in Detail
1. System
Breuckmann Optocat
Version Chooses an installed version of Optocat.
Launcher Path Chooses the file path of the
Optocat .exe file.
Connect & Initialization Connects a scanner
and defines the initial setup preferences
supported by Optocat. The color of Breuckmann
Connection will change from red to green when
successful.
Rotary Table Setting
Model Chooses a type of a rotary table.
COM Port Chooses a port for the application to
communicates with a rotary table. If a rotary table
is connected by USB, this option will be disabled.
Connect Connects a selected rotary table. The
color of Breuckmann Connection will change
from red to green when successful.
Test Tests to verify that a rotary table is working
correctly.
Data Option
Including Color Imports color information.
Triangulation Starts triangulation when scan
data is acquired.
Scanner Waiting Time Sets the time between
scanning intervals.
503
2. Calibration
Home Rotates a rotary table to a default position.
Move Rotary Table Rotates a rotary table by a specific
angle.
Set Scan Parameter Opens the option dialog box of
Optocat.
Incremental Angle Specifies an angle between scans.
Scan for Calibration Calibrates by scanning three
times by a specified angle.
Start Calibration Opens the Calibration Window
dialog box and calculates the rotational axis of a rotary
table by picking markers or spheres on three images and
clicking the Start Calibration button.
Image Size Selects an image size in the Calibration

Window dialog box.
Reverse Axis Direction Flips a rotation axis.
Show Axis Displays an axis.
3. Single
504
Home - Rotates a rotary table to a default position.

Move Rotary Table Rotates a rotary table by a specific
angle.
Set Scan Parameter - Opens the option dialog box of
Optocat.
Auto Align Automatically aligns scan shots.
Geometry Aligns scan data using a feature-tofeature recognition alignment algorithm.
Rotary Axis Aligns scan data using the axis of a
rotary table that can be found in the Calibration
tab.
With Only Last Scan Performs alignment with
the last scan.
4. Batch
Auto Filling Displays the Auto Filling dialog box
where the Start / End Angle and Count options can be
utilized. Angles will be displayed in the Scan List box.
Clear Removes all angles in the Scan List box.
Set Scan Parameter - Displays the scan parameters
option dialog box for Optocat.
Batch Scan Starts scanning.
Geometry Aligns scan data using a feature-to-feature
recognition alignment algorithm.
Rotary Axis Aligns scan data using the axis of a rotary
table that can be found in the Calibration tab.
505
7.4.10.4. Insert > Scanner Direct Control > KODEN

OCM-A
The default setting of KODEN OCM-A devices are included in OCM-A_Info.ini.file. The file is located
in C:\Program Files\INUS Technology\Rapidform Program\bin\KODEN OCM-A.
Options in Detail
Connect To communicate with KODEN OCM-A devices, click this button. When connected to
the device, the button will change to Disconnect.
Auto Automatically applies the Zoom fit function while scanning is in progress.
ZoomFit Displays and refreshes an entire model during scanning.
7.4.10.5. Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Roland LPX

(32 bit only)
Supported devices
Device
LPX Series
32-bit
64-bit
Yes
No
Options in Detail
Connect Communicate with a Roland LPX scanner.
Port Selects a port.
Rotational Scan Set scanning options for scanning a model while it is rotating.
506
A scanning area is defined by the Height and Circumferential input boxes. If a scanning size
cannot be initially defined, click the Preview button and an approximate height will be
generated for a Height value.
Scanning pitch is defined in the Circumferential Pitch and Height-direction Pitch input
boxes. After scan settings are define scanning time can be estimated by using the up arrow
button. To start scanning, click the Scan button.
Planar Scan Makes a square of the scanning area and scans a model in several rotational
directions.
507
A total number of scans can be defined in the Surfaces to Scan input box. If 3 is input, a model
will be scanned 3 times.
To change an initial scanning direction, click the
button. A scanning area is defined by the
Height and Width input boxes. If a scanning size cannot be initially defined, click the Preview
button and an approximate height will be generated for a Height value.
Scanning pitch is defined by the Circumferential Pitch and Width-direction Pitch input
boxes. After scan settings are define scanning time can be estimated by using the up arrow
button. To start scanning, click the Scan button.
Points Only Imports scan data as a point cloud.
Cutoff Angle - Specifies an angle between a scan direction and a normal direction of poly-face
mesh to be generated. If the angle is larger than a user defined value, a poly face mesh will not
be generated. This option is useful for preventing scan data from containing unwanted spikes.
508
7.4.10.6. Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica

Minolta RANGE5/RANGE7 (64 bit only)
To execute the RANGE5 and RANGE7 command, previously, RangeViewer should be installed on
your machine.
Options in Detail
Connect Connects to a RangeViewer after setting a Path.
Points Only Imports only point data from RangeViewer.
Suppress Used to suppress data when acquiring point cloud or mesh data of large sizes from
a scanner. The suppressed data will be imported and loaded on the hard disk.
RangeViewer Path Automatically sets a default installation path when the application is first
installed. If the installation folder is changed or move, this option can be used to set the correct
path for RANGEVIEWER.exe.
7.4.10.7. Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Shining3D

To directly control a Shining 3D scanner, Shining 3Ds application should be installed in advance.
Note: If the application cannot find a Shining 3D application, a dialog box will be displayed to
manually choose the Shining 3Ds application execution file (.exe) when the Insert > Scanner
509
Direct Control > Shining3D command is executed.
Options in Detail
1. Run Application
Manually choose the directory where the Shining 3D application execution file (.exe) and
configuration files are located. Once the directory is set, it will be preserved for when the
application is run again.
2. General
Ini Path Shows the path where the configuration file
(.ini) is located.
Manually chooses
configuration file (.ini).
the
location
of
the
View Shows the view of the Left Camera or the Right

Camera.
Camera Settings Specifies camera settings.
Exp. Time Specifies the exposure time of
camera.
Both Applies camera settings to both the Left
Camera and the Right Camera.
Gain Adjusts camera sensitivity to capture more
or less points on the surface of an object. Darker
objects will need higher gain settings so that the
laser will appear brighter to the camera.
Projector Settings Specifies projector settings.
Stripe Test Projects stripes on a target object.
Cross Projects a crossed center on a target
object.
Stripe Width Sets the width of projected stripes
510
by adjusting a slider.
Min. / Max. Bright Sets the range of brightness
by adjusting a slider. (0~255)
Calibration Shows the Sensor Calibration dialog box
for Shining 3D.
Scan and Align Scans and aligns scan data.
Align Aligns scan data.
Maker Aligns scan data by using detected markers used during scanning.
Feature Aligns scan data by using feature information. The application uses the
Local Based On Auto Guess method for quick and accurate alignment.
Import Marker Info. Imports pre-defined markers information.
Export Marker Info. Exports detected marker information during the scanning.
7.4.10.8. Insert
>
Scanner
Direct
Control
>
Corporation ZScanner
ZScan should be installed in advance to directly control a ZScanner 700 scanner.
Supported devices
Device
ZScan
32-bit
64-bit
Yes
Yes
Options in Detail
1. Configure
511
Session
New Starts a new session.
Open Opens an existing session file (.CSF).
Save Saves the current session (.CSF).
Positioning Features
Open Opens a positioning target file (.TXT).
Copy - Copies positioning targets to a new scan.
Save - Saves positioning targets in a file (.TXT).
Scan List - Shows existing scans of the current session and
highlights the current scan.
Add Adds a scan to a current session.
Rename Scan - Changes the name of the current scan
in the Current Scan box.
Remove Scan - Removes the current scan.
Sensor
Configuration - Shows the Sensor Configuration
dialog box for ZScan.
Calibration Shows the Sensor Calibration dialog
box for ZScan.
Scan Backup Path Set the backup folder for scan data.
2. Scan
512
Scan
Start Starts scanning.
Stop Stops scanning.
Reset Clears the scan data for the current scan.
Surface Gathers both surface data and positioning
Positioning Features Gathers only positioning
Show Current Scan Only Shows only the scan data
of a selected scan.
Hide Positioning Features When Surface Scanning
Hides positioning features during scanning.
Show ZScan Entity Only Shows only meshes and
ref. point entities related to scan data.
Open ZScan Window Opens the ZScan window
and allows users to access all functions that ZScan
provides.
Surface Parameter - Sets scanning volume size or resolution.
Volume Size Adjust surface reconstruction settings and sets the scanning volume.
Changing the volume size directly affects the voxel size of each resolution level.
Resolution Select High, Medium or Low resolution.
Apply - Confirms settings.
Center Volume - Centers the volume on an object being scanned.
Refine - Performs an operation on a surface that decreases the impact of possible
positioning errors that may occur during scanning.
513
Facet Parameter
Spike Filter Determines the level of spike filtering.
Fill Positioning Features Fills holes created by the positioning features on an object.
Apply Confirms settings.
7.4.11. Insert > Note

What
The Note command adds tags with custom text. It is used to add comments onto a model.
Added Notes
Why
The Note command is useful for:
Adding comments
Sharing information with co-workers
How to Use
How to add notes to a model
1.
Go to Insert > Note or click the icon in the toolbar.
514
2.
Pick a position on a model. An empty note will be added.
3.
Type text in the note dialog box and click Add.
7.5.
Tools
The Tools menu features commands to generate and edit features such as curves, sections, regions,
GD&Ts, nominal data, and scan data.
Nominal Tools
Modifies nominal data using commands such as Sew and Split Face in the Nominal mode.
Scan Tools
Edits scan data for inspect in the Scan mode.
Region Tools
Creates and edit region groups depending on geometry types in the Mesh Region of the
Nominal mode.
Section Tools
Measures dimensions and creates ref.geometries in the Section mode.
Curve Tools
Draws and edits curves in the Curve mode.
GD&T Tools
Measures GD&Ts such as flatness, straightness, and position in the 3D GD&T mode.
515
Regroup 3D GD&Ts
Makes groups of measured GD&Ts.
7.5.1. Tools > Nominal Tools

The Nominal Tools menu features commands used to modify bodies, convert bodies to mesh, and
separate front and back faces by thickness. These functions give more freedom to the inspection
process by editing nominal data.
Sew
Combines two or more faces into a single surface body by sewing together boundaries.
Split Face
Splits a target face.
Transform
Moves, rotates or scales a solid or surface body.
Offset
Enlarges or shrinks a surface body by a constant distance.
Thicken
Offsets a surface body and generates a solid body with a constant thickness.
Delete Faces
Removes faces on a solid or surface body.
Fix Normal
Harmonizes normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
Healing Wizard
Detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals them.
Find Defect
Detects Self Intersection and Face Continuity defects.
Separate Thicken Body

Classifies the upper, lower, and side faces of a solid body that has a consistent thickness.
516
Convert to Mesh
Converts a selected solid or surface body to a mesh.
Assign Tolerance
Sets multiple tolerances onto the faces and edges of nominal data.
7.5.1.1.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Sew
What
The Sew command combines two or more faces into a single surface body by sewing together
boundaries.
Two surface bodies
Apply Sew
Why
The Sew command is useful for:
Combining faces
Matching faces
How to Use
How to sew faces with the tangent constraint
1. Prepare faces and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
517
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Sew or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select faces as Surface Bodies.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Faces will be tangentially connected to form a

single surface body.
Options in Detail
Surface Bodies Selects independent surfaces to sew.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Sew Boundaries
7.5.1.2.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face
What
The Split Face command splits a target face by using the projection, silhouette and intersection
methods. After splitting a face, a target entity will have several faces but will still be a single entity.
518
Body and Curve
Split Face
Why
The Split Face command is useful for:
Adding edge faces
Adding parting lines
How to Use
How to split a body face by using a curve
1. Prepare a curve and a body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Choose the Projection method. Select a curve for Tool Entities and a face for Target
Entities.
4. Click Preview. If the face cannot be split then change the projection direction by using
the Flip Direction button.
519
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Projection Determines the projection method.
Single Direction Projects a split line in one direction. To reverse the direction, click the
Flip Direction button
Bidirection Projects a split line in both directions.

Silhouette Creates a silhouette in a pull direction and splits target entities with the silhouette
lines.
Pull Direction - Defines a silhouette direction.
Target Entities Selects faces on a solid or surface body.
Pull Direction & Target Entities
Split Result
520
Draft Angle Sets the angle between pull direction and tangential direction on a point
of a face.
Draft Angle: 0
Draft Angle: 30
Draft Angle: 60
Intersection Divides target entities by intersecting them with other faces.
Pull Direction & Target Entities
The Split Result
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Faces
7.5.1.3.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Transform
What
The Transform command moves, rotates or scales a solid or surface body. It can also be used to
align a body to another body or mesh by using datum pairs.
521
Body
Apply Transform
Why
The Transform command is useful for:
Copying and moving a body
Repositioning a body
Aligning a body to another body or a mesh
How to Use
How to move and rotate a body
1. Prepare a solid or surface body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal
mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Transform or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a body and check the Duplicate box to copy it. Click the Next Stage button.
4. Select the Rotate And Translate method and input a Rotate and Translate value or
drag the manipulator on the screen.
522
Note: After the transformation of a body, the transformation matrix can be exported.
To export the transformation matrix follow the steps below:
1. Select a Transform feature in the Feature tree.
2. See the Properties panel.
3. Click the
button.
4. Use the Export button and save the matrix. The file will be saved as Transform
Matrix File (.trm).
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
523
Select Entities
Target Selects solid or surface bodies.
Duplicate Copies selected bodies.
[Stage 2]
Methods
Rotate And Translate Applies rotation and translation to a body in the X, Y and Z direction and
axis. You can interactively use the manipulator on the screen or input specific values.
Scale - Scales a solid or surface body along its center, a coordinate system, or a custom position.
Uniform Scale Scales a body based on the X, Y and Z directions concurrently. If this
option is not used, scale can be applied individually in the X, Y and Z directions.
Uniform Scale: X, Y, & Z=3
Non-uniform Scale: X=2, Y=3, Z=3
Unit Converter Converts scale values by using unit conversion. Changing unit types in
From and To, will automatically apply the changes to the scale value. Changing the scale
value directly will set the Unit Converter as default.
Scale Center Selects a position of a scale origin. Global Origin, or the global coordinate,
Body Center, or the center of a body, and Custom, or the custom origin, can be chosen.
524
By Matrix Allows for the direct input of values into a transformation matrix. After using the
Rotation And Translate and Scale options the transformation matrix will be calculated and filled.
If a value in the matrix is modified, the corresponding Rotate, Translate, Scale values will reflect
those changes.
A transformation matrix file can be imported by using the Matrix File Open button
If Set is selected the imported matrix is applied as it is.

If Multiply is selected the imported matrix will be multiplied from the current position.
If Inverse Multiply is selected the imported matrix will be inversed and multiplied from the
current position.
If Transpose is select the imported matrix will be transposed from the current position.
Datum Alignment Aligns a body to another body or a mesh by using datum pairs. Select a face
that can be a datum such as a cylinder, sphere, plane, or edge on the original body and then select
a pair of datum on another body.
Datum Pairs Type(Moving Target, Flip) Defines datum pairs in Moving and Target
order.
Note: A moving datum can be flipped by using the Flip button
when datum pairs
are defined.
Interactive Alignment Aligns a body to a desired location in a scan data.
Moving Selects the 3-2-1 or X-Y-Z alignment methods.
3-2-1 Aligns using entities on a mesh as a moving plane, moving vector, and
moving position. The Flip button
reverses the direction of the selection.
525
X-Y-Z Aligns using entities as moving points and X, Y, and Z axes. The Flip button
reverses the direction of the selection.
Target Sets a Coordinate or X-Y-Z Target.
Coordinate Sets target coordinates for an alignment.
X-Y-Z Alignment using entities as points and X, Y, Z axes. The Flip button
reverses the direction of a selection.
7.5.1.4.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset
What
The Offset command enlarges or shrinks a surface body by a constant distance.
Why
The Offset command is useful for:
Creating a model in a different size
Offsetting faces on a surface or solid body
Copying faces on a surface or solid body
How to Use
A. How to offset faces on a surface or a solid body
mode.
526
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select faces on a body and specify the Offset Distance.
B. How to copy faces on a body

1. Enter the Nominal mode. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset or click the icon in the
toolbar.
2. Set the Offset Type to Surface Body, Body Face. Select a face to copy.
3. Change the offset distance to 0.
527
4. Click OK to complete the command and then hide the body. A copied face can be seen.
Options in Detail
Bodies / Faces Selects bodies to offset when the Solid Body option is selected. When the
Surface Body, Body Face option is selected, faces on a body or an entire surface body can be
selected.
Offset Distance Specifies the distance to offset from a solid body. To reverse the offset
direction, use the Flip Direction button
Make Side Wall Creates side walls between an offset face and a body.
Disable Option
Enable Option
Remove Original Faces Removes original faces used to offset.
Disable Option
Enable Option
528
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Offset
7.5.1.5.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Thicken
What
The Thicken command offsets a surface body and generates a solid body with a constant
thickness.
Why
The Thicken command is useful for:
Creating an object with constant thickness
Creating a sheet metal part
How to Use
How to generate a constant wall thickened feature from a surface body
1. Prepare a surface body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Thicken or click on the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a surface body to thicken. Enter 3 mm as the Thickness and set the offset
direction.
529
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Surface Bodies Selects a surface body.
Note: When a surface body is comprised of multiple adjacent faces, the surfaces must be
sewn together before applying the Thicken command.
Thickness Specifies a thickness value.
Direction
Direction 1 The default positive direction to thicken.
Direction 2 The opposite, negative direction from Direction1.
Both Thickens in both directions.
530
7.5.1.6.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Faces
What
The Delete Faces command removes faces on a solid or surface body.
Body
Remove Face
Why
The Delete Faces command is useful for:
Reconstructing features
How to Use
How to remove a body face
mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Faces or click the icon in the toolbar.
531
3. Select a face to delete.
Options in Detail
Faces Selects faces on a solid or surface body to remove.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face
7.5.1.7.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Fix Normal
What
The Fix Normal command harmonizes normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
532
Why
The Fix Normal command is useful for:
Correcting the normal information of poly-faces to create an optimal mesh
Fixing the normal information of poly-faces in tessellated CAD mesh that has been imported
from neutral file formats such as IGES or STEP
How to Use
How to correct normal information of poly-faces in a mesh
1. Click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Fix
Normal or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Automatic method and check the Propagate Topologically option. To
reverse the normal direction manually, choose the Interactive method and pick a seed
poly-face on the mesh.
3. Pick a seed poly-face on a mesh and check the results.
Options in Detail
[CAD Data]
Surface Bodies Reverses the normal information of surface bodies.
[Mesh Data]
533
Methods
This tool features 3 methods:
Automatic
Automatically fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh
Interactive
Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces
Entire Mesh
Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in a mesh
Automatic Fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh by propagating topologically,

propagating geometrically, or repairing tangled poly-faces.
Propagate Topologically
Propagate Geometrically
Tangled Poly-Face
Propagate Topologically Fixes the normal information of poly-faces inside of its

boundary.
Note: Check the Propagate Topologically option if the mesh has no non-manifold
poly-faces and the boundaries exist in the mesh.
Propagate Geometrically Fixes the normal information of poly-faces regardless of its
boundaries. Check the Propagate Geometrically option of a mesh that has disjoined
poly-edges and non-manifold poly-faces and boundaries that do not exist in the mesh.
Repair Tangled Poly-Faces Repairs twisted and tangled topology and fixes the normal
information of poly-faces. The Repair Tangled Poly-Faces option is used to correct the
twisted topology that may occur when triangulating 3D scan data which has thin walls.
Interactive Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces.
Entire Mesh Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in mesh.
Reference
Related Commands
534
Tools > Scan Tools > Fix Normal
7.5.1.8.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Healing Wizard
What
The Healing Wizard command detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals
them. When 3D scan data that has been scanned in different directions by using a 3D scanner are
aligned and merged into a single mesh, some abnormal poly-faces such as folded poly-faces,
dangling poly-faces, and small noisy clusters may occur. To optimize the mesh, the defects on the
mesh need to be healed.
Why
The Healing Wizard command is useful for:
Creating an optimal mesh model without any abnormal poly-faces
Healing defects
How to Use
How to heal abnormal poly-faces and clean defects from a mesh
1.
Click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools >
Healing Wizard or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Abnormal poly-faces will be automatically detected in a mesh and the results will be
displayed with different colors. Check detected abnormal poly-faces and click the OK
button to heal them at all the same time.
535
3.
Check that all detected defects are healed from the mesh.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Bodies Select bodies to heal.
[Stage 2]
Heal Selected Gaps Is filled with selected gaps in the Gap List box.
Try To Heal All Gaps Tries to fill all gaps on the body. For the complex shape of holes
may not be filled completely.
Restore The Healed Bodies Cancels applied gaps by the above buttons.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Nominal Tools > Find Defect
7.5.1.9.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Find Defect
What
The Find Defect command detects two types of defects: Self Intersection, Face Continuity.
536
Why
The Find Defect command is useful for:
Finding and removing defects in nominal data
Determining the quality of nominal data
How to Use
How to Find and delete defects in a mesh
1. Click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools >
Find Defect or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a body and check the Self Intersection Test and Face Continuity Test option.
Click the Next button
3. Defected faces will be highlighted.
537
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Bodies Selects bodies to find defects in.
Self Intersection Test - Detects intersecting faces.
Face Continuity Test Detects discontinuous faces.
[Stage 2]
Abnormal Bodies Displays the number of erroneous bodies.
Abnormal Faces Displays the number of erroneous faces.
Abnormal Edges Displays the number of erroneous edges.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Nominal Tools > Healing Wizard
7.5.1.10. Tools > Nominal Tools > Separate Thickened

Body
What
The Separate Thicken Body command classifies upper, lower, and side faces of a solid body that
has a consistent thickness.
538
Why
The Separate Thickened Body command is useful for:
Separating a thickened body
Comparing 3D scan data files that has been scanned in either the top or bottom directions of
the part
Creating nominal data to use for measuring deviation of boundaries
How to Use
How to separate thickened solid bodies into top, bottom, and side faces
1.
Separate Thickened Body or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select a solid body for target Bodies and click the Next Stage button
3.
Turn off the side and lower options and click the OK button
4.
Check that the side and lower faces are removed and that only the upper faces remain.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Bodies Selects surface or solid bodies.
Results
539
Upper Shows faces classified as upper faces on a target body.

Side Shows faces classified as side faces on a target body.
Lower Shows faces classified as lower faces on a target body.
Note: When a target body can be classified by upper, side, and lower faces, these options are
checked by default. To remove classified faces from a target body, uncheck these options.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools> Nominal Tools > Offset
Tools> Nominal Tools > Delete Faces
7.5.1.11. Tools > Nominal Tools > Convert to Mesh

What
The Convert to Mesh command converts a selected solid or surface body to a mesh.
Why
The Convert to Mesh command is useful for:
Converting a solid body into mesh
How to Use
540
How to convert bodies into mesh

1.
Prepare a body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
2.
Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Convert Body or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select the body to convert to mesh.
4.
Options in Detail
Quality Determines the accuracy of a mesh. Moving the slider towards High, will
produce a more accurate mesh that contains more poly-faces.
Quality: Low
Quality: Medium
Quality: High
Advanced Displays sub-options used to precisely limit the size of poly-faces.

Max. Chord Height Specifies how accurately a mesh represents a surface by
setting the distance between the mesh and the part of the surface it represents.
541
Max. Edge Length Specifies the value of the maximum edge length of a polyface.
Min. Edge Length Specifies the value of the minimum edge length of a poly-face.
More Options
Sew Boundary Removes small gaps along boundaries.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools
7.5.1.12. Tools > Nominal Tools > Assign Tolerance

What
The Assign Tolerance command sets multiple tolerances onto faces and edges of nominal data.
542
Why
The Assign Tolerance command is useful for:
Setting multiple tolerances onto faces or edges of nominal data
Comparing nominal data according to tolerance criteria
How to Use
How to set multiple tolerances onto faces of nominal data
1.
Assign Tolerance or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Click the Add Group button to make a new group and check that a new dialog tree
named Group 2 is generated.
3.
Click the Group 2 button to select faces and assign a new tolerance to the selected faces.
Specify the minimum tolerance as -0.1mm and the maximum tolerance to +0.1mm and
change the color to red. Select faces.
543
4.
Click the Add Group button to make a new group and check that a new dialog tree
named Group 3 is generated.
5.
Click the Group 3 button to select faces and assign a new tolerance to the selected faces.
Specify the minimum tolerance as -0.5mm and the maximum tolerance to +0.5mm and
change the color to yellow. Select faces.
6.
Turn off the side and lower options and click the OK button
tolerance ranges in the color bar.
. Check assigned
Options in Detail
Add Group Creates a new group.
Group Using Driven Tolerance Lists all boundary edges automatically that will have the
same tolerances of adjacent faces when target nominal data is a surface body. Boundary
544
edges follow tolerances from neighboring faces by default. However, tolerances can be
specified to follow boundary edges by selecting them in a group when target nominal
data is a surface body or mesh with boundaries.
Group X Lists faces or edges that have identical tolerances. To add faces or edges to the
group, click the Group X button and select entities. When assigned faces or edges need to
be moved into another tolerance group, click another Group X button and select the
entities. To delete a group click the Remove Group button
. To preserve selected
entities in a group, click the Preserve Selection From Other Group button
7.5.2. Tools > Scan Tools

The Scan Tools menu features various commands used to create new meshes from raw scan data
as well as editing existing 3D scan data.
Mesh Buildup Wizard

A wizard style interface for creating defect-free and watertight mesh models from raw 3D scan
data.
Align
Aligns two or more 3D scan data sets scanned in different scanning directions based on
geometric feature shape information.
Triangulate/Merge
Creates poly-faces by connecting points within 3D scan data to construct a mesh and merges
multiple point clouds or meshes to create a single mesh.
Combine
Combines selected point clouds or meshes as a single point cloud or mesh without
reconstructing entities.
Transform
Rotates, translates, scales or uses a transformation matrix to transform 3D scan data.
Filter Noisy Poly Vertices

Cleans noisy clusters from point clouds.
Sampling
Reduces the number of poly-vertices in a point cloud.
545

Creates normal information for a point cloud without creating polygonal meshes.
Find Defect
Detects four types of defects: Non-Manifold Poly-Faces, Crossing Poly-Faces, Redundant
Poly-Faces and Tangled or Reversed Poly-Faces.
Healing Wizard
Detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals them.
Fix Normal
Harmonizes normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
Sew Boundaries
Sews narrow line type holes in boundaries.
Edit Boundaries
Edits the boundaries of a mesh.
Fill Holes
Fills in missing holes with poly-faces based on the feature shapes of a mesh.
Defeature
Removes feature shapes and regenerates poly-faces on a mesh.
Remove Marker
Removes scanned markers from a mesh.
Decimate
Reduces the number of poly-faces by merging poly-vertices while preserving geometric
feature shapes.
Split
Divides a mesh into multiple parts by using various tool entities such as Ref.Planes, curves,
faces, surface bodies, solid bodies, and polylines.
Offset
Creates a new mesh that has a constant distance from an original mesh.
Thicken
Changes the volume of a mesh by giving a constant thickness to each face to create a
completely closed mesh with no boundaries.
546
7.5.2.1.
Tools > Scan Tools > Mesh Buildup Wizard
What
The Mesh Buildup Wizard command is a wizard style interface for creating defect-free and
watertight mesh models from raw 3D scan data. The command consists of 5 stages that can be
quickly executed, enabling the speedy creation of optimized mesh for use in an inspection process.
Why
Mesh Buildup Wizard command is useful for:
Creating a watertight mesh from raw 3D scan data
Managing large amounts of 3D scan data and generating high quality mesh from it
Applying proper 3D scan data processing methods to 3D scan data based on its type
Reducing tedious and time consuming 3D scan data processing tasks
How to Use
How to create mesh from unaligned raw point clouds
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Mesh Buildup
Wizard or click the icon
in the toolbar.
547
2. Edit Tools: Removes unnecessary areas or reverses normals.

Set Max. Poly-Vertices/Faces Count Per Noise Cluster to 100 under Edit Tools, and click
the Auto Select button to remove small clusters that are not necessary to create a mesh.
Click the Delete button
to delete selected entities.
Note: You can see all shots of scan data in the Entity Thumbnails panel. To show or
hide an individual scan shot in the Model View, uncheck it or use the Popup menu. If
you click a thumbnail, a small model view will be displayed. It can be rotated, zoomed
and panned similar to the Model View. The properties for each scan shot can be
shown in the Properties panel by clicking on it.
3. Step 2 Merge: Merges scans as a single mesh.

Click the Apply button
using default options.
548
5. Step 3 Finalize: Enhances triangle size, sharpness, smoothness and fills holes to create a
complete mesh.
Check the Global Optimize and Enhance Shape options. Click the Apply button
next to
Finalize.
6. To complete the Mesh Buildup Wizard, click the OK button
Options in Detail
Stages
This command consists of the following stages:
Edit Tools
Edits scan data. Can be found in every step.
Align
Aligns imported scan data to make a single scan data.
Triangulate/Merge
Generates poly-faces from point clouds and merges the aligned scan data.
Retriangulate
Retriangulates polygons for better mesh quality.
549
Finalize
Finalizes a scan. Global optimize is used to generate regular triangle sizes and Enhance
Shape is used to adjust the sharpness on edges and smooth surfaces.
Editing Tools
This stage prepares data by selecting target 3D scan data and setting its type and alignment
status. Depending on the settings selected in this stage, options in future stages may be
different.
Remove Unwanted Data Removes unnecessary poly-vertices and faces such as small clusters
and the base surface that is generated during a scanning process. After selecting entities, click
the Delete button
or press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete them.
Manual Select Manually selects poly-vertices or faces.

Reset
Resets all selections.
Detect Floor
Automatically searches and selects a base floor of a model by selecting
a seed poly- vertex or face on the model.
All Boundaries
Selects all of the boundaries of a scan. If they are deleted, the polyfaces adjacent to the selected boundaries will also be removed.
Auto Select Specify a number for the Max. Poly-Vertices/Faces Count Per Noisy Cluster
option then click the Auto Select button to automatically select clusters of poly-vertices or faces
less than the given value.
Reverse Normal Flips the normal of a scan shot by clicking the Reverse Normal button and
selecting a scan shot.
550
Align
Aligns and integrate two or more scan shots to complete larger models that must be captured in
multiple scans. This stage is the same as Tools > Scan Tools > Align.
Refer to Tools > Scan Tools > Align for detailed information.
Triangulate/Merge
Generates poly-faces from point clouds and merges them as a single mesh. If point clouds are
used, the name will be displayed as Triangulate/Merge. However if meshes are used, the title
will be displayed as Merge. This stage is the same as Tool > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge.
Refer to Tools > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge for detailed information.
Retriangulate
After generating a single mesh, it can be further optimized in the Retriangulate stage.
Finalize
Generates regular triangle sizes using the Global Optimize option and adjusts the sharpness of
edges and the smoothness of surfaces using the Enhance Shape option.
Global Optimize Creates fine triangles. Using the Extend Boundary option can create a
watertight mesh.
Approx. Poly-Face Count Determines the accuracy of the Global Optimize option.
Moving the slider towards More will regenerate a mesh with more poly-faces.
Overall Smoothness Creates a smooth mesh when a mesh includes a lot of noise.
Min
Max
551
Extend Boundaries Extends boundaries and fills large holes using a wrapping
algorithm. The wrapping shape can be adjusted by moving the slider that determines the
tension tightness. Moving the slider towards Flat will tighten the filling shape.
Original Shape
Without an Extend
With an Extend Boundary
Boundary
Enhance Shape Regenerates sharp edges and round areas.

Sharpness Controls the sharpness of a mesh. Min will create a less sharp mesh; while
Max will create a more sharp mesh.
Original Shape
Min
Max
Overall Smoothness Controls the smoothness of a mesh. Min will create a less smooth
mesh; while Max will create a smoother mesh.
Original Shape
Min
Max
Enhance Level Determines the strength of the Enhance Shape option.
Original Shape
Min
Max
552
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Align
Tools > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge
7.5.2.2.
What
The Align command aligns two or more 3D scan data sets scanned in different scanning directions
based on geometric feature shape information.
Why
The Align command is useful for:
Completing a model from multiple 3D scan data files scanned in different scanning directions
Effectively managing a large amount of 3D scan data and re-arranging them
How to Use
A. How to align multiple 3D scan data files automatically
1.
Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Align or click
Note: To apply this command to 3D scan data, the target 3D scan data should not
have child entities.
553
2.
Check the Local Based On Auto Guess option, and then select all scans for Moving.
3.
Click the Apply button and check the results.
B. How to align multiple 3D scan data manually

1.
If scans fail during auto guessing, manually align them using the Local Based On Picked
Point method.
Check the Local Based On Picked Point option and select aligned scans for Reference
and select failed scan shots for Moving.
2.
Manually pick corresponding points on 3D scan data in the Reference and Moving
554
window. To cancel the last picking point, go to Edit > Undo or use the Ctrl + Z keyboard
shortcut.
3.
Click the Apply button to apply manual alignment.
C. How to align multiple 3D scan data files accurately

1.
Accurately align roughly aligned scans by using the Local Based On Auto Guess or
Local Based On Picked Point methods.
Check the Global And Fine option and select all scans for Moving.
2.
Click the Apply button.
555
3.
Options in Detail
Methods
This command features three methods:
Local Based On Auto Guess

Automatically aligns scans based on geometric feature shape information
Local Based On Picked Point

Manually aligns scans by using corresponding points
Global And Fine

Aligns scans based on geometric feature shape information with the lowest amount of
deviation possible in overlapping areas
Local Based On Auto Guess Automatically aligns scans.

Reference Selects scans to define as reference entities.
Moving Selects scans to define as moving entities. One or more scans should be
registered for Moving to execute the command.
More Options
Preference Adjusts operation preferences. To quickly align scans, move the slider
towards Speed, and if it fails, move the slider towards Quality.
If Features Are Sufficient In Overlapped Regions Used when scans have
sufficient features in overlapped areas. If overlapped areas are flat or smooth
without features, do not use this option.
556
Alignment Order When target scans are scanned in a certain scanning order, use
this option for more accurate alignment.
By Name aligns by naming order.
By Selection aligns by selection order. The selection order can be changed in the list
box under Moving using the Up and Down buttons
Do Not Align Between Moving Object Applies alignment by scan groups.
Reference Group
Moving Group aligned

scans
Local Based On Picked Point Manually aligns scans. Select scans for Reference and for
Moving, and pick corresponding points in the Reference and Moving windows.
The corresponding points are required to be defined for Reference and Moving entities to apply
this method. This method can be used when scans fail in the Local Based On Auto Guess
method or when scans are needed to be aligned manually.
557
Refine Alignment Applies best-fit alignment to areas around defined corresponding

points after the Local Based On Picked Point method is applied.
Global And Fine Aligns scans based on geometric feature shape information with the lowest
amount of deviation possible in overlapping areas. This method can be used after the Local
Based On Auto Guess or Local Based On Picked Point methods are applied to scans for more
accurate alignment.
Partial Selects scans to define as partial entities.
Note: Poly-vertices selected from at least two different 3D scan data files are need as
Partial to apply this command. The partially selected poly-vertices are used to
calculating the fine alignment.
Statistical results such as average, standard deviation, RMS for Global And Fine
alignment are listed in the Console panel after alignment.
Global Options
Sampling Ratio Samples data points by a specified value. When the ratio is 100%,
all selected data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be
used.
558
Max. Iteration Count Specifies a maximum iteration value.

Max. Average Deviation Specifies a maximum average deviation.
Note: The Max.Iteraction Count and Max.Average Deviation options
interactively affect each other. For example, if both options are applied to the
alignment, it performs until the defined maximum average deviation is satisfied
within the maximum iteration count.
Apply Only Small Transform Applies small transform only if overlapped areas are
assumed to be well aligned or if alignment is difficult to be performed due to lack of
feature shapes that can be referred to on the overlapped areas.
Use Only Reliable Scan Data Uses only reliable 3D scan data or only effective
overlapped scan areas for better alignment.
Constraint Options Fixes the translation or rotation of the X, Y, or Z axes for Moving
entities.
Update View & Histogram Used to view the alignment process in the Model View and to
update the histogram in real-time.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Transform
7.5.2.3.
What
The Triangulate/Merge command creates poly-faces by connecting points within 3D scan data to
construct a mesh and merging multiple point clouds or meshes to create a single mesh. During the
merging process, overlapped areas will be removed efficiently and neighboring boundaries will be
stitched together. A target can be entire point clouds or individually selected poly-vertices in a
point cloud.
559
Point clouds scanned and produced by 3D scanners can be used directly for measuring and
visualizing. Using only a point cloud can be difficult to represent a shape and lacks information for
further design stages. Triangulation is a typical process used for creating geometric shape
information from a raw point cloud.
Why
The Triangulate/Merge command is useful for:
Converting point cloud to 3D mesh models with geometric shape information
Creating basic geometric shape information used for creating CAD model
Creating basic geometric shape information used for evaluating the shape of a model
Creating basic geometric shape information used for modifying an original feature shape
Merging multiple 3D scan data into a single mesh
How to Use
A. How to triangulate a mesh model from a point cloud that has side-wall shapes
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools >
Triangulate/Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
560
2. Click the Mesh / Point Cloud button and select a point cloud.
Note: This example assumes that a target point cloud is a single point cloud
combined by multiple scans that have been scanned in different scanning directions
and that it cannot be projected onto any virtual plane.
3. Click OK button with the default values. Check the results.
B. How to merge multiple 3D scan data into a single mesh

1.
Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools >
Triangulate/Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note: To apply this command to 3D scan data, a target 3D scan data should not have
child entities.
2.
Click the Mesh / Point Cloud button and select entities to merge them.
561
3.
Click the OK button to complete the command.
Options in Detail
Mesh / Point Cloud Selects meshes, point clouds or poly-vertices.
Note: This option allows the selection of not only multiple point clouds, but also polyvertices. Selected point clouds and poly-vertices can be used to create a polygonal mesh on
partial areas of point clouds.
Mesh Density Determines the density of a mesh when creating poly-faces.
Sparse
Dense
Remove Original Data If checked, removes original data.
More Options
Reduce Noise If checked, removes noise poly-faces.
Disable Reduce Noise
Enable Reduce Noise
Remove Redundant Points If checked, removes redundant poly-vertices. Therefore a uniform

mesh will be generated.
562
Create More Dense Mesh Around Boundary If boundary area is flat (low curvature area),
some missing poly-faces may exist after calculation. If checked, these poly-faces can be
prevented from missing.
Reference
Related Commands
Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate
Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate
7.5.2.4.
Tools > Scan Tools > Combine
What
The Combine command combines selected point clouds or meshes as a single point cloud or a
mesh without reconstructing entities.
Why
The Combine command is useful for:
Combining multiple point clouds into a single point cloud

563
Combining multiple meshes into a single mesh
How to Use
How to combine multiple meshes into a single mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Combine or
Note: To apply this command to 3D scan data, the target 3D scan data should not have
child entities.
2. Select meshes.
3. Click the OK button to complete the command.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects point clouds or meshes.
Remove Overlap Region Removes overlapped areas.
564
Before Combining
Combine Without Remove
Combine With Remove
Overlapped Areas
Overlapped Areas
Reference
Related Commands
Add-Ins > Combine
7.5.2.5.
What
The Transform command transforms 3D scan data by rotating, translating, scaling or using a
transformation matrix.
Why
The Transform command is useful for:
Transforming scan data to a specific position

565
Scale scan data up or down
How to Use
How to transform 3D scan data to a specific position
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Transform or
Note: To apply this command to 3D scan data, the target 3D scan data should not have
child entities.
2. Select point clouds or meshes.
3. Click the Next Stage button.
4. Transform the scan data using the manipulator on the screen.
Options in Detail
566
Target Entities
Target Selects a point cloud or mesh.
Methods
Rotate And Translate

Transforms 3D scan data by rotating and translating.
Scale
Transforms 3D scan data by scaling.
By Matrix
Transforms 3D scan data by using a transformation matrix.
Rotate And Translate Transforms target 3D scan data by rotating and translating with
manipulators for the X, Y and Z coordinates.
Use Local Coordinate Uses an existing Ref.Coordinate as a local coordinate.

Rotate Selects rotational values for the X, Y and Z coordinates.
Translate Selects translation values for the X, Y and Z coordinates.
Scale Scales scan data from its center, global origin, or by a custom position.
Uniform Scale Scales target scan data along the X, Y and Z directions concurrently.
Uniform Scale
Non-uniform Scale
567
Unit Converter Converts scale value using the From and To options.
Note: When the Uniform Scale is manually defined, the Unit Converter will be
changed by default. The default unit follows the Default Measure Unit defined in
the General Tab within Preferences (File > Preferences).
Scale Center Selects a center position of scale.
Note: Global Origin, the global coordinate, Mesh Center, the center of mesh, or
Custom, the custom origin, can be defined.
By Matrix Defines the transformational values in a transformation matrix.
Apply Matrix File Import a transformation matrix file using the Matrix File Open button and
applies it to the current coordinates of a model.
Set Applies an imported matrix.
Multiply Multiplies an imported matrix.
Inverse Multiply Inverses and multiplies an imported matrix.
Transpose Transposes an imported matrix.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Nominal Tools > Transform
568
7.5.2.6.
Tools > Scan Tools > Filter Noisy Poly Vertices
What
The Filter Noisy Poly Vertices command cleans noisy clusters from point clouds.
Why
The Filter Noisy Poly Vertices command is useful for:
Cleaning noisy clusters from point clouds
Removing unnecessary clusters of points
How to Use
How to filter noisy clusters from point clouds
1.
Go to File > Import Scan data.
2.
Check Use Custom Setting to check Points Only. Click Import Only button with the
Points Only option.
569
3.
Click Scan button to enter scan mode.
4.
Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Filter Noisy Poly Vertices or click the icon in the toolbar. Set
the Max. Poly-Vertex Count Per Noisy Cluster to 100.
5.
Click the OK button to complete the command. Small noisy clusters will be removed
from the point cloud.
Options in Detail
Max. Poly-Vertex Count Per Noisy Cluster Specifies the maximum poly-vertices number per
noisy cluster that can be removed.
Note: Noisy clusters are determined by the average distance between poly-vertices and will
be removed when the number of poly-vertices contained in noisy clusters is smaller than a
specified value.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling
570
7.5.2.7.
Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling
What
The Sampling command reduces the number of poly-vertices in a point cloud. It can be used to
remove redundant poly-vertices.
Why
The Sampling command is useful for:
Reducing the number of poly-vertices in a point cloud
How to Use
How to reduce the number of poly-vertices
1. Import a point cloud.
2. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode.

3. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling. When multiple scan data exists the Target option will
be displayed.
4. Select the Curvature method. Set the Sampling Ratio to 40 %.
5. Click the OK button.
571
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a point cloud or mesh.
Methods
Curvature
Samples a point cloud based on its curvature flow.
Uniform Ratio
Reduces the number of poly-vertices uniformly by specific ratio.
Uniform Distance
Reduces the number of poly-vertices uniformly by a specific distance.
Curvature Samples a point cloud based on its curvature flow. With this option, poly-vertices in
a high curvature area are sampled less than poly-vertices in a low curvature area in order to
maintain the accuracy of a curvature flow.
Uniform Ratio Reduces the number of poly-vertices uniformly by the ratio of poly-vertices.
Uniform Distance Reduces the number of poly-vertices so that poly-vertices are uniformly
arranged by average distance. This method removes redundant poly-vertices and constructs a
572
grid-type point cloud.
Options
Target Poly-Vertex Count Specifies a target number of poly-vertices to remain after sampling.
Average Distance Between Poly-Vertices Specifies an average distance between polyvertices. This option will be displayed when the Method is set to Uniform Distance.
To estimate an average distance, click the Estimate button.
To manually set the distance or radius, use the Measure Distance or Measure Radius buttons.
To measure distance between poly-vertices, click the Measure Distance button and pick two
poly-vertices.
To measure a radius of a hole, click the Measure Radius button and pick three poly-vertices.
More Options
Do Not Modify Boundaries Preserves poly-vertices around boundaries.
7.5.2.8.
Tools > Scan Tools > Generate Vertex Normal
What
573
The Generate Vertex Normal command creates normal information for a point cloud without
creating polygonal meshes.
Why
The Generate Vertex Normal command is useful for:
Creating normal information
How to Use
How to create normal information
1. Import a point cloud.
2. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode.

3. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Generate Vertex Normal. When multiple scan data exists, the
Target option will be displayed.
4. Click the Next Stage button.
574
Options in Detail
Except Point Clouds Which Have Vertex Normal Excludes point clouds that have normal
information. This option is only activated when two or more point clouds exists.
Reverse Reverses generated normals by clicking the Point Clouds button and selecting
entities.
7.5.2.9.
Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect
What
The Find Defect command detects four types of defects: Non-Manifold Poly-Faces, Crossing
Poly-Faces, Redundant Poly-Faces and Tangled or Reversed Poly-Faces.
Why
The Find Defect command is useful for:
Finding defects in a mesh and deleting them
Determining the quality of a generated mesh
How to Use
How to Find defects in a mesh and delete them
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect or
575
2. Check that detected defects have different colors and how many defects exist in the
mesh.
Note: To navigate defects, click the left or right
buttons.
3. Click OK to complete the command. All defective abnormal poly-faces will be selected.
4. Delete the poly-faces by pressing the Del key or go to Edit > Delete.
Options in Detail
Non-Manifold Poly-Faces Shows the total number of detected Non-Manifold Poly-Faces and
enables the changing of their displayed colors.
Crossing Poly-Faces Shows the total number of detected Crossing Poly-Faces and enables
the changing of their displayed color.
Redundant Poly-Faces Shows total number of detected Redundant Poly-Faces and enables
the changing of their displayed color.
Tangled Or Reversed Poly-Faces Shows total number of detected Tangled or Reversed PolyFaces and enables the changing of their displayed color.
Note: Non-manifold Poly-Faces, Redundant Poly-Faces, Crossing Poly-Faces and Tangled
Or Reversed Poly-Faces are defined as below:
Non-manifold Poly-Face When poly-faces share three or more poly-edges, it is referred to
as non-manifold topology. In a pure mathematical term, to be a manifold topology, only two
576
poly-faces can constitute a poly-edge. However, a poly-edge with only one poly-face is
classified as a boundary poly-edge in the application and considered to be normal.
Non-manifold poly-faces may cause severe errors in various calculations, and even fatal errors
in other applications such as NC machining.
The right picture shows an example of the non-manifold topology, where poly-faces (V1 V2
V4), (V2 V4 V3), and (V2 V4 V5) share poly-edges (V2 V4).
Redundant Poly-Face A redundant poly-face is a type of abnormal poly-face from the

viewpoint of a poly-vertex. Ignoring boundaries, a poly-vertex must have an identical number
of poly-faces and connecting poly-edges.
A poly-face violating this rule is called a redundant poly-face.
The following picture shows an example of a redundant poly-face (V1 V2 V3).
Crossing Poly-Face When poly-edges sharing a poly-vertex intersect with one another, they
are geometrically incorrect and their poly-faces are called crossing poly-faces.
The following image displays a crossing poly-face. The poly-edge (V2 V3) of poly-face (V1 V2
V3) is crossed with the poly-edge (V1 V4).
Although crossing poly-face is neither a topological definition nor a possible cause of serious
problems, it may cause errors in geometrical calculations.
577
Tangled Or Reversed Poly-Face Every poly-face has normal information. If the normal
direction of poly-face is opposite to neighboring poly-face, it is a tangled or reversed polyface.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Healing Wizard
7.5.2.10. Tools > Scan Tools > Healing Wizard

What
The Healing Wizard command detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals
them. When 3D scan data that has been scanned in different directions by using a 3D scanner are
aligned and merged into a single mesh, some abnormal poly-faces such as folded poly-faces,
dangling poly-faces, and small noisy clusters may occur. To optimize the mesh, the defects on the
mesh need to be healed.
Why
578
The Healing Wizard command is useful for:
Creating an optimal mesh model without any abnormal poly-faces
Healing defects
How to Use
How to heal abnormal poly-faces and clean defects from a mesh
1.
Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Healing
Wizard or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Abnormal poly-faces will be automatically detected in a mesh and the results will be
displayed with different colors. Check detected abnormal poly-faces and click the OK
button to heal them at all the same time.
3.
Check that all detected defects are healed from the mesh.
Options in Detail
Folded Poly-Faces Automatically checks if poly-faces have been folded in the same place on a
mesh and that the angle between poly-faces is smaller than a specified value.
Angle Is Smaller Than Specifies angle criteria to detect folded poly-faces.
Angle Between Poly-faces
Note: When the angle criteria are changed, the number of detected folded poly-faces will
be automatically updated.
579
Dangling Poly-Faces Automatically checks if 2 or 3 sided opened poly-faces exist on the

boundaries of a mesh.
2 Side Open
3 Side Open
Small Clusters Checks if a group of connected poly-faces, known as small clusters, have less
poly-faces than a specified value exist on a mesh.
Small Clusters
Poly-Face Count In A Cluster Specifies count criteria used to detect small clusters.
Small Poly-Faces Checks if small poly-faces exist that have a smaller area than specified area
criteria.
Small Poly-faces
Area Is Smaller Than Specifies area criteria used to detect small poly-faces.
Non-Manifold Poly-Faces Checks if non-manifold poly-faces and redundant poly-faces exist
on a mesh.
Crossing Poly-Faces Checks if crossing poly-faces exist in a mesh.
Method Contains 3 methods used to heal crossing poly-faces.
Smooth Smooths poly-faces around crossing poly-faces.
Merge Poly-Vertices Merges poly-vertices of crossing poly-faces.
Delete And Fill Hole Deletes crossing poly-faces and fills the deleted area.
Small Tunnels Detects poly-faces shaped like a tunnel or handle, known as small handles. This
option is automatically checked if small tunnels that have lesser poly-faces than the count criteria
exist on the mesh.
580
Tunnel Shape
Poly-Face Count In Tunnel Specifies the count criteria used to detect small tunnels.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect
7.5.2.11. Tools > Scan Tools > Fix Normal

What
The Fix Normal command harmonizes normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
Why
The Fix Normal command is useful for:
Correcting the normal information of poly-faces to create an optimal mesh
Fixing the normal information of poly-faces in tessellated CAD mesh that has been imported
from neutral file formats such as IGES or STEP
How to Use
How to correct normal information of poly-faces in a mesh
581
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Fix Normal or
2. Choose the Automatic method and check the Propagate Topologically option. To
reverse the normal direction manually, choose the Interactive method and pick a seed
poly-face on the mesh.
3. Pick a seed poly-face on a mesh and check the results.
Options in Detail
Methods
This tool features four methods:
Automatic
Automatically fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
Interactive
Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces.
Entire Mesh Or Point Cloud

Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in a mesh.
Reference Nominal Data

Fixes the normal of scan data based on the normal of the nominal data.
Automatic Fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh by propagating topologically,

propagating geometrically, or repairing tangled poly-faces.
582
Propagate Topologically
Propagate Geometrically
Tangled Poly-Face
Propagate Topologically Fixes the normal information of poly-faces inside of its

boundary.
Note: Check the Propagate Topologically option if the mesh has no non-manifold
poly-faces and the boundaries exist in the mesh.
Propagate Geometrically Fixes the normal information of poly-faces regardless of its
boundaries. Check the Propagate Geometrically option of a mesh that has disjoined
poly-edges and non-manifold poly-faces and boundaries that do not exist in the mesh.
Repair Tangled Poly-Faces Repairs twisted and tangled topology and fixes the normal
information of poly-faces. The Repair Tangled Poly-Faces option is used to correct the
twisted topology that may occur when triangulating 3D scan data which has thin walls.
Interactive Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces.
Entire Mesh Or Point Cloud Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in mesh.
Reference Nominal Data Fixes the normal of scan data based on the normal of the nominal
data.
7.5.2.12. Tools > Scan Tools > Sew Boundaries

What
The Sew Boundaries command sews narrow line type holes in boundaries.
583
Why
The Sew Boundaries command is useful for:
Creating an optimal mesh model without any torn boundaries
Sewing torn boundaries in tessellated CAD mesh that have been imported from neutral file
formats such as IGES or STEP
How to Use
How to sew the boundaries of a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Sew
Boundaries or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note: To check the boundaries of a mesh in the Model View, check the Boundary
option in the Display tab.
2. Click the Find Distance button in the Sew If Gap Is Smaller Than option to calculate an
estimated distance from boundaries.
584
Options in Detail
Sew If Gap Is Smaller Than Specifies a distance for sewing gaps.
More Options
Merge Close Poly-Vertices Merges poly-vertices in close proximity to each other using Within
Distance.
Before Merged
After Merged
Repair Spike Poly-Faces Repairs spiky poly-faces.
Spike Poly-Faces
Repaired Spike PolyFaces

585
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Edit Boundaries
Tools > Scan Tools > Fill Holes
7.5.2.13. Tools > Scan Tools > Edit Boundaries

What
The Edit Boundaries command edits the boundaries of mesh. This command features multiple
boundary editing methods such as Smooth, Shrink, Fit, Extend, Extrude, and Fill.
Why
The Edit Boundaries command is useful for:
Reducing the effect of noise and roughness on mesh boundaries
Modifying the feature shapes of mesh
Creating a CAD-like mesh
How to Use
How to edit mesh boundaries
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. And go to Tools > Scan Tools > Edit
Boundaries or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the outer boundary of a mesh as the target Boundaries.
586
3. Choose the Fit method and define the Fitting Shape as Rectangle.
4. Click the OK button and check the results.
5. Run the Edit Boundaries command again.

6. Choose the fitted outer boundary as the target Boundaries.
7. Choose the Extrude method and set the Distance to -10mm and then check the Cap
option to close the bottom of the mesh.
587
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Boundaries Selects boundaries of mesh. The Split Boundary button splits a boundary at
selected positions. This button is useful for partially editing boundaries of a mesh.
Before splitting boundary
After splitting boundary
Methods
This command features six methods:
Smooth
Reduces the effects of roughness on a boundary.
Shrink
Removes poly-faces from boundary.
Fit
Fits a boundary to a specific feature shape.
Extend
Extends a boundary by a specific distance.
Extrude
Extrudes a boundary by a specific distance.
Fill
Fills poly-faces in a boundary.
Smooth Reduces noises and effect of roughness in boundary of mesh.
588
Original Boundary
Smooth Boundary
Select N-Depth From Boundary Specifies the influence range of the smoothing effect
from a target boundary. The influence range will be highlighted on a mesh interactively
with this option.
Shrink Removes poly-faces from a boundary.
Original Boundary
Shrink Boundary
Note: 3D scan data may have roughness and noise in the area near a boundary caused by
shadows or vibrations during the scanning process. These defects may adversely affect the
alignment between scan data as well as the merging process. To get better results in scan data
processing, defects in the boundaries of mesh should be cleaned.
Select N-Depth From Boundary Specifies the influence range of the shrinking effect
from a target boundary. The influence range will be highlighted on a mesh interactively
with this option.
Fit Fits a boundary to specific feature shapes such as Circle, Slot, Rectangle, Polygon and
Freeform.
Fitting Shape Defines specific features for a boundary to be fit to.
Auto Automatically recognizes a feature shape within an allowable tolerance.
Circle Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a circle.
589
Slot Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a slot.
Rectangle Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a rectangle.
Polygon Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a polygon.
Freeform Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a freeform shape.
Allowable Tolerance Specifies allowable tolerance for extracting a feature shape from a
boundary. If any feature shape cannot be matched with a boundary a freeform shape will
be chosen.
Note: This option can be used only when the Fitting Shape option is set to Auto. Click
the Estimate button and the best tolerance will be automatically calculated based on
the shape of the selected target boundaries.
Fitting Type Chooses a fitting type to create a geometric boundary shape from the
590
boundaries of poly-vertices.
Best Fit Finds a best-fitted geometric shape using the least squares fitting method
from the boundary poly-vertices.
Min. Bound - Finds the smallest geometric shape that contacts the most distant
boundary poly-vertex along the positive normal direction of a boundary.
Max. Bound Finds the biggest geometric shape that contacts the most distant
boundary poly-vertex along the negative normal direction of a boundary.
Hole Finds the maximum inscribed geometric boundary shape from the boundary
poly-vertices using the minimum separation fitting method.
Note: The Hole method is available when the fitting type is set to Auto or Circle.
Best Fit
Min Boundary & Max
Hole
Boundary
The N*Sigma method requires an N value and excludes data that is larger than N times the
standard deviation, also known as the sigma.
The Ratio method requires a ratio value and only data that falls into the selected value will
be used.
N Sigma
591
Use Only Effective Data Uses only effective data when fitting. Effective data is the actual
data points used in fitting after sampling and outlier removal.
Rounded Corner Fits a boundary to a specific feature shape with rounded corners and is
available when the fitting type is set to Auto, Rectangle or Polygon.
Non-Rounded Corner
Rounded Corner
No. Of Edges Decides the number of edges for a polygonal feature shape and is
available when the fitting type is set to Auto or Polygon.
Number of edges: 3
Number of edges: 5
Extend Adds poly-faces around a boundary and extends the shape. The extending distance of
poly-faces can be controlled using Distance under Extend Options.
Distance Specifies an extending distance.

Refine And Smooth Extended Mesh Refines poly-faces in an extended area by
removing crossing poly-faces that can be generated during the extension, and smooths
poly-faces.
No. Of Smoothing Iterations Specifies the number of smoothing iterations.
Extrude Extrudes a boundary by a specified distance or up to a specified plane. The Blind, Up
To Plane, and Custom extrusion methods are available.
Method Defines extrusion methods.
Blind Extrudes a boundary by a specified distance.
592
Cap Closes a boundary at the end of an extrusion.

Up To Plane Extrudes a boundary up to a specified plane. Ref.Plane, and planar
face can be selected as a target plane.
Custom Extrudes a boundary up to a specific position. The specific position can be

defined by using a manipulator for the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Fill Fills poly-faces in a boundary. This option is similar to the Fill Hole command.
Flat Fills a boundary by using flat poly-faces.
Curvature Fills a boundary by following the curvature flow of poly-faces around a
boundary.
Merge Splitted Boundaries Merges split boundaries into a single boundary.
593
Original Boundary
Uncheck Merge Split
Check Merge Split
Boundary
Boundary
Smooth Boundary Refines a boundary for better filling results.

Flatness Of Filled Holes Adjusts the flatness of a resulting shape in a filled boundary.
Curved
Flat
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Sew Boundaries
7.5.2.14. Tools > Scan Tools > Fill Holes

What
The Fill Holes command fills in missing holes with poly-faces based on feature shapes of a mesh.
This command also offers advanced editing commands to modify or remove feature shapes from
boundaries.
Why
The Fill Holes command is useful for:
Manually filling in holes with poly-faces based on geometric feature shapes

594
How to Use
How to fill missing holes in mesh
1
.
Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Fill Holes or
Select holes and choose the Curvature method.
.
3
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Boundaries Selects boundaries. To select all boundaries at one time, Go to Select > All
Boundaries in the menu, use the pop-up menu, or use the Shift + A keyboard shortcut.
595
Editing Tools
This command features six editing commands:
Add Bridge
Adds bridges in between boundaries.
Fill Gulf
Fills poly-faces on indented boundaries.
Remove Peninsula
Removes poly-faces on indented boundaries.
Remove Island
Removes small clusters.
Smooth Boundary
Applies smoothing to boundaries.
Delete Poly-Face
Removes poly-faces.
Add Bridge Adds bridges between target boundaries by connecting two poly-edges. To add a
bridge, drag a poly-edge from one side to the other.
Note: If a hole is too large and complex to fill with poly-faces, use the Add Bridge editing
command to make the hole smaller and simpler.
Fill Gulf Fills poly-faces on an indented boundary. To fill poly-faces on a gulf-like boundary, pick
points for a starting point and ending point.
Remove Peninsula Removes poly-faces on an indented boundary. To remove peninsula-like

poly-faces on a boundary, draw a trimming path by picking two points.
596
Remove Island Removes small clusters. To remove small clusters, pick a point in the cluster.
Smooth Boundary Applies smoothing to a boundary.
Delete Poly-Face Removes poly-faces. To remove poly-faces, click this button and select polyfaces, and then press the Delete key.
Note: Using the Delete Poly-Face command to delete poly-faces will not exit the Fill Holes
command.
Methods
Flat Fills target boundaries with flat poly-faces.
Curvature Fills poly-faces in target boundaries using the curvature flow around the boundary.
597
More Options
Hole Size Measure
Boundary Edge Count Limits filling holes by the boundary edge count.
Perimeter Limits filling holes by the length of boundaries.
Do Not Fill N-Biggest Holes Preserves large holes. The biggest holes will be preserved in order
of size according to a specified value. If the value is set to zero, the option will be ignored.
Do Not Fill If Hole Is Bigger Than Preserve large holes. Holes with a boundary edge count or
length of a boundary less than a specified value will not be filled.
Smooth Boundary Applies smoothing to target boundaries. This option is useful for reducing
noise and the effect of roughness in a target boundary and allows easy filling of poly-faces in
complex boundaries.
Original Data
Disable Smooth Boundary
Enable Smooth Boundary
Flatness Of Filled Holes Adjusts the flatness of filled areas.
598
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Edit Boundaries
7.5.2.15. Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature

What
The Defeature command removes feature shapes and regenerates poly-faces on a mesh.
Defeature removes selected areas first and applies the Fill Holes operation to the removed areas.
Why
The Defeature command is useful for:
Removing feature shapes from a target mesh
Removing unnecessary feature shapes and filling in poly-faces in empty areas to smoothly
connect with adjacent feature shapes
How to Use
How to delete feature shapes and recreate poly-faces on a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature or
2. Choose the Fill method. Select poly-faces to remove feature shapes.
599
Options in Detail
Target Feature Shape
Fill Removes feature shapes and fills poly-faces in the removed areas.
Bridge Removes feature shapes on cylindrical areas and fills poly-faces in the removed areas
by connecting with bridges.
Methods
Flat Fills removed areas using flat poly-faces.
600
Curvature Fills removed areas using the curvature flow around a boundary.
More Options
Smooth Boundary Of Defeatured Area Applies smoothing to boundaries. This option is
useful for reducing the effect of roughness around boundaries that have been manually
selected and removed, and easily fills in poly-faces in boundaries.
Disable Smooth Boundary
Enable Smooth Boundary
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Delete
7.5.2.16. Tools > Scan Tools > Remove Marker

What
When scanning an object in different directions, markers are used to recognize feature shapes of
3D scan data and align scans accurately. After aligning and merging scans to mesh, the markers are
601
required to be removed for creating an optimal mesh. The Remove Marker command removes
scanned markers from a mesh.
Why
The Remove Marker command is useful for:
Finding and removing scan markers
How to Use
How to remove scan markers from a mesh
1.
Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Remove
Marker or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Manually specify the marker radius as 10 mm and then click the Find Markers button.
3.
Check the detected markers. If markers cannot be located by using Find Marker button
with a specified marker radius, pick the boundary of a marker on the mesh to select them
manually.
602
4.
Options in Detail
Marker Radius Specifies the radius of a target marker. Click the Find Markers button to find
markers with the specified radius.
Markers Shows detected markers in a list. Click the From File button to import an AICON file
(.obc) that contains center coordinates of markers. This information will be used to find markers in
a mesh.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Delete
Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature
7.5.2.17. Tools > Scan Tools > Decimate

What
The Decimate command reduces the number of poly-faces by merging poly-vertices while
preserving geometric feature shapes. This command can be applied to multiple 3D scan data at
one time.
603
Why
The Decimate command is useful for:
Reducing the number of poly-faces
Increasing the size of poly-faces from meshes
Dealing with a large number of meshes in follow-up inspection processes while maintaining an
original shape
How to Use
How to reduce the number of poly-faces of a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Decimate or
Note: To apply this command to meshes, the target meshes should not have child
entities.
2. Check the Poly-Face Count option and set the Reduction Ratio to 70 %.
604
Options in Detail
Methods
This command features two methods:
Poly-Face Count
Reduces the number of poly-faces by controlling the target poly-face count.
Allowable Deviation
Reduces the number of poly-faces within an allowable deviation.
Poly-Face Count Reduces the number of poly-faces by using parameters specified by the
Target Poly-Face Count or Reduction Ratio options.
Target Poly-Face Count Determines the target number of poly-faces. This option can be
used only when a single mesh is selected.
Original Face Count: 14,703
Target Face Count: 5,228
Reduction Ratio Determines reduction ratio.
Original Data
Reduction Ratio: 70%
Reduction Ratio: 30%
High Curvature Area Resolution Determines resolution in high curvature areas of a

target mesh.
605
Original Data
High Curvature Area Resolution: Sparse
High Curvature Area Resolution: Dense
Allowable Deviation Reduces the number of poly-faces within an allowable deviation

between an original shape and decimated results.
More Options
Do Not Move Poly-Vertices Preserves the original position of poly-vertices during decimation.
Do Not Modify Boundaries Preserves the original shape of boundaries during decimation.
Original Data
Check Option
Uncheck Option
Regularize Poly-Faces Regenerates poly-faces with uniform poly-edge lengths.
606
Note: The calculation time for this command may be highly increased with this option.
Large Data Mode Internally divides target 3D scan data into sub models by unloading and
loading between the physical memory and the hard drive during the calculation. This option is
useful when dealing with huge numbers of meshes.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.2.18. Tools > Scan Tools > Split

What
The Split command divides a mesh into multiple parts by using various tool entities such as a
Ref.Plane, curve, face, surface Body, solid Body, or polyline.
Why
The Split command is useful for:
Splitting a mesh into multiple parts
How to Use
How to split a mesh with a tool entity
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Split or click
607
2. Choose the By Entity method and select a Ref. Plane.
3. Click the Next Stage button to continue and select a remaining area.
Options in Detail
Methods
By Entity
Splits a mesh by using a tool entity.
By Drawing Polyline On Screen

Splits a mesh by drawing a polyline on the screen.
By User Defined Plane

Splits a mesh by a user defined plane.
608
By Entity Splits a mesh by using a plane, curve, or a body face.
Tool Entity Selects tool entities.

By Drawing Poly-Line On Screen Splits a mesh by drawing a polyline on the screen.
Note: Hold the Shift key while drawing to create a horizontal or vertical polyline.
Node Num. Of Poly Line Shows the number of nodes on a polyline to split.
By User Defined Plane Splits a mesh by using user-defined virtual plane that can be
manipulated by dragging or rotating manipulator handles.
Base Plane Splits a mesh by a selected base plane.

Position Specifies X, Y, or Z as a base position.
Normal Specifies X, Y, or Z as a base normal.
609
More Options
Cap Section Ends Fills an open boundary to create a closed mesh.
Disable Capping
Enable Capping
Result
Remaining Region Selects remaining regions.
7.5.2.19. Tools > Scan Tools > Offset

What
The Offset command creates a new mesh that has a constant distance from an original mesh using
either the Surface or Volume method.
Why
Increasing or decreasing the size of a mesh
610
How to Use
How to increase the size of mesh by using distance
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Offset or click
2. Set the Distance to 3 mm.

Options in Detail
Methods
Surface Creates a new mesh that is offset from the original mesh. Although the operation
appears to expand or contract the faces, it actually defines new offset faces at a specific distance
from the original mesh.
Original Data
Surface Offset
Distance Specifies an offset distance.

Volume Calculates the distance from a voxel node to a poly-vertex and makes a new offset
polygon using the distance.
611
Original Data
Volume Offset
Output Resolution Control Determines the resolution of poly-faces after an offset by

specifying a multiplier of the current poly-edge length. This option is available for the
Volume method.
Current Average Edge Length Shows the resolution of the current average edge
length.
Edge Length Multiplier Multiplies the average edge length by a specified value.
Target Average Edge Length Defines average edge length by a specified value.
More Options
Preview Offset Result Displays an offset result as a point cloud.
Preview
Remove Crossing Region Automatically verifies and cleans crossing regions. This option is
available for the Surface method.
Make Closed Mesh Closes and offset an open mesh. This option is available for the Volume
method.
612
Original Data
With Closed Mesh
Without Closed Mesh
Option
Option
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken
7.5.2.20. Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken

What
The Thicken command changes the volume of a mesh by giving a constant thickness to each face
to create a completely closed mesh with no boundaries.
Why
The Thicken command is useful for:
Giving faces with no volume thickness
Creating constant thickness parts
613
How to Use
A. How to create thickness
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken or
2. Set the Thickness to 3 mm.

Options in Detail
Methods
Surface Defines new offset poly-faces that are a specific distance from an original mesh.
Thickness Specifies an offset distance. To change an offset direction, use the
Direction1 or Direction2 options. To offset both directions at the same time, use Both.
Direction 1 Thickens in the default positive direction.

Direction 2 Thickens in the opposite, negative direction from Direction1.
Both Thickens using both Direction 1 and Direction 2 at the same time.
Volume Calculates the distance from a voxel node to a poly-vertex and makes a new
thickened polygon using the distance.
614
Output Resolution Control Determines the resolution of poly-faces after an offset by

specifying a multiplier of the current poly-edge length. This option is available for the
Volume method.
Current Average Edge Length Shows the resolution of the current average edge
length.
Edge Length Multiplier Multiplies the average edge length by a specified value.
Target Average Edge Length Defines average edge length by a specified value.
More Options
Preview Thicken Result Displays a thickened result as a point cloud.
Remove Crossing Region Automatically verifies and cleans crossing regions. This option is
available for the Surface method.
Make Closed Mesh This option is available when you select the Volume method. If a mesh is
not closed, the application will close and thicken a mesh.
Original Data
Check the Option
Uncheck the Option
Reference
Related Commands
615

Tools > Scan Tools > Offset
7.5.3. Tools > Region Tools

The Region Tools menu features various commands used to generate and edit feature regions on
a mesh. Geometry feature regions can be classified with region tools and created feature regions
can be used for creating feature shapes.
The Region Tools are divided into 2 tool groups used to:
Creating Feature Regions
Auto Segment
Automatically segments feature regions on a mesh.
Resegment
Resegments previously segmented feature regions.
Editing and Managing Feature Regions
Merge
Merges multiple feature regions into a single feature region.
Split
Divides feature regions into multiple parts.
Insert
Inserts a new feature region.
Separate
Separates a feature region into multiple feature regions.
Enlarge
Enlarges feature regions.
Shrink
Shrinks feature regions.
7.5.3.1.
Tools > Region Tools > Auto Segment
What
The Auto Segment command automatically classifies feature regions by recognizing 3D features
616
from raw scan data. Classified feature regions have geometric feature information that can be used
for creating features quickly.
Why
The Auto Segment command is useful for:
Classify feature regions on a mesh
Using geometric feature information for easily and quickly creating features
How to Use
How to automatically segment feature regions on a mesh
1
.
2
.
3
Click Nominal button
Click Mesh Region button
in the toolbar to enter Nominal mode.
to enter Mesh Region mode.
Go to Tools > Region Tools > Auto Segment or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
4
Click the OK button with default values.
617
Options in Detail
CAD Tessellated Mesh Segments regions more specifically when segmenting target mesh
converted from CAD data.
Unchecked
Checked
Sensitivity Specifies search sensitivity for feature regions.

Note: When the slider is moved towards More, search sensitivity will increase. Higher search
sensitivity may generate many particle regions if a mesh is rough.
Sensitivity: 100
Sensitivity: 20
Mesh Roughness Adjusts the roughness of a mesh depending on the noise level. If you click
the Estimate button
, the application analyzes the mesh and recommends a proper value.
618
Rough Mesh
Smooth Mesh
Merge Same Primitives Shapes Generates a single region if one certain primitive region
(Plane, Cylinder, Corn, Sphere or Box) is separated into several regions.
Unchecked
Checked
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Region Tools > Resegment
Tools > Region Tools > Merge
Tools > Region Tools > Split
Tools > Region Tools > Insert
Tools > Region Tools > Separate
Tools > Region Tools > Enlarge
Tools > Region Tools > Shrink
7.5.3.2.
What
The Resegment command removes selected regions then classifies them again. Generally the
Resegment command is useful for resegmenting smaller irregular areas after Auto Segmenting,
which classifies overall areas.
619
Why
The Resegment command is useful for:
Accurately classifying geometries on a region
How to Use
How to resegment feature regions on a mesh
1.
Click Nominal button in the toolbar to enter Nominal mode.
2.
Click Mesh Region button to enter Mesh Region mode.
3.
Go to Tools > Region Tools > Resegment or click the icon in the toolbar.
4.
Select regions to resegment.
5.
Set the Sensitivity and Mesh Roughness options. In this example, regions should be
simplified. So move the Sensitivity slider to Less.
6.
Options in Detail
620
Sensitivity Specifies the search sensitivity of feature regions.

Note: When the slider is moved towards More, search sensitivity will be increase. Higher
search sensitivity may generate many particle regions if a mesh is rough.
Sensitivity: 100
Sensitivity: 20
Mesh Roughness Adjusts the roughness of a mesh depending on the noise level.
Rough Mesh
Smooth Mesh
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.3.3.
What
The Merge command merges multiple feature regions into a single feature region. This command
performs the opposite function of the Separate command.
621
Why
The Merge command is useful for:
Merging multiple feature regions into a single feature region
Managing separated feature regions as a single feature region
How to Use
How to merge multiple feature regions into a single feature region
1.
Click the Nominal button in the toolbar to enter the Nominal mode.
2.
Click the Mesh Region button to enter the Mesh Region mode.
3.
Select two regions to merge.
Note: Poly-faces of regions can be selected and merged with regions.
4.
Go to Tools > Region Tools > Merge or click the icon in the toolbar. The regions will be
622
merged.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.3.4.
What
The Split command divides a feature region into multiple parts.
Why
The Split command is useful for:
Manually dividing feature regions
Separating multiple parts of feature region

623
How to Use
How to divide feature regions into multiple parts
1
.
2
.
3
Go to Tools > Region Tools > Split or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
4
Drag areas by using the Paint Brush Section Mode to divide a region into two parts.
The feature region will be divided into two separated parts.
Click the OK button.
Reference
Related Commands
624
7.5.3.5.
What
The Insert command manually adds new feature regions.
Why
The Insert command is useful for:
Manually adding new feature regions
Making interesting areas by grouping feature regions
How to Use
How to insert a new feature region
1.
2.
3.
Select areas by using the Paint Brush Selection Mode. Insert a new region.
625
4.
Go to Tools > Region Tools > Insert or click the icon in the toolbar. A new feature region
will be inserted on the existing feature region.
Before Insert
After Insert
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.3.6.
What
The Separate command creates independent feature regions. This command performs the
opposite function of the Merge command.
Why
626
The Separate command is useful for:
Separating a feature region into multiple feature regions
How to Use
How to separate a feature region into multiple feature regions
1.
2.
3.
Select a feature region to separate. Feature regions that have been distributed in
separate areas can be a target feature region for this command.
4.
Go to Tools > Region Tools > Separate or click the icon in the toolbar. The feature
regions will be individually separated.
Reference
Related Commands
627
7.5.3.7.
What
The Enlarge command expands a feature region. This command performs the opposite function of
the Shrink command.
Why
The Enlarge command is useful for:
Expanding an existing feature region
How to Use
How to enlarge the size of feature regions
1.
2.
Click Mesh Region button to enter Mesh Region mode.
3.
Select a feature region to expand.
628
4.
Go to Tools > Region Tools > Enlarge or click the icon in the toolbar. The feature region
will be enlarged.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.3.8.
What
The Shrink command shrinks a feature region. This command performs the opposite function of
the Enlarge command.
Why
629
The Shrink command is useful for:
Shrinking a feature region
Reducing the roughness of feature regions around boundaries
Correcting geometry properties of automatically classified feature regions
How to Use
How to shrink the size of feature regions
1. Click the Nominal button in the toolbar to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Click the Mesh Region button to enter the Mesh Region mode.
3. Select a feature region to shrink.
4. Go to Tools > Region Tools > Shrink or click the icon in the toolbar. The feature region
will be shrunk.
Reference
Related Commands
630

7.5.4. Tools > Section Tools

The Section Tools menu features commands to inspect a section of a part in the Section mode.
Ref. geometries created in the Section mode are internally treated differently from the normal ref
geometries and applicable types of GD&Ts also will be treated differently from normal 3D GD&Ts.
The Section Tools are divided into 4 tool groups used to:
Section Deviation and Datum
Edit Section Deviation

Edits the definition of existing section deviations.
Datum
Adds datums to the geometric profiles of a model.
Geometric Dimensioning
Smart Dimension
Inspects the distance, radius, and angle of target entities on a section.
Linear Dimension
Inspects the linear distance between target entities.
Angular Dimension
Inspects angles between target entities.
Radial Dimension
Inspects angles between target entities.
Elliptical Dimension
Inspects the longest distance and the shortest distance between elliptical features.
Geometric Tolerancing
Position
Verifies portions of a feature whether they relate to datums or not.
Straightness
Verifies the straightness of a linear geometric shape in a sectional entity.
Circularity
Verifies the circularity of a sectional entity that has a circular geometric shape.
Concentricity
631
Verifies the concentricity of a sectional entity that has a circular geometric shape.
Parallelism
Verifies the parallelism of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric shape.
Perpendicularity
Verifies the perpendicularity of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric shape.
Angularity
Verifies the angularity of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric shape.
Symmetry
Verifies the symmetry of sectional entities that face each other.
Ref. Geometry
Point
Creates a reference point on a section.
Simulated CMM Point

Simulates a Coordinate Measuring Machine, or, CMM, as it would function in the real world on
a section.
Vector
Creates a reference vector on a section.
Circle
Creates a reference circle on a section.
Slot
Creates a reference slot on a section.
Rectangle
Creates a reference rectangle on a section.
Regular Polygon
Creates a reference polygon on a section.
How to Use
How to enter the Section mode
1
Go to Insert > Section or click the Section icon in the toolbar. In this mode sections can
be created to find deviation. Section mode provides a 2D environment to work with and
inspect a model.
632
How to edit existing section features

1. To edit existing sections in the Section mode, double-click a section feature or right-click
on a section feature in the Inspection Feature tree and choose the Edit command.
How to generate ref. geometries from 3D entities in the Section mode

1. While in the Section mode, the rotation of the view is essentially locked into a 2D view. To
add ref. geometries from a 3D feature, show the nominal or scan data and uncheck the
Lock option under General options in the Display tab to freely rotate the view in the
Section mode.
7.5.4.1.
Tools > Section Tools > Edit Section Deviation
What
The Edit Section Deviation command edits the definition of existing section deviations.
633
Why
The Edit Section Deviation command is useful for:
Editing the definition of existing section deviations
How to Use
How to edit the definition of an existing section deviation
1.
Select an existing section deviation, in this example, SEC1 in the Inspection Feature
tree.
2.
Go to Tools > Section Tools > Edit Section Deviation. Section deviation can also be
directly edited by right clicking a section feature in the Inspection Feature tree and
choosing the Edit Section Deviation command from the pop-up menu.
3.
The Edit Section Deviation dialog box will be displayed. Parameters can be changed as
desired.
634
For information about the definition of Section Deviation: Insert > Section.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Section
7.5.4.2.
Tools > Section Tools > Datum
What
The Datum command adds datums on the geometric profiles of a model. A datum is a theoretical
exact point or line derived from specific geometric feature profiles. They are the origin from which
a location or geometric characteristics of feature profiles are established.
The name of a datum is automatically assigned in alphabetical order from A to Z. Letters can be
unrestrictedly combined to form characters such as AA or ZZZ.
Note: Datums created in a section are available to use only in that section.
Why
635
The Datum command is useful for:
Defining geometric feature profiles as standard feature profiles for inspection
Inspecting feature profiles that have three degrees of constraints in a section
How to Use
How to edit the definition of an existing section deviation
1.
Double click a section entity in the Inspection Feature tree to enter the Section mode.
2.
Go to Tools > Section Tools > Datum or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Define datum A by selecting a section edge, then place the resulting annotation in the
Section View.
4.
Define datum B by selecting a section edge, then place the resulting annotation in the
Section View.
5.
Click the OK button
to complete the command.
Options in Detail
636
Target Selects a target entity to measure a distance, an angle, or a radius.

Note: A Ref.Point, Ref.Vector, Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot, Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Polygon, Section
Vertex, Section Edge, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can be a target
entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of the
target entity.
The following table shows where Datum can be applied:
Geometric Feature Type
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Circle
Section
OK
OK
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
OK
OK
7.5.4.3.
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
OK
OK
OK
Tools > Section Tools > Smart Dimension
What
The Smart Dimension command inspects the distance, radius, and angle of target entities on a
section. The type of dimension is automatically determined by the combination of selected target
entities.
Why
The Smart Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring the distance, radius, and angle of target entities on a section at one time
637
How to Use
How to measure distance, radius and angle at the same time
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Section Tools > Smart Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Measure a distance by selecting two parallel section edges then place the resulting
annotation in the Section View.
4.
Measure an arc radius by selecting an arc section edge then place the resulting
annotation in the Section View.
5.
Click the OK button
Options in Detail
Dimension Type
Type Shows dimension types such as Linear, Radial and Angular.
Note: A dimension type is intelligently determined according to a selected entity. For
example, when two parallel lines are selected as target entities, the dimension type will
automatically become Linear. When arcs are selected as target entities, the dimension type
will automatically become Radial. For more information, see Tools > Section Tools > Linear
Dimension, Angular Dimension, or Radial Dimension.
638
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a distance, an angle, or a radius.
target entity.
The following table shows where smart dimension can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
Line
(Vertex)
(Vector)
Section
OK
OK
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
OK
OK
Circle
Slot
Rectangle
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
Options
Tolerance Specifies features and tolerance ranges by typing values into an input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Nominal Shows a nominal size that is used as a designation value for general feature
identification. This value is automatically extracted from Nominal data. It can also be manually
modified if desired. When the default nominal value is manually changed, the Estimate button
will be displayed next to the nominal input box. To calculate the nominal value from
selected target entities, click the Estimate button
disabled.
. After calculation, the button will be
Note: Based on the type of dimension, measuring icons (

) that can manually
measure distance, angle, or radius, will be displayed next to the Nominal input box. To
manually set a nominal value by measuring the distance between features, click the
Measure Distance button
, then pick a point on a feature profile. To manually set a
nominal value by measuring the radius of a feature, click the Measure Radius button
,
then pick a point on a feature profile. To manually set a nominal value by measuring the
639
angle between features, click the Measure Angle button

profile.
, then pick a point on a feature

In Space Finds minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair
point along the positive normal direction of target edges based on the Actual Mating
Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
As Nominal Finds scan pair geometry based on the fitting method that has been defined in
the properties of a target edge.
640
Note: When measuring a Dimension, the calculation will simulate measuring with a
caliper in the real-world. The following images show how each mating method (In Space
and In Material) is applied for measuring the size of concave and convex features.
In Space
In Material
Alignment Aligns a measuring direction and is only available for Linear dimensions.
Without Alignment
X Alignment
Y Alignment
(Shortest Distance)
Arc Condition Specifies arc conditions by choosing either center, minimum or maximum. This
option is displayed when the dimension type is Linear and target entities are circular section
edges.
641
Center - Center
Min - Min
Max - Max
Between Line - Circle
Pattern Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This
option is displayed only when the dimension type is Radial.
Radius Changes the display of radius values from a Radius to a Diameter. This option is
displayed only when the dimension type is Radial.
Reference
642
Related Commands
Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension
Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension
Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension
Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension
7.5.4.4.
Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension
What
The Linear Dimension command inspects the linear distance between target entities.
Why
The Linear Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring the linear distance between target entities
How to Use
How to measure a linear distance between target entities
643
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select two section edges then place the resulting annotation in the Section View.
4.
Measure the distance between the remaining circles by selecting circular section edges
as explained in Step3. Click the OK button
5.
Click the OK button
How to inspect Pass/Fail Results

The following cases explain how linear dimensions are measured according to target entity type.
Point/Point Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:
Point Geometry Type Vertex, Circle, Ref. Point, Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot, Ref.Rectangle,
Ref.Regular Polygon
Linear dimension measures the direct distance between selected entities and defines the
distance as a nominal value. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the
deviation between a nominal value and the actual value, which is the direct distance
between scan pair geometries extracted from a target 3D scan data according to the Actual
Mating Envelop Rule.
Point/Line Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:

644
Point Geometry Type Vertex, Circle, Ref. Point, Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot, Ref.Rectangle,
Ref.Regular Polygon
Line (Vector) Geometry Type Line, Ref.Vector
Linear dimension measures the projection distance along the normal direction of a selected
target entity that has a vector geometry type, and defines the distance as a nominal value.
When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation between a nominal
value and the actual value, which is the projection distance between scan pair geometries
extracted from target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
Line/Line Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:
The firstly selected entity is used as the standard for dimensioning. The nominal value is
defined by an average distance calculated between two perpendicular distances from the
start and end points of the secondly selected entity to the firstly selected entity. When scan
pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and
the actual value, which is an average perpendicular distance between scan pair geometries
Note: Actual Mating Envelop

An Actual Mating Envelop is theoretically defined as a form perfect, maximum inscribed,
minimum circumscribed or tangent, inverse representation of an actual feature. Mating
Envelopes can be specified as In-Material, In-Space, and as unconstrained, orientation
constrained and location constrained relative to a Datum Reference Frame. It defines the
mating method to find scan pair geometry in the application.
In Space
Finds the minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point
along the positive normal direction of target edges.
In Material
Finds the maximum inscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along
the negative normal direction of target edges.
645
Options in Detail
Methods
Individual Individually measures linear dimensions by selecting target entities one by one.
Continue Continually measures a linear dimension from a previous target entity to another
target entity. The first target is automatically set from the last target in the previous dimensioning.
Baseline Measures a linear dimension from a target baseline entity to other entities.
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a distance.
646

entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of the target
entity.
The following table shows where linear dimensions can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Circle
Section
OK
OK
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
OK
OK
Slot
Rectangle
Regular
Polygon
OK
OK
OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
will be displayed next to the nominal input box. To calculate the nominal value from selected
target entities, click the Estimate button
. After calculation, the button will be disabled.

) that can manually
manually set a nominal value by measuring the distance between features, click the Measure
Distance button
, then pick a point on a feature profile. To manually set a nominal value
by measuring the radius of a feature, click the Measure Radius button

, then pick a point
on a feature profile. To manually set a nominal value by measuring the angle between
features, click the Measure Angle button
, then pick a point on a feature profile.

In Space Finds minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair
point along the positive normal direction of target edges based on the Actual Mating
Envelop Rule.
647
Envelop Rule.
As Nominal Finds scan pair geometry based on the fitting method that has been defined in
the properties of a target edge.
Note: When measuring a Dimension, the calculation will simulate measurement with a
caliper in the real-world. The following images show how each mating method (In Space
and In Material) is applied for measuring the size of concave and convex features.
In Space
In Material
Alignment Aligns a measuring direction.
648
Without Alignment
X Alignment
Y Alignment
(Shortest Distance)
option is displayed when target entities are circular section edges.
Center - Center
Min - Min
Max - Max
Reference
Related Commands
649
7.5.4.5.
Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension
What
The Angular Dimension command inspects angles between target entities.
Why
The Angular Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring angles between target entities
How to Use
How to measure angles between target entities
1. Double click a section entity in the Inspection Feature tree to enter the Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select two section edges then place the resulting annotation in the Section View. Specify
a Tolerance value.
650
4. Click the OK button
How to Inspect Pass/Fail Results

The geometry type of target entities can be:
The angle between two lines is calculated after a second parallel line is selected and moved
parallel to the first selected Line so that the target entities can be intersected. When scan pair
points exist, angular dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and the actual
value, which is the angle between scan pair geometries extracted from a target 3D scan data
according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.

In Space
Finds minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along
the positive normal direction of target edges.
In Material
Finds maximum inscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along the
negative normal direction of target edges.
651
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure a distance.
target entity.
The following table shows where angular dimension can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Section
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note: During the first angular dimension measurement no default tolerance values are
652
provided. After defining tolerance values, they will be preserved when the command is used
again.

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.6.
Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension
What
The Radial Dimension command inspects angles between target entities.
653
Why
The Radial Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring the radius of a target entity
How to Use
How to measure the radius of a target entity
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a circular section edge then place the resulting annotation in the Section View.
Specify a Tolerance value.
4. Measure the radius of a second circular edge then place the resulting annotation in the
Section View. Click the OK button

654
How to inspect radial dimensions

Circle Geometry Type Circle, Ref.Circle
Radial dimension measures the radius of selected entities and defines the radius as a nominal
value. When scan pair points exist, radial dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal
value and the actual value which is a radius of the scan pair geometries extracted from target 3D
scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
In Space
Finds minimum circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along
the positive normal direction of target edges.
In Material
Finds maximum inscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along the
negative normal direction of target edges.
Options in Detail
655
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a radius. A ref. point, ref. vector, ref. circle, ref. slot, ref.
rectangle, ref. polygon, section vertex, section edge, region edge, GT, dimension, datum and
composite selection can be a target entity.
target entity.
The following table shows where radial dimension can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
Line
(Vertex)
(Vector)
Section
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
Regular
Polygon
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point

656
Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
caliper in the real-world. The following images show how each mating method (In
Space and In Material) is applied for measuring the size of concave and convex
features.
In Space
In Material
Radius Changes the display of radius values from a Radius to a Diameter.
657
Pattern - Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.7.
Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension
What
The Elliptical Dimension command inspects the longest distance and the shortest distance
between elliptical features.
658
Why
The Elliptical Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring the longest distance and the shortest distance between elliptical features
How to Use
How to measure the size of an elliptical feature
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select an elliptical section edge and enable the Radius and Major Axis options. Place the
resulting annotation in the Section View.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure an elliptical dimension.
Note: A Section Edge, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can be a target
659
target entity.
The following table shows where elliptical dimension can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
Line
(Vertex)
(Vector)
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
Regular
Polygon
Section
OK
Ref.Geometry
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
660
Note: When measuring a Dimension, the calculation will simulate measuring with a caliper i
the real-world. The following images show how each mating method (In Space and I
Material) is applied for measuring the size of concave and convex features.
In Space
In Material
Radius Measures half the distance of an elliptical feature.
661
Alignment Aligns a measurement direction to the X, Y, Z Axis or a User Defined Axis.

Major / Minor Axis Chooses either the Major Axis or the Minor Axis to measure the longest or
shortest distance of an elliptical feature profile.
Major Axis
Minor Axis
Fitting Options
Fitting Type Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from nominal data. It will be used
as a fitting method for finding scan pair geometry using the As Nominal option.
nominal entities.
edges. It is used for finding best-fitted scan pair geometry from scan pair points.
fitting method from nominal edges. It is used for finding the maximum inscribed
geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along the negative normal
direction.
separation fitting method from nominal edges. It is used for finding the minimum
circumscribed geometry that contacts the most distant scan pair point along the
positive normal direction.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
662
The Ratio method requires a ratio value and only data that falls into the selected value will be
used.
The Absolute Distance method requires a distance and the fitting will be done by excluding any
data outside of that distance.
N Sigma
Ratio Samples data points by a specified value. When the ratio is 100%, all selected data
will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be used.
Absolute Distance Specifies an absolute distance value. This option is useful for scan
points excluded outside of a specified distance.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.8.
Tools > Section Tools > Position
What
The Position command verifies portions of a feature whether they relate to datums or not. Position
tolerance is a geometric dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) location control used to describe a
perfect, or exact, location of a feature in relation to datum references or other features.
663
Symbol:
Why
The Position command is useful for:
Verifying how far a feature profile can deviate from its exact true position
Controlling the location of a feature in relation to datum references or other features
How to Use
How to verify the location of feature profiles from its exact true position
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Datum or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Define datums A and B by clicking section edges.
664
5. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Position in the menu. Select circular section edges then
place the resulting annotations in the Section View. Specify a Tolerance value for Datum
A and Datum B.
How circular feature profiles are inspected for Pass/Fail results

1. A position tolerance controls how much the location of a feature can deviate from its
exact true position whether or not they relate to datums.
For circular feature profiles, deviation is defined by the diameter of the smallest circle
that encloses the two extremities of the center points of measured circles. The pass/fail
inspection judges whether the point of a scan circle fitted to a pair of scan points of a
specified nominal section edge is within a given tolerance range.
How two mating planar features are inspected for Pass/Fail results
1. A position tolerance controls how much the location of a feature can deviate from its
exact true position whether or not they relate to datums.
For two mating planar features, a thickness zone will be defined by the center line of two
parallel lines that are generated internally from scan pair points, datums, and a given
tolerance. The pass/fail inspection judges whether the center line of two scans is within a
given tolerance range.
Options in Detail
665
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to verify a position tolerance.
Note: A Ref. Point, Ref. Vector, Ref. Circle, Ref. Slot, Ref. Rectangle, Ref. Polygon, Section
target entity.
The following table shows where position can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Section
OK
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
OK
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
OK
OK
OK
OK
Options
Tolerance Specifies a tolerance value.
Display Projection Distance Determines how projection distance is displayed within an
annotation.
Pattern Verifies the position of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
SEPREQT Separates a feature from a requirement group and evaluates the feature regardless of
other geometric tolerances.
Material Condition Defines the material condition of a feature.
Note: When a Geometric Tolerance is defined on a feature profile that can be controlled by
size, the Material Condition can be defined onto the feature within a Geometric Tolerance
together with the Dimension.
Material Condition Type Chooses a material condition type, from either MMC also
666
known as a Maximum Material Condition, or LMC, also known as Least Material

Condition.
Note: Maximum Material Condition (MMC) is the condition in which a feature with
size contains the maximum amount of material within stated limits of size, for example
a minimum hole diameter or maximum shaft diameter.
Least Material Condition (LMC) is the condition in which a feature with size contains
the least amount of material within stated limits of size, for example a maximum hole
diameter or minimum shaft diameter.
Dimension Tolerance Specifies features and tolerance ranges by typing values into an
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
The following image illustrates how the Actual Mating can be applied to scan data:
667

Note: If the actual mating option is used while defining a datum reference frame, the
fitting methods predefined on each datum entity will be used.
Datum Specifies datums.

Material Condition For Datum Defines a material condition for datums.
Note: When a circular feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size, a
position tolerance can be used on the datum and a material condition can be set.
Condition.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Section Tools > Straightness
Tools > Section Tools > Circularity
Tools > Section Tools > Concentricity
668
7.5.4.9.
What
The Straightness command verifies the straightness of a linear geometric shape in a sectional
entity. Straightness is a condition where a section element is a straight line.
Symbol:
Why
The Straightness command is useful for:
Verifying how far a feature profile can deviate from a straight line
How to Use
How to verify the straightness of a feature profile
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Straightness or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a section edge then place the resulting annotation in the Section View. Specify a
Tolerance value.
669
How straightness is inspected for Pass/Fail results

1. A straightness tolerance controls how much a feature profile can deviate from a straight
line. It can be applied to a linear section edge and does not require datums to use.
When straightness is measured on a section feature profile, scan pair points are gathered
within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target
entity. Two parallel lines that can enclose the scan pair points are constructed and its
minimum thickness is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a minimum thickness is within a given tolerance.
Options in Detail
670
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure the straightness of a feature profile.
target entity.
The following table shows where straightness can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Section
Line
(Vector)
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
OK
Ref.Geometry
Options
Pattern Verifies the straightness of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.10. Tools > Section Tools > Circularity

What
The Circularity command verifies the circularity of a sectional entity that has a circular geometric
671
shape. Circularity is the condition where all points are equidistant from a center point.
Symbol:
Why
The Circularity command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from a perfect form of a circle
How to Use
How to verify the circularity of a feature profile
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Circularity or click the icon in the toolbar.
Specify a Tolerance value.
672
How circularity is inspected for Pass/Fail results

1. A circularity tolerance controls how much a feature profile can deviate from a perfect form
of a circle. It can be applied to a circular section edge and does not require datums to use.
When circularity is measured on a circular section edge, scan pair points are gathered
within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity.
Two concentric circles that can enclose the scan pair points are constructed and its
Options in Detail
673
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure the circularity of a feature profile.
target entity.
The following table shows where circularity can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Section
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
OK
Ref.Geometry
Options
Pattern Verifies the circularity of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.11. Tools > Section Tools > Concentricity

674
What
The Concentricity command verifies the concentricity of a sectional entity that has a circular
geometric shape. The measurement must have one circular datum. Concentricity is the condition
where the median points of all diametrically opposed elements of the features of a revolution or
correspondingly located elements of two or more radially disposed features are congruent with
the center point of a datum feature.
Symbol:
Why
The Concentricity command is useful for:
Verifying how much the median points of multiple diameters can deviate from a center point
of a specific datum
How to Use
How to verify the concentricity of a feature
675
3. Define datum A by selecting an outer circular section edge.
4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Concentricity or click the icon in the toolbar.
Specify a Tolerance value and set datum A for the measurement.
How concentricity is inspected for Pass/Fail results

1.
A concentricity tolerance controls how much the median points of multiple diameters
can deviate from the center point of a specific datum. It can be applied to a circular
section edge or a ref. circle. This measurement requires one circular datum.
When concentricity is measured on a feature profile, scan pair points are gathered within
a ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target entity. The
scan pair points are used as scan pair geometry.
The location of scan pair geometry is optimized to the normal geometry according to the
Optimizing Position and Orientation methods so that the deviation between them can
676
be minimized. The deviation between the center point of scan pair geometry and the
center point of a datum feature is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the deviation is within a given tolerance.
Note: Optimizing Position and Orientation method

When Geometric Tolerance is measured with specific datums on a feature in 3D scanbased inspection, corresponding scan pair geometry is extracted from qualified scan
pair points and its location is optimized to the position and the orientation of the
nominal geometry so that the deviation between them is minimized to accurately
analyze features based on specified datums. This is referred to as the Optimizing
Position and Orientation method. This method is used when Orientation-type
Geometric Tolerances (Perpendicularity, Angularity, Parallellism) and Location-type
Geometric Tolerances (Position Tolerance, Concentricity, Symmetry) are measured.
The following figures show how the position and orientation of extracted scan pair
geometry are optimized while measuing Orientation-type Geometric Tolerances and
Location-type Geometric Tolerances.
Step
State
Operation
Coordinates of a Datum Reference Frame
(DRF) of nominal geometry and scan pair
geometry are composed of datums.
Pn : Position of Nominal Geometry

Ps : Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Tn : Nominal DRF
Ts : Scan DRF
677
The coordinates of scan pair geometry defined

by DRF moves to the coordinate of nominal
geometry.
2
Ps : Moved Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Degrees of freedom with no constraints
(residual DOF) is defined according to a
combination of datums, and the position and
the orientation of scan pair geometry is
optimized using the residual DOF so that the
deviation between them can be minimized.
3
The deviation between the positions of those

geometries is calculated as actual value.

Ps : Optimized Position of Scan Pair
Geometry
If the Material Condition for a Datum has been

defined in a datum, the position and the
orientation of nominal geometry will be
optimized according to the Material Condition
for the Datum and the deviation between the
positions of those geometries will be
calculated as an actual value.
Pn : Optimized Position of Nominal

Geometry
Geometry
Options in Detail
678
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure the concentricity of a feature profile.
Note: A Ref. Circle, Section Edge, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can be
a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of
the target entity.
The following table shows where concentricity can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Circle
Section
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
Options

Material Condition For Datum Defines the material condition for a datum.
Note: When a circular feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size,
concentricity can be used the datum as well as set material condition for the datum.
Material Condition Type Choose either MMC (Maximum Material Condition) or
LMC (Least Material Condition) types for datum.
Note:
Maximum Material Condition (MMC) The condition in which a feature of size
contains the maximum amount of material within the stated limits of size (e.g.,
minimum hole diameter, maximum shaft diameter).
Least Material Condition (LMC) The condition in which a feature of size
contains the least amount of material within the stated limits of size (e.g.,
679
maximum hole diameter, minimum shaft diameter).
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.12. Tools > Section Tools > Parallelism

What
The Parallelism command verifies the parallelism of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric
shape. Parallelism is a condition of a line that is equidistant at all points from a datum line.
Symbol:
Why
The Parallelism command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from an orientation parallel to a specific
datum line
680
How to Use
How to verify the parallelism of a feature from a specific datum
3. Define datum A by selecting a linear section edge.
4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Parallelism or click the icon in the toolbar.
5. Select a linear section edge then place the resulting annotation in the Section View.
681
How parallelism is inspected for Pass/Fail results

1. Parallelism controls how much a feature profile can deviate from an orientation parallel to
a specific datum line. It can be applied to a linear section edge or a ref. vector and requires
one datum.
If a ref. vector is measured as a target entity, only its size can be applied.
When parallelism is measured on a section profile, target scan points are constrained by a
defined datum, then scan pair points are gathered within a ribbon-like thickness zone
that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target entity. Two parallel lines that can
enclose the scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an
actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is in a given tolerance.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure the parallelism of a feature profile.
Note: A Ref. Vector, Section Edge, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can
be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type
of the target entity.
The following table shows where parallelism can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Section
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
682
Options

annotation.
Pattern Verifies the parallelism of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
Note:
minimum hole diameter, maximum shaft diameter)
maximum hole diameter, minimum shaft diameter)
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Section Tools > Perpendicularity
Tools > Section Tools > Angularity
Tools > Section Tools > Symmetry
683
7.5.4.13. Tools > Section Tools > Perpendicularity

What
The Perpendicularity command verifies the perpendicularity of a sectional entity that has a linear
geometric shape. Perpendicularity is a condition of a line that is at a 90 degree right angle from a
datum line.
Symbol:
Why
The Perpendicularity command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from a 90 degree angle
How to Use
How to verify the perpendicularity of a feature from a specific datum
684
4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Perpendicularity or click the icon in the toolbar.
How perpendicularity is inspected for Pass/Fail results

1. Perpendicularity controls how much a feature profile can deviate from a 90 degree angle.
It can be applied to a linear section edge or a ref. vector and requires one datum.
When perpendicularity is measured on a section profile, target scan points are
constrained by a defined datum, then scan pair points are gathered within a ribbon-like
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target entity. Two parallel lines
that can enclose the scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is
defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is within a given
tolerance.
685
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure the perpendicularity of a feature profile.
of a target entity.
The following table shows where perpendicularity can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Section
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
Options

686
annotation.
Pattern Verifies the perpendicularity of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
Note:
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Section Tools > Parallelism
7.5.4.14. Tools > Section Tools > Angularity

What
The Angularity command verifies the angularity of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric
shape. Angularity is a condition of a line that is at a specified angle other than 90 degrees from a
datum line.
687
Symbol:
Why
The Angularity command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from an angle described in nominal
specifications
How to Use
How to verify the angularity of a feature from a specific datum
4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Angularity or click the icon in the toolbar.
688
How angularity is inspected for Pass/Fail results

1. Angularity controls how much a feature profile can deviate from an angle described in
nominal specifications, but cannot be equal to 90 degrees. It can be applied to a linear
section edge or a ref. vector and requires one datum.
When angularity is measured on a section profile, target scan points are constrained by a
defined datum, then scan pair points are gathered within a ribbon-like thickness zone
that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target entity. Two parallel lines that can
enclose the scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an
actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is within a given
tolerance.
Options in Detail
689
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure the angularity of a feature profile.
of a target entity.
The following table shows where angularity can be applied:
Target Entity
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Section
OK
Ref.Geometry
OK
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
Options

annotation.
Pattern Verifies the angularity of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
Note:
690
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.15. Tools > Section Tools > Symmetry

What
The Symmetry command verifies the symmetry of sectional entities that face each other.
Symmetry is a three-dimensional geometric tolerance that controls how much the median points
between two feature profiles deviate from a specific datum.
Symbol:
691
Why
The Symmetry command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from an angle described in nominal
specifications
How to Use
How to verify the symmetry of a feature from a specific datum
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Vector or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select feature profiles and change the Method to Find Slot Axis. Click the OK button
6. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Symmetry or click the icon in the toolbar.
692
How symmetry is inspected for Pass/Fail results

1. Symmetry controls how much a feature profile can deviate from the orientation, location,
and form of a derived median line of a slab or slot-like feature profile relative to a
nominally co-linear datum line. It can be applied to a linear section edge and requires one
datum.
The actual value is the thickness of the thinnest slab-like zone whose center line coincides
with a referenced datum line and contains all of the scan pair points in a derived median
line.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness of two parallel lines is
within a given tolerance.
Options in Detail
693
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure the symmetry of a feature profile.
entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of a target
entity.
The following table shows where symmetry can be applied:
Target Entity
Section
Point
(Vertex)
Line
(Vector)
Circle
Slot
Rectangl
e
Regular
Polygon
OK
Ref.Geometry
Options

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
694

Note: A datum is not required for this measurement. When datums are defined, scan pair
geometry is extracted from scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum Reference
Frame, or DRF, on a sectional profile. Otherwise, scan pair geometry will be aligned so that the
deviation is minimized to the nominal feature.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.16. Tools > Section Tools > Point

What
The Ref. Point command creates a reference point on a section. A reference point is a zero
dimensional entity. A reference point is used to mark a specific position on a section.
Note: Ref.Geometry entities created using both Insert > Ref. Geometry and Tools > Section
Tools have the same creation methods. The difference between creating Ref.Geometry using
695
Ref. Geometry and Section Tools is that Section Tools will project onto the current section.
Why
The Ref. Point command is useful for:
Finding a the center of a circle, slot, rectangle, polygon, or sphere
Finding an average point from multiple points
Finding the intersection point of two lines
Finding the intersection point of a line and a face
Finding the intersection point of three planes
Importing positions
How to Use
How to find and add a point on a circle center
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Point or click the
2. Change the Method to Find Circle Center.
3. Select circular edges on a model.
4. Click the OK button to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created with
its pair geometry.
696
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Find Circle Center
Find Slot Center
Find Rectangle Center
Find Polygon Center
Find Sphere Center
Projection
Convert
N Division
Between 2 Points
Intersect 2 Lines
Intersect Line(Curve, Axis) & Face
Intersect 3 Planes
Find Cone Vertex
Extreme Position
697
Import
Definition Creates a point by using the mathematical definition of a point and projects it on a
section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Extract Creates a point from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
point on a section.
will be used.
N Sigma
Find Circle Center Creates a circle center point from selected entities and projects the point
on a section.
nominal entities.
698
direction.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
Remove Outlier, Sampling Ratio Identical to the Extract method.

Find Slot Center Extracts the center point of a slot from selected entities using a fitting
algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle
Center method under Ref. Point.
Find Rectangle Center Extracts the center point of a rectangle from selected entities using a
fitting algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as the Find
Circle Center method under Ref. Point.
Rounded Corner Finds the center point of a rounded corner rectangle.

699
Find Polygon Center Extracts the center point of a polygon center from selected entities
using a fitting algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as
the Find Circle Center method under Ref. Point.
Rounded Corner Used for polygon corners that are round.

Num. Of Edges Specifies the number of edges of a polygon.
Find Sphere Center Extracts the center point of a sphere from selected entities using a fitting
algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle
Center method under Ref. Point.
Projection Extracts a point by projecting onto another entity and projects the point on a
section.
To make a point using the Projection method:
1. Select points such as ref. points, curve points or vertices.
2. Select a target entity that selected points will be projected to a section.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates an average point by choosing one or more points and projects
the point on a section.
To make a point using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick points on scan data or select points such as ref. points, vertices or circles.
2. Click OK.
700
Convert Create a center point from a selected entity and projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the Convert method:
1. Select a circle or an arc.
2. Click OK.
N Division Creates multiple points by dividing a selected curve, vector, or mesh data and
projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the N Division method:
1. Select a curve.
2. Click OK.
entity.
Uniform
Offset
Between 2 Points Creates a point between two points using a Ratio value to decide the
position and projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the Between 2 Points method:
1. Select two points.
2. Set the ratio of position between two selected points.
3. Click OK.
701
Ratio: 0.2
Ratio: 0.5
Ratio: 0.8
Intersect 2 Lines Creates a point from the intersection of two linear entities.
To make a point using the Intersect 2 Lines method:
1. Select two linear entities such as a line, edge, or vector.
2. Click OK.
Intersect Line (Curve, Axis) & Face Creates a point from the intersection of a curve and a face
and projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the Intersect Axis and Face method:
1. Select a curve such as a line, edge, vector, 2D or 3D curve.
2. Select a face.
3. Click OK.
Intersect 3 Planes Creates a point from the intersection of three selected planar entities and
projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the Intersect 3 Planes method:
1. Select three planar entities such as a face, region, or plane.
2. Click OK.
702
Check Orthogonality Allows the creation of a point only if three planes are orthogonal.
Find Cone Vertex Creates a point at the apex position of a conical entity and projects the
point on a section.
Extreme Position Creates a point at an extreme position from selected entities and projects
the point on a section. A target entity and a linear entity need to be selected for a Direction to
define an extreme direction.
Import Creates points by importing an ASCII file and projects the point on a section. A text file
containing X,Y, and Z coordinates separated by tabs or commas can be imported with the ASCII
converter.
When a text file is opened, the ASCII Converter will appear. Column definition, separators such as
white space or user defined characters, and commas for decimal point in the ASCII Convert
dialog box can be set.
703
[Stage 2: Define Scan Pair]

As Nominal Automatically creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as created in
Stage 1.
Manual Manually creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as created in Stage 1
but with the addition of CMM simulation.
Simulate CMM Creates a pair point by simulating CMM in a real world
environment. Scan data can be treated as a real part and the CMM can be virtually
controlled as a real CMM.
Ray Intersection Finds a pair point by intersecting a virtual ray and poly
vertices.
The Search Radius and Search Depth options define the size of a searching
zone.
The Direction option defines the projecting direction of the ray.
The Fitting Type option is the fitting method used for detected poly-vertices.
When scan data is mesh it can be easy to find pair points on the mesh
surface, however on point clouds poly-vertices in a search area must be fitted
and a surface must be generated internally.
The Auto option fits poly-vertices in a search area to an identical geometry
704
type of a picked nominal face. If no nominal face exists poly-vertices will be

fit to a freeform surface.
The Plane / Sphere / Cylinder / Cone / Torus / Surface Fitting options fits
poly-vertices in a searching zone to a specified geometry type.
Rod Contact Finds a pair point by the contact position of a rod. The Search
Radius and Search Depth define the size of a searching zone. The Direction
option defines the contact direction of the rod to poly-vertices. The Rod Axis
defines the direction of the rod.
Disk Contact Finds a pair point by the contact position of a disk. The
Direction option defines the contact direction of the disk to poly-vertices.
Find Closest Point Finds the closest pair point within a given search radius.
The Search Radius option defines a searching zone from a nominal point.
705
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.4.17. Tools > Section Tools > Simulated CMM Point

What
The Simulated CMM Point command simulates a Coordinate Measuring Machine, or, CMM, as it
would function in the real world on a section. Within the application, scan data will be treated as a
real part and the CMM Point command can be used to acquire measure points with a virtual probe
device that acts like a real-world probing device.
This method is available when both nominal and scan data exist as well as when inspecting scan
data only without any nominal data.
When a CMM point is picked on a model the direction of probing will be automatically defined by
the normal of the nominal data. However if only scan data is used, the probing direction will be
defined by a planes normal which will be internally made by fitting scan points within a searching
zone.
Why
The Simulated CMM Point command is useful for:
Finding a contact point by simulating CMM
Ray Intersection
This method is similar to a ball-type probing device. The Ray-Intersection method can find a
contact point on scan data but does not consider any physical conflicts between the virtual probe
and scan data.
Ray-Intersection finds pair points by intersecting a virtual ray and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the ball probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
706
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. Poly-vertices in the searching zone will be
candidate poly-vertices used to find the intersection with the virtual ray.
The specified depth is a total of the frontward and backward depth of a picked point on the
direction of measurement. If the Search Depth is set to 10mm, 5mm will be the search depth in
both directions as shown in the image below:
How to Use Ray Intersection

How to find a contact point using the Ray Intersection method
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Simulated CMM
Point or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Ray-Intersection method.
707
warning colors.
Options in Detail for Ray Intersection

Fitting Type Selects a fitting method used for detecting poly-vertices. When scan data is mesh
it can be easy to find pair points on the mesh surface, however on point clouds pair points
cannot be found and one of the following fitting type options need to be used.
Auto Fits poly-vertices in a search zone identically to the geometry on a nominal face. If
no nominal face exists the fitting will be performed on a freeform face.
Plane Fitting Sets a CMM point to a place. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a plane.
Sphere Fitting Sets a CMM point to a sphere. Pair points are found by fitting polyRapidform XOV3 | Menu
708
vertices in a search area to a sphere.

Cylinder Fitting Sets a CMM point to a cylinder. Pair points are found by fitting polyvertices in a search area to a cylinder.
Cone Fitting Sets a CMM point to a cone. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices in
a search area to a cone.
Torus Fitting Sets a CMM point to a torus. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a torus.
Surface Fitting Sets a CMM point to a surface. Pair points are found by fitting polyvertices in a search area to a surface.
Direction Defines the approaching direction to an object. The direction for measuring a CMM
point is displayed as a blue arrow. Four direction options are available: Auto, Nominal Normal,
Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected on a
boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a nominal face.
Nominal Tangent Sets the approaching direction to an object tangent to a nominal

face.
709
Rod Contact
This method is similar to a rod-type probing device. The Rod Contact method can find a contact
data. The virtual rod defines the searching zone on scan data and is useful for measuring
boundaries or features on sheet metal parts.
Rod Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the rod probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. The Rod Axis option defines the direction of
the rod.
How to Use Rod Contact

How to find a contact point using the Rod Contact method
2. Choose the Rod Contact method.
3. Pick a point on a boundary of the nominal data and set the rod radius, search depth and
rod length.
710
warning colors.
Options in Detail for Rod Contact

Rod Radius / Search Depth / Rod Length Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the
searching zone will be candidate points for a CMM point.
Direction Selects the Measuring Direction and Rod Axis for the Rod Contact method.
surface.
711

nominal face.

nominal face.
Rod Axis Defines the direction of the rod axis. Four direction options are available: Auto,
Nominal Normal, Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto Sets the rod axis direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected on
a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal Sets the rod axis direction to an object normal to a nominal
face.
Nominal Tangent Sets the rod axis direction to an object tangent to a nominal
face.
Manual Manually sets the rod axis direction to an object.
Disk Contact
This method is similar to a disk-type probing device. The Disk Contact method can find a contact
data. The virtual disk defines the searching zone on scan data.
712
Disk Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the disk probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. The Direction option defines the contacting
direction of the disk. Using the flat surface of the disk probe can find a maximum point within the
search zone.
How to Use Disk Contact

How to find a contact point using the Disk Contact method
2. Choose the Disk Contact method.
713
warning colors.
Options in Detail for Disk Contact

Search Radius / Search Depth Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the searching zone
will be candidate points for a CMM point.
Direction Selects the Measuring Direction for the Disk Contact method.
Auto Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected
on a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a nominal
face.

714
nominal face.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Simulated CMM Point
7.5.4.18. Tools > Section Tools > Vector

What
The Ref. Vector command creates a reference vector on a section. A reference vector is a virtual
axis with a direction and infinite size. A ref. vector is used for adding assisting geometry for
inspection.
Why
The Ref. Vector command is useful for:
Extracting a vector entity
Finding the axis of a cylinder
Finding the axis of a cone
Finding the intersection between two planes
Adding lines on a section
Inspecting straightness in a scan-only inspection process
How to Use
How to find a vector from two intersecting planes
715
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Vector or click the
icon in the tool bar.
2. Change the Method to Intersect 2 Planes.
3. Select two faces on the nominal data.
Note: When two faces are perpendicular to a section plane, it is impossible to create a
Ref. Vector because projection of the intersection becomes a point instead of a vector.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Vector1 will be created by intersecting two planes
and projecting the intersection.
warning colors.
716
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Find Slot Axis
Find Cylinder Axis
Find Cone Axis
Projection
Pick Point & Line
Convert
Intersect 2 Planes
Average
Tangent
Cross 2 Lines
Definition Creates a vector using the mathematical definition of a vector and projects the
vector on a section. A numeric value can be input or a point can be picked manually in the
Model View.
717
Position & Direction Creates a ref. vector with Position and Direction values.
Position Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manual input of specific
values for X, Y and Z.
Direction Selects a linear entity to acquire a directional value or allows the
manual input of a specific numerical value. The X, Y or Z buttons align the direction
to a selected direction.
Start & End Creates a vector by defining the Start Position and the End Position.
Start Position and End Position Creates a vector by connecting two positions.
The positions can be selected in the Model View or manually input into the X, Y, Z
boxes.
Extract Extracts a vector from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
vector on a section.
When a ref. vector is created by fitting a section of scan data, its straightness can be measured.
To inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. vector, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the
718
will be used.
N Sigma
Find Slot Axis Creates a vector of a slot on a selected entity using a fitting algorithm and
projects the vector on a section. The fitting option is the same as the Extract method.
direction.
719
Find Cylinder Axis Creates a cylinder axis from a selected entity by using the fitting algorithm
and projects the vector on a section. The fitting option is same as the Extract method.
Find Cone Axis Creates a cone axis from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and
projects the axis on a section. The fitting option is same as the Find Cylinder Axis method.
720
Projection Creates a vector by projecting a linear entity onto a section.

To make a vector using the Projection method:
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points - Creates a vector by picking two or more points and projects the vector on
a section.
To make a vector using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & Line Creates a vector by picking a point as the position and a linear entity as the
direction and projects the vector on a section.
To make a vector using the Pick Point & Line method:
1. Select a linear entity for the direction of a vector.
2. Pick a point for the position of the vector.
3. Click OK.
721
Convert Creates a vector as an axis of a selected entity or on a selected entity and projects the
vector on a section.
To make a vector using the Convert method:
1. Select a cylindrical entity such as a face or a region, or a linear entity such as a line or an
edge.
2. Click OK.
Intersect 2 Planes Creates a vector from intersecting two planes and projects the vector on a
section.
To make a vector using the Intersect 2 Planes method:
1. Select two planar entities such as planes, faces, regions.
2. Click OK.
Average Creates a vector by averaging two linear entities and projects the vector on a section.
To make a vector using the Average method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, vectors.
2. Click OK.
722
Tangent Creates a vector that is tangent to a selected entity and projects the vector on a
section.
To make a vector by using the Tangent method:
1. Pick a point on an entity such as a curve, edge, or poly-vertex.
2. Click OK.
Cross 2 Lines Creates a vector from crossing two linear entities and projects the vector on a
section.
To make a vector using the Tangent method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, or vectors.
2. Click OK.
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
723
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Vector
7.5.4.19. Tools > Section Tools > Circle

What
The Ref. Circle command creates a reference circle on a section. A reference circle is a twodimensional entity that has a center and a radius. A ref. circle is used for adding assisting geometry
for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Circle command is useful for:
Inspecting circularity in a scan-only inspection process
Finding a hole
Finding a center or an arc
How to Use
How to extract a circle from a nominal face
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Circle or click the
2. Choose the Pick Plane & Surface and click a plane and a face of a cylinder.
724
3. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created and projected on
a section.
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
725
N Division
Pick Plane & Surface
Definition Creates a ref. circle by using the mathematical definition of a circle and projects the
circle on a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the
Model View.
Center & Radius Creates a circle using Position, and Radius values.
3 Positions Creates a circle by three specified positions.
Extract Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
circle on a section.
726
nominal entities.
direction.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
N Sigma
727
Projection Creates a circle by projecting an existing circular entity onto a section.
To make a circle using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing circular entity such as a ref. circle or edge.
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a circle by picking three or more points and projects the circle on
a section.
To make a circle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
N Division Creates circles by dividing selected cylindrical or conical entities and projects the
circle on a section. Multiple circles will be created evenly and perpendicularly to the selected
entity.
To make a circle using the N Division method:
1. Select a cylindrical or conical entity.
2. Define a division method and a total number.
3. Select two points for a Start Point and End Point.
4. Click OK.
Offset Creates planes by a specified offset distance and a total number on a selected
entity.
728
Uniform
Offset
Pick Plane & Surface Creates a circle on an intersection between a planar entity and an entity
that has a circular section such as a cylinder, cone, sphere, or torus. And projects the circle on a
section.
To make a circle using the Pick Plane & Surface method:
1. Select a circular section entity.
2. Set a plane.
3. Click OK.
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Circle
729
7.5.4.20. Tools > Section Tools > Slot

What
The Ref. Slot command creates a reference slot on a section. A reference slot is a two-dimensional
entity that has two lines and two arcs. A ref. slot is used for adding assisting geometry for
inspection.
Why
The Ref. Slot command is useful for:
Finding a center of a slot
How to Use
How to extract a slot from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Slot or click the
2. Choose the Extract method and select a slot edges.
a section.
730
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
Definition Creates a slot by using the mathematical definition of a slot and projects the slot on
a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model
View.
Coordinate & Size Creates a slot by specifying a Center, Width, and Radius.
2 Centers & Radius Creates a slot by specifying a Center1, Center2, and Radius.
731
Extract Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the slot
on a section.
direction.
Best Fit

Separation
will be used.
732
N Sigma
Projection Creates a slot by projecting an existing slot entity on a section.
To make a slot using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing slot entity such as a ref. slot or edge.
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a slot by picking six or more points and projects the slot on a
section.
To make a slot using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
[Stage 2]
733
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Slot
7.5.4.21. Tools > Section Tools > Rectangle

What
The Ref. Rectangle command creates a reference slot on a section. A reference rectangle is a twodimensional entity that has four lines and four right angles. A ref. rectangle is used for adding
assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Rectangle command is useful for:
Finding a center of a rectangle
Extracting a rectangular entity
How to Use
How to extract a rectangle from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Rectangle or
2. Choose the Extract method and select rectangle edges.
734
a section.
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
735
Definition Creates a rectangle by using the mathematical definition of a rectangle and

projects the rectangle on a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by
a point in the Model View.
Coordinate & Size Creates a rectangle by specifying a Center, Width, Height, and
Corner Radius.
3 Positions Creates a rectangle by specifying three positions. Position1 and Position2

define an edge of a rectangle and Position3 defines the height of the rectangle.
Extract Extracts a rectangle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
slot on a section.
direction.
736
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
N Sigma
Projection Creates a rectangle by projecting an existing rectangular entity onto a section.

To make a rectangle using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing rectangular entity such as a ref. rectangle or edge.
2. Click OK.
737
Pick Multiple Points Creates a rectangle by picking six or more points and projects the
rectangle on a section.
To make a rectangle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Rectangle
7.5.4.22. Tools > Section Tools > Regular Polygon

What
The Ref. Polygon command creates a reference polygon on a section. A reference polygon is a
738
two-dimensional entity that has several equal lines. A ref. polygon is used for adding assisting
Why
The Ref. Regular Polygon command is useful for:
Finding a center of a polygon
Extracting a regular polygon entity
How to Use
How to extract a regular polygon from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Regular Polygon
2. Choose the Extract method and select polygon edges.
3. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry is created and projected on a

section.
739
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Methods
Definition
Extract
Projection
Definition Creates a polygon by using the mathematical definition of a polygon and projects
the polygon on a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point
in the Model View.
Coordinate & Size Creates a polygon by specifying a Center, U Axis, No. of Edges, and
Rounded Corner.
2 Segment & Rounded Radius Creates a polygon by specifying Start Segment, End
740
Segment, Number of Edges and Corner Radius. The Start and End Segments define an
edge of a polygon and Normal defines the direction of a polygon.
Extract Extracts a polygon from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
polygon on a section.
direction.
Best Fit

Minimum Separation
will be used.
741
N Sigma
Projection Creates a polygon by projecting an existing polygonal entity onto a section.

To make a polygon using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing polygonal entity such as a ref. polygon or edge.
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points Creates a polygon by picking six or more points and projects the
polygon on a section.
To make a polygon using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
742
[Stage 2]
Stage1.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Ref.Geometry > Regular Polygon
7.5.5. Tools > Curve Tools

The Curve Tools menu features various command such as Spline, Section, and Offset that are
used to draw and edit curved entities.
The Curve Tools menu provides 5 sets of sketch edit tools used to:
Create Curve Entities
Spline
Creates curves on nominal data, scan data or in free 3D space.
Section
Creates section curves on nominal data and scan data.
Intersection
Creates intersection splines between bodies.
743
Create Curve Entities Using Other Objects
Surface UV Curves
Creates curves on a face along its U and V directions.
Boundary
Extracts curves from the boundary of a mesh.
Fit From Points

Creates curves from points or region boundaries by fitting to them.
Modify Curve Entities
Offset
Offsets existing curves or lines.
Project
Projects curves or nodes onto a selected entity.
Mirror
Creates a mirrored copy of a 3D curve.
Convert Entities
Converts other entities into curve entities.
Edit Curve Entities
Smooth
Smoothes curves.
Trim
Trims curves.
Extend
Extends curves.
Split
Splits a curve into multiple parts.
Match
Matches tangencies and curvatures between a curve and another entity.
Merge
Merges separated curves to form a single curve.
Adding Patterned Curve Entities
Insert Node
Creates a node on a curve or line.
Remove Node
Removes a node from a curve or line.
Remove Constraint
Removes existing constraints on curves and nodes.
744
7.5.5.1.
Tools > Curve Tools > Spline
What
The Spline command is used to create a curve on nominal data, scan data or in free 3D space.
Example of Splines on scan data
Example of a spline in 3D space
Why
The Spline command is useful for:
Creating a curve network for a boundary fitted surface
Creating a path for a swept or lofted body
Creating an original user-designed shape from scratch instead of copying the shape of an
existing object
Working with highly curved 3D features such as a corkscrew feature
Working with freeform shapes that require more manual control than an automated tool can
provide
Splitting a section made out of lines and splines to create new enclosed sections
How to Use
A. How to create a Spline and alter it in Curve mode
1.
Click the Curve button to enter the Curve mode.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Spline, or click the icon in Curve mode.
3.
Select a point on a mesh to place a spline. Create extra nodes to further define the shape
by adding a node with a left mouse click.
745
4.
To finish a spline you can either right-click, double left-click, or press the Enter button on
the keyboard. Click OK when the spline has been completed.
5.
When the mouse cursor is hovered over a node the selection area will be shown in a red
circle. Hold down the Alt key on the keyboard and move the mouse from left to right to
change the size of the selection area.
6.
If further altering of the spline is desired, select a node by left-clicking on it and dragging
it to a desired located then release the mouse button.
7.
When more or less interpolation points are desired for the spline use the Rebuild
command found in the toolbar. In this example the number of interpolation points has
been set to 30.
746
B. How to create a Spline in Curve mode

1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Spline, or click icon in the Curve mode.
3.
Select a base plane. For this example use the Top base plane.
4.
Left-click to begin drawing a spline. The first click will create the first node of the spline.
5.
Without clicking anywhere else in the model view, click the Base Plane option again
and select a perpendicular base plane, in this case, the Front base plane.
6.
Click again to place another node of the spline on the perpendicular plane. Doing this
747
allows the spline to first be aligned to the Top plane and then aligned to the Front plane
mid-spline.
7.
Finish the spline by switching back to the Top base plane and double-left click, right
click, or press the Enter key on the keyboard to finish the spline. The spline will curve
based on where the nodes were placed. Click OK to finish the command.
Note: When a spline is drawn on a scan data in Curve mode the snap function will
automatically be enabled. If snapping to mesh is not desired, use the Alt key while
creating the spline.
Options in Detail
Base Plane Select base planes.
Join At Intersection Points Automatically creates intersection points between intersecting
curves. The Tolerance range can be set to determine if curves intersect or not.
Enable Option
Disable Option
748
Tolerance Sets the tolerance range.

Snap On Assistance Vector Automatically creates intersection points between intersecting
curves. The Tolerance range can be set to determine if curves intersect or not.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Curve Tools > Section
Tools > Curve Tools > Intersection
Tools > Curve Tools > Surface UV Curves
Tools > Curve Tools > Boundary
Tools > Curve Tools > Fit From Points
7.5.5.2.
What
The Section command is used to create section curves on nominal data and scan data.
Why
Creating a curve network for a boundary fitted surface
Making a profile of a model to simplify in making a lofted body
How to Use
749
How to create a model profile in Curve mode

1.
Enter Curve mode and go to Tools > Curve Tools > Section or click on the icon in the
toolbar.
2.
Click on the mesh to select the entire model as the Target Entity. This will select all
entities available. Click the Next Stage button to proceed.
3.
Go to the N-Division Between Planes method and select the Right plane as the
reference plane for the Base Plane input box. Set the No. Of Sections option to 7 and
click OK.
.
4.
The model will be sectioned into seven sections of equal length.
5.
Exit the Curve mode and hide the mesh to see the created sections.
Options in Detail
750
Methods
The following methods are available:
Draw Line On Screen

Creates sections from a line.
Select Plane
Creates sections from an intersecting plane.
N-Division Between Planes

Creates sections based on a chosen base plane.
N-Division Along Curve

Creates sections based on a chosen curve.
Radial
Creates sections based radial segments.
Cylindrical
Creates sections based on cylindrical segments.
Conical
Creates sections based on conical segments.
Draw Line On Screen Creates sectional curves by drawing lines on the screen.
Cutting Line
Resulting Section Spline
Note: The Shift key can be used to draw horizontal or vertical lines. Multiple cutting
lines can be created at one time by using the Draw Line On Screen method. The
Undo command or Ctrl + Z keyboard shortcut will delete the last created cutting line.
Select Plane Creates sectional curves by selecting Base Planes.
N-Division Between Planes Creates a specified number of sections based on chosen base
planes.
751
N-Division
Resulting Section Spline
Distance Between Sections Sets the distance between sections.

Equal Spacing Creates an equal amount of space between all sections.
No. of Sections Sets the total number of sections to be created which includes
the two base planes selected for the option.
Show Section Base Geometry Shows the base geometry of the section.
N-Division Along Curve Creates the specified number of sections with respect to the curve.
Uniform Creates multiple sections by either a total number of sections or by equal
distances.
No. of Sections Uses a set number of sections as the criteria.
Equal Spacing Uses equal spacing as the criteria.
Curvature Creates more sections in areas of higher curvature.
No. of Sections Uses a set number of sections as the criteria.
Pick Points Creates sections manually by picking points on a curve. To cancel the last
picked point the Undo keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Z can be used.
Radial Creates virtual radial sections and generates section curves from them.
Axis Chooses an axis.
Base Plane Chooses a base plane.
Flip Start Plane Flips the starting plane the opposite direction.
No. of Sections Sets the number of sections.
Interval Angle Sets the interval angle value between sections.
752
Equal Spacing Sets equal spacing between sections.

Show Section Base Geometry Shows the base geometry of a section.
Cylindrical Creates cylindrical sections and generates section curves.
No. of Sections Sets a number of sections.
Total Angle Sets a total angle value.
Radius Interval Sets the distance between sections.
Base Radius Sets the base radius of a starting section.
Height Sets the height of a cylindrical area.
Section Inside Sets the creation direction from the base radius.
Conical Creates conical sections and generates section curves from them.
Base Position Specifies X, Y, or Z as a base position.
No. of Sections Sets the number of sections.
Total Angle Sets a total angle value.
Radius Interval Sets a radius interval.
753
Bottom Radius Sets a value for a bottom radius.

Top Radius Sets a value for a top radius.
Apex Angle Sets a value for a slope.
Height Sets a value for height.
Section Inside Sets the value for a creation direction.
Show Section Base Geometry Shows section cylinders.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.5.3.
What
The Intersection command is used to create intersection splines between bodies. It can only be
used in Curve mode.
Why
754
The Intersection command is useful for:
Finding the boundaries where two entities meet
How to Use
How to find an intersection for two entities
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Intersection, or click on the icon in Curve mode.
3.
Select target Tool Bodies and Target Bodies. The Tool Bodies will be the bodies that
are used as the base bodies and the Target Bodies will be the bodies that the
intersections using the Tool Bodies are found on.
4.
Click OK to complete the command. The intersection between the bodies will be
created.
Options in Detail
Tool Bodies Selects tool bodies.
Target Bodies Selects target bodies.
Reference
755
Related Commands
7.5.5.4.
What
The Surface UV Curves command is used to create 3D curves on a face along its U and V
directions.
Why
The Surface UV Curves command is useful for:
Creating 3D curve networks on curved faces that are relatively uniform and follow the U and V
directions
How to Use
How to find set a UV Curves
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Surface UV Curve or click on the icon in the Curve mode.
756
3.
Select a position on a face.
4.
Options in Detail
Parameter Direction Chooses the U, V, or both the U and V directions for creating curves.
Make Curve Editable Created curves will have node points that are editable.
Make Node At UV Curves Intersection Creates intersection nodes at the intersection

point of the U and V curves.
Reference
Related Commands
757

7.5.5.5.
What
The Boundary command is used to extract curves from the boundary of a mesh.
Why
The Boundary command is useful for:
Finding the boundary of a model that is irregularly shaped
How to Use
How to find boundary for an entity
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Boundary, or click on the icon in Curve mode.
758
3.
Select the Curves From Boundaries option and choose an outside boundary on the
model for the Boundaries input box.
4.
Click OK to extract the selected boundary as a spline. If only a part of the boundary is
desired to be extracted then the Interactively Split Curve Segments From a Single
Boundary option can be used to manually pick the starting and ending points of the
boundary.
Boundary as a spline
Split curve segment from a boundary
Options in Detail
Curves From Boundaries Creates 3D spline curves on selected mesh boundaries.
Interactively Split Curve Segments From a Single Boundary Creates a partial boundary
curve by picking a starting and ending point on a boundary.
Boundaries Selects boundaries on a mesh.
Smoothness Defines the smoothness of a boundary curve by using a value between a Min
and Max limits.
Min. Smoothness
Max. Smoothness
Offset Creates an offset curve from a boundary.
759
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.5.6.
What
The Fit From Points command is used to create 3D curves from points or region boundaries by
fitting to them.
Why
The Fit From Points command is useful for:
Generating analytic curves such as circles, slots and rectangles from point data
Generating freeform curves from point data
Generation of curves on region boundaries and character lines of a model

760
How to Use
How to extract feature shapes using the Fit From Points command
1.
Go to File > Import Scan Data to import a scan file.
2.
3.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Fit From Points.
4.
Set the Fitting Shape to Circle and the Fitting Type to Hole.
5.
Click the Circle Selection Mode button on the bottom-left corner of the application
window to select a target.
6.
Select a circle on the scan data.
7.
Click OK to complete the command. Curves will be extracted from the circle.
Options in Detail
Target Selects poly-vertices or region boundaries for fitting curves.
Fitting curve from points

761
Fitting curve from region boundaries
Split Target Splits a fitting curve by picking the starting and ending points of a splitting
position on a preview curve.
Fitting Options
Fitting Shape Generates a fitting curves from several shapes: Auto, Circle, Slot, Rectangle
Polygon, Line and Freeform.
Fitting Shape Chooses the type of shape for a fitting curve.
Auto
Circle
762
Slot
Rectangle
Polygon
Line
Freeform
Allowable Tolerance Fits a curve to a shape within a given value. The Auto Estimate button
computes the value automatically.
More Options
Fitting Type Chooses a fitting type to create geometric curve shape from points or
edges.
Best Fit Finds best-fitted geometric curve using the least squares fitting method
from points or edges.
Min. Bound Finds maximum inscribed geometric curve using the minimum
763
separation fitting method from points or edges.

Max. Bound Finds minimum circumscribed geometric curve using the minimum
separation fitting method from points or edges.
Best Fit
Min. / Max. Bound

from Minimum Separation
Remove Outlier Removes outlier data from the fitting type using the N*Sigma, Ratio (%), or
Absolute Distance algorithms.
Use Only Effective Data Uses only effective data when fitting. Effective data is the actual data
points used in fitting after sampling and outlier removal.
Rounded Corner Rounds corners of rectangular shapes.
No. Of Edges Sets the number of edges created.
Smoothness Controls the smoothness of extracted curves.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.5.7.
Tools > Curve Tools > Offset
764
What
The Offset command is used to offset existing curves or lines.
Why
Offsetting a line or a curve to create lines or curves with the same properties and shape.
How to Use
How to offset a curve on a mesh
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Offset, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select a curve to offset.
4.
Specify the distance desired for the offset curve. Direction1 creates a curve in a direction
from the existing curve. Direction2 creates a curve in the other direction. Both
Directions creates both curves.
Offset curve in Direction1
Offset curve in Both Directions
Options in Detail
765
Base Entity Selects base entities.

Curves Selects curves to offset.
Distance Sets the distance of the offset.
Direction1 Creates a curve in a first direction from the original curve.
Direction2 Creates a curve in a second direction from the original curve.
Both Directions Creates two curves in both directions from the original curve.
More Options
Remove Original Curves Removes the original curve after the offset is completed.
Offset Curve Deviation Connects curves within a given deviation value.
Tolerance: 0.01
Tolerance: 0.1
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Curve Tools > Project
Tools > Curve Tools > Mirror
Tools > Curve Tools > Convert Entities
Tools > Curve Tools > Smooth
Tools > Curve Tools > Trim
Tools > Curve Tools > Extend
Tools > Curve Tools > Split
Tools > Curve Tools > Match
Tools > Curve Tools > Merge
7.5.5.8.

766
What
The Project command is used to project curves or nodes onto a selected entity.
Why
The Project command is useful for:
Creating a copy of a line onto an entity
How to Use
How to project a curve onto a surface
1.
Click Curve button to enter Curve mode.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Project or click the icon in the toolbar. This command can
only be used in Curve mode.
3.
Select a target curve and a body as the target entity.
4.
Change the Projection Method option to Along Vector and select a reference plane.
767
5.
Options in Detail
Curves / Nodes Selects curves or nodes to project.
Target Entity Selects target entity to project the target curve onto.
Project Duplicated Curve Retains an original curve.
Projection Method
Min. Distance Projects a curve to a minimum distance.
Along Vector Projects a curve in a selected direction. A ref. plane, vector, curve or edge can be
used.
Allowable Deviation Sets a deviation value between a projected curve and a target entity.
768
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.5.9.
What
The Mirror command is used to mirror 3D curves.
Why
The Mirror command is useful for:
Creating a mirrored copy of a 3D curve

Note: A curve mirrored in Curve mode will be projected onto the mesh.
769
How to Use
How to mirror a curve
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Mirror, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select a Symmetry Plane and Curves as the entities that will be mirrored.
4.
Options in Detail
Symmetry Plane Selects a ref. plane or planar face as a Symmetry Plane.
Curves Select curves to mirror.
Remove Original Curves Removes original curves after mirroring.
Reference
Related Commands
770

7.5.5.10. Tools > Curve Tools > Convert Entities

What
The Convert Entities command is used to convert entities such as edges and polylines into 3D
curves.
Why
The Convert Entities command is useful for:
Creating a 3D curve out of a 2D entity
How to Use
How to convert an entity
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Convert Entities, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select edges to convert.

771
4.
Click OK to complete the command. A 3D curve will be generated.
Options in Detail
Entities Selects entities to convert. Entities can be polylines and curves on edges.
Note: A spline that is black contains constraints. To remove constraints use the Remove
Constraints command.
Note: The Smooth command regenerates intersection points between curves. The
parameters for intersection points can be set in the Join tool palette.
Reference
Related Commands
772

7.5.5.11. Tools > Curve Tools > Smooth

What
The Smooth command is used to smooth curves.
Why
The Smooth command is useful for:
Smoothing irregular curves
Smoothing a portion of a curve
Saving time over smoothing curves manually
How to Use
How to smooth a curve
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Smooth or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select a curve and adjust the Smoothness setting. Click OK to complete the command.
Before Smoothing
After Smoothing
773
Options in Detail
Methods
All Range Applies smoothing to a selected curve.
Partial Range Determines the strength of the smoothing procedure.
Sub Options
Curves Selects curves to smooth.
Smoothness Sets a level of smoothness from Min. to Max.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.5.12. Tools > Curve Tools > Trim

What
The Trim command is used to trim curves.
774
Why
The Trim command is useful for:
Trimming away unwanted sections of a curve
Combining curves
How to Use
How to trim curves
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Trim, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select curves. Click OK to complete the command.
Options in Detail
Methods
Pick Curve Portion To Trim Trims selected curves.
775
Trim Short Portion Of Curves Trims the short portions from selected curves.
Curves Selects curves to trim.

Portion Rate Sets the ratio of short curves compared to an original curve length.
Intersection Tolerance Determines whether curves intersect or not by setting the tolerance
for gaps between curves.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.5.13. Tools > Curve Tools > Extend
776
What
The Extend command is used to extend 3D curves and lines.
Why
The Extend tool is useful for:
Extending a 3D curve or line

Note: Extending a curve in Curve mode will follow mesh data. To extend a curve in a
tangential direction without following the mesh, copy the curve in the Curve mode into the
Curve mode and then apply the Extend command.
How to Use
How to extend a curve
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Extend or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select a curve to extend and click-drag the arrow on the screen. To extend a curve in
both directions click on the curve itself, or to extend in only one direction click on the
end of the curve in the desired direction.
777
4.
Options in Detail
Curves Selects curves to extend.
Options
Shape Selects the shape of an extension.
Tangent Extends a curve in a tangential direction from a starting position.
Curvature Extends a curve in a curvature direction from a starting position.
Reflective Extends a curve as a reflection of the original shape.
Distance Sets a distance to extend.
Reference
Related Commands
778
7.5.5.14. Tools > Curve Tools > Split

What
The Split command is used to divide a curve.
Why
The Split command useful for:
Dividing a curve by creating a node if one does not exist
How to Use
How to use the Split command to create nodes on a curve
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Split or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Pick points on the curve to split and click OK. The curve will now have nodes where the
split command was used.
779
Note: The Split command can move the seam position of a closed curve. A split
position on a closed curved will become the new seam point.
Original Seam Point
Changed Seam Point
Options in Detail
Pick Point Splits a curve at a picked point.
Curves At Intersection Points Splits a curve at an intersecting point.
Plane Or Face Intersection Points Splits a curve on intersecting positions with other planes
or faces.
Curves Selects curves to split.
Intersection Tolerance Sets the tolerance for splitting curves at an intersection point.
Tool Entity Selects tool entities.
Reference
Related Commands
780
7.5.5.15. Tools > Curve Tools > Match

What
The Match command is used to match tangencies and curvatures between a curve and another
entity.
Why
The Match command is useful for:
Creating areas that a scanner might not be able to get data for
How to Use
How to extract a curve from two solid faces
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Match or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select a Curve to match and a body edge as the Target Entity.
4.
Click OK to match the selected curves.
781
5.
Apply the matching process in steps 2-4 again on the other side of the model to
complete the match.
Options in Detail
Curve Selects a curve to match.
Target Entity Selects an entity to use as a matching reference. The target entity can be a ref.
vector, ref. plane, curve, edge, or face.
Curve to Ref. Vector
Curve to Ref. Plane
Curve to Curve
Curve to Edge
Curve to Face
Tangent Makes a tangency (G1) connection to the target entity.

782
Curvature Makes a curvature (C2) connection to the target entity.

Orthogonal Makes an orthogonal connection to the target entity. Only reference planes and
faces can be used for this method.
Average Modifies a target curve to create a smooth connection.
Disable Average
Enable Average
Note: A matched constraint will be shown with blue arrows. To remove constraints, click the
Remove Constraint button
on the toolbar and select the constraints in the list box.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.5.16. Tools > Curve Tools > Merge

What
The Merge command is used to merge separate curves to form a single curve.
783
Why
The Merge command is useful for:
Merging separate lines into one line
How to Use
How to merge curves
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Select curves to merge.
4.
Click OK to complete the command and merge the selected curves.
784
Options in Detail
Methods
2 Curve Ends Connects the ends of two curves.
Average Multiple Curves Combines neighboring curves to generate a single averaged curve.
More Options
Curves Selects curves to merge.
Fix Shape Preserves the original shape of curves. This option can be used to preserve a sharp
edge after merging and is available only in Curve mode.
Original Curves
Disable Option
Enable Option
Smoothness Sets the smoothness when averaging multiple curves.

Merge Range Merges the values between curves.
Reference
Related Commands
785
7.5.5.17. Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node

What
The Insert Node command is used to insert a node onto a curve or line.
Why
The Insert Node command is useful for:
Creating a break in a line
Creating a node to connect another line to
How to Use
How to insert a node
1.
Click the Curve button to enter Curve mode.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node or click on the icon in the toolbar.
3.
Click on a curve to insert nodes. Click OK to finish the command.
Note: A node can be added onto a line or curve by dragging an existing node while
holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard.
786
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node
7.5.5.18. Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node

What
The Remove Node command is used to remove a node from a curve or line.
Why
The Remove Node command is useful for:
Removing nodes in a line
How to use
How to remove a node
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node or click on the icon in the toolbar.
787
3.
Select nodes to remove.
Before Node Removal
After Node Removal
Note: A node can be removed by pressing the Delete key on the keyboard.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node
7.5.5.19. Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Constraint

What
The Remove Constraint command is used to remove existing constraints on curves and nodes.
Why
The Remove Constraint command is useful for:
Removing constraints on curves and nodes
How to Use
How to remove constraints on a curve
1.
2.
Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Constraint or click the icon in the toolbar.
788
3.
Select a curve and all constraints on the curve will be displayed.
4.
Select constraints to be removed and click OK to complete the command. Constraints

will be removed and the converted curve will be displayed in blue.
Options in Detail
Curve / Nodes Selects curves or nodes to remove constraints.
Constraints To Remove Shows a list of constraints that can be removed by selecting the
constraint in the list box and clicking the Delete button on the keyboard.
Note: Constraints can also be removed by using the Trash Can icon that will appear next to a
constraint when selected.
No. Of Interpolation Points Sets the number of interpolation points and regenerates the curve
when removing constraints from an imported curve.
7.5.6. Tools > GD&T Tools

The GD&T Tools menu features various commands used to inspect GD&T such as Position,
Flatness, and Straightness.
789
The GD&T Tools menu provides three sets of GD&T tools used for:
Creating Datums
Datum
Adds datums to the geometric profile of a model.
Dimensioning
Smart Dimension
Inspects a distance, radius, or an angle of a target entity.
Linear Dimension
Inspects a distance between selected target entities.
Angular Dimension
Inspects an angle between target entities.
Radial Dimension
Inspects the radius of a target entity.
Elliptical Dimension
Inspects the longest and shortest distance of an elliptical feature.
Bore Depth
Inspects the depth of holes or pockets.
Counterbore
Inspects the diameter of holes and pockets.
Countersink
Inspects the maximum diameter and the apex angle of conical pockets.
Thickness
Inspects the thickness of a cylindrical tube or planar slab.
Geometric Tolerancing
Position
Verifies the position of a feature.
Flatness
Verifies the flatness of a planar entity.
Straightness
Verifies the straightness of an entity that is a cylindrical, conical, or planar geometric shape.
Circularity
Verifies the circularity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical geometric shape or a circular
hole.
Cylindricity
Verifies the cylindricity of an entity that is a cylindrical geometric shape.
790
Concentricity
Verifies the concentricity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical geometric shape.
Parallelism
Verifies the parallelism of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
Perpendicularity
Verifies the perpendicularity of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
Angularity
Verifies the angularity of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
Runout
Verifies the runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
Total Runout
Verifies the total runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
Line Profile
Verifies the line profiles of entities.
Surface Profile
Verifies the surface profiles of entities.
Symmetry
Verifies the symmetry of entities that face each other.
7.5.6.1.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Datum
What
The Datum command adds datums on the geometric profiles of a model. The Datum is a
theoretical exact axis, or plane derived from the true scan pair geometry of a specified datum
feature. They are the origin from which a location or geometric characteristics of features of a part
are established. It is usually used for generating GD&T features.
The name of a datum is automatically assigned in alphabetical order from A to Z. Letters can be
unrestrictedly combined to form characters such as AA or ZZZ. The creation and the use of datum
can be shared between the 3D GD&T features.
791
Why
The Datum command is useful for:
Defining geometric features as standard features for inspection
Inspecting features with constraints on six degrees of freedom
How to Use
How to add datums onto geometric features
1. Go to Insert > 3D GD&T or click the icon in the toolbar in the 3D GD&T mode.
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Datum or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Define datum A by selecting a body face then placing the resulting annotation in the
Model View.
Options in Detail
792
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to set datums features.
Note: A Ref.Vector, Ref.Circle, Ref.Plane, Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone, Boundary, Edge, Section
Edge, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can be a target entity; and
applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where datums can be applied:
Target Entity
Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Face of Body
OK
OK
OK
Feature Region
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
(Vector)
Boundary Edge of Body

Boundary Edge of
Feature Region
OK
OK
OK
OK
Edge of Body
Ref. Geometry
Circle
OK
OK
OK
More Options
Rotate Annotation Plane Click the Rotate Annotation Plane button
annotation plane.
to rotate an
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.2.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Smart Dimension

793
What
The Smart Dimension command inspects a distance, radius, or an angle of target entities. The
type of dimension is automatically determined by the combination of selected target entities.
Aligned Nominal and Scan
Measured Dimensions of Features
Why
The Smart Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring a distance, radius, or an angle of target entities with a single command
How to Use
How to measure a distance, radius, or angle using Smart Dimension
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Smart Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Measure a distance by selecting two parallel faces then place the resulting annotation
onto the Model View.
794
4. Measure a radius of a hole by selecting a cylindrical face then place the resulting
annotation onto the Model View.
5. Measure an angle by selecting two angular faces then place the resulting annotation onto
the Model View.
Options in Detail
Dimension Type
Type Displays the type of dimension as Linear, Radial, or Angular.
Note: A display type is intelligently determined based on a selected entity. For example, if two
parallel faces are selected as target entities, the type will automatically become Linear. If an
arc edge is selected as a target entity, the type will automatically become Radial. For more
information, see Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension, Angular Dimension, or Radial
Dimension.
795
Target Entities
Type Selects target entities to set smart dimensions features.
Note: A Ref.Point, Ref.Vector, Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot, Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Polygon, Ref.Plane,
Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone, Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus, Vertex, Boundary, Edge, Section Vertex,
Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite
Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the
geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where smart dimension can be applied:
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
OK
Rectangle
OK
OK
Slot
Circle
Edge of Body
Torus
Line (Vector)
Boundary
Sphere
OK
Region
Cone
OK
Feature
Cylinder
OK
Face of Body
Plane
Target Entity
Point (Vertex)
OK
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
796

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.

The As Nominal option follows the definition of the Fitting Option of a faces property.
When selecting an entity for measuring GD&T, As Nominals sub-option uses a fitting
method predefined in the target entitys properties for finding scan pair geometry.
797
features.
In Space
In Material
Alignment Aligns a measuring direction and is only available for Linear dimensions.
Without Alignment
X Alignment
Y Alignment
(Shortest Distance)
option is displayed when the dimension type is Linear and target entities are circular section
edges.
798
Center - Center
Min - Min
Max - Max
Note: Even if entities to be measured are not located on the same plane, the Arc Condition
parameter can still be applied. To apply Arc Condition to the entities that are not located on
the same plane, the Alignment option must be applied in advance.
Pattern Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This
799
More Options
Rotate Annotation Plane Click the button
to rotate an annotation plane.
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension
Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension
Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension
7.5.6.3.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension
What
The Linear Dimension command inspects a distance between selected target entities.
Measured Distance of Features
Why
The Linear Dimension command is useful for:
800
Measuring a distance between target entities
How to Use
How to measure distance between target entities
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select two cylindrical faces then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
4. Measure a distance between holes by selecting cylindrical faces and click the OK button.
Note: After measuring a dimension, if the axis/normal direction of the scan pair
geometries is out of a given range while the Check Pair's Axis/Normal option is
applied in the Properties of the Nominal Data, a notice message will be displayed in
the Error List that says The max angle deviation condition is not satisfied. Check
entities whose scan points are red in color.
801
Scan pair points are highlighted in red when the mouse cursor hovers over a resulting
annotation.
Note: After measuring a dimension check scan pair points that are used for finding
scan pair geometries by selecting a resulting annotation and switching the Scan Points
option from False to True in the Appearance section within its Properties.

The following cases explain how linear dimensions are measured according to target entity type.
Point/Point Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:
Point Geometry Type Vertex, Circle, Sphere, Torus, Ref. Point, Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot,
Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Regular Polygon, Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus
Linear dimension measures the direct distance between selected entities and defines the
distance as a nominal value. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the
802
deviation between a nominal value and the actual value, which is the direct distance
between scan pair geometries extracted from a target 3D scan data according to the Actual
Mating Envelop Rule.
Point/Line Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:
Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Regular Polygon, Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus
Line (Vector) Geometry Type Line, Cylinder, Cone, Ref.Vector, Ref.Cylinder,

Ref.Cone
Point/Plane Distance The geometry type of target entities can be;
Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Regular Polygon Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus
Plane Geometry Type Plane, Ref.Plane
Line/Line Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:

Ref.Cone
defined by an average distance calculated between two perpendicular distances from the
start and end points of the secondly selected entity to the firstly selected entity. When scan
pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and
the actual value, which is an average perpendicular distance between scan pair geometries
Line/Plane Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:

Ref.Cone

803
A linear dimension between Line and Plane is differently measured depending on which
geometry type of entity is firstly selected:
When selecting linear entity first
The firstly selected linear entity is used as the standard for dimensioning. The nominal value
is defined by a projected distance from the center point of the secondly selected planar
entity perpendicular to the linear entity. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension
inspects the deviation between the nominal value and the actual value, which is a
perpendicularly projected distance between scan pair geometries extracted from target 3D
scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
When selecting planar entity first

The firstly selected planar entity is used as the standard for dimensioning. The nominal value
is defined by an average distance calculated between two perpendicular distances from the
start and end points of the second selected linear entity to the first selected entity. When
scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal
value and the actual value, which is an average perpendicular distance between scan pair
geometries extracted from target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop
Rule.
Plane/Plane Distance The geometry type of target entities can be:
defined by a projected distance from the center point of the secondly selected entity
perpendicular to the first entity. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects
the deviation between the nominal value and the actual value, which is a perpendicularly
projected distance between scan pair geometries extracted from target 3D scan data

In Space
804
In Material
Options in Detail
Methods
Individual Individually measures linear dimensions by selecting target entities one by one.
Continue Continually measures a linear dimension from a previous target entity to another
target entity. The first target is automatically set from the last target in the previous
dimensioning.
Baseline Measures a linear dimension from a target baseline entity to other entities.
805
Target Select target entities to measure a distance.

Note: A Ref.Point, Ref.Vector, Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot, Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Polygon, Ref.Plane,
Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone, Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus, Vertex, Boundary, Edge, Section Vertex,
Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite
The following table shows where linear dimensioning can be applied:
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
OK
Rectangle
OK
OK
Slot
Circle
Edge of Body
Torus
Line (Vector)
Boundary
Sphere
OK
Region
Cone
OK
Feature
Cylinder
OK
Face of Body
Plane
Target Entity
Point (Vertex)
OK
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Note: To change a selection order, click the Change Order Of Targets button
806
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
target entities, click the Estimate button. After calculation, the button will be disabled.

) that can manually
manually set a nominal value by measuring the distance between features, click the
Measure Distance button
, then pick a point on a feature profile. To manually set a
nominal value by measuring the radius of a feature, click the Measure Radius button
, then pick a point on a feature profile. To manually set a nominal value by
measuring the angle between features, click the Measure Angle button
a point on a feature profile.
, then pick

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
The As Nominal option follows the definition of a Fitting Option of a faces property.
807
features.
In Space
In Material
Alignment Aligns a measuring direction.
Without Alignment
X Alignment
Y Alignment
(Shortest Distance)
option is displayed when target entities are circular section edges.
808
Center - Center
Min - Min
Max - Max
Note: Even if entities to be measured are not located on the same plane, the Arc Condition
parameter can still be applied. To apply Arc Condition to the entities that are not located on
the same plane, the Alignment option must be applied in advance.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
809
7.5.6.4.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension
What
The Angular Dimension command inspects an angle between target entities.
Measuring Distance of Features
Why
The Angular Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring an angle between target entities
How to Use
How to measure angles between target entities
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select two planar faces and click the OK button.
810
Note: The angle consist two sides of complementary angle in the 180 degree
standard. When the result is calculated, one of the complementary angles is chosen for
measurement according to the position of mouse.
annotation.
811
option from False to True in the Appearance section within its Properties.

The following cases explain how angular dimensions are measured according to target entity type.
Line/Plane Angle The geometry type of target entities can be;

Ref.Cone
An angle between a line and a plane is calculated with a line and a vector which is internally
projected onto a plane and defined as a nominal value. When scan pair points exist, the
angular dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and the actual value
which is the angle between scan pair geometries extracted from target 3D scan data
Line/Line, Plane/Plane Angle The geometry type of target entities can be;

Ref.Cone
When measuring an angle between lines, the angle is calculated after a second selected line
that is parallel is moved to a first selected Line so that target entities can be intersected.
When measuring the angle between planes, the angle is calculated with the normal vectors
of two planes as a nominal value. If scan pair points exist, the angular dimension inspects the
deviation between the nominal value and the actual value which is the angle between the
scan pair geometries extracted from the target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating
Envelop Rule.

812

In Space
In Material
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to set smart dimensions features.
Note: A Ref.Vector, Ref.Plane, Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone, Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus, Boundary,
Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite
The following table shows where angular dimensioning can be applied:
813
Region
Boundary
Edge of Body
OK
OK
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Feature
Cylinder
Face of Body
Plane
Target Entity
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point
More Options
814
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.5.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension
What
The Radial Dimension command inspects the radius of a target entity.
Measuring Distance of Features
Why
The Radial Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring the radius of a target entity
How to Use
How to measure the radius of a target entity
815
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a cylindrical face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
4. Measure radius of holes by selecting cylindrical faces and click the OK button.
816
annotation.
option from False to True in the Appearance section within its Properties

Circle Geometry Type Circle, Cylinder, Sphere, Ref.Circle, Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Sphere
A radial dimension measures the radius of selected entities and defines it as a nominal value.
When scan pair points exist, the radial dimension inspects the deviation between the
nominal value and the actual value which is the radius of the scan pair geometries extracted
from target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.

817
In Space
In Material
Options in Details
818
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to set smart dimensions features.
Note: A Ref.Vector, Ref.Plane, Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone, Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus, Boundary,
Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite
The following table shows where radial dimensioning can be applied:
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of Body
OK
OK
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
Rectangle
Feature Region
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
Cone
OK
Torus
Cylinder
Face of Body
Target Entity
Sphere
Plane
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Feature Region
Edge of Body
Ref. Geometry
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
) that can manually

819
Distance button

, then pick a point

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
820
features.
In Space
In Material
Pattern - Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This
More Options
821
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.6.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension
What
The Elliptical Dimension command inspects the longest and shortest distance of an elliptical
feature.
Measuring Elliptical Dimensions of Features
Why
The Elliptical Dimension command is useful for:
Measuring the longest and shortest distance of an elliptical feature
How to Use
How to measure the size of an elliptical feature
822
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select an edge on an elliptical feature with the Radius and Major Axis options enabled.
Options in Details
Target Entities
Target Selects target entities to measure an elliptical dimension.
Note: A Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or
Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined
according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where elliptical dimensioning can be applied:
Target Entity

823
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
Circle
Line (Vector)
Torus
Sphere
Cone
Cylinder
Plane
Point (Vertex)
Face of Body
Feature
Region
Boundary
OK
Edge of Body
Boundary
Edge of
OK
Feature
Region
Edge of Body
OK
Ref.
Geometry
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point
824

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.

825
features.
In Space
In Material
Radius Measures half of the distance of an elliptical feature

Major / Minor Axis Measures the longest or shortest distance of an elliptical feature.
Fitting Options
Fitting Type Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from nominal data. It will be used
as a fitting method for finding scan pair geometry using the As Nominal option.
points.
826

Best Fit

Minimum Separation
The Ratio method, requires a ratio value and only data that falls into the selected value will be
used.
N Sigma
827
Constraint Options
Project On Plane Projects a circle onto a selected plane. Select either the Specific Plane or Fit
Plane From Scan Pair methods. The Specify Plane method projects scan pair geometry onto a
specified plane. The Fit Plane From Scan Pair method projects scan pair geometry onto a plane
fitted from scan pair points.
Specify Plane
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.7.
Tools > GD&T Tools > Bore Depth
What
828
The Bore Depth command inspects the depth of a cylindrical flat-bottomed holes or pockets and
is available for Solid or Surface faces only.
Symbol:
Measured Bore Depth of Features
Why
The Bore Depth command is useful for:
Measuring the depth of holes or pockets
How to Use
How to measure the depth of holes or pockets
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Bore Depth or click the icon in the toolbar.
829
Options in Details
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a bore depth.
Note: A Face, Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can be a target
target entity.
The following table shows where bore depth can be applied:
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Feature
Cylinder
Face of Body
Plane
Target Entity
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of Body
Ref. Geometry
830
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
831

The As Nominal option follows the definition of a Fitting Option of a faces property. When
selecting an entity for measuring GD&T, As Nominals sub-option uses a fitting method
predefined in a target entitys properties for finding scan pair geometry.
Direction Defines a measuring direction.
Note: If cylindrical face is set as the target entity, its axis is automatically determined as the
measuring direction according to the normal direction of scan pair geometry extracted from
the top face. To manually set the measuring direction, click the Direction button and then
select an entity which has an axis or normal property such as Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot,
Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Polygon, Ref.Plane, Ref.Torus, or Planar Face.
More Options
832
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > GD&T Tools > Counterbore
Tools > GD&T Tools > Countersink
7.5.6.8.
What
The Counterbore command inspects the diameter of a cylindrical flat-bottomed holes and
pockets and is available for Solid or Surface faces only.
Symbol:
Measured Counterbore of Features
Why
The Counterbore command is useful for:
Measuring the diameter of holes or pockets
833
How to Use
How to measure the diameter of holes or pockets
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Counterbore or click the icon in the toolbar.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a counterbore.
target entity.
The following table shows where counterbore can be applied:
Target
834
Face of
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
Circle
Line (Vector)
Torus
Sphere
Cone
Cylinder
Plane
Point (Vertex)
Entity
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

) that can manually
Distance button
, then pick a point
835

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.

predefined in the target entitys properties for finding scan pair geometry.
836
Note: If cylindrical face is set as the target entity, its axis is automatically determined as the
measuring direction according to the normal direction of scan pair geometry extracted from
the bottom face. To manually set the measuring direction, click the Direction button and
then select an entity which has an axis or normal property such as Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot,
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.9.
What
The Countersink command inspects the maximum diameter and the apex angle of conical
837
pockets and is available for Solid or Surface faces only.

Symbol:
Measured Countersink of Features
Why
The Countersink command is useful for:
Measuring the maximum diameter and apex angle of conical pockets
How to Use
How to measure the maximum diameter and apex angle of conical pockets
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Countersink or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a cylindrical face and specify an Apex Tolerance of 90 then place the resulting
annotation onto the Model View.
838
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a counterbore.
target entity.
The following table shows where countersink can be applied:
Face of
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
Circle
Line (Vector)
Torus
Sphere
Cone
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
839
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.
840


Note: When a cylindrical face is set as a target entity, its axis is automatically determined as
the measuring direction according to the normal direction of scan pair geometry extracted
from the top face. To manually set the measuring direction, click the Direction button then
select an entity that has an axis or a normal property such as a Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot,
Apex Tolerance Specifies a tolerance value of an apex angle.
841
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.10. Tools > GD&T Tools > Thickness

What
The Thickness command inspects the thickness of a cylindrical tube or planar slab. It
automatically finds an opposite face when a face is selected on a model and measures the
thickness between them. The command is available for Solid or Surface faces only.
Symbol:
Measured Thickness of Features
Why
842
The Thickness command is useful for:
Measuring the thickness of cylindrical tubes and planar slabs
How to Use
How to measure the thickness of cylindrical tubes and planar slabs
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Thickness or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a planar face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Options in Detail
843
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure thickness.
target entity.
The following table shows where thickness can be applied:
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
OK
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
844
) that can manually
Distance button

, then pick a point

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.

845
More Options
7.5.6.11. Tools > GD&T Tools > Position

What
The Position command verifies the position of a feature. Position tolerance is a Geometric,
Dimensioning, and Tolerancing (GD&T) location control used to describe the perfect, or exact,
location of a feature in relation to datum references or other features.
Symbol:
Verified Position Tolerance of Features
Why
846
The Position command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature can deviate from its exact true position
Controlling the location of a feature in relation to datum references or other features
How to Use
A. How to verify the location of a feature from its exact true position
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Position or click the icon in the toolbar.
4. Specify a Tolerance value and enable the Material Condition option.

5. Choose either MMC or LMC as the Material Condition type and specify a Dimension
Tolerance.
6. Set Datum A and Datum B.
847
B. How to control the location of a feature from its exact true position
Note: This example assumes that a reference feature with size defined by a radial
dimension exists in the model and a datum has been defined on the feature.
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Position or click the icon in the toolbar.
4. Specify a Tolerance value and enable the Material Condition option.

5. Choose either MMC or LMC as the Material Condition type and specify a Dimension
Tolerance.
6. Set Datum A, Datum B, and Datum D then check the Material Condition For Datum
option.
848
7. Choose either MMC or LMC as the Material Condition type.


A position tolerance controls how much a feature can deviate from its exact true position. It can be
applied to two mating planar features as well as axial features such as cylinders or cones.
How to inspect cylindrical features such as holes and bosses

Deviation is defined by the diameter of the smallest cylinder that encloses the two extremities of a
measured axis. The pass/fail inspection judges whether the axis of a scan cylinder fitted to scan
pair points of a specified nominal face or region is in a given tolerance.
How to inspect two mating planar features

A Thickness Zone is defined by the center plane of two planar features that are generated
internally from scan pair points, datums, and a given tolerance. The pass/fail inspection judges
whether the center plane of two scan planes belongs to a given tolerance.
Options in Detail
849
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity or two opposing planar entities to verify a position tolerance.
Note: A Ref.Circle, Ref.Slot, Ref.Rectangle, Ref.Polygon, Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone,
Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus, Boundary, Edge, Section Vertex, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face,
Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and
The following table shows where position tolerance can be applied:
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Freeform
OK
Line (Vector)
Region
Torus
Feature
Sphere
Body
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
OK
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Options
Tolerance Specifies tolerance ranges.
Use Projected Modifier Projects a tolerance zone in a specified distance outside the physical
limits of a feature. It can be applied to a feature that has an axis, such as a cylindrical feature or a
conical feature.
Symbol:
850
Note: A projected tolerance zone helps to ensure that mating parts can fit during assembly.
For example, if the size of a boss is longer than the depth of a hole while assembling the boss
into the hole, the projected tolerance zone enables the extension of the tolerance zone
outside of the feature.
The following figure shows that the actual axis to the right side of the figure is within the
tolerance zone despite lying outside of the feature. As well, the actual axis shown at the left
side of the figure is out of tolerance.

annotation.
Pattern Verifies the position of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
SEPREQT Separates a feature from a requirement group and evaluates the feature regardless of
other geometric tolerances.
Note: When a Geometric Tolerance is defined on a feature profile that can be controlled by
size, the Material Condition can be defined onto the feature within a Geometric Tolerance
together with the Dimension.
Condition.
851
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.

852
If the actual mating option is used while defining a datum reference frame, the fitting
methods predefined on each datum entity will be used.
Datum Specifies datums

Material Condition Type Chooses a material condition type, from either MMC also known as a
Maximum Material Condition, or LMC, also known as Least Material Condition.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > GD&T Tools > Flatness
853
Tools > GD&T Tools > Straightness

Tools > GD&T Tools > Circularity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Cylindricity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Concentricity
7.5.6.12. Tools > GD&T Tools > Flatness

What
The Flatness command verifies the flatness of a planar entity. Flatness is the condition of a surface
that has all elements in one plane.
Symbol:
Verified Flatness of Features
Why
The Flatness command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a planar surface
How to Use
How to verify the location of a feature from its exact true position
854
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Flatness or click the icon in the toolbar.
4. Specify a Tolerance value.


Flatness controls how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a planar surface. It can
be applied to a planar face of a body or to a region. A datum is not used in this measurement.
When flatness is measured on a planar feature, scan pair points are gathered within a slab-like
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Two parallel plans that can
enclose the scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an actual
855
value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is in the given tolerance.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity or two opposing planar entities to verify a position tolerance.
target entity.
The following table shows where flatness can be applied:
Face of
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
Circle
Line (Vector)
Freeform
Torus
Sphere
Cone
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
856
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
Pattern - Measures the flatness of patterned feature profiles at the same time.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > GD&T Tools > Position
7.5.6.13. Tools > GD&T Tools > Straightness

What
857
The Straightness command verifies the straightness of an entity that is a cylindrical, conical, or
planar geometric shape. Straightness is a condition where an element of the surface of an axis is a
straight line.
Symbol:
Verified Straightness of Features
Why
The Straightness command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature can deviate from a straight line
How to Use
How to verify the straightness of a feature
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Straightness or click the icon in the toolbar.
858

5. Select the By Section method and specify the No. Of Sections.

Straightness controls how much a feature can deviate from a straight line. It can be applied to a
planar, cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region as well as the linear boundary edge of a body
or region. A datum is not necessary in this measurement.
This measurement uses two different methods, By Section and By Median Geometry to accurately
verify straightness based on a feature shape.
How to verify straightness by section

This method verifies surface straightness by generating sections.
When straightness is measured on a planar feature, scan pair points are gathered within a slab-like
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan sections are defined
along a user-defined direction and all points enclosed in the section are used for finding the
minimum thickness of two parallel lines. The thickest of the minimum thicknesses calculated on
each section is defined as an actual value.
859
When straightness is measured on a cylindrical or conical feature, scan pair points are gathered
within a tube-like Thickness Zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan
sections are defined along a measuring direction automatically detected from the target entity. All
points enclosed on the section are used for finding the minimum thickness of two parallel lines.
The thickest of the minimum thicknesses calculated on each section is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a maximum thickness is within a given tolerance.
The following figures show the definition of the By Section method on a cylinder face and a planar
face.
On Planar Face
On Cylinder Face
How to verify straightness by median geometry

This method verifies surface straightness by generating Median Geometry.
When straightness is measured on a cylindrical or conical feature, scan point are gathered within a
tube-like Thickness Zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan sections are
defined along a measuring direction automatically detected from the target entity.
The minimum cylindrical thickness of a medial line is calculated by connecting the center points of
section circles is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum cylindrical thickness is within a given
tolerance.
This method enables the use of the Material Condition option.
860
Note: A Median Line is defined as a set of center points of a sectional circle and a Center Line
is defined as a connecting line between a starting point and an ending point of entity.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the straightness of a feature.
Note: A Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, GTol, Dimension,
Datum, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be
determined according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where straightness can be applied:
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
OK
Region
Edge of
Body
OK
Ref.
Geometry
Options
861
Surface Straightness
Median Geometry Straightness
Pattern Verifies the straightness of patterned features at the same time.

By Section - Verifies surface straightness by generating sectional lines on a face of a target entity.
Specify sections by choosing either the No. Of Sections or the Distance Between options.
Note: When a planar face is selected as a target entity, a measuring direction needs to be
manually defined.
Note: The following images show how sections are defined according to the geometric type
of a target entity when the method is set to By Section.
On Cylinder Face
Surface Straightness
By Median Geometry Verifies straightness of axis of the target entity by generating median
geometry.
Note: The following images show how median geometry is generated from scan pair points
when the method is set to By Median Geometry.
862

Note: When Geometric Tolerance is defined on a feature that can be controlled by a
size, the Material Condition can be defined onto the feature within the Geometric
Tolerance together with the Dimension.
Condition.
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
More Options
863
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.14. Tools > GD&T Tools > Circularity

What
The Circularity command verifies the circularity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical
geometric shape or a circular hole. Circularity is a condition where a feature other than a sphere
has all of its surface points intersected by any plane perpendicular to an axis that is equidistant
from that axis.
Symbol:
Verified Circularity of Features
864
Why
The Circularity command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a circle
How to Use
How to verify the circularity of a feature
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Circularity or click the icon in the toolbar.

5. Select the No. Of Sections method and specify the number of sections.

Circularity controls how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a circle. It can be
865
applied to a cylindrical or conical face of a body or region as well as a circular boundary edge of a
body or region. A datum is not necessary in this measurement.
How to verify cylindrical or conical features

When circularity is measured on a cylindrical or conical feature, it is verified by user defined
sections along the direction of scan pair geometry. Scan pair points are gathered within a tube-like
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. Scan sections are defined along
a measuring direction automatically detected from the target entity. All points enclosed in the
section are used for finding the minimum thickness of two concentric circles. The thickest of the
minimum thickness candidates calculated on each section is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a maximum thickness is within a given tolerance.
How to verify a circular boundary edge

When circularity is measured on a circular boundary edge, scan pair points are gathered within a
doughnut-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. The scan pair
points are used for finding the minimum thickness of two concentric circles and its minimum
thickness is defined as an actual value.
Options in Detail
866
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the circularity of a feature.
The following table shows where circularity can be applied:
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
OK
Feature
Region
Edge of
OK
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
Pattern Verifies the circularity of patterned features at the same time.

867
No. Of Sections Specifies a total number of sections.

Note: The No. Of Sections option is set to 5 in the following example.
Distance Between Specifies the distance between sections.

Note: The Distance Between option is set to 2mm in the following example.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
868
7.5.6.15. Tools > GD&T Tools > Cylindricity

What
The Cylindricity command verifies the cylindricity of an entity that is a cylindrical geometric shape.
Cylindricity is a condition of the surface of a revolution that has all of its surface points equidistant
from a common axis.
Symbol:
Verified Cylindricity of Features
Why
The Cylindricity command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a cylindrical feature
How to Use
How to verify the cylindricity of a feature
869
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Cylindricity or click the icon in the toolbar.


Cylindricity controls how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a cylindrical feature.
It can be applied to a cylindrical face of a body or region. A datum is not necessary in this
measurement.
When cylindricity is measured on a cylindrical feature, scan pair points are gathered within a tubelike cylindrical thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Two coaxial
cylinders that can enclose the scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is
defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is within a given tolerance.
870
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the cylindricity of a feature.
target entity.
The following table shows where cylindricity can be applied:
Face of
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
Circle
Line (Vector)
Freeform
Torus
Sphere
Cone
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
871
Pattern Verifies the cylindricity of patterned features at the same time.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.16. Tools > GD&T Tools > Concentricity

What
The Concentricity command verifies the concentricity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical
geometric shape. Concentricity is a condition where the median points of all diametrically
opposed elements of a figure of a revolution (or correspondingly-located elements of two or more
radially disposed features) are congruent with the axis (or center point) of a datum feature.
Symbol:
872
Verified Concentricity of Features
Why
The Concentricity command is useful for:
Verifying how much the median points of multiple diameters can deviate from a specific
datum of an axis
How to Use
How to verify the concentricity of a feature
3. Define Datum A by selecting a cylindrical face.
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Concentricity or click the icon in the toolbar.
873


Concentricity controls how much the median points of multiple diameters can deviate from a
specific datum axis. It can be applied to a cylindrical, conical, spherical, or torus face of a body or
region as well as a circular boundary edge of a body or region, ref. cylinder, ref. circle, ref. cone, ref.
sphere, or ref. torus. This measurement requires one axis-type datum.
When concentricity is measured on a cylindrical feature, scan pair points are gathered within a
tube-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. The scan pair
points are used for finding scan pair geometry. The location of scan pair geometry will be
optimized to the nominal geometry according to the optimizing position and orientation method
so that the deviation between them can be minimized. The deviation between the axis of scan pair
geometry and a datum axis is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the deviation is within a given tolerance.
874
Note: Optimizing Position and Orientation method

When Geometric Tolerance is measured with specific datums on a feature in 3D scan-based
inspection, corresponding scan pair geometry is extracted from qualified scan pair points and
its location is optimized to the position and the orientation of the nominal geometry so that the
deviation between them is minimized to accurately analyze feature based on the specified
datums. This is referred to as the Optimizing Position and Orientation method. This method is
used when the Orientation-type Geometric Tolerance (Perpendicularity, Angularity, Parallellism)
and Location-type Geometric Tolerance (Position Tolerance, Concentricity, Symmetry) are
measured.
The following figures show how the position and orientation of extracted scan pair geometry
are optimized while measuing Orientation-type Geometric Tolerances and Location-type
Geometric Tolerances.
Step
State
Operation
Coordinates of a Datum Reference Frame
(DRF) of nominal geometry and scan pair
geometry are composed of datums.

Ps : Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Tn : Nominal DRF
Ts : Scan DRF
875
The coordinates of scan pair geometry defined

by DRF moves to the coordinate of nominal
geometry.
2
Ps : Moved Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Degrees of freedom with no constraints
(residual DOF) is defined according to a
combination of datums and the position and
the orientation of scan pair geometry is
optimized using the residual DOF so that the
deviation between them can be minimized.
3
The deviation between the positions of those

geometries is calculated as actual value.

Geometry
If the Material Condition for Datum has been

defined in a datum, the position and the
orientation of nominal geometry will be
optimized according to the Material Condition
for Datum and the deviation between the
positions of those geometries will be
calculated as an actual value.
Pn : Optimized Position of Nominal

Geometry
Geometry
Options in Detail
876
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the concentricity of a feature.
Note: A Ref.Circle, Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone, Ref.Sphere, Ref.Torus, Boundary, Edge, Section
Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can
of the target entity.
The following table shows where concentricity can be applied:
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
OK
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
Sphere
Body
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
OK
Feature
Region
Edge of
OK
Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Options
877
Use Projected Modifier Projects the tolerance zone over a specified distance outside the
physical limits of a feature. It can be applied to the feature which has axis such as cylindrical
feature and conical feature. Specify the projection distance.
Symbol:
Note: Projected tolerance zones help to ensure that mating parts can fit during assembly.
into the hole, the projected tolerance zone enables extending the tolerance zone outside of
the feature.
The following figure shows that the actual axis shown at the right side of the figure is within a
required tolerance zone in spite of lying outside of the feature. As well, the actual axis shown
at the left side of the figure is out of tolerance.

annotation.
Pattern Verifies the concentricity of patterned features at the same time.
Note:
878

More Options
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.17. Tools > GD&T Tools > Parallelism

What
The Parallelism command verifies the parallelism of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical
geometric shape. Parallelism is a condition where a surface or center plane is equidistant at all
points from a datum plane, which is considered as a special case of angularity.
Symbol:
879
Verified Parallelism of Features
Why
The Parallelism command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature can deviate from an orientation parallel to a specific datum
How to Use
How to verify the parallelism of a feature from a specific datum
3. Define Datum A by selecting a planar face.
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Parallelism or click the icon in the toolbar.
880


Parallelism controls how much a feature can deviate from an orientation parallel to a specific
datum. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region as well as a
circular boundary edge of a body or region, ref. vector, ref. cylinder, or ref. cone. This measurement
requires one datum.
When parallelism is measured on a target feature, scan pair points are gathered within a thickness
zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. The scan pair points are constrained by
the defined datum. Two parallel planes that can enclose the scan pair points are contructed and its
881
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the parallelism of a feature.
Note: A Ref.Vector, Ref.Cylinder, Ref.Cone, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge,
Face, Region, GTol, Dimension, Datum, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and
The following table shows where parallelism can be applied:
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
OK
Feature
Region
Edge of
OK
Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
Options
Note: The following figures show how parallelism sets a tolerance zone based on the
geometry type of target features and reference datums.
882
Axial Features to an Axial Datum
Planar Features to an Axial Datum
Axial Feature to a Planar Datum
Planar Features to a Planar Datum
Symbol:
883
the feature.

annotation.
Pattern Verifies the parallelism of patterned features at the same time.
Material Condition For Datum Defines the material condition for a feature.
Note: When geometric tolerance is defined on a feature that can be controlled by size, the
material condition can be defined for the feature by combining the geometric tolerance with
the dimensions.
Material Condition Type Choose either MMC (Maximum Material Condition) or LMC
(Least Material Condition) types for datum.
Note:
minimum hole diameter, maximum shaft diameter)
Least Material Condition (LMC) The condition in which a feature of size contains the
least amount of material within the stated limits of size (e.g., maximum hole diameter,
minimum shaft diameter)
884
input box such as:

0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Condition.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > GD&T Tools > Perpendicularity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angularity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout
Tools > GD&T Tools > Total Runout
Tools > GD&T Tools > Line Profile
Tools > GD&T Tools > Surface Profile
Tools > GD&T Tools > Symmetry
885
7.5.6.18. Tools > GD&T Tools > Perpendicularity

What
The Perpendicularity command verifies the perpendicularity of an entity that is a planar or
cylindrical geometric shape. Perpendicularity is a condition where a surface, center plane, or axis is
at a ninety degree right angle to a datum plane or axis.
Symbol:
Verified Perpendicularity of Features
Why
The Perpendicularity command is useful for:
Verifying how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from a ninety degree angle
How to Use
How to verify the perpendicularity of a feature from a specific datum
886
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Perpendicularity or click the icon in the toolbar.


Perpendicularity controls how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from a ninety degree right
angle. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region as well as a linear
boundary edge of a body or region, ref. vector, ref. cylinder, or ref. cone. This measurement requires
one datum.
When perpendicularity is measured on a target feature, scan pair points are gathered within a
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. The scan pair points are
constrained by the defined datum. Two parallel planes that can enclose the scan pair points are
887
contructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an actual value.

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the perpendicularity of a feature.
The following table shows where perpendicularity can be applied:
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
OK
Region
888
Edge of
OK
Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
Options
Note: The following figures show how perpendicularity sets a tolerance zone based on the
Axial Features to a Planar Datum
889
Axial Features to an Axial Datum
Symbol:
the feature.

annotation.
Pattern Verifies the perpendicularity of patterned features at the same time.
the dimensions.
890
Note:
minimum shaft diameter).
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note: When a cylindrical or conical feature profile has been defined as a datum feature
with size, a position tolerance can be used on the datum and a material condition can
be set.
Condition.
More Options
Reference
891
Related Commands
Tools > GD&T Tools > Parallelism
7.5.6.19. Tools > GD&T Tools > Angularity

What
The Angularity command verifies the angularity of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical
geometric shape. Angularity is a condition where a surface, center plane, or axis is at an angle
other than a ninety degree angle from a datum plane or axis.
Symbol:
Verified Angularity of Features
Why
The Angularity command is useful for:
Verifying how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from an angle described in nominal
specifications
How to Use
892
How to verify the angularity of a feature from a specific datum

4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Angularity or click the icon in the toolbar.


893
Angularity controls how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from an angle that is not a
ninety degree angle as described in nominal specifications. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical,
or conical face of a body or region as well as a linear boundary edge of a body or region, ref. vector,
ref. cylinder, or ref. cone. This measurement requires more than one datum.
When angularity is measured on a target feature, scan pair points are gathered within a thickness
zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. The scan pair points are constrained by
the defined datum. Two parallel planes that can enclose the scan pair points are contructed and its
Options in Detail
894
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the parallelism of a feature.
The following table shows where angularity can be applied:
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
OK
Feature
Region
Edge of
OK
Body
Ref.
Geometry
OK
OK
OK
Options
Note: The following figures show how parallelism sets a tolerance zone based on the
895
Axial Feature to a Axial Datum
Axial Feature to a Planar Datum
Axial Feature to an Axial Datum and Planar

Datum
Axial Feature to dual Planar Datums
896
Planar Features to an Axial Datum and Planar

Datum
Planar Features to dual Planar Datums
897

Symbol:
the feature.

annotation.
Pattern Verifies the angularity of patterned features at the same time.
the dimensions.
Note:
898
minimum shaft diameter).
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note: When a cylindrical or conical feature profile has been defined as a datum feature
with size, a position tolerance can be used on the datum and a material condition can
be set.
Condition.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
899

7.5.6.20. Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout

What
The Runout command verifies the runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric
shape. Runout is a composite deviation from a desired form and orientation of a part surface
during a sectional revolution when performing a full 360-degree rotation of the part on a datum
axis.
Symbol:
Verified Runout of Features
Why
The Runout command is useful for:
Verifying normal distances for all points on circular sections of the surfaces of a revolution
relative to a specified datum axis
How to Use
How to verify the runout of a feature from a specific datum
900
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout or click the icon in the toolbar.


901
Runout controls the relative normal distances for all points on circular sections of the surfaces of a
revolution relative to a specified datum axis. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical, or conical
face of a body or region. This measurement requires one axis-type datum.
When runout is measured on a revolving feature, scan pair points are gathered around sections
within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. All scan pair
points enclosed in the sections will be used for calculating the deviation along the datum axis. The
maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a maximum deviation is within a given tolerance.
Note: When a top or bottom face of a cylindrical feature is selected as a target entity, scan
points will be gathered on the cylindrical sections within a cylindrical ribbon-like thickness
zone that is formed by defining a Min. / Max. size. Deviation will be calculated on each section
along the datum axis. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
902
Coaxial section cylinders to datum direction
When a conical feature is selected as a target entity, scan points will be gathered on the conic
sections within a conical ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by defining a Min. / Max.
size. Deviation will be calculated on each section along the datum axis. The maximum
deviation is defined as an actual value.
A section cone with 90 degrees on the surface
Options in Detail
903
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the runout of a feature.
target entity.
The following table shows where runout can be applied:
Regular
Polygon
904
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
OK
Rectangle
Region
Cone
Feature
Cylinder
Face of Body
Plane
Target Entity
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
Pattern Verifies the runout of patterned features at the same time.
Note: The No. Of Sections option is set to 5 in the following example.
Distance Between Specifies the distance between sections.

Note: The Distance Between option is set to 2mm in the following example.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
905

7.5.6.21. Tools > GD&T Tools > Total Runout

What
The Total Runout command verifies the total runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical
geometric shape. Total runout is a composite deviation from a desired form and orientation of a
part surface during a sectional revolution when performing a full 360-degree rotation of the part
on a datum axis. Total runout inspects a whole surface.
Symbol:
Verified Total Runout of Features
Why
The Total Runout command is useful for:
Verifying normal distances for all scan pair points of a specified nominal face or region of a
revolution, relative to a specified datum axis
906
How to Use
How to verify the total runout of a feature from a specific datum
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout or click the icon in the toolbar.

907

Total runout controls the relative normal distances for all scan pair points of a specified nominal
face or region of a revolution relative to a specified datum axis. It can be applied to a planar,
cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region. This measurement requires one axis-type datum.
When total runout is measured on a revolving feature, scan pair points are gathered within a tubelike thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. All scan pair points
enclosed in the thickness zone will be used for calculating the deviation along the datum axis. The
maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
Note: When a top or bottom face of a cylindrical feature is selected as a target entity, scan
points will be gathered on the flat face within a slab-like thickness zone that is formed by
defining a Min. / Max. size. Deviation will be calculated along the datum axis. The maximum
When a conical feature is selected as a target entity, scan points will be gathered on the
conical face within a conical tube-like thickness zone that is formed by defining a Min. / Max.
size. Deviation will be calculated on each section along the datum axis. The maximum
908
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure the total runout of a feature.
target entity.
The following table shows where total runout can be applied:
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
OK
Freeform
OK
Torus
OK
Sphere
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
909
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
Note: The tolerance for total runout is similar to cylindricity, but its tolerance zone is
determined by a Datum.
The following figures compare the tolerance zone of cylindricity to total runout and show
how total runout sets a tolerance zone according to the combination of measuring features
and a datum when a cylindrical feature is selected as the target entity.
Tolerance Zone of Cylindricity
Tolerance Zone of Runout
Pattern Verifies the runout of patterned features at the same time.

More Options
910
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.22. Tools > GD&T Tools > Line Profile

What
The Line Profile command verifies the line profiles of entities. The Line Profile command specifies
a uniform boundary along a true sectional profile that the elements of the surface must lie upon.
Symbol:
Verified Line Profile of Features
Why
The Line Profile command is useful for:
Verifying how much a sectional line can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location
of planar sections of surfaces that are linear, rotational, or extruded
911
How to Use
How to verify the line profile of a feature from specific datums
3. Define Datum A, B, and C by selecting a planar faces.
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Line Profile or click the icon in the toolbar.
5. Select a freeform face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Specify a Tolerance value for Datums A, B, and C.
Select a Ref. Plane as a Base Plane to define a measuring direction.
912

Line profile controls how much a sectional line can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and
location of planar sections of surfaces that are linear, rotational, or extruded. It can be applied to a
planar, cylindrical, conical, freeform, spherical, or torus face of a body or region. This measurement
can have up to three datums.
Line profile measures the deviation between nominal geometry and scan pair points within a
tolerance zone defined by target features and a section plane. When line profile is measured, scan
points are constrained by the defined datum, then scan pair points are gathered around sections
within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. The
deviation is calculated from the scan pair points on the sections along the normal direction of the
target entity. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a line profile of a feature.
913
target entity.
The following table shows where line profile can be applied:
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
Freeform
Region
Torus
Feature
Sphere
Body
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
Pattern Verifies the line profile of patterned features at the same time.
914

geometry is extracted from the scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum
Reference Frame, or DRF, on a sectional profile. Otherwise, scan pair geometry will be aligned
so that the deviation is minimized to the nominal feature.
Extrusion Shape Defines a measuring direction when a target feature is an extrusion shape.
Revolution Shape Defines a measuring axis when a target feature is a revolution shape.
Add Section Of Peak Position Adds a section at a peak position of a deviation.
Direction Defines a custom measuring direction.
Note: When a directional feature is not selected, the application will automatically calculate
an extrusion direction or a revaluation axis by analyzing the geometric shape of the target
feature.
Unidirectional Tolerance Zone Defines a unidirectional tolerance zone. Positive or Negative
directions are used to define a single direction for a measurement.
Note: The tolerance zone is applied to the single direction from the face according to the
definition.
Without Unidirectional
Positive Tolerance Zone
Negative Tolerance Zone
Tolerance Zone
Whisker Multiplier Specifies a whisker multiplier or set whisker size by adjusting the slider
between x1 to x1000.
915
Whisker Display Ratio Specify the whisker display ratio or set the whisker display ratio by
adjusting the slider between from 1% to 100%.
More Options
Reference
Related Commands
916
7.5.6.23. Tools > GD&T Tools > Surface Profile

What
The Surface Profile command verifies the surface profiles of entities. The Surface Profile command
specifies a uniform boundary along a surface that the elements of the surface must lie upon.
Symbol:
Verified Surface Profile of Features
Why
The Surface Profile command is useful for:
Verifying how much a face can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location of planar
and compound curve surfaces described in nominal data specifications
How to Use
How to verify the line profile of a feature from specific datums
917
3. Define Datum A, B, and C by selecting a planar faces.
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Surface Profile or click the icon in the toolbar.
5. Select a freeform face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Specify a Tolerance value for Datums A, B, and C.

Surface profile controls how much a face can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location
of planar and compound curve sections of surfaces described in nominal data specifications. It can
be applied to a planar, cylindrical, conical, freeform, spherical, or torus face of a body or region. This
measurement can have up to three datums.
Surface profile measures the deviation between nominal geometry and scan pair points within a
tolerance zone. When surface profile is measured, scan points are constrained by the defined
datum, then scan pair points are gathered within a tube-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min.
918
and Max. size on target entity. The deviation is calculated from the scan pair points along the
normal direction of the target entity. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target Selects a target entity to measure a surface profile of a feature.
target entity.
The following table shows where surface profile can be applied:
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Regular
Polygon
OK
Rectangle
OK
Slot
OK
Circle
OK
Line (Vector)
Freeform
Region
Torus
Feature
Sphere
Body
Cone
Face of
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
919
Edge of
Feature
Region
Edge of
Body
Ref.
Geometry
Options
Pattern Verifies the surface profile of patterned features at the same time.
More Options
Use Tolerance Color Displays tolerance colors defined by a color map (default green) that
920
helps to verify areas that are within a tolerance zone.
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.6.24. Tools > GD&T Tools > Symmetry

What
The Symmetry command verifies the symmetry of entities that face each other. Symmetry is a
three-dimensional geometric tolerance that controls how much the median points between two
features can deviate from a specified axis or center plane.
Symbol:
Verified Symmetry of Features
Why
The Symmetry command is useful for:
Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the form, orientation, and location of a derived
921
median plane of slab and slot-like features relative to a nominally coplanar datum plane
How to Use
How to verify the symmetry of a feature from a specific datum
1. Prepare a ref. plane to be used as a datum plane in the middle of a slab-like feature.
Note: For more information about creating Ref.Planes, see Insert > Ref.Geometry >
Plane.
4. Define Datum A by selecting the previously created ref. plane.
5. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Symmetry or click the icon in the toolbar.
6. Select two planar faces then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Specify a Tolerance value for Datum A.
922

Symmetry controls how much a feature can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location
of a derived median plane of slab and slot-like features relative to a nominally coplanar datum
plane. It can be applied to a planar face of a body or region or linear boundary edges of a body or
region. This measurement requires one datum.
The actual value is the thickness of the thinnest slab-like zone that has a center plane that
coincides with a referenced datum plane, and contains all the scan pair points in the derived
median plane.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a minimum thickness of two parallel planes is within a
given tolerance.
Options in Detail
923
Target Entities
Target Selects two opposable entities to measure the symmetry between them.
The following table shows where symmetry can be applied:
Face of
Body
Feature
Region
Regular
Polygon
Rectangle
Slot
Circle
Line (Vector)
Freeform
Torus
Sphere
Cone
Cylinder
Entity
Plane
Target
Point (Vertex)
OK
OK
Boundary
Edge of
Body
Boundary
Edge of
Feature
OK
Region
Edge of
Body
OK
Ref.
Geometry
Options
924

Envelop Rule.
Envelop Rule.


More Options
925
Reference
Related Commands
7.5.7. Tools > Regroup 3D GD&Ts

What
The Regroup 3D GD&Ts command classifies existing GD&Ts and generates new groups.
Regrouped 3D GD&Ts
Why
926
The Regroup 3D GD&Ts command is useful for:
Classifying existing GD&Ts
How to Use
How to classify existing GD&Ts
1. Go to Tools > Regroup 3D GD&Ts or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Click the Add New GD&T Feature button
to add a new GD&T feature.
3. Select GD&Ts in the Model View to register a second group, 3D GD&T2.

5. Check that the classified GD&Ts are registered in the new 3D GD&T2 feature in the
Inspection Feature tree.
927
Options in Detail
Auto Regroup GD&Ts Automatically regroups GD&T according to its viewpoints.
Add New GD&T Feature
Creates a new GD&T group.
Merge This Feature and Upper Feature

group.
Appends a current group of GD&Ts to an upper
GD&Ts To Exclude Removes selected GD&Ts.
7.6.
LiveInspect
LiveInspect enables real-time inspection. Probed points can be used to inspect a model by aligning
it, measuring dimensions, as well as other functions.
Play LiveInspect Process

Performs streamlined inspections based on pre-planned inspection requirements.
LiveAlign
Aligns a hardware coordinate system to a part being measured.
LiveCapture
Captures measurement data by using a scanning and probing device.
LiveDimension
Creates dimensions from a physical part in real-time by using a probing device.
LiveGeometry
Creates geometries from a physical part in real-time by using probing device.
Settings
Modifies the settings for capturing data, controlling views, etc.
Move Device
Maintains a coordinate system after moving a device.
928
Supported Devices in LiveInspect

LiveInspect supports various measurement devices in multiple operating system versions.
Manufacturer
Creaform
FARO
Kreon
LDI
Measurement Device
HandyPROBE
FaroArm/ScanArm
Zephyr/Aquilion/Solano
SLP Series
Leica
NDI
Nikon Metrology
Perceptron
Romer
Steinbichler
32bit
64bit
T-Scan TS50
ScanTRAK
Handheld
ScanWorks
Absolute
Infinite/Stinger
Sigma/Omega
T-Scan 3/CS
Web Site
www.creaform3d.com
www.faro.com
www.kreon3d.com
www.laserdesign.com
metrology.leicageosystems.com
www.ndigital.com
www.nikonmetrology.com
www.perceptron.com
www.romer.com
www.steinbichler.de
How can LiveInspect control a scanner?

LiveInspect technology uses three function controls. The functions of the buttons will vary
between different types and manufacturers of scanners.
Button on
Function
LiveInspect
A
Scan - Resumes and pauses scanning.

Probe Picks a point.
Scan - Stops scanning.

Probe - Creates a probe point entity.
Scan - Not Available

Probe Cancels the creation of a probe point or a probe
session.
To perform the A, B and C functions of LiveInspect as described above, use the buttons on each
scanner device specified in the following table.
Manufacturer
Measurement Device
Button
There are Three buttons on the hardware.
Creaform
Handy PROBE
Probing
Function A: Click the middle button.
Function B: Click the buttons on the left side.
Function C: Press the buttons on the right side.
FARO
FaroArm
Scanning
929
ScanArm
Function A: Click the green button.

Function B: Click the red button.
Probing
Function C: Press the red button for a few
seconds.
The function control varies according to the arm

type. For a Cimcore arm, the function control is
same with that of a Perceptron arm.
Scanning
[Kreon]
Scanner
Zephyr
Aquilion

Function B: Click the buttons on both sides.
Solano
Probing
Function B: Click the buttons on sides.
Function C: Press the buttons on the sides for a
few seconds.
The function control varies according to the arm
type. For a FARO arm, the function control is as
follows:
LDI
SLP Series
Scanning
Probing
Function C: Press the red button for a few
seconds.
Scanning
Nikon
Metrology
Handheld
Probing
Function A: Click one of the four buttons on the
inside.
Function B: Click the button on the outside.
930
For a Cimcore arm, the function control is as

follows:
Perceptron
ScanWorks
Absolute
Scanning
Function A: Click the middle button
Probing
Function C: Press the buttons on both sides for a
few seconds.
There are three buttons on the hardware.
Probing
[Romer]
Portable CMM
Infinite/Stinger

Function C: Press the buttons on both sides for a
Sigma/Omega
few seconds.
Scanning
Function A: Hold the button to resume and
release the button to pause.
[Steinbichler]
T-Scan 3/CS
T-Scan 3/CS
Probing
Function A: Click the button on the application
screen.
Function B: Click the button on the application
screen.
931
7.6.1. LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process

What
The Play LiveInspect Process command performs streamlined inspections based on pre-planned
inspection requirements. It is only available when nominal data exists with probable inspection
features.
Why
The Play LiveInspect Process command is useful for:
Inspecting features using pre-defined inspection in real-time.
How to Use
How to inspect using pre-defined datum alignment and GD&T of nominal data
1.
2.
Select a device and click the Connect button.
3.
Go to LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process, or click the Inspect button.
4.
Datum Alignment will begin. Probe points on the physical part to measure points on
the first planar face.
5.
Press the B button on the probing device to confirm the first face.
6.
Repeat to measure points on the second and third planar faces.
932
7.
After measuring the third face, probe points to validate the alignment.
8.
Press the B button on the probing device and click the Next Inspection Features
option.
9.
The remaining faces to be probed will be displayed in blue. Probe points using the A
button on the probing device while following the on-screen guidance arrow, and press
the B button to confirm.
10.
As the blue faces are probed, the pre-defined GD&T will solve.
Options in Detail
Note: The InfoCenter for the Play LiveInspect Process is the same as the InfoCenter of a predefined inspection. Refer to other chapters of LiveInspect for details.
7.6.2. LiveInspect > LiveAlign

What
The LiveAlign command aligns a hardware coordinate system to a part being measured. It
features various alignment methods such as Interactive alignment and advanced alignment for
inspection without nominal data as well as Auto, Best-Fit, Adaptive, Datum, RPS, 3-2-1, and
Transform. It can utilize both scan data and contact measurements for inspection with nominal
data.
933
Why
The LiveAlign command is useful for:
Aligning a hardware coordinating system to a part in real-time.
How to Use
A. How to align a hardware coordinate system to a part using Datum Alignment with
nominal data
1.
2.
3.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveAlign, or click the Align button.
4.
Click Datum for datum alignment.
5.
Select three planar faces of nominal data as Datum Pair.
6.
Click the OK button.
7.
Measure three points for the first datum pair.
8.
Press the B button on the probing device to confirm the first datum pair.
9.
Measure points for the second and the third datum pairs the remaining highlighted
faces on the nominal data.
10.
Press the B button on the probing device to validate the alignment.
11.
Probe points to check deviation results.
12.
Press the B button on the probing device to exit LiveInspect.
13.
Select the Exit LiveInspect option.
934
14.
Check the Datum Alignment item on the Inspection Feature tree.
B. How to align a physical model to global coordinates using the Interactive 3-2-1
alignment without nominal data
1.
2.
3.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveAlign, or click the Align button.
4.
Select the Interactive Method for interactive 3-2-1 alignment.
5.
Probe points on the top planar face of the physical model to create a Z-axis.
6.
Press the B button to confirm the first plane.
7.
Click the Z-axis button.
8.
Click the Plus button to determine the positive direction of the Z-axis.
9.
Probe points on the second planar face of the physical model to create the Y-axis.
935
10.
Press the B button to confirm the second plane.
11.
Click the Y-axis button.
12.
Click the Plus button to determine the positive direction of the Y-axis.
13.
Probe points on the third planar face of the physical model to create the X-axis.
14.
Click the OK option.
Options in Detail (InfoCenter)

The InfoCenter for the Alignment process
1. Process Info Displays the current process.

2. Step Info Shows the name of an alignment.
3. Current Target Info Indicates the current measurement target.
4. Total Target Info Indicates the total measurement target.
936
5. H/W Coordinates Info DRO (Digital Read Out) shows current position of a probing device
.
The InfoCenter of Validation after aligning

2. Step Info Indicates the current inspection step.
3. Deviation Info DRO (Digital Read Out) shows deviation results in the X, Y, Z, and minimum
distance (3D) axes.
4. H/W Coordinates Info DRO (Digital Read Out) shows the current position of a probing
device.
7.6.3. LiveInspect > LiveCapture

What
The LiveCapture command captures measurement data by using a scanning or probing device.
937
Why
The LiveCapture command is useful for:
Scanning physical parts using a laser scanner when there is nominal data.
Probing points on a physical part when there is no nominal data.
How to Use
A. How to capture scan data using a laser scanner without nominal data
1.
2.
3.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveCapture, or click the Capture button in the LiveInspect mode.
4.
Before scanning, check scanning conditions.
5.
Press the A button on the scanning device to scan. To pause scanning, press the A
Button again.
6.
Scan a physical model.
7.
The scanning data will be displayed in the application in real-time.
938
8.
Check scanning results.
9.
B. How to capture probed scan data points with nominal data

1.
2.
3.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveCapture, or click the Capture button.
4.
Before probing, check the device.
5.
Go to LiveInspect > Settings to set probing settings.
6.
Click the Probe tab of the Settings.
7.
Check the ProbeScan option.
8.
Set the Time to 100 msec.
9.
Click the OK button to confirm the settings.
10.
Press the A button on the probing device to measure points.
11.
Measure points on the physical model.
939
12.
Measured points will be displayed in the application.
13.
Press the B button to confirm measurements.
14.
Press the B button to exit LiveCapture.
15.
Click the Exit LiveCapture button.
16.
Check the results of the Probe Sessions in the Model tree.
Options in Detail
Scanner type Switches between laser and probe scanning.
Real Time Deviation Shows deviation between nominal data and scan data. It is only activated
when there is nominal data.
Use Tolerance Color Shows deviation with the tolerance colors set in the color bar.
Smart Display Makes nominal data transparent while scanning.
The InfoCenter for laser type measurements
940
1. Type Info Shows the type of scanner.

2. Status Info Shows the status of a scanner.
3. Input Info Shows how many points have been measured.
The InfoCenter for probing type measurements

2. Step Info Indicates the current inspection step.
device.
4. Status Info Indicates the current status.
7.6.4. LiveInspect > LiveDimension

What
941
The LiveDimension command creates dimensions from a physical part in real-time by using a
probing device.
Why
The LiveDimension command is useful for:
Measuring dimension and GD&T by probing points in real-time.
How to Use
A. How to measure angularity between two faces with nominal data
1.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveDimension, or click the Dimension button in the LiveInspect

mode to measure dimensions.
2.
Measure points for the first planar face.
3.
Press the B button to confirm the first face.
4.
Measure points for the second planar face.
5.
Press the B button to confirm the second face.
6.
The annotation of the angularity will be displayed.
942
7.
Click the Confirm button to exit the mode.
B. How to measure cylindricity without nominal data

1.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveDimension, or click the Dimension button in the LiveInspect

mode to measure dimensions.
2.
Probe points on a cylindrical geometry of a physical part.
3.
Press the B button on the scanning device to confirm the cylindrical geometry.
4.
The annotation of the cylindricity will be displayed.
5.
943

2. Target Info Indicates a measurement target.
device.
7.6.5. LiveInspect > LiveGeometry

What
The LiveGeometry command creates geometries from a physical part in real-time by using a
probing device.
Why
The LiveGeometry command is useful for:
Creating geometries by probing points.
How to Use
A. How to create a spherical geometry with nominal data
1.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveGeometry, or click the Geometry button in the LiveInspect

mode.
944
2.
Click the Geometry Wizard in the Geometry Tool Palette.
3.
Measure points on the physical part to detect spherical geometry.
4.
When the InfoCenter shows Sphere RMS among candidates, press the B button on the
probing device to confirm the sphere.
5.
Select the Sphere option.
6.
7.
Check the sphere in the Inspection Feature tree.
B. How to create a planar geometry without nominal data

1.
Go to LiveInspect > LiveGeometry, or click the Geometry button in the LiveInspect

mode.
2.
Click the Geometry Wizard in the Geometry Tool Palette.
3.
Measure points to detect spherical geometry.
4.
When the InfoCenter shows a Plane RMS among candidates, press the B button on the
945
probing device to confirm the plane.

5.
Select the Plane option.
6.
7.
Check the plane item in the Inspection Feature tree.

2. Target Info Indicates the current measurement target.
3. Candidates Info Lists searched geometry candidates. A dominant candidate will be
highlighted.
device.
7.6.6. LiveInspect > Settings

The Settings command consists of six tabs:
General
Controls displays and views.
Probe
946
Specifies probing and compensation methods.
Scan Data
Specifies options for scan data processing and scanning result types.
Inspect
Specifies options for result types and tolerances to be used when calculating inspection results.
Device
Changes settings for a measurement device.
Hotkey
Specifies hotkeys to be used during an inspection.
Each tab typically has six buttons:
Export
Exports settings in the .INI file format.
Import
Imports existing .INI files.
Default
Returns all values to their default settings.
OK
Applies modified settings to the application and closes the LiveInspect Settings.
Cancel
Cancels modified settings.
Apply
Applies modified settings to the application while keeping the LiveInspect Settings window
open for further modifications.
7.6.6.1.
General Tab
The General tab controls displays and views.
947
Options in Detail
Zoom
Zoom Fit Displays an entire model during scanning.
Dynamic Panning Dynamically displays a model according to measured points during probing.
None Displays a model without any constraints. Only Sound While Measuring and InfoCenter
Size are activated in this setting.
Zoom Fit
Dynamic Panning
948
View Direction
Fixed Top View Fixes the top view direction by using hardware information. The Set button
defines the Top view direction.
Smart View Intelligently recognizes a scanning direction within a system-defined view
range and dynamically adapts the view direction to a proper viewpoint.
Free View Freely sets the view direction according to a scanning direction.
Hotkeys
Hotkeys For A/B/C Buttons Shows keyboard hotkeys for scanner buttons. Hotkeys can be
edited in the Hotkey tab.
Sound and InfoCenter

Sound While measuring Enables sounds while measuring.
InfoCenter Size Enlarges or reduces the size of the InfoCenter. Large and Small can be selected.
7.6.6.2.
Probe Tab
The Probe tab specifies probing and compensation methods.
949
Options in Detail
Auto Probe
SteadyPoint Acquires a probe position automatically without using the A button when the
probe tip is held still near a target position. Pressing the A button changes the acquisition status
to Pause and Resume. In the Pause state, no probe position is acquired, even if the probe is held
at a position. In the Resume state, the auto probing scheme will be used. The current status will
be displayed at the top right corner of the Model View.
Time Defines how long a probing device needs to be stationary in order to collect data.
Range Defines how far a probing device needs to be moved to start collecting new data.
Drag Mode
ProbePoint Captures multiple points while pushing the A button.
Time Defines the time between probe measurements.
Distance Defines the physical distance in between measurements.
Hotkey Shows a keyboard hotkey for the probe scanning of LiveCapture. Hotkeys can be
edited in the Hotkey tab.
RMS
RMS Warning Sets an RMS warning value and displays any value outside of the value as red
during probing.
Probe Compensation
Ref. Geometry Determines a compensation direction for Ref. Geometry.
Last Point Compensates the center position of measured probe points according to the
position of the last input point. For example, When the last point is picked inside measured
features, the center position of measured probe points will be compensated outward.
When the last point is a point is picked outside a measured feature, the center position of
measured probe points will be compensated inward.
950
When the last point is picked inside
When the last point is point is
measured features
picked outside a measured feature
Initial Axis Compensates the center position of measured probe points along the initially
approached probe axis.
Ref. Point Compensates the center position of measured probe points by the X, Y, and Z global
axes directions or the probe axis.
Without Compensation
7.6.6.3.
Compensation to -Z
Compensation to Probe Axis
Scan Data Tab
The Scan Data tab specifies options for scan data processing and scanning results.
951
Options in Detail
Scan Line
Remove Outliers Ignores data outside of a set average.
Scan Pass
Noise Reduction Reduces noise by using a slide bar to select a value.
Sampling
Original Data Uses original scan data from a scan device for post processing.
Grid Data Generates a grid-type uniform scan data.
Grid Size Defines a grid resolution. The higher the resolution of a grid, the denser scan
data will be.
Result
Point Cloud Creates point clouds after scanning.
Mesh Creates meshes after scanning.
Max. Edge Length Limits triangle size by a longest edge length value.
952
Backup
Backup Raw Data Saves files in the .LSF(LiveScan File) format for backing up data. The file can
be imported by going to File > Import Scan data.
7.6.6.4.
Inspect Tab
The Inspect tab specifies options for results and tolerances to be used when calculating inspection
results.
Options in Detail
SmartSelect
3D Geometry Selects a 3D Geometric shape that a device is pointed at.
2D Geometry Selects a 2D Geometric shape that a device is pointed at.
SmartSelect Zone
Edge Determines the range of edge selection.
953
Face Determines the range of face selection.

Ref. Geom Determines the range of pre-measured Ref.Geometry selections.
LiveDimension
Min. Angle Determines a minimum angle between target faces.
Ang. Tolerance Specifies angle tolerance between measured geometries. The specified angle
tolerance will be used to determine pass or fail results.
Deviation/Validate
Show Whisker Shows a solid line between a probing device and a projected point on nominal
data while validating after an alignment. The line is only displayed when the length of the line is
within the value that is set as the Range.
Range Sets the maximum distance that will be displayed as a whisker.
Unchecked
Checked
Show Arrow Shows a guiding arrow that directs to a projected point on nominal data while
validating after an alignment.
Unchecked
Checked
Live Geometry
Form Tolerance Sets a RMS tolerance to select geometry while probing points. If there is no
candidate within the tolerance, the geometry that is within the minimum RMS is selected. If there
are several candidates within the tolerance, the application automatically chooses one.
954
Nominate Geometry Candidate Displays candidates available for selection when the B button
on a probing device is pressed if there are several candidates within the tolerance.
7.6.6.5.
Device Tab
The Device tab changes settings for a measurement device.
Options in Detail
Calibration Used for the calibration of a scanning device.
Laser Settings Changes the settings for a scanning device.
Select Probe Changes the settings for a probing device.
7.6.6.6.
Hotkey Tab
The Hotkey tab specifies hotkeys to be used during an inspection.
955
Options in Detail
A Button Defines a keyboard hotkey for the A button.
B Button Defines a keyboard hotkey for the B button.
C Button Defines a keyboard hotkey for the C button.
ProbeScan Defines a keyboard hotkey for the probe scanning feature of LiveCapture.
7.6.7. LiveInspect > Move Device

What
The Move Device command maintains a coordinate system after moving a device.
Why
The Move Device command is useful for:
Maintaining a coordinate system when a part is flipped to inspect the back of the part.
Maintaining a coordinate system when scanning a large object that requires multiple scans
due to the single scan size limitations of a scanning device.
956
How to Use
How to maintain a coordinate system after moving a device
1.
Go to LiveInspect > Move Device.
2.
Pick points on nominal data.
3.
Click the Start Probing button.
4.
Probe Points on a physical part.
5.
Options in Detail
Start Probing Starts the probing of points on a physical part.
7.7.
Report
The Report menu features commands for generating a report from inspection results within the
application. Reports can be made on an existing template or automatically generated in HTML.
Generate Report
957
Generate Report
Creates an inspection report from selected features.
Sharing
Export 3D HTML Report

Exports inspection results to an HTML file that includes 3D model data.
Trend Analysis
Trend Report
Analyzes variation trends of inspection results.
7.7.1. Report > Generate Report

What
The Generate Report command creates an inspection report from selected features in the
Generate Report dialog box either manually or automatically.
How to Use
A. How to generate a report
1.
After inspection with nominal and scan data, go to Report > Generate Report or click
2.
Check features under the Model Tree section what you want to generate a report.
3.
Click the New Report button.

958
B. How to predefine a report layout

1.
Customize the layout of the report by clicking the Report tab then the Layout button in
the Default menu.
2.
Click the Layout button to edit the layout of a report. Once a feature is edited, its page
structure can be seen in the main window of the Report tab.
3.
Go to the Comparison Point page and click the Image button
to import an
image. Align the image to the right by clicking the Set Align Object In Line button
and choose the Align Right In Line method
4.
Add texts by clicking the Text button
and drag a box to where a desired
location. Text can be input directly into the text box or in the Format menu in the
Reports tab. The Overlay option can be unchecked to prevent the text box from being
overlapped by a table.
5.
Align text to the left and use the Field button
field
to add a field. The Entity Properties
can be used to add values that can be drawn in a table automatically. Choose 6
Sigma.
959
6.
To add preset images of the model click the Capture Image button and add the images.
For a more detailed description on the Capture Image function, see Report.
7.
Uncheck features that will be omitted from the report. Click New Report and a new
report will be generated. If there is an existing report open it will be deleted and
replaced by the new report.
8.
Click OK to complete the command. The Report tab will be displayed with images,
tables, and histograms of the inspection results.
960
Note: Changes are automatically saved to the autoreporttemplate.xml file that can
be found at C:\Documents and Settings\user name\My Documents\Product
Name\Configure.
C. How to save and load a layout template

1.
After a layout is edited it can be managed in the Edit Template dialog box that can be
displayed by clicking the Manage button
in the Layout menu. Type the name of a
template and click the Add button or import templates by using the Manage Templates
dialog box. To edit a template while preserve an unaltered copy, use the Duplicate
button and copy it. To delete all template settings and restore the default template click
the Restore Preset button.
2.
To change the current template of a report layout, select an existing template under the
Select Template menu.
961
D. How to edit a table

1.
To add or remove fields in a table, select a table and click the Field Chooser button
in the Format menu. Check fields that will be displayed in the table and
arrange the order of the fields.
2.
To add a defined table, click the Tabular View button

as an additional table related to the selected feature.
in the Layout menu as well
E. How to add a chart

1.
Select a table in the report. Click Insert New Chart in the Default menu.
2.
Select a chart type and check values in the Legend display.
962
3.
Click the OK button the complete the command.
F. How to edit an image

1.
Drag and drop an image from the Viewpoint and Image Folder panels.
2.
When an image is selected in a report the Format menu will be displayed. It contains
various tools to edit images.
963
G. How to edit text

1.
Add text by clicking the Insert New Text button
. To change font size, color, size, etc.,
use the tools under the Format menu.
2.
To align a text box use the Arrange button
To place an image anywhere in the report use the Overlay button.

To change border thickness use the Line Weight button
To change border color use the Specify Line Color button

3.
Click the OK button the complete the command.
Options in Detail
Model Tree, Generate Target Used to generate reports. The left list box, Model Tree, shows all
the features that can be added into a report. Items of checked features will be shown in the right
list box, Generate Target, and these entities will be published in the report. To change the page
order of items, select the items and move them up or down using the up and down arrow
buttons. Groups can be made from multiple features such as groups of sections, 3D GD&Ts,
comparison points and ref. geometries.
Custom Field Information Defines report information for each custom field. This custom field
can be inserted into report page by the Custom Field command in the default report mode and
layout mode. For more information about Custom Field, see Tools > Docking Bars > Report.
Update Adds an appended report to an existing report.
New Report Creates a new report.
Cancel Cancels the Generate Report operation.
Generate Cover Page Creates a cover page for a report.
Remove Empty Object Removes unnecessary tables that have empty values.
964
Reference
Related Commands
Tools > Docking Bars > Report
7.7.2. Report > Export 3D HTML Report

What
The Export 3D HTML Report command exports inspection results to an HTML file that includes
3D model data.
How to Use
How to generate a 3D HTML report
1.
Go to Report > Export 3D HTML Report or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select entities to be exported in the left panel.
965
3.
Select a folder to save the report to.
4.
Select the Launch Internet Explorer option to view the report after it is generated.
5.
Click the OK button to generate the report. Install any necessary ActiveX controllers and
the report and 3D model will be displayed in Internet Explorer.
Options in Detail
Select Entities To Be Exported Chooses items will be exported into the HTML report.
Information Used to put any information desired.
966
Remarks Used to put any remarks desired.

ICF View Size Sets the ICF view size using Width and Height value boxes.
Property, Value Sets the value of properties of a file.
Select Folder For Backup HTML Files Specifies a folder to store a HTML report.
Launch Internet Explorer Opens and loads a report into Internet Explorer after it is generated.
7.7.3. Report > Trend Report

What
The Trend Report is a utility that works independently from the application that analyzes variation
trends of inspection results that have been reported from the application. The trend report is
created in the XML format.
How to Use
How to generate a trend report
1.
Go to Report > Trend Report or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Click the Import Source Reports button
3.
The sample reports will be listed in the File List panel. To add more reports, click the
Open button
and select report files in the .xml format.
and select more files to import. The order of imported reports can be
changed using the Move Selection Up/Down buttons

using the Trash button
4.
. Reports can be deleted
Click the Generate button

in the trend report.
in the Default menu. Check entities that will be reported
967
5.
Click the Confirm button

the report.
6.
The trend report will be generated. It can be saved as a .pdf, .ppt, .xls, and .txt file
at the bottom right hand corner of the screen to generate
formats.
7.8.
Measure
The Measure menu features commands to measure distances, angles, radii, etc., between entities.
Distance, Angle and Radius fitting geometries created for measurement can be reused while in the
command. When the command is exited the fitting geometries will no longer be available.
The Measure menu provides tools used to:
Distance
Measure the distance between entities.
Angle
Measure the angle between two edges or three picked points.
Radius
Measure the radius of an edge or three picked points.
968
Section
Temporarily create sections on a mesh and body to measure the deviation between them.
Area
Measures the area of a selected entity.
Volume
Measures the volume of a selected entity.
Mesh Deviations
Show the deviation between point clouds and meshes using a defined color map.
Virtual Caliper
Simulates virtual calipers that can measure the distance of features in scan data in virtual space.
7.8.1. Measure > Distance

What
The Distance command measures the distance between entities.
Why
The Distance command is useful for:
Comparing distances between plane-plane
Comparing distances between plane-line
Comparing distances between plane-point
Comparing distances between line-line
Comparing distances between line-point
Comparing distances between point-point

969
Note: Plane-plane, line-line and plane-line measurements should be parallel.
How to Use
How to find the distance between two edges
1.
Go to Measure > Distance or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
To measure the distance between two cylinders, click the cylinder edges. When doing a
mouse-over a measurement the measured entities will be shown.
Note: To pick a position on a line or a plane, hold down the Ctrl button on the
keyboard while clicking.
Options in Detail
Measure Distance Selects two entities to measure the distance between.
Method Selects a measuring method for analytic features.
No Align Measures a direct distance between entities with no alignment.
X Axis Align Measures a distance in the X direction.
970
Y Axis Align Measures a distance in the Y direction.
Z Axis Align Measure a distance in the Z direction.
Fitting Geometry Selects poly-vertices from scan data and fits a primitive feature to them.
Fitting geometry can be directly created from scan data by selecting poly-vertices and using the
right mouse button.
To preview the results, click the Preview button

To apply the results, click the Accept button
To cancel the selection, click the Cancel button
.
.
.
To expand the current geometry and create new fitting geometry, click the Expand Selection For
Fitting Geometry button
. This function works for Plane, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, and Torus
fitting geometries.
Clicking on the Annotation Display Control option will open a window where the properties of
measured entities as well as the selection mode can be changed.
When measuring, a pass or fail constraint can be added by entering a nominal value and
tolerance value in the properties window of a created entity.
971
Fitting Type Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from target entities.
Best Fit Finds best-fitted geometry using the least squares fitting method from target
entities.
Min. Bound - Finds the smallest geometry that contacts the most distant boundary polyvertex along the positive normal direction of a boundary.
Max. Bound Finds the biggest geometry that contacts the most distant boundary polyvertex along the negative normal direction of a boundary.
Projected Hole Finds maximum inscribed geometry from the boundary of poly-vertices.
Best Fit
Min. Bound
Max. Bound
Projected Holes
used.
Use Normal Excludes points that have a normal angle larger than the normal of fitted ref.
geometry. After removing points, the application will internally generate fitted ref. geometry
again from the refined points.
972
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.2. Measure > Angle

What
The Angle command measures the angle between two edges or three picked points.
Why
The Angle command is useful for:
Comparing angles between plane-plane
Comparing angles between plane-line
Comparing angles between plane-point
Comparing angles between line-line
Comparing angles between line-point-point
Comparing angles between point-point-point

Note: Angles between parallel entities cannot be measured.
973
How to Use
How to find the angle between two edges
1.
Go to Measure > Angle or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select two edges to measure the angle. Click OK to finish the command. When doing a
Note: To pick a position on a line or a plane, hold down the Ctrl button on the
keyboard while clicking.
Options in Detail
Measure Angle Selects entities to measure the distance between.
right mouse button.
To preview the results click the Preview button
.
974
To apply the results click the Accept button
fitting geometries.
entities.
Best Fit
Min. Bound
Max. Bound
Projected Holes
used.
975
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Distance
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.3. Measure > Radius

What
The Radius command measures the radius of an edge or three picked points.
976
Note: To select a point on a line or a plane hold the Ctrl button while picking the point.
Why
The Radius command is useful for:
Finding the radius of a circle
Comparing angles between point-point-point
How to Use
How to find the radius of an edge
1.
Go to Measure > Radius or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select an edge to measure a radius from. Click OK to finish the command. When doing a
Options in Detail
Measure Radius Selects entities to measure the radius.
right mouse button.
977
To preview the results click the Preview button

To apply the results click the Accept button
.
.
fitting geometries.
entities.
Best Fit
Min. Bound
978
Max. Bound
Projected Holes
used.
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.4. Measure > Section

What
The Section command temporarily creates sections on a mesh and body to measure the deviation
between them.
979
Why
Checking the deviation between reverse engineered models and original mesh
How to Use
How to find sectional differences between a body and a mesh
1.
Go to Measure > Section or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select a mesh and a solid body as the Target Entity and click the Next Stage button.
3.
Choose the Select Plane option and select a base plane.
980
4.
Choose the Min Distance option under Measure Method to find the minimum distance
between the body and mesh. Select a point on the body section and then pick the scan
section to get the distance.
5.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
This tool consists of two stages :
Target Entity
Selects an entity to section.
Section Type
Chooses a candidate coordinate.
Stage 1/2 Target Entity

Target Entity Selects a target entity to measure.
Stage 2/2 Section Type

Creation Method Selects a creation method. See Tools > Curve Tools > Section for more
information.
Options Is changed depending on the Creation Method. See Tools > Curve Tools > Section for
more information.
Measure Method Selects a measurement method.
Distance By Picking Measures distance between two picked points.
Min. Distance Measures the minimum distance from a selected point to a section
between CAD data and a scan section. This option is available only when both CAD and
scan data are selected as targets in Stage 1.
981
Normal Distance Measures the normal distance from a selected point to a section
between CAD data and a scan section. This option is available only when both CAD and
scan data are selected as targets in Stage 1.
Section Property Displays the properties of a selected section in the Properties panel.
Only a scan section can be selected.
Create Ref. Plane Creates a temporary sectional plane as a ref. plane.
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.5. Measure > Area

What
The Area command measures the area of a selected entity.
Why
982
The Area command is useful for:
Quickly finding the total area for an entity
How to Use
How to measure the area of an entity
1.
Go to Measure > Area or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select an entity to measure the area of.
3.
Enter an annotation name such as Cylinder 1.
4.
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Volume
983
7.8.6. Measure > Volume

What
The Volume command measures the volume of a selected entity.
Why
The Volume command is useful for:
Quickly finding the volume for a selected entity
How to Use
How to measure the volume of an entity
1.
Go to Measure > Volume or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select a mesh and un-check the Use Projection Plane option.
3.
Enter an annotation name such as Measurement 1.
4.
Options in Detail
Name Selects a name of an annotation.
984
Entities Selects a mesh or poly-faces.

Projected Volume Calculates the volume of a mesh.
Enclosed Volume Calculates the volume created by two parallel planes.
The plane direction can be a user-defined value. The View Align button changes the
normal of a plane to the screen view direction. A distance can be selected between two
planes by using the Depth option in the Normal Direction section.
Use Projection Plane Calculates the volume of an open mesh or poly faces by
projecting poly-faces on a plane. In projected volume calculation if a face normal and a
projection direction are different a plus volume will be created. If a face normal and a
projection direction are the same, a minus volume will be created.
For example, the volume of a closed shell will be the same with or without a plane.
The volume of an open shell will be measured using a projection plane results similar to
the following image:
985
Reset Resets Projected Volume and Enclosed Volume to default.

Plane Options Selects a measurement method.
Position Sets the position of the plane by using the X, Y, and Z directions.
Normal Direction Sets the normal direction by using the X, Y, and Z directions.
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
7.8.7. Measure > Mesh Deviations

What
The Mesh Deviations command shows the deviation between point clouds and meshes using a
defined color map.
986
Why
The Mesh Deviations command is useful for:
Checking the deviation between many meshes and point clouds
How to Use
How to find deviation between meshes
1.
Go to Measure > Mesh Deviations or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select all meshes as Target Entities. Click the Next Stage button.
Note: Histogram and Entity Thumbnails View windows will automatically open.
Check the results in the windows.
The results will be recorded in the Console window. If needed, copy the results and
paste it into other applications. For more information, see Console page.
3.
Multiple results will be shown in the Entity Thumbnails panel.
4.
Options in Detail
987
Stages
This tool consists of two stages:
Target Entities and References

Selects an entities and References for deviation analysis.
Deviation Analysis
Chooses a candidate coordinate. The ideal coordinate is listed at the top of the list box.
Stage 1/2 Target Entities and References

Target Entities Chooses target entities.
References Chooses reference entities.
Max.Deviation Specifies the maximum distance for ignoring features when calculating
deviation. This option can be useful for filtering noisy and irregular data.
Signed Displays positive and negative distance values.
Unsigned Displays absolute distance values.
Use Tolerance Color Displays defined tolerance colors on the color map.
Stage 2/2 Deviation Analysis

Deviation between entities is shown as a color map. If necessary, the Use Tolerance Color option
can be used in this step.
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
988
7.8.8. Measure > Virtual Caliper

What
The Virtual Caliper command simulates virtual calipers which can measure the distance of a
feature in scan data in virtual space.
How to Use
How to measure using virtual calipers
1.
Go to Measure > Virtual Caliper or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select Outside Caliper for Caliper Type and Ray-Intersection For Searching Method.
3.
Select a point on scan data. The selected point will be marked with a cone-shape and the
opposite direction will be marked by two cylinder shapes.
4.
Select one of the cylinder shapes on the position. The caliper will measure the distance
from the cone shape to the selected cylinder shape.
5.
Options in Detail
Caliper Type Selects a caliper type.
Outside Caliper
feature.
Measures the outline distance of a cylinder or boundary of a
989
Inside Caliper
Measures the distance between the area inside a feature or the
diameter of a hole.
Depth Caliper
Measures the depth of a feature or a hole.
Measuring Direction Selects a measurement direction.

Auto Sets the measuring direction automatically by searching for the reverse direction of
the normal direction.
Custom Sets a measurement direction by measuring the distance to a user-selected
direction.
Parallel to Measuring Plane Sets a measurement direction parallel to a specified
measuring plane. The Front, Top and Right planes can be used.
Tip Option Selects a tip type.
Searching Method Sets the searching method type.
Ray Intersection Finds a pair point by intersecting virtual rays and poly-vertices.
Disk Contact Finds a pair point by the contact position of a disk.
Search Radius Sets the radius of the searching tip.
990
Searching Depth Sets the depth of the searching tip.
Reference
Related Commands
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.9.
View
The View menu features commands to change how a model is displayed, change and split
viewpoints, as well as other viewing related functions.
The View menu provides tools used to:
Manage Visibility
Visibility
Select different entity types to display or hide.
Zoom
Zoom
Zoom an area of interest, fit a model to a screen, or use the picture-in-picture (PIP) function.
Manage Mesh Display Mode
Mesh Display Mode

Set how meshes are displayed in the model view.
Manage Body Display Mode

991
Body Display Mode

Set how solid surfaces and bodies are displayed in the model view.
Manage Viewpoints
Viewpoint
Sets how a model is displayed in the model view.
Manage Viewports
Viewport
Set the number of viewing windows and how they are displayed.
Manage Light Properties
Light Properties
Set the global lighting properties such as color and point of origin within the model view.
Clip a View
View Clip
Cut away a part of a model using cutting planes or a box to view inside of it.
Manage Annotation
Annotation Alignment
Selects an annotation display method.
Annotation Display Control

Manages how annotations are displayed.
Manage Screen
Maximize View Area

Enlarges the Model View area.
7.9.1. View > Visibility

The Visibility menu features methods to show or hide entities in the Model View.
992
Global Control
Show Selected Only

Displays only selected entities.
Show All
Shows all entities.
Hide All
Hides all entities.
Partial Control
Show Pass Only

Displays entities that pass deviation parameters.
Show Fail Only

Displays entities that fail deviation parameters.
Show Warning Only

Displays entities that are within warning deviation parameters.
Show No Result Only

Displays entities that have no deviation results.
Show Pass & Warning Only

Displays entities that pass and are within warning deviation parameters.
Show Fail & Warning Only

Displays entities that fail and are within warning deviation parameters.
Individual Control
Point Clouds
Shows or hides point clouds.
Meshes
Shows or hides meshes.
Surface Bodies
Shows or hides surface bodies.
Solid Bodies
Shows or hides surface bodies.
Curves
Shows or hides curves.
Sections
Shows or hides sections.
Ref. Points
Shows or hides reference points.
993
Ref. Vectors
Shows or hides reference vectors.
Ref. Planes
Shows or hides reference planes.
Ref. Circles
Shows or hides reference circles.
Ref. Cylinders
Shows or hides reference cylinders.
Ref. Coordinates
Shows or hides reference coordinates.
GD&Ts
Shows or hides GD&Ts.
Deviations
Shows or hides deviations.
Measurements
Shows or hides measurements.
7.9.1.1.
View > Visibility > Show Selected Only
What
The Show Selected Only command displays only selected entities in the Model View.
Why
The Show Selected Only command is useful for:
Focusing on only specific entities

Note: This command will be unavailable and dimmed if no entities have been selected.
994
How to Use
How to show or hide selected entities
1.
Select entities. Go to View > Visibility > Show Selected Only or click the icon in the
toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Visibility > Show All
View > Visibility > Hide All
7.9.1.2.
What
The Show All command shows all entities in the Model View.
Why
The Show All command is useful for:
Quickly showing all hidden entities
How to Use
995
How to show all entities

1.
Go to View > Visibility > Show All or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.3.
What
The Hide All command hides all entities in the Model View.
Why
The Hide All command is useful for:
Quickly hiding all visible entities
How to Use
How to hide all entities
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Hide All or click the icon in the toolbar.
996
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.4.
View > Visibility > Show Pass Only
What
The View > Visibility > Show Pass Only command displays entities that pass deviation
parameters in the Model view.
Why
The Show Pass Only command is useful for:
Showing only entities that pass deviation parameters
How to Use
How to show only passing entities
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Show Pass Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Visibility > Show Fail Only
View > Visibility > Show Warning Only
View > Visibility > Show No Result Only
View > Visibility > Show Pass & Warning Only
View > Visibility > Show Fail & Warning Only
7.9.1.5.
What
997
The Show Fail Only displays entities that fail deviation parameters in the Model view.
Why
The Show Fail Only command is useful for:
Showing only entities that fail deviation parameters
How to Use
How show only failing entities
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Show Fail Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.6.
What
The Show Warning Only command displays entities in the Model View that are within warning
deviation parameters. Warning deviation parameters are determined by the Warning Ratio option
in the Properties of the Nominal Data.
Note: Refer to Properties for more detailed information.
Why
The Show Warning Only command is useful for:
Showing only entities that are close to failing deviation parameters

998
How to Use
How show warning entities
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Show Warning Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.7.
What
The Show No Result Only displays entities that have no deviation results in the Model view.
Why
The Show No Result Only command is useful for:
Showing only entities that have no deviation results
How to Use
How show or hide entities that have no deviation results
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Show No Result Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
999

7.9.1.8.
What
The Show Pass & Warning Only displays entities that pass and warning deviation parameters in
the Model view.
Why
The Show Pass & Warning Only command is useful for:
Showing entities that pass and come to close to failing deviation parameters
How to Use
How show passing and warning entities
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Show Pass & Warning Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.9.
What
The Show Fail & Warning Only command displays entities that fail and warning deviation
1000
parameters in the Model view.
Why
The Show Fail & Warning Only command is useful for:
Showing entities that fail and come to close to failing deviation parameters
How to Use
How show failing and warning entities
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Show Fail & Warning Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.10. View > Visibility > Point Clouds

What
The Point Clouds command displays or hides all point clouds in the Model View.
Why
The Point Clouds command is useful for:
Viewing all point clouds at one time
Hiding all point clouds at one time
How to Use
1001
How show or hide all point clouds

1.
Go to View > Visibility > Point Clouds, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 1
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.11. View > Visibility > Meshes

What
The Meshes command displays or hides all meshes in the Model View.
Why
The Meshes command is useful for:
Viewing all meshes at one time
Hiding all meshes at one time
How to Use
1002
How to show or hide all meshes

1.
Go to View > Visibility > Meshes, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 1
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.12. View > Visibility > Surface Bodies

What
The Surface Bodies command displays or hides all Surface Bodies in the Model View.
Why
The View Surface Bodies command is useful for:
Viewing all Surface Bodies clouds at one time
Hiding all Surface Bodies at one time
How to Use
1003
How show or hide all surface bodies

1.
Go to View > Visibility > Surface Bodies, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 3
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.13. View > Visibility > Solid Bodies

What
The Solid Bodies command displays or hides all Solid Bodies in the Model View.
Why
The View Solid Bodies command is useful for:
Viewing all Solid Bodies at one time
Hiding all Solid Bodies at one time
How to Use
1004
How show or hide all solid bodies

1.
Go to View > Visibility > Solid Bodies, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 4
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.14. View > Visibility > Curves

What
The Curves command displays or hides all curves in the Model View.
Why
The Curves command is useful for:
Viewing all curves at one time
Hiding all curves at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all curves
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Curves, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 5
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
1005

7.9.1.15. View > Visibility > Sections

What
The Sections command displays or hides all sections in the Model View.
Why
The Sections command is useful for:
Viewing all sections at one time
Hiding all sections at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all sections
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Sections, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 6
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.16. View > Visibility > Ref. Points

What
1006
The Ref. Points command displays or hides all Ref. Points in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Points command is useful for:
Viewing all Ref. Points at one time
Hiding all Ref. Points at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. points
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Points, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 7
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Visibility > Ref.Vector
View > Visibility > Ref.Planes
View > Visibility > Ref.Circles
View > Visibility > Ref.Cylinders
View > Visibility > Ref.Coordinates
7.9.1.17. View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors
1007
What
The Ref. Vectors command displays or hides all Ref. Vectors in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Vectors command is useful for:
Viewing all Ref. Vectors at one time
Hiding all Ref. Vectors at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. vectors
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 8
keyboard shortcut.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Visibility > Ref.Points
1008
7.9.1.18. View > Visibility > Ref. Planes

What
The Ref. Planes command displays or hides all Ref. Planes in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Planes command is useful for:
Viewing all Ref. Planes at one time
Hiding all Ref. Planes at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. planes
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Planes or click on the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Visibility > Ref.Vectors
1009
7.9.1.19. View > Visibility > Ref. Circles

What
The Ref. Circles command displays or hides all Ref. Circles in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Circles command is useful for:
Viewing all Ref. Circles at one time
Hiding all Ref. Circles at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. circles
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Circles or click on the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Visibility > Ref.Vector
7.9.1.20. View > Visibility > Ref. Cylinders

What
The Ref. Cylinders command displays or hides all Ref. Cylinders in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Cylinders command is useful for:
1010
Viewing all Ref. Cylinders at one time
Hiding all Ref. Cylinders at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. cylinders
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Cylinders or click on the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.21. View > Visibility > Ref. Coordinates

What
The Ref. Coordinates command displays or hides all Ref. Coordinates in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Coordinates command is useful for:
1011
Viewing all Ref. Coordinates at one time
Hiding all Ref. Coordinates at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. coordinates
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Coordinates or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.22. View > Visibility > GD&Ts

What
The GD&Ts command displays or hides all GD&Ts in the Model View.
Why
The GD&Ts command is useful for:
Viewing all GD&Ts at one time
Hiding all GD&Ts at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all GD&Ts
1.
Go to View > Visibility > GD&Ts or click the icon in the toolbar.
1012
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.1.23. View > Visibility > Deviations

What
The Deviations command displays or hides all deviations in the Model View.
Why
The Deviations command is useful for:
Viewing all deviations at one time
Hiding all deviations at one time
How to Use
How to show or hide all deviations
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Deviations or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
Insert > Deviation
7.9.1.24. View > Visibility > Measurements

What
1013
The Measurements command displays or hides all measurement entities in the Model View.
Why
The Measurements command is useful for:
Viewing all measurement entities at one time
Hiding all measurement entities at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all measurements
1.
Go to View > Visibility > Measurements or click the icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
Measure
7.9.2. View > Zoom

The Zoom menu features methods to control zooming entities on Model View.
The Zoom menu is divided into 2 groups used to:
Zoom View
1014
Area
Zooms in on a specific area.
Previous Area
Displays a previous area.
Fit
Fits all entities into the model view.
Create Picture-In-Picture
PIP
Creates a zoomed view within the model view.
7.9.2.1.
View > Zoom > Area
What
The Area command zooms into a manually selected rectangular area.
Why
The Area command is useful for:
Zooming in on specific areas of a model
How to Use
How to zoom in on an area
1.
Go to View > Zoom > Area or use the Shift+Z keyboard shortcut.
1015
2.
Drag-select a rectangular region over the model.

Note: The Zoom Area command is active until another command runs or the
command is ran again. To go back to a previous viewing area use the View > Zoom >
Previous Area command.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Zoom > Previous Area
View > Zoom > Fit
View > Zoom > PIP
7.9.2.2.
What
The Previous Area command restores the viewing window to the previous view.
1016
Why
The Previous Area command is useful for:
Zooming to a previous view
How to Use
How to zoom to a previous area
1.
Go to View > Zoom > Previous Area or click the icon in the toolbar. The Shift + X
keyboard shortcut can also be used.
Note: The history of the Zoom Previous Area command is stacked when the Zoom
Area command is executed: however it is unavailable until the Zoom Area command
has been executed first.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Zoom > Area
View > Zoom > Fit
View > Zoom > PIP
7.9.2.3.
View > Zoom > Fit
What
The Fit command fits a model into the viewing window.
1017
Why
The Fit command is useful for:
Zooming a model to fit to the viewing window
How to Use
How to fit a model to the model view
1.
Go to View > Zoom > Fit or click the icon in the toolbar. The Ctrl + F keyboard shortcut
can also be used.
Note: The history of the Zoom Previous Area command is stacked when the Zoom
Area command is executed: however it is unavailable until the Zoom Area command
has been executed first.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Zoom > Area
View > Zoom > PIP
7.9.2.4.
View > Zoom > PIP
What
1018
The PIP command creates a pop-up window that zooms onto a specific position.
Event
Short Cut / Action
Window Toggle
Ctrl + W
Close Window
Esc
Move
Ctrl + Left Mouse Button
Window Size
Ctrl + Mouse Wheel
Magnification
Mouse Wheel
Fix Center of Window

Compensate Center (Click and drag the position that you want to
set the center of the window)
Close Window
Edit Window Size
Why
The PIP command is useful for:
Zooming into precise areas without zooming the entire entity
How to Use
How to zoom using the PIP function
1.
Go to View > Zoom > PIP or click the icon in the toolbar. The Ctrl + W keyboard shortcut
can also be used.
1019
Reference
Related Commands
View > Zoom > Area
View > Zoom > Fit
7.9.3. View > Navigate Sections

What
The Navigate Sections command navigates features by utilizing the Back and Forth buttons
. Section appearance options, display options and mode can be changed for selected
sections.
Why
The Navigate Sections command is useful for:
Navigating through sections
How to Use
How to navigate selections
1.
Go to View > Navigate Sections or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Use the Back and Forth buttons
to navigate through the sections of a model.
Options in Detail
Section Selects a section feature.
Edit Current Section Enters the Section mode for the currently navigated section.
Appearance Options
Show Deviation Shows or hides deviation for a current section.
Show Nominal Geometry Shows or hides a current nominal section.
1020
Show Scan Geometry Shows or hides a current scan section.

Show Tags Shows or hides tags on a current section.
Show Ref. Geometries Shows or hides ref. geometries for a current section.
Show GD&Ts Shows or hides GD&T for a current section.
Display Options
Use Tolerance Color Displays a green tolerance color on a section deviation.
Whisker Multiplier Adjusts the length of a whisker for deviation.
Whisker Display Ratio Adjusts the display ratio of a whisker for deviation.
7.9.4. View > Mesh Display Mode

What
The Mesh Display Mode sets the display mode of a mesh by utilizing the following mode types:
Point Set Draws only poly vertices.
Wireframe Draws only the edges of faces.
Shaded Draws shaded faces.
Texture Draws textures.
Region Draws regions.
1021
Point Set: F5
Wireframe: F6
Shaded: F7
Shaded With Edges: F8
Why
The Mesh Display Mode is useful for:
Displaying mesh using one of the available display filters
How to Use
How to select a mesh display mode
1.
Go to View > Mesh Display Mode > Point Set / Wireframe / Shaded / Shaded With
Edge or click the icon in the toolbar.
7.9.5. View > Body Display Mode

What
The Body Display Mode sets the display mode of a surface or solid body by utilizing the following
mode types:
Wireframe Draws only the edges of bodies.
Hidden Line Draws all hidden lines on a body as dotted lines.
Shaded Draws all shaded faces.

1022
Wireframe
Hidden Line
Shaded
Shaded With Edges
Why
The Body Display Mode is useful for:
Displaying bodies using one of the available display filters
How to Use
How to select a body display mode
1.
Go to View > Body Display Mode > Wireframe / Hidden Line / Shaded / Shaded With
Edge or click the icon in the toolbar.
1023
7.9.6. View > Viewpoint

What
The Viewpoint commands set the view direction as one of seven pre-defined views and can also
be used to rotate, flip and align a models view.
Add
Captures a custom viewpoint.
Viewpoint
Viewpoints
Controls preset views of a model.
1024
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Isometric
Bottom
Rotate CCW
1025
Rotate CW
Flip
Align View
Sets the view direction in the Model View by aligning to an entity.
Before Align View
After Align View
Note: The Align View function can be reversed by holding the Ctrl button on the
keyboard while using the function.
Why
The Viewpoint command is useful for:
Setting the viewpoint of a model in the model view
1026
How to Use
How to select a viewpoint
1.
Go to View > Viewpoint > Front / Back / Left / Right / Top / Bottom / Isometric or click
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.7. View > Viewport

What
The Viewport commands set the viewing window a pre-set view layout, each having its own
properties.
1 View Displays one view.
1027
2 Vertical Views Displays the view into two vertical panes.
2 Horizontal Views Displays the view into two horizontal panes.
3 Left Horizontal Views Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the left
side and one full horizontal pane on the right side.
1028
3 Right Horizontal Views Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the
right side and one full horizontal pane on the left side.
3 TopVertical Views Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the top half
and one full horizontal pane on the bottom half.
3 BottomVertical Views Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the
bottom half and one full horizontal pane on the top half.
1029
4 Views - Displays the view into four equal sized panes.
Why
The Viewport command is useful for:
Setting the viewport window mode in the model view
How to Use
How to select a viewport
1.
Go to View > Viewport > 1 View / 2 Vertical Views / 2 Horizontal Views / 3 Left
Horizontal Views / 3 Right Horizontal Views / 3 Top Vertical Views / 3 Bottom
Vertical Views / 4 Views or click the icon in the toolbar.
7.9.8. View > Light Properties

What
The Light Properties command enables changing of the direction or the color of a light source.
1030
Why
The Light Properties command is useful for:
Customizing the lighting conditions of the viewing area
How to Use
How to set light properties
1.
Go to View > Light Properties or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Drag light sources to desired positions in the model view. The shadow will change while
the light source is altered.
1031
3.
Options in Detail
Methods
Light Sets the color of each light source.
Light 1 Sets the color of light 1.
Reset Resets all light settings back to default.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.9. View > View Clip

What
The View Clip command enables viewing of a model by clipping away a part of it.
1032
Why
The View Clip command is useful for:
Clipping away an area of a model to inspect it
How to Use
How to clip a view
1.
Go to View > View Clip or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select the Inside Box option and a bounding box used to select the clipping area will
appear.
3.
The dimensions of the box can be adjusted by dragging the blue arrows or the green
points.
1033
4.
Options in Detail
Methods
Use View Clip Toggles the view clip on or off.
Below Plane Defines a cutting plane and clips all model data above it. The Position and
Normal Direction options of the plane can be defined unless the View Align option is used, in
which case the normal of the plane aligns to the screen direction.
Between Two Planes Defines two cutting planes and clips all model data outside of the two
planes. The Position or Normal Direction options of the plane can be defined unless the View
Align option is used, in which case the normal of the plane aligns to the screen direction. The
Depth option can be used to set the distance between two preview planes.
Inside Box Defines a cutting box and clips all model data outside of the box. The box can be
resized in the Model View.
Reset Resets view clipping to default.
Plane Options
Position Sets the position of the view clip plane.
X Sets the X position.
Y Sets the Y position.
Z Sets the Z position.
Normal Direction Sets the direction of the normal.
1034
X Sets the X position.

Y Sets the Y position.
Z Sets the Z position.
View Align Aligns the normal direction to the global coordinates.
Reference
Related Commands
7.9.10. View > Annotation Alignment

What
The Annotation Alignment command selects a method of annotation display in the Model View.
There are three different types of annotation alignment:
Snapped: Aligns annotations without overlapping and can be repositioned.
Automatic: Aligns annotations near the border of the Model View and cannot be repositioned.
Close To Object: Aligns annotations that cannot be repositioned near a model which might
cause overlapping.
Why
The Annotation Alignment command is useful for:
Setting an annotation display method

1035
How to Use
How to select an annotation display method
1.
Go to View > Annotation Alignment > Snapped / Automatic / Close To Object or click
the desired icon in the toolbar.
Reference
Related Commands
View > Annotation Display Control
7.9.11. View > Annotation Display Control

What
The Annotation Display Control command controls items in annotations such as fonts and item
visibility. This command can be directly accessed in the pop-up menu or by right clicking on an
entity in the Model View.
Why
The Annotation Display Control command is useful for:
Setting control items in annotations
How to Use
How to change annotation display controls
1.
Create a comparison point.
2.
Go to View > Annotation Display Control or click the icon in the toolbar.
1036
3.
Select Comparison Point in Annotation Types. Change the font color to red and
uncheck the Shadow option.
Uncheck Nominal Pos. and Dir. in Property Visibility.
Click the Apply button.
4.
The display of the annotation will be changed.
Options in Detail
Annotation Types Selects a type of annotation to edit.
Format Changes font type and color.
1037
Preset Management Edits default annotation and simple annotation properties or adds a new
preset. To remove all existing presets click the Clear All button. To generate a default and simple
annotation click the Get Defaults button.
Default Preset
Simple Preset
Property Visibility Displays selected items in annotations.

Arrangement For Sets the display order of items using the up and down arrows buttons. To
make a group select vector-type items that have X, Y and Z values or scalar-type items that have a
gap distance and click the button
Ungrouped
Grouped
Result Color From Colorbar Applies the background color of tags from a positions deviation
color defined by the colorbar. If this option is not checked, the pass or fail color will be applied.
Color from Colorbar
Color from Pass / Fail
Hide Property Name This option is activated when only one option except name is checked in
the Property Visibility list. This option hides property name and show only value.
Show Property Name
Hide Property Name

1038
Use Label Instead of Annotation This option displays only the name of geometry. This option
is available only for ref. geometries which have its scan pair geometry.
Show Property Name
Hide Property Name
Reference
Related Commands
View > Annotation Alignment
7.9.12. View > Maximize View Area

What
The Maximize View Area command maximizes the viewing area in the Model View by hiding
other menu items such as menu bars, tool palettes and toolbars. When the Report tab is selected
only the menu for generating reports will be displayed and all others will be hidden. The keyboard
shortcut for this command is F12.
Why
The Maximize View Area command is useful for:
Maximizing viewing space in the Model View

1039
How to Use
How to maximize the viewing area
1.
Go to View > Maximize View Area or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note: Once the Maximize View Area button is clicked, the name will change to Restore View
Area. Click the Restore View Area button to return back to the original area size.
7.10. Add-Ins
The Add-Ins menu has various functions that are used to handle point clouds and polygons and
generate complete polygon data.
The Add-Ins menu is divided into five tool groups used to:
Import and Register Scan Data
Import Large Data

Imports large scan files using the Suppress option to manage data and memory.
Import & Split

Splits ASC, STL, OBJ, and PLY scan data file formats by the number of vertices or number of
meshes when importing.
Global Register
Aligns scan data files globally.
Register Target
Aligns target scan data files automatically using alignment spheres.
Triangulate and Merge Scan Data
2D Triangulate
Creates a polygonal mesh from scan points.
3D Triangulate
Converts a full 3D point cloud to a polygonal mesh.
Triangulate/Merge Large Data

Triangulates and merges meshes or point clouds.
1040
Surface Merge
Creates a single mesh from several scan shots.
Volume Merge
Creates a single mesh from several scan shots by utilizing a volumetric method.
Combine
Joins selected point clouds or meshes together into a single point cloud or mesh.
Control Normal
Find Scan Direction

Finds and shows the scan directions of a selected scan data.

Creates normal information for a point cloud without creating polygonal meshes.
Reverse Normal
Flips the normal direction of point clouds or meshes.
Modify Scan Data
Delete Poly-Faces
Removes poly-faces without entering the Mesh mode.
Trim Mesh
Cuts off regions surrounded by reference curves on a mesh or aligns poly-edges along
reference curves.
Deviation
Contour Curve From Whole Deviation

Converts the color map where a Whole Deviation is applied to a contour curve type.
7.10.1. Add-Ins > Import Large Data

What
The Import Large Data is similar to File > Import Scan Data. Differences between the two
commands are Run Inspection Process and Suppress. In Import Large Data, there is no Run
Inspection Process option and there is Suppress option to manage data and memory by
swapping the data dynamically between in physical memory and in hard disk.
1041
Why
The Import Large Data command is useful for:
Importing large scan files with Suppress option which manages data and memory
Options in Detail
Unit Displays a dialog box to select a proper unit if the size of imported data is too large.
7.10.2. Add-Ins > Import & Split

What
The Import & Split command splits scan data by the number of vertices or number of meshes
while importing ASC, STL, OBJ, and PLY file formats. If data files are too large to import at one time
this command features the Suppress option in the Import dialog box which separates the file and
loads them onto the hard disk drive one at a time.
Why
The Import & Split command is useful for:
Importing large scan files as split vertices or meshes
Options in Detail
Split By Number Of Vertices Splits scan data as specified value. If it is set to 1000, every scan
data will contain 1000 vertices.
Split By Number Of Meshes (or Point Cloud) Divides a mesh as specified value. If it is set to 3,
the input data is divided into three meshes.
1042
Overlap Ratio Among Meshes (or Point Cloud) Makes overlap region by specified ratio
among split meshes.
7.10.3. Add-Ins > Global Register

What
The Global Register command aligns selected scan data globally like Global And Fine of Align.
Note: The command is activated when there are two data at least.
Why
The Global Register command is useful for:
Aligning scan data
How to Use
How to align multiple scans globally
1.
Go to Add-Ins > Global Register or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select all meshes as Moving.
1043
3.
Options in Detail
Reference / Moving To fix the position of scan data click the Reference button and select scan
data. If the position does not matter, click the Moving button and select scan data. All scan data
can be included in the Moving group.
Sample Ratio Large data sets can be sampled using 1/1, 1/4, 1/9, 1/16, 1/25, 1/36, 1/49 and
1/64 sampling ratios. This will not affect registration result but will greatly decrease processing
time.
More Options
Max. Iteration Count Specifies the number of times a registration iterates.
Max. Average Deviation Judges if registration results are good enough based on deviation
criteria. The system will try to make the average deviation of a final model less than the value
specified as the Max. Iteration Count.
Apply Only Small Transform Considers an entire overlapped region well aligned and only
makes a small transformation. It is recommended to check this option if there are few geometric
features in the overlapped region.
Use Only Reliable Scan Data Leaves boundary vertices out of consideration when a
1044
registration is performed and doesn't regard vertices as noise.

Do Not Align Between Moving Object Performs an alignment between the Reference group
and Moving group only.
Update View & Histogram Updates the Model View and Histogram in real-time during
calculation and displays registration results. This option lengthens the operation time.
Reference
Related Commands
7.10.4. Add-Ins > Register Target

What
The Register Target command roughly aligns meshes by matching target alignment spheres.
Note: The command is activated when history of Inspection Feature is rolled to Scan Data. To
make the rolled status, go to Edit > Roll To Start.
Why
The Register Target command is useful for:
Combining multiple scans that are too large for one scan
Combining multiple scans that require the use of target alignment spheres
1045
How to Use
How to align multiple scans by matching target alignment spheres
1.
Go to Add-Ins > Register Target or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select all meshes as Meshes targets.
.
3.
Click the Estimate button to automatically get the ball size. When scan data is rough, the
tolerance value can be increased. When scan data is smooth, the tolerance value can be
decrease to help accurately find spheres.
4.
Options in Detail
Selection Methods
Scan Data Select meshes or point clouds.
Shared Scan Folder Selects a folder to align files from.
Select Share Folder Chooses a designated shared scan folder.
1046
Ball Radius
Acceptable Tolerance Specifies the allowable tolerance for the radius of target spheres.
Min. Size Of Cluster Specifies the minimum number of poly-faces/vertices of a target sphere.
Max. Size Of Cluster Specifies the maximum number of poly-faces/vertices of a target sphere.
More Options
Ignore Spike Faces Ignores spiky faces on targets.
Use Curvature Separates regions by curvature.
Note: Target spheres must be disconnected from the rest of the scan to be found
automatically, or manually located.
Reference
Related Commands
Edit > Roll To Start
7.10.5. Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate

What
The 2D Triangulate command creates a polygonal mesh from scan points. First, the scan vertices
in three dimensional space are projected onto a two dimensional plane specified by a user. Then a
triangulation process is applied to the projected points and triangular faces are created. This
command can be applied to only point clouds. Triangulation of mesh is tried is not enabled for this
command.
1047
Note: If this command is applied to a PTS formatted point cloud, the triangulation
process will be performed in its local coordinate system and all scan vertices will be
projected onto the local XY plane before triangulation.
After projection if overlapping areas remain, change the projection direction or
triangulation method.
Note: The command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is
rolled to Scan Data using the Edit > Roll To Start command.
Why
The 2D Triangulate command is useful for:
Creating a polygonal mesh from scan points
How to Use
How to create a polygonal mesh
1. Go to Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a point cloud and choose the Planar method.
3. Click the Estimate button

next to the Maximum Edge Length Is Larger Than option to
automatically estimate the average distance among points.
1048
Options in Detail
Point Clouds Selects point clouds.
Projection Method
Planar Projects scan vertices onto a plane and triangulates them. The Projection Direction is the
direction scan points are projected onto a plane. When -Z is selected, points are projected along
the negative Z direction. This is useful for scan data that is located entirely in front of the XY plane
and generates non-overlapped projected points. When +Z is selected, points are projected along
the positive Z direction. This is useful for scan data that is located entirely behind the XY plane
and generates non-overlapped projected points. When Current Viewing Direction is selected, the
vertices are projected along the current view direction. This is useful for scan data that can
generate non-overlapped projected points along the view direction, but not in the -Z or +Z
directions.
Spherical Used to triangulate spherical scan data obtained by certain types of scanners such as
long range scanners. When selected, a Center node will be displayed in the dialog tree. It is used
to decide the scanner position. Normally the default values (X - 0, Y - 0, Z - 0) can be used because
in most situations the scanner's position is the origin in the world coordinate system. However,
when scan data was transformed before triangulation, new X, Y, Z values may be necessary.
Cylindrical Used to triangulate cylindrical scan data obtained by certain types of scanners.
When selected, a Center node and an Axis Direction node will be displayed in the dialog tree. The
Center node is used to decide the scanner position. Normally the default values (X - 0, Y - 0, Z - 0)
can be used because in most situations the scanner's position is the origin in the world
coordinate system. However, when scan data was transformed before triangulation new X, Y, Z
values may be necessary.
Face Removal Criteria

Maximum Edge Length Is Larger Than Removes faces that have abnormally long edges by
inputting a value or using the down and up arrows to adjust the default value to a proper one.
Any faces that have a longest edge length bigger than this value will be removed. Clicking the
1049
Estimate button will average the distance between points.

Area Is Larger Than Removes faces with large area values by inputting a value or use the down
and up arrows to adjust the default value. Any faces that have an area value that is bigger than
this value will be removed.
Max/Min Edge Length Ratio Is Larger Than Removes faces that have unbalanced edges by
inputting a value or using the down and up arrows to adjust the default value. Any faces that
have a ratio between the longest edge and the shortest edge larger than this value will be
removed.
Angle Between Projection Direction And Face Normal Direction Is Larger Than Removes
faces that have normal directions with large angles values in the projection direction by inputting
a value or using the down and up arrows to adjust the default value.
More Options
Suppress Mesh After Triangulation Automatically unload shells after triangulation. When
working with large data sets, it is recommended to check this option.
Reference
Related Commands
7.10.6. Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate

What
The 3D Triangulate command converts a full 3D point cloud to a polygonal mesh. This command
can be applied to only point clouds. Triangulation of a mesh is not allowed in this command.
1050
Note: The command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is rolled to
Scan Data using the Edit > Roll To Start command.
Why
The 3D Triangulate command is useful for:
Creating a polygonal mesh from a 3D point cloud
How to Use
How to create a polygonal mesh
1. Go to Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a point cloud and choose the Planar method.
3. Click the Estimate button

next to the Distance Criteria Connect To Vertices option to
automatically estimate the average distance among points.
Options in Detail
Point Clouds Selects point clouds.
Distance Parameters
Distance Criteria Connect To Vertices Automatically calculates the distance criteria for
connecting to vertices by clicking the Estimate button. Values will be standard distances for
connecting vertices.
1051
More Options
Assume Vertices Are Densely Placed Along A Direction Triangulates scan-line type point
clouds.
Crease Angle Specifies the smallest angle between the normal vectors of to-be-generated
polygonal faces. For polygonal model created by triangulation, there should be no polygonal
faces with angles smaller than the angle between its normal and the normal of its adjacent faces.
Large Data Mode Helps for working with large data. If point cloud is too large to be handled by
current physical memory, use this option.
Suppress Scan Data After Triangulate Automatically suppresses point clouds after
triangulation. When working with large data sets, it is recommended to use this option.
Reference
Related Commands
7.10.7. Add-Ins > Triangulate/Merge Large Data

What
The Triangulate/Merge Large Data command triangulates and merges meshes or point clouds.
For processing large data, suppressed meshes or point clouds can be selected in the command.
The textures on meshes or point clouds will be converted to colored points after merging and
triangulation.
1052
Note: The command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is rolled to
Scan Data using the Edit > Roll To Start command.
Why
The Triangulate/Merge Large Data command is useful for:
Triangulating and merging large data
How to Use
How to triangulate and merge large data
1. Go to Add-Ins > Triangulate/Merge Large Data or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the meshes or point clouds. If using large data files, suppress them first.
3. Move the slider of the Mesh Density option towards Dense.

4. Click the OK button. A merged single mesh will be created.
1053
Options in Detail
Mesh / Point Cloud Selects meshes or point clouds. Suppressed meshes or point clouds can be
selected.
Mesh Density Determines the density of the mesh when creating poly-faces.
Sparse
Dense
Remove Original Data Removes original data.

Reduce Noise Removes noisy poly-faces.
Disable Reduce Noise
Enable Reduce Noise
Remove Redundant Points Removes redundant poly-vertices for better triangulation results.
Use Original File Data Removes an original point cloud after triangulation.
Reference
Related Commands
7.10.8. Add-Ins > Surface Merge

What
The Surface Merge command creates a single mesh from several scan shots. During the merging
1054
process, overlapped regions are removed and neighboring boundaries are stitched together.
Note: The command is activated when there are at least two meshes.
Why
The Surface Merge command is useful for:
Merging several scan data
How to Use
How to merging scan data by using the Surface Merge command
1. Go to Add-Ins > Surface Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select desired meshes as Meshes.
1055
Options in Detail
Meshes Selects meshes.
Output Resolution Control

Estimated Num. Of Face Calculates and displays the rough count of total faces when the
Estimate button is clicked.
Ratio Sets the Reduction Ratio to reduce the total number of faces from original data.
100%
50%
Moving the slider of the Preserve High Curvature Regions option towards More will generate
more poly-faces in highly rounded areas than in flat areas.
Less
More
Allowable Deviation Sets the allowable deviation when performing a surface merge.
More Options
Scale Of Overlap Region Deviation Criteria Creates better merged results when mesh size is
very small and there are not many overlapping regions.
Use Original File Data Used to specify a new Sampling Ratio even if a different sampling ratio
was used when importing the file. This option is enabled when importing grid type data.
Reference
Related Commands
1056
7.10.9. Add-Ins > Volume Merge

What
The Volume Merge command creates a single mesh from several scan shots. It merges meshes by
utilizing a volumetric method.
Note: This method can generate smoother results at overlapping regions than
surface merges with meshes that have complex boundaries or meshes that were
poorly registered.
When meshes have complex boundaries, the processing speed can be faster than
that of surface merging, but for simple meshes, it can take more time.
Note: The command will be activated when there are at least two data files.
Why
The Volume Merge command is useful for:
Merging several scan data by volumetric method
How to Use
How to merging scan data by using the Volume Merge command
1. Go to Add-Ins > Volume Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select desired meshes as Meshes.
1057
Options in Detail
Meshes Selects meshes.
Output Resolution Control

Scale Of Average Edge Length Sets the ratio of edge lengths of a merged mesh. If a number
larger than 1 is used, the edge length of the merged mesh will be larger than the edge length of
the original meshes. If it is set as 1.0, the number of faces created from volume merging will be
similar with that from surface merging.
Estimated Num. Of Face Calculates and displays a rough count of total faces.
Ratio Reduces the total number of faces from the original data by setting the Reduction Ratio.
100%
50%
Moving the Preserve High Curvature Regions slider towards More, will generate more polyfaces in highly rounded areas than in flat areas.
1058
Less
More
Allowable Deviation Sets the allowable deviation when performing a volume merge.
More Options
Fast Volume Calculation Projects meshes without overlapping to speed up volume calculation.
Optimize Face Shape Applies decimation and constraint smoothing to meshes, automatically
deleting erroneous faces such as spikes.
Large Data Mode Helps for working with large data. If point cloud is too large to be handled by
current physical memory, use this option.
Suppress Mesh After Merging Internally suppresses divided sub models individually. This
helps when working with very large data files.
Use Original File Data Used to specify a new Sampling Ratio even if a different sampling ratio
was used when importing the file. This option is enabled when importing grid type data.
Reference
Related Commands
7.10.10.
Add-Ins > Combine
What
The Combine command joins selected point clouds or meshes together into a single point cloud
or a mesh without removing overlapping areas.
1059
Note: The command is activated when there are at least two data files.
Why
Combining several point clouds or meshes into a single point cloud or mesh
How to Use
How to combine meshes
1. Click Add-Ins > Combine.
2. Select point clouds or meshes.
3. Click the OK button. Meshes will be combined.
Options in Detail
Type To Combine Chooses the entity type to combine.
Remove Overlap Region Creates a combined point cloud or mesh after removing overlapped
1060
regions.
Before Combining
7.10.11.
Combine Without Remove
Combine With Remove
Overlap Region
Overlap Region
Add-Ins > Find Scan Direction
What
The Find Scan Direction command finds and shows the scan directions of selected scan data.
Note: When applying the 2D Triangulate operation to create polygons from point
clouds that do not include scan directions, the normal direction of each shell may be
different from the direction anticipated. In this situation it is better to apply the Find
Scan Direction operation to the point clouds before triangulating.
Note: The command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is
rolled to Scan Data by going to Edit > Roll To Start.
Why
Combining several point clouds/meshes into a point cloud/mesh
1061
How to Use
How to find the direction of scan data
1. Go to Add-Ins > Find Scan Direction or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select desired point clouds as Entities.
4. Click arrows to reverse their direction in the Model View.
Options in Detail
Entities Selects point clouds or meshes.
Except Entities With Scan Direction Prevents the selection of entities that already have a scan
direction.
Point Arrange Type Specifies whether scan data is Grid type or Random type. The point type
helps you to find the scan direction more precisely.
Reference
1062
Related Commands
7.10.12.
Add-Ins > Generate Vertex Normal
What
The Generate Vertex Normal command creates normal information for a point cloud without
creating polygonal meshes.
Note: When a point cloud has normal information, it will be displayed more
realistically no matter what Shading Method is used. If a point cloud does not have
normal information, pseudo vertex rendering using depth information will be
applied.
Note: This command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is
Why
Generating the normal information of a point cloud
How to Use
How to generate normal information
1. Go to Add-Ins > Generate Vertex Normal or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select all point clouds.
1063
3. Click the Next Stage button. The normal of two point clouds is not correct.
4. Click the Point Cloud button and select two point clouds.
5. Click the Reverse Normal button
then click the OK button.
Options in Detail
Points Clouds Selects point clouds.
Except Entities With Scan Direction Prevents the selection of point clouds that already have
vertex normals.
Reference
Related Commands
1064
7.10.13.
Add-Ins > Reverse Normal
What
The Reverse Normal command flips the normal of point clouds or meshes.
Note: This command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is
Why
Flipping the normal of point clouds/meshes
How to Use
How to flip a normal
1. Go to Add-Ins > Reverse Normal or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select point clouds as Entities. In the image below the left entity is the point cloud.
1065
Options in Detail
Entities Selects point clouds or meshes.
Selection Type To Reverse Normal Selects an item type to reverse.
Reference
Related Commands
7.10.14.
Add-Ins > Delete Poly-Faces
What
The Delete Poly-Faces command quickly removes poly-faces.
Why
The Delete Poly-Faces command is useful for:
Deleting individual irregular poly-faces from multiple meshes at one time

1066
Deleting extraneous poly-faces from scan data
How to Use
How to delete poly-faces from scan data
1.
Go to Add-Ins > Delete Poly-Faces or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select poly-faces to remove.
3.
Click the Delete Selected Entities button or press the Delete key.
4.
Options in Detail
Deleting
Select Poly-Faces Selects poly-faces to delete.
Reference
1067
Related Commands
Edit > Delete
7.10.15.
Add-Ins > Trim Mesh
What
The Trim Mesh command cuts off regions surrounded by reference curves on a mesh, or aligns
poly-edges along reference curves.
Why
The Trim Mesh command is useful for:
Deleting unwanted areas of mesh
Deleting extraneous mesh from scan data
Using child curve features to cut a mesh
How to Use
A. How to trim meshes from scan data using the By Curve method
1.
Go to Add-Ins > Trim Mesh or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select the By Curve method. Choose a Mesh and Curves. Set the Method to Split PolyFaces.
1068
.
3.
Click the Next Stage button.
4.
B. How to trim meshes from scan data using the By Custom Path method
1.
Go to Add-Ins > Trim Mesh or click the icon in the toolbar.
2.
Select the By Custom Path method. Created a desired path.
.
3.
Click the Next Stage button.
1069
4.
Select the remaining Region and click the OK button to complete the command.
Options in Detail
Methods
By Custom Path Trims a mesh using a custom path.
Drawing Custom Path
Undo Path
Close Path
By Curve Trims a mesh using existing closed curves.

Trim Path Undoes, closes and discards paths.
Curve Options
Mesh Selects mesh.
Curves Selects Curves.
Method Selects a method.
1070
Rearrange Poly-Vertices Trims by projecting nearby poly-vertices onto selected curves.
Split Poly-Faces Trims by dividing poly-faces with selected curves at intersecting

positions between poly-edges and curves.
Max. Curve To Poly-Vertex Distance Sets the maximum allowable distance from a
curve to a poly vertex.
Max. Edge Splitting Ratio Sets the maximum allowable splitting ratio of edges.
Remaining Region
Remaining Region Selects what regions will remain.
7.10.16.
Add-Ins > Contour Curve From Whole
Deviation
What
The Contour Curve From Whole Deviation command converts a color map where Whole
Deviation is applied to a contour curve type. It also extracts the boundary of a deviation map to
curves. The created curves can be exported using the File > Export command and can be used to
compare and analyze results in another programs.
1071
Why
The Contour Curve From Whole Deviation command is useful for:
Converting deviation from the Whole Deviation to the contour curve type
How to Use
How to convert Whole Deviation to contour curve type
1. Go to Add-Ins > Contour Curve From Whole Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar
2. Select the desired whole deviation in the Select Whole Dev Entity option.
3. Click OK. The contour curves will be created.
Options in Detail
Select Whole Dev Entity Selects a desired Whole Deviation entity. If the Whole Deviation
command has been performed several times, one entity should be selected from them.
Min. Curve Length Specifies the length of curves to be displayed in the Model View. When set
to a small value, the displayed contour curves will be more detailed.
10mm
50mm
Smoothness Smooth curves. When it is set to a value closer to Min, curves will be less rounded.
1072
When it is set to a value closer to Max, curves will be more rounded.
Max
Min
7.11. Help
Help > Context
The Help > Context menu loads the contents and index table of the help file into the Help window.
When a specific item is double-clicked, the context will appear in the Help tab of the working
window. To access documentation on a specific operation while a dialog tree is floating, press the
F1 key while in that operation.
Help > Quick Start Guide

Going to Help > Quick Start Guide loads the quick start guide into the Help window. The purpose
of the quick start guide is to give a quick start understanding of the inspection processes in the
application. By working through the tutorial procedures, the fundamentals of the application can
be learned.
Help > Tutorial

Going to Help > Tutorial loads the Tutorial that is installed with software.
Help > Release Note

Going to Help > Release Note loads the release note for that version of the application that shows
the new and enhanced functions and fixed bugs in the current version and previous versions.
Help > Check For Update

Going to Help > Check For Update checks the version of the application installed on your
machine and downloads the latest patch files if any exist.
Note: There are two methods to update the application:
1. Letting the application automatically check when it is started.
2. Manually using the Help > Check For Update command.
1073
Help > License Information

Going to Help > License Information displays the current license information, like license type
and expiry date.
Help > Activate License

The Help > Activate License command activates a current license. Follow the on screen
instructions to complete the activation.
Help > Activate Maintenance

The Help > Activate Maintenance command activates a maintenance license.
Help > Deactivate License

The Help > Deactivate License command can be used to deactivate your current license. Follow
the on screen instructions to complete the deactivation.
Help > Launch Performance Profiler

Going to Help > Launch Performance Profiler runs a utility which analyzes the graphic driver,
memory, processor speed, etc. of a PC and sets the best values in the Hardware tab in the
Preferences. After performing the Performance Profiler the resulting file will be saved as an .htm
document in the installation folder with the name of the PC. This document contains the hardware
specifications of your system.
Note:
The Performance Profiler can also be found in the Windows Start menu, but this
command doesnt save the results as an .htm file and its calculation speed is quicker
than in the version found in the Help menu. If a system setting, for example a new
graphic card has been installed, use the Performance Profiler in the Windows Start
menu to get the system information and register changed settings to the
application.
When running the Performance Profiler, it is better to close all other applications
for accurate results. The profiler takes about 2 or 3 minutes to complete the
performance evaluation.
Help > Support

Going to Help > Support loads the Support tab which connects to the solution center. The Online
Support Page in the Support tab can be searched for information. The support tab provides helpful
information such as the latest tutorials, FAQs, and technical tips. As well, feedback for Rapidform
products can be sent.
The Online Support Page can be accessed by going to:
1074
https://rapidform.zendesk.com/home
Help > About

The Help > About menu displays a window including information about the application, such as
the version of the product, the product ID and copyright information. Click the window to close it.
8. Glossary
This chapter explains the definition of terms used in Rapidform XOV. The following sections define
many of the basic terms and concepts you should know in order to use Rapidform effectively.
A
ACIS
A standard computer file format for exchanging CAD data, usually from Auto CAD.
Actual Size
A general term for the size of a produced feature. This term includes the actual mating size and the
actual local sizes.
Actual Mating Envelope
This term is defined according to the type of feature, as follows"
a) For an external feature. A similar perfect counterpart of smallest size that can be
circumscribed about the feature so that it just contacts the surface at the highest points. For
example, a smallest cylinder of perfect form or two parallel planes of perfect form at minimum
separation that just contact(s) the highest points of the surface(s).
b) For an internal feature. A similar perfect counterpart of largest size that can be inscribed
within the feature so that it just contacts the surface at the highest points. For example, a
largest cylinder of perfect form or two parallel planes of perfect form at maximum separation
that just contact(s) the highest points of the surface(s).
For features controlled by orientation or positional tolerances, the actual mating envelope is
oriented relative to the appropriate datum(s), for example, perpendicular to a primary datum plane.
ASME Y14.5M-1994
The national standard for dimensioning and tolerancing in the United States. ASME stands for
American Society of Mechanical Engineers. The Y14.5 is the standard number. "M" is to indicate the
standard is metric, and 1994 is the date the standard was officially approved.
ASCII
Rapidform XOV3 | Glossary
1075
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). Typically a representation of text files,
as opposed to binary files.
Aspect Ratio
Ratio of width to height.
Axis
A straight line that can be used to create model geometry, features, or patterns. An axis can be
made in a number of different ways, including using the intersection of two planes. See temporary
axis, reference geometry.
Accuracy
The accuracy is the closeness of a measurement to the actual feature. The opposite of accuracy is
uncertainty, which is an inverse perspective of the same value.
Alignment
The process of aligning two objects in a common coordinate system. Commonly refers to aligning
scan data to reference objects in inspection applications.
B
Basic Dimension
A numerical value used to describe a theoretically exact size, true profile, orientation, or location of
a feature or datum target.
Bitmap
A Bitmap is a pixel by pixel image.
Boundary
A series of poly-edges that form the borders of a model or an internal hole
Bounding Box
A bounding box is a rectangular box that fully encloses mesh data. It is oriented to the world
coordinate system.
Body
A 3D object. It is composed of one or more components. When a body contains more than one
component, it is a disjointed body.
C
1076
CAD
Computer Aided Design.
CAM
Computer Aided Manufacturing. CAM is a set of technologies that convert designs into data used
to run the manufacturing process.
CAI
Computer Aided Inspection. CAI is a set of technologies that convert designs into data used to run
the inspection process.
CMM
Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM). A contact 3D scanner using physical touch used mostly in
manufacturing and can be very precise. CMMs require contact with the object being scanned
which is a disadvantage when touching the object may modify or damage it. Compared to noncontact optical laser scanning, scanning within a touch CMM is relatively slow.
Calibration
The process of verifying that a measuring instrument is within its designated accuracy. Calibration
usually consists of formal comparison with a standard traceable to national standards (NIST in US)
and certified references.
Control Points
A set of points that parameterize and control the shape of a NURBS curve or surface.
Curvature
This is a mathematically-defined term which refers to the amount of roundness located at a point
on a curve or surface. If a curve is flat, then its curvature is zero. As the curve becomes more
rounded, the radius of curvature goes down and the curvature goes up. Curvature 'k' = 1 / rho,
where rho is defined as the radius of curvature. These two values ('k' and 'rho') are inversely related.
Curve
A curve is a mathematical function that describes the path of a point moving through space. In the
application, curves are displayed by sampling the mathematical description of the curve at
specified intervals, then drawing line segments between these sample points.
Continuity
The continuity between the patches of a B-surface or segments of a B-surface can be of various
levels:
C' Continuity for curves and surfaces:
C0 means that the positions are continuous in both magnitude and direction.
C1 means that the positions and first derivatives are continuous in both magnitude and direction.
1077
C2 means that the positions and first and second derivatives are continuous in both magnitude
and direction.
'G' Continuity for curves:
G0 means that the positions are continuous in direction but not necessarily in magnitude.
G1 means that the positions and first derivatives are continuous in direction but not necessarily in
magnitude.
G2 means that the positions and first and second derivatives are continuous in direction but not
necessarily in magnitude.
'G' Continuity for surfaces:
G0 means that the positions are continuous in direction but not necessarily in magnitude.
G1 means that the positions and surface normals are continuous in direction but not necessarily in
magnitude.
G2 means that the positions, surface normals, and curvatures are continuous in direction but not
necessarily in magnitude.
Color Map
A color plot visually representing deviations from actual to theoretical.
D
Datum
A theoretical exact point, axis, or plane derived from the true geometric counterpart of a specified
datum feature. A datum is the origin from which the location or geometric characteristics of the
features of a part are established.
Situation features are used to define the position and/or orientation of a tolerance zone, or to
define the position and/or orientation of the virtual conditions (in the case of complementary
requirements, e.g. maximum material requirement).
Datum System
Ordered list of at least two datums and at most three datums, which may be single or common
datums. A set of symbols and rules that communicate to the drawing user how dimensional
measurements are to be made.
Datum Feature
A feature of a part that is used to establish a datum.
Datum Reference Frame
A datum system is an ordered list of at least one datums and at most three datums, which may be
single or common datums. They are a set of symbols and rules that communicate to the user who
is drawing on how dimensional measurements are to be made.
1078
Datum Target
A specified point, line, or area on a part used to establish a datum. It can also be a portion of an
integral feature (surface) which can be a point, a line or an area.
Decimation
An operation that reduces the number of entities in an object. It attempts to preserve the object's
overall shape and sharp features while simplifying it.
Degrees of Freedom
Describes the numbers of directions of movement and refers to how the position and orientation
of an object is described relative to a coordinate system. In 3D scanning it usually consists of three
linear translations (X, Y, and Z) and three rotations about the three axes (pitch, yaw, and roll).
Deviation
As typically applied to 3D scanning, deviation refers to the difference in the size and shape of a
manufactured part versus its design specifications. Deviation is easily discovered by quality
inspection with the use of color maps and cross-sectional analysis found in CAI applications.
Dimension
A numerical value expressed in appropriate units of measurement and used to define the size,
location, orientation, form, or other geometric characteristics of a part.
Drag-select
The selection of entities by moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button.
Draft
Draft is incorporated into the wall of a mold so that the opening of the cavity is wider than its base.
Draft allows for easier ejection of the part from the mold.
E
Extrude
An extrude is the shape created by moving a profile along a path that is line.
Entity
An entity is an item in the model which can be accessed by the application.
F
Features
A general term applied to a physical portion of a part, such as a surface, pin, tab, hole or slot.
1079
Fillet
A fillet is an operation that rounds a corner of a profile or an edge of a solid / surface to a specified
radius.
G
Geometries
Geometries are the points, curves and surfaces which specify the shape and position of an element.
Geometric Dimensioning & Tolerancing (GD&T)
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing is a standard used to define the nominal geometry of
parts and assemblies, to define the allowable variation in form and possibly size of individual
features, and to define the allowable variation between features.
H
Healing
A series of functions whose purpose is to correct geometric abnormalities contained within a
model. Common functions may include: surface simplification (mapping spline surfaces to analytic
shapes such as planes, cylinders, cones, etc.), poly-face stitching, and poly-edge gap repair. More
advanced functions may include the ability to merge coincident vertices, repair self-intersections,
and reduce and/or redeploy curve and surface control nodes. Programs typically perform healing
on geometry that you import through neutral formats such as IGES, STEP, and SAT with problems
caused by conditions ranging from imprecise geometric definitions to poor entity mapping to
poorly written translator code.
I
IGES
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification, a standard for exchanging geometric information
Inspection
A methodical examination or evaluation of a part to compare it to a set standard or set of
specifications, such as a 3D model, by taking measurements or performing tests on an item of
interest to analyze for inherent flaws or wear from use. Inspection is one of the main applications
of non-contact laser scanning technologies. Types of inspections include First Article Inspection,
Last Article Inspection, In-Line Inspection, In-Process Inspection, etc.
Interpolation
1080
The process of defining a curve (or surface) that passes through a set of points.
ISO
International Standards Organization. Standards are being developed for the specification of
dimensioning and tolerancing annotation in the 3D space.
ISO 1101- 1983
Geometrical tolerancing. Tolerancing of form, orientation, location and run-out.
ISO/FDIS 1101-1998
Geometrical product specification (GPS). Geometrical Tolerancing - Generalities, definitions,
symbols, indication on drawings.
Final Draft International Standard (FDIS). Revision of ISO 1101:1983.
L
Least Material Condition (LMC)
The condition in which a feature of size contains the least amount of material within the stated
limits if size -- for example, maximum hole diameter, minimum shaft diameter.
Light
A source used to illuminate a model. In the application, there are 4 lights you can use. They are
used to display mesh data with Shaded or Transparent rendering modes. The position of each light
source is shown in the following picture.
LMB
Left Mouse Button.
Loop
A fundamental item of topology representing one boundary of a face as a closed and connected
set of edges.
1081
M
Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
The condition in which a feature of size contains the maximum amount of material within the
stated limits if size -- for example, minimum hole diameter, maximum shaft diameter.
Merge
Combining two or more scan data sets into one larger data set.
Mesh
A wireframe model showing a 3D digital representation of a physical object. Specifying each edge
of the physical object where two mathematically continuous smooth surfaces meet or by
connecting an object's constituent vertices using straight lines or curves creates the mesh.
Mouse Drag
Moving the mouse while pressing and holding a mouse button.
Mirror
A mirror feature is a copy of a selected feature, mirrored about a plane or planar face.
Multi-Thread
Multithreading computers have hardware support to efficiently execute multiple threads. These
are distinguished from multiprocessing systems (such as multi-core systems) in that the threads
have to share the resources of single core
N
Noise
Noise is erroneous data resulting from the scanning process, is usually represented as unnecessary
points in point cloud.
Normal
A surface normal at a point on a surface is a vector which is locally perpendicular to the surface.
Normal describes a unit vector.
NURBS
Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline. This is a type of spline where curves pass close to, but not through
control points or knots and is used in spline-based modeling. Also commonly used to describe
NURBS surfaces; which are surfaces comprised of a number of splines in two directions (U and V).
1082
O
OBJ
An open and widely adopted simple data-format that represents 3D geometry alone, e.g., the
position of each vertex, the texture coordinate associated with a vertex, the normal at each vertex,
and the faces that make each polygon.
P
Parallel Projection view
Parallel Projection view shows a model without any parallax.
Parallelism
Parallelism is the condition that results when a surface, axis or center plane is exactly parallel to a
datum.
Point Cloud
A point cloud is the computer visualization of the XYZ coordinates that describe a physical object
or environment. Each point represents an actual point on the object or in the environment, and
collectively describes its shape and measurements. Points can be captured individually, such as
with a CMM, or thousands at a time, such as with a 3D laser scanner that captures multiple point
sets from different perspectives that can be merged into a cloud. Point clouds are typically
represented by an unorganized STL file.
Point
A point is a single point construction geometry, which can be used to create other objects.
Poly-edge
A line connecting two adjacent vertices on a polygon.
Polygonal model
A model composed of polygonal faces.
Poly-face
A poly-face is a flat N-sided face composed of N vertices. The application only allows 3-sided faces
which are three poly-edges connected by vertices.
Polyline
A collection of line segments, connected end to end.
Poly-Vertex
1083
A point at which two or more lines or poly-edges intersect. Vertices can be selected for
dimensioning, and many other operations.
Primitives
Pre-defined basic objects, either 2D or 3D, i.e., circle, square, arc, plane or sphere, cube, cylinder,
cone, torus, and various polyhedrons.
R
Regardless of Feature Size (RFS)
The term used to indicate that a geometric tolerance or datum reference applies at any increment
of size of the feature within its tolerance.
Region
A region is a user-selected set of poly-vertex or poly-face, which is just a temporary set in the job
process. A region is released after the corresponding job is finished.
RMB
Right Mouse Button.
Reference Geometry
Basic geometrical elements, such as planes, axes, and coordinate systems. Reference geometry is
not a body but used to assist in creating features.
Rollback
Enables a model to be returned to a previous point in a construction history. Changes made to a
feature are reflected in subsequent features once Rolled Forward. This command is commonly
used to change the parameters of previous features.
S
SAT
A file format for 3D solid geometry that is native for any ACIS modeling software developed by
Spatial Technology Corp.
Six sigma
A quality management program to achieve "six sigma" levels of quality. Six Sigma aims to have the
total number of failures in quality, or customer satisfaction, occur beyond the sixth sigma of
likelihood in a normal distribution of customers. Here sigma stands for a step of one standard
deviation; designing processes with tolerances of at least six standard deviations will, on
reasonable assumptions, yield fewer than 3/4 defects in one million.
1084
STL
Stereo Lithography file format. Contains polygonal mesh data defined by vertex, and connections
between them. Can be written in ASCII (text) or binary.
Surface
A surface is used to describe the skin of a 3D geometric element.
Spline
A 2D or 3D curve consisting of several control points.
Silhouette edge
A curve the represents the extent of a cylindrical or curved face when viewed from the side.
T
Tessellation
Tessellation is the process of subdividing a surface into smaller shapes. Tessellation is used to
convert a Solid, Surface, or Reference object into a polygonal mesh. To create object surface
patterns, tessellation breaks down the surface of an object into manageable polygons. Triangles
are frequently used in drawing graphical objects because computer hardware can easily
manipulate and calculate them.
3-2-1 Rule
A rule that defines the minimum number of points of contact required for a part datum feature
with its primary, secondary, and tertiary datum planes.
Toggle
To switch from one setting to another. The term toggle implies that there are only two possible
settings and that you are switching from the current setting to the other setting.
Tolerance
The value that features of a part are permitted to vary from the specified dimension.
Toolbar
Movable palette of tools that performs operations.
Touch Probe
A Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM) that requires physical contact with the part to measure it.
Transformation
A change in the size, location, or orientation of an object.
1085
U
UV
Instead of X and Y coordinates, the U and V coordinates are used as a base coordinate system for
representing a 2D-based work space or entity.
V
Viewports
Windows that display 3D views of models.
W
Wireframe
One of the display methods for solid and surface bodies. In this mode only the body edges are
displayed and the faces are hidden.
World Coordinates
In 3D space, World Coordinates are a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system used to define the
location of models, lights, cameras, etc. It is independent of viewpoint and display. The origin of
the world coordinate system is (0, 0, 0).
X
x86
The x86 series of processors includes the Pentium, Pentium Pro, Pentium II, Pentium III, Celeron,
and Athlon as well as the 786, 686, 586, 486, 386, 286, 8086, 8088, etc. It is an exceptionally popular
design (by far the most popular CISC series) in spite of the fact that even its fastest model is
significantly slower than the assorted RISC processors. Many different OSes run on machines built
around x86 processors, including MS-DOS, Windows 3.1, Windows '95, Windows '98, Windows ME,
Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows CE, Windows XP, GEOS, Linux, Solaris, OpenBSD, NetBSD,
FreeBSD, Mac OS X, OS/2, BeOS, CP/M, etc. A couple different companies produce x86 processors,
but the bulk of them are produced by Intel. It is expected that this processor will eventually be
completely replaced by the Merced, but the Merced development schedule is somewhat behind.
Also, it should be noted that the Pentium III processor has stirred some controversy by including a
"fingerprint" that will enable individual computer usage of web pages etc. to be accurately tracked.
1086
9. Index
2
2D Angular Dimension ..................................... 655
2D Angularity .................................................... 695
2D Circularity ..................................................... 678
2D Concentricity ............................................... 682
2D Elliptical Dimension ..................................... 665
2D Linear Dimension ........................................ 648
2D Parallelism .................................................... 687
2D Perpendicularity .......................................... 691
2D Position ........................................................ 670
2D Radial Dimension......................................... 659
2D Smart Dimension ......................................... 642
2D Straightness ................................................. 676
2D Symmetry .................................................... 699
2D Triangulate ................................................. 1057
3
3-2-1 .................................................................. 322
3D GD&T ............................................................ 438
3D Mouse .......................................................... 199
3D Triangulate ................................................. 1060
A
Adaptive ............................................................ 329
Add-Ins ............................................................ 1050
Adjusting the Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go
Results ........................................................... 102
Align .......................................................... 306, 557
Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data .................. 47
Alignment ........................................................... 78
All....................................................................... 274
Analyzing............................................................. 83
Analyzing Scan Data ........................................... 49
Angular Dimension ........................................... 819
Angularity .......................................................... 901
Annotation Alignment .................................... 1045
Annotation Display Control ............................ 1046
Application of 3D Scan Data ............................... 57
Area ................................................................. 1025
Assign Tolerance ............................................... 547
Auto ................................................................... 307
Auto Segment ................................................... 621
B
Basic Concept of User Interface .......................... 27
Basic Entity Terminology ..................................... 20
Basic Inspection Workflow .................................. 45

Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection
Process ............................................................. 72
Batch Process ..................................................... 236
Best Fit ............................................................... 310
Body Display Mode ......................................... 1032
Bore Depth ........................................................ 837
Boundary Curve ................................................. 766
Boundary Deviation .......................................... 458
Boundary Entities .............................................. 279
Breuckmann ...................................................... 507
By Color.............................................................. 288
By Criteria .......................................................... 287
C
Cache Disk Indicator .......................................... 192
Capture Screen .................................................. 250
Checking Deviations ........................................... 83
Circularity........................................................... 873
Color Bar ............................................................ 157
Combine .................................................. 567, 1069
Comparison Point .............................................. 450
Concentricity ..................................................... 881
Console .............................................................. 186
Contour Curve From Whole Deviation............ 1081
Convert Current Selection ................................. 286
Convert Curve Entities....................................... 779
Convert to Mesh ................................................ 544
Convert XDL....................................................... 205
Copy ................................................................... 295
Counterbore ...................................................... 842
Countersink ....................................................... 846
Creaform Handyscan 3D ................................... 498
Curve.................................................................. 346
Curve Deviation ................................................. 465
Curve Tools ........................................................ 751
Curves .............................................................. 1014
Custom Region .................................................. 277
Cut...................................................................... 295
Cylindricity ......................................................... 878
D
Datum ........................................................ 318, 640
Datum ................................................................ 800
Decimate ........................................................... 608
Defeature ........................................................... 604
Delete ................................................................ 297
Delete Faces ....................................................... 535
Delete Poly-Faces ............................................ 1076
Deviation ........................................................... 439
Deviations ........................................................ 1023
Rapidform XOV3 | Index
1087
Device Setting Tab ............................................ 964

Dialog Tree ........................................................ 189
Dialog Tree Convention ...................................... 36
Display ............................................................... 127
Docking Bar Convention ..................................... 40
Docking Bars ..................................................... 119
E
Edit..................................................................... 292
Edit Boundaries ................................................. 591
Edit Section Deviation ...................................... 639
Elliptical Dimension .......................................... 831
Enlarge ...................................................... 282, 633
Entities Around Edges/Faces ............................ 280
Error List ............................................................ 186
Esc Key ............................................................... 193
Exit ..................................................................... 268
Export ................................................................ 238
Export 3D HTML Report .................................... 974
Extend Curve ..................................................... 785
Exterior Poly-Face .............................................. 290
F
Feature............................................................... 304
Features of Rapidform XOV................................... 6
File ..................................................................... 200
Fill Holes ............................................................ 599
Filter Noisy Poly Vertices ........................... 573, 575
Find Defect ................................................ 541, 580
Find Scan Direction ......................................... 1071
Fit ..................................................................... 1027
Fit From Points .................................................. 768
Fix Normal ................................................. 536, 586
Flatness.............................................................. 863
G
GD&T ................................................................... 89
GD&T Tools ........................................................ 798
General Setting Tab ........................................... 956
Generate Report ................................................ 967
Generate Vertex Normal ......................... 578, 1073
Generating and Exporting Reports .................... 53
Generating Reports ........................................... 105
Geometry Deviation ......................................... 483
Getting Help ...................................................... 111
Getting Started ................................................... 13
Global Register ................................................ 1053
Glossary ........................................................... 1085
H
Healing Wizard .......................................... 539, 583
Help ......................................................... 135, 1083
Hide All ............................................................ 1005

Hotkey Setting Tab ............................................ 964
I
ICF ...................................................................... 244
Image Folder...................................................... 184
Import & Split ........................................ 1051, 1052
Import CATIA file with PMI ................................ 212
Import Creo(PRO/E) file with PMI...................... 223
Import Nominal data ......................................... 208
Import Scan Data............................................... 229
Import Siemens NX file with PMI ...................... 218
Importing Data .................................................... 46
Index ................................................................ 1098
Insert .......................................................... 305, 630
Insert Node ........................................................ 794
Inspect Setting Tab ............................................ 962
Inspection Scenario ............................................. 69
Inspection using Probe Measurement Devices 108
Installation ........................................................... 17
Intersection Curve ............................................. 762
Introduction .......................................................... 1
Inverse ............................................................... 276
K
Key Themes of Rapidform XOV ............................. 4
KODEN OCM-A........................................... 498, 510
Konica Minolta VIVID ......................................... 501
L
Light Properties ............................................... 1040
Line Profile ......................................................... 920
Linear Dimension .............................................. 809
LiveAlign ............................................................ 942
LiveCapture ....................................................... 946
LiveDimension ................................................... 950
LiveGeometry .................................................... 953
LiveInspect ........................................................ 937
LiveInspect Settings .......................................... 955
M
Match Curve ...................................................... 789
Maximize View Area ........................................ 1049
Measure ............................................................. 977
Measure Angle................................................... 982
Measure Area ..................................................... 992
Measure Dimensions using Virtual Caliper ....... 998
Measure Distance .............................................. 978
Measure Mesh Deviations ................................. 995
Measure Radius ................................................. 985
Measure Section ................................................ 989
Measure Volume ................................................ 993
1088
Measurements ................................................ 1023

Memory Usage Indicator .................................. 192
Menu ................................................................. 200
Menu Bar ........................................................... 114
Merge ................................................................ 626
Merge Curve ...................................................... 792
Mesh Buildup Wizard ........................................ 551
Mesh Display Mode......................................... 1031
Mesh vs. Point Cloud ........................................... 67
Meshes ............................................................ 1011
Mirror Curve ...................................................... 777
Mode ................................................................. 271
Mode Convention ............................................... 39
Model View ........................................................ 188
Monitoring Bars................................................. 191
Mouse Control ................................................... 193
Move Setting Device ......................................... 965
Multiple Sections .............................................. 339
N
Navigate Sections ........................................... 1030
Navigating Entities .............................................. 41
New ................................................................... 202
Nominal Tools.................................................... 520
None .................................................................. 275
Note ................................................................... 518
O
Offset ......................................................... 530, 615
Offset Curve ...................................................... 773
Open .................................................................. 203
P
Parallelism ......................................................... 888
Paste .................................................................. 296
Perpendicularity ................................................ 895
PIP .................................................................... 1028
Play LiveInspect Process ................................... 941
Plot .................................................................... 489
PMI Import Wizard ............................................ 210
Point Clouds .................................................... 1011
Point Stream ...................................................... 241
Pop-up Menus ................................................... 196
Position .............................................................. 855
Power of 3D Scan Data ........................................ 56
Preferences ........................................................ 255
Preparing ............................................................. 73
Previous Area .................................................. 1026
Print ................................................................... 252
Print Preview ..................................................... 253
Print Setup......................................................... 253
Probe Setting Tab .............................................. 958
Progress Bar ....................................................... 192
Project Curve ..................................................... 775
Properties .......................................................... 137

Publish ............................................................... 240
R
Radial Dimension .............................................. 824
RANGE5/RANGE 7...................................... 498, 513
Rebuild............................................................... 297
Rebuild Current Mode Only .............................. 298
Recent Files ........................................................ 267
Redo ................................................................... 293
Ref Coordinate ................................................... 434
Ref Sphere ......................................................... 424
Ref Torus ............................................................ 429
Ref. Circle ................................................... 389, 732
Ref. Circles ........................................................ 1019
Ref. Cone ............................................................ 419
Ref. Coordinates .............................................. 1021
Ref. Cylinder ....................................................... 412
Ref. Cylinders ................................................... 1020
Ref. GD&Ts........................................................ 1022
Ref. Geometry .................................................... 347
Ref. Plane ........................................................... 377
Ref. Planes ........................................................ 1018
Ref. Point .................................................... 348, 703
Ref. Points ........................................................ 1016
Ref. Polygon ............................................... 406, 746
Ref. Rectangle ............................................ 401, 742
Ref. Slot ...................................................... 395, 738
Ref. Vector ........................................ 368, 723, 1017
Region Tools ...................................................... 621
Register Target ................................................. 1055
Regroup 3D GD&Ts ............................................ 935
Remove Constraint ............................................ 797
Remove Marker ................................................. 606
Remove Node .................................................... 795
Repeat Last Command ...................................... 294
Replace Scan Data ............................................. 232
Report ........................................................ 160, 966
Reporting ............................................................. 96
Resegment......................................................... 624
Reverse Normal ............................................... 1075
Roll Forward....................................................... 300
Roll To End ......................................................... 302
Roll To Next Alignment...................................... 301
Roll To Start ........................................................ 301
Rollback ............................................................. 299
RPS ..................................................................... 313
Runout ............................................................... 909
S
Save.................................................................... 206
Save As ............................................................... 207
Scan Data ........................................................... 496
Scan Data Setting Tab ....................................... 960
Scan Tools .......................................................... 549
Scanner Direct Control ...................................... 497
1089
Section............................................................... 331
Section Curve .................................................... 757
Section Tools ..................................................... 636
Sections ........................................................... 1015
Select ................................................................. 269
Selection Convention.......................................... 38
Separate ............................................................ 631
Separate Thickened Body ................................. 542
Sew .................................................................... 521
Sew Boundaries................................................. 588
Shining Tech ...................................................... 498
Shining3D .......................................................... 513
Shortcut Keys .................................................... 194
Show All........................................................... 1004
Show Fail & Warning Only ............................... 1010
Show Fail Only ................................................. 1007
Show No Result Only....................................... 1008
Show Pass & Warning Only ............................. 1009
Show Pass Only ............................................... 1006
Show Selected Only ........................................ 1003
Show Warning Only ........................................ 1007
Shrink ........................................................ 284, 634
Silhouette Deviation ......................................... 470
Simple Measuring ............................................... 91
Simulated CMM Point ............................... 359, 714
Smart Dimension .............................................. 802
Smooth Curve ................................................... 781
Solid Bodies ..................................................... 1013
Spline ................................................................. 753
Split............................................................ 612, 628
Split Curve ......................................................... 787
Split Face ........................................................... 522
Status Bar........................................................... 191
Straightness....................................................... 866
Summary Info .................................................... 266
Support ............................................................. 183
Suppress ............................................................ 303
Surface Bodies ................................................. 1012
Surface Merge ................................................. 1064
Surface Profile ................................................... 926
Surface UV Curves ............................................. 764
Symmetry .......................................................... 930
System Requirements ......................................... 13
T
Tabular View ...................................................... 186
Thicken ...................................................... 533, 618
Thickness ........................................................... 851
Time Indicator ................................................... 192
Title Bar .............................................................. 113
Tool Palette ........................................................ 115
Toolbar ............................................................... 115

Tools ................................................................... 519
Total Runout ...................................................... 915
Transform ................................................... 324, 525
Transform Scan Data ......................................... 569
Tree .................................................................... 122
Trend Report ...................................................... 976
Triangulate/Merge ............................................. 563
Triangulate/Merge Large Data ........................ 1062
Trim Curve ......................................................... 783
Trim Mesh ........................................................ 1078
Types of 3D Scan Data ......................................... 59
U
Understanding Mesh........................................... 63
Understanding Point Clouds ............................... 59
Understanding Scan Data ............................. 55, 69
Understanding User Interface Philosophy ......... 35
Undo .................................................................. 293
Unsuppress ........................................................ 304
User Interface .................................................... 112
User Interface Overview ...................................... 28
V
Verifying Geometric Features.............................. 76
View ................................................................. 1000
View Clip .......................................................... 1042
Viewpoint ................................................ 136, 1034
Viewport .......................................................... 1037
Virtual Edge Deviation ...................................... 477
Visibility ........................................................... 1002
Visualizing Results by Color Map ........................ 96
Visualizing Results by Tagging .......................... 100
Volume Merge ................................................. 1067
W
Welcome to Rapidform XOV ................................. 2
What Can XOV Do? .............................................. 19
Whole Deviation ................................................ 441
Why 3D Scanning?............................................... 56
Working with Large Scan Data ............................ 73
Z
Z Corporation ZScanner .................................... 515
Zoom ............................................................... 1024
1090

RapidformXOV UserGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RapidformXOV UserGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

Copyright INUS Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Correspondence regarding this publication should be directed to:

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

Welcome to Rapidform XOV ................................................................................................ 2

Key Themes of Rapidform XOV ............................................................................................ 4

Features of Rapidform XOV ................................................................................................. 6

GETTING STARTED ......................................................................................... 13

System Requirements ........................................................................................................ 13

What Can XOV Do? ............................................................................................................. 19

Basic Entity Terminology ................................................................................................... 20

Basic Concept of User Interface ......................................................................................... 27

Basic Inspection Overview................................................................................................. 45

UNDERSTANDING SCAN DATA ...................................................................... 55

Importing Data ...............................................................................................................................................................45

Why 3D Scanning? .............................................................................................................. 55

Types of 3D Scan Data ........................................................................................................ 58

Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection Process ................................................ 71

Power of 3D Scan Data.................................................................................................................................................56

Understanding Point Clouds .....................................................................................................................................58

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

GETTING HELP .............................................................................................. 109

USER INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 110

Title Bar .............................................................................................................................112

Menu Bar ...........................................................................................................................112

Tool Palette .......................................................................................................................113

Tree ................................................................................................................................................................................... 120

Model View .......................................................................................................................186

Dialog Tree ........................................................................................................................187

Monitoring Bars................................................................................................................ 189

Esc Key ...............................................................................................................................191

Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................................................... 189

6.10. Mouse Control .................................................................................................................. 191

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

6.13. 3D Mouse ..........................................................................................................................197

MENU ............................................................................................................ 198

Select > Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 268

Edit > Undo ................................................................................................................................................................... 289

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

Edit > Roll To Next Alignment ................................................................................................................................ 298

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

Report > Generate Report ....................................................................................................................................... 958

LiveInspect > Move Device ..................................................................................................................................... 956

Measure > Distance.................................................................................................................................................... 969

7.10. Add-Ins ............................................................................................................................1040

Add-Ins > Import Large Data................................................................................................................................1041

7.11. Help .................................................................................................................................1073

GLOSSARY .................................................................................................. 1075

INDEX .......................................................................................................... 1087

Rapidform XOV3 | Table of Contents

Rapidform XOV3 | Introduction

Welcome to Rapidform XOV

The Most CAD Friendly Point-Cloud Inspection Software

Compare Manufactured Parts to CAD Models in Minutes

Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA, Creo(Pro/ENGINEER) and SolidWorks

Native GD&T Import from CAD Truly 3D PMI-ready

Easiest & Quickest Works through CAD-like Intuitive User Interface

Easily Automate Every Inspection Job without Macro

Feature-by-feature Parametric Inspection - All inspection features can be updatable and

Industry-proven Accuracy in Use at Top Companies

Intelligent Auto-Align Based on Feature Recognition